trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/memoir

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@379 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

2 files changed, 25760 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/memoir/memoir.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/memoir/memoir.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..302c02f2c21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/memoir/memoir.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,25663 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% memoir.dtx
+% Author: Peter Wilson (Herries Press) herries dot press at earthlink dot net
+% Copyright 2001--2005 Peter R. Wilson
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any 
+% later version.
+% The latest version of the license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+% LaTeX version 2003/06/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
+%
+% This work consists of the files listed in the README file.
+% 
+% \fi
+% \CheckSum{20643}
+%
+% \changes{v0.1}{2001/05/20}{First public alpha release}
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{First beta release}
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Bug fixing}
+% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/09}{Bug fixing}
+% \changes{v0.32}{2001/08/03}{Fix for old versions of amsmath package}
+% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/03}{Added controllable chapter/LoF spacing}
+% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/03}{Fixed bug in \cs{appendixpage}}
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{First production release}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/12/07}{Feature fixes} ^^A never released
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{More fixups}
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Replaced all the subfigure code}
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added sidebars}
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Upgraded verse typesetting}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added 17pt option}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added extra \cs{provide} commands}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Major verbatim, box and file additions}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Removed extraneous space from change marks}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Extra optarg in \cs{chapter} and \cs{chapter*}}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Twiddled font sizes a little}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/27}{Fixed 12pt bug}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/09/27}{Minor tweaks wrt v1.2}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Extra trimming styles}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Major extensions for indexing}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Automatically call a patch file}
+% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Fixed nasty figure/table bug}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added patches v1.1}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added patches v1.3}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Including current patches}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added patches v1.2}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.4}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.5}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.6}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.7}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/30}{Added patches v1.8}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/30}{Added patches v1.9}
+% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/31}{Decided to issue v1.4 as v1.6 on the way to 
+%                            the golden section}
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Changes to clo files, and footnotes} 
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{Removed a potential problem with the 
+%                             hangul package}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Folded in all v1.61 patches}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/15}{Some minor extensions}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Support for glossaries}
+%
+% \def\dtxfile{memoir.dtx}
+%
+% \def\fileversion{v0.1}  \def\filedate{2001/05/20}
+% \def\fileversion{v0.2}  \def\filedate{2001/06/03}
+% \def\fileversion{v0.3}  \def\filedate{2001/07/14}
+% \def\fileversion{v0.31} \def\filedate{2001/07/24}
+% \def\fileversion{v0.32} \def\filedate{2001/08/03}
+% \def\fileversion{v0.33} \def\filedate{2001/08/31}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.0}  \def\filedate{2001/11/17}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.0a} \def\filedate{2001/12/07}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.1}  \def\filedate{2002/03/28}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.1a} \def\filedate{2002/04/28}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.2}  \def\filedate{2002/08/10}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.2}  \def\filedate{2002/08/27}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.3}  \def\filedate{2002/11/14}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.3a} \def\filedate{2002/11/22}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.4}  \def\filedate{2003/12/18}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.6}  \def\filedate{2004/01/31}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.61}  \def\filedate{2004/04/04}
+% \def\fileversion{v1.618}  \def\filedate{2005/09/27}
+% \title{The LaTeX \Lpack{memoir} class for configurable book 
+%        typesetting: Source code\thanks{This
+%        file (\texttt{\dtxfile}) has version number \fileversion, last revised
+%        \filedate.}}
+%
+% \author{%
+% Peter Wilson\thanks{\texttt{herries dot press at earthlink dot net}}\\
+% Herries Press}
+% \date{\filedate}
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% The \Lpack{memoir} class is designed for typesetting
+% general books such as novels, biographies, histories, 
+% and so on, although as it supports all the functionality of the 
+% standard \Lpack{book} class it can also be used for technical writing.
+% It provides more functions than the standard class as well as 
+% presenting a more friendly interface for the book designer.
+% It can also simulate the typesetting style of the standard \Lpack{article}
+% class.
+%
+%    The class was first released in mid 2001 and has been well used ever
+% since.
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+% \listoftables
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This document provides the commented source 
+% for the LaTeX \Lpack{memoir} class, which is designed for typesetting
+% general books such as novels, biographies, histories, 
+% and so on. It has all the functionality of the standard \Lpack{book}
+% class and, as well as providing some extra functions, also provides
+% a more friendly interface for the document designer. As it can encompass
+% everything that the \Lpack{book} class provides it may also be used
+% for technical writing.
+%
+%   The default appearance of a document typeset with this class is
+% the same as if it had been typeset with the \Lpack{book} class and
+% it can be made to simulate the \Lpack{article} class..
+% The class, though, includes extra facilities that make it easy to
+% change the appearance of such things as the page headers and footers,
+% the style of chapter and other sectional headings, and the style of
+% captions. It also makes it easy to both change the style of the
+% Table of Contents, List of Figures, etc., as well as creating new
+% kinds of `List of\ldots'. New types of floats, if needed, can be
+% created very simply. Epigraphs can be put into the document in a
+% variety of styles.
+%
+%    The class provides a variety of page, chapter and captioning
+% styles that you can choose from if you don't want to create your own.
+%
+%    Documents can be typeset in 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt, 14pt or 17pt font
+% sizes and there is a reasonably intuitive means of setting the margins
+% and placement of the text on a page. There is an option to put
+% trim marks on the printed pages if the stock sheets need to be trimmed
+% down to the final page size. For those whose publishers like a
+% manuscript to look as though it was typewritten, there is an option
+% to do this (double spacing, ragged right, no hyphenation, 
+% fixed width font). There is also an unsophisticated means of flagging any
+% revisions to the text.
+%
+%    As this is a new class, by default it does not support the old 
+% LaTeX v2.09
+% font commands, namely the |\bf|, |\sl|, |\it| and |\sc| commands;
+% it warns about using the |\em| command but does support it.
+%
+%
+% I hope that apart from the font commands the class 
+% is compatible with
+% `standard' LaTeX.
+%
+%    Development of this class would never have been started without
+% the wonderful work done by Leslie Lamport and others~\cite{CLASSES}
+% from whom I have learned a great deal and borrowed much code. 
+%
+%    Sections~\ref{sec:docstrip} through~\ref{sec:ic} describe some
+% administrative elements and code for general use later in the 
+% specification.
+% The macros forming the class file are defined in sections~\ref{sec:opt}
+% through~\ref{sec:init}. 
+% 
+% This manual is typeset according to the conventions of the
+% \LaTeX{} \textsc{docstrip} utility which enables the automatic
+% extraction of the \LaTeX{} macro source files~\cite{GOOSSENS94}.
+%
+%
+% \section{A driver for this document} \label{sec:docstrip}
+%
+% The next series of code contains the documentation driver file for
+% \LaTeX, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
+% currently reading. This will be extracted from this file by the 
+% \textsc{docstrip} program.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass[twoside]{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{url}
+%%\usepackage[draft=false,
+%%            plainpages=false,
+%%            pdfpagelabels,
+%%            bookmarksnumbered,
+%%            hyperindex=true
+%%           ]{hyperref}  % Doesn't work with indexing of \DescribeMacro
+\providecommand{\phantomsection}{} % just in case hyperref not used 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    We do want an index, using linenumbers, but not update information.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+%% \RecordChanges
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We had better have page headings to aid navigation, but I don't
+% like Uppercased titles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makeatletter
+  \@mparswitchfalse
+\makeatother
+\renewcommand{\MakeUppercase}[1]{#1}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We may use so many \file{docstrip} modules that we set the
+%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Some commonly used abbreviations
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf {#1}}            % typeset an option
+\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt {#1}}            % typeset a file
+\newcommand*{\Lcount}[1]{\textsl {\small#1}}    % typeset a counter
+\newcommand*{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl {#1}}          % typeset a pagestyle
+\newcommand*{\Lenv}[1]{\texttt {#1}}            % typeset an environment
+\newcommand*{\Lpack}[1]{\textsf {#1}}           % typeset a package
+\newcommand*{\ctt}{\textsc{ctt}}                % comp.text.tex
+\newenvironment{PW}{\em}{}
+\newcommand*{\theTeXbook}{\textit{The \TeX book}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We want the full details printed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\raggedbottom
+\raggedright
+\DocInput{memoir.dtx}
+\PrintIndex
+%% \PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%   ^^A  There are some elements we do not want to appear in the index.
+% \DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@addtoreset,\@arabic,\@badmath}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@centercr,\@cite}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@minus,\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\@set@topoint}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace}
+% \DoNotIndex{\advance,\Alph,\alph}
+% \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box}
+% \DoNotIndex{\bullet}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption}
+% \DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist}
+% \DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\endgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter}
+% \DoNotIndex{\fbox}
+% \DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef}
+% \DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\if@tempswa,\ifcase,\or,\fi,\fi}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
+% \DoNotIndex{\input}
+% \DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let}
+% \DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m@ne,\m@th}
+% \DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment}
+% \DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen}
+% \DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number}
+% \DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip}
+% \DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions}
+% \DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass}
+% \DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand,\reset@font}
+% \DoNotIndex{\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily,\roman}
+% \DoNotIndex{\roman,\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength}
+% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space}
+% \DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase}
+% \DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace}
+% \DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@nameuse,\csname,\endcsname}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Identification} \label{sec:id}
+%
+%    The \Lpack{memoir} document class can only be used with LaTeX2e, 
+% so we make
+%    sure that an appropriate message is displayed when another \TeX{}
+%    format is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<class>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Announce the name, option files and version for LaTeX2e files:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<class>\ProvidesClass{memoir}%
+%<class>              [2005/09/25 v1.618 configurable document class]
+%<9pt>\ProvidesFile{mem9.clo}%
+%<9pt>             [2004/03/12 v0.3 memoir class 9pt size option]
+%<10pt>\ProvidesFile{mem10.clo}%
+%<10pt>             [2002/07/27 v0.2 memoir class 10pt size option]
+%<11pt>\ProvidesFile{mem11.clo}%
+%<11pt>             [2002/07/27 v0.2 memoir class 11pt size option]
+%<12pt>\ProvidesFile{mem12.clo}%
+%<12pt>             [2004/03/12 v0.3 memoir class 12pt size option]
+%<14pt>\ProvidesFile{mem14.clo}%
+%<14pt>             [2004/03/12 v0.3 memoir class 14pt size option]
+%<17pt>\ProvidesFile{mem17.clo}%
+%<17pt>             [2004/03/12 v0.2 memoir class 17pt size option]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Initial Code} \label{sec:ic}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note (2001/08/03): Old versions of the \Lpack{amsmath} package did odd
+% things with \cs{@tempa}, \cs{@tempb} and \cs{@tempc}. I have now replaced
+% any use of these with \cs{@memtempa}, etc.
+%
+%    In this part we define a few commands that are used later on.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ptsize}
+%    This control sequence is used to store the second digit of the
+%    pointsize we are typesetting in. So, normally, it's value is one
+%    of 0, 1 or 2.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@ptsize}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Any new lengths that depend on the point size option must be declared
+% before the options are executed.
+% \begin{macro}{\onelineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\lxvchars}
+% \begin{macro}{\xlvchars}
+% The length \cs{onelineskip} is the vertical space taken
+% by a normal line of text. The lengths \cs{lxvchars} and \cs{xlvchars} are
+% the approximate lengths required for typesetting lines with either 65 or 45
+% characters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\onelineskip}
+\newlength{\lxvchars}
+\newlength{\xlvchars}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memcnta}
+% We need a scratch count register.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@memcnta
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/11/28}{Deleted count register \cs{@memtempa}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@restonecol}
+%    When the document has to be printed in two columns, we sometimes
+%    have to temporarily switch to one column. This switch is used to
+%    remember to switch back.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@restonecol
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@openright}
+% This is TRUE if chapters are to start on righthand (recto) pages;
+% this is the default. FALSE means chapters can start on any page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@openright
+  \@openrighttrue
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@openleft}
+% This is TRUE if chapters are to start on lefthand (verso) pages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@openleft
+  \@openleftfalse
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mainmatter}
+% This is TRUE if the main part of the document is being currently procesed;
+% this is the default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mainmatter
+  \@mainmattertrue
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@memoldfont}
+% This is TRUE if the \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option is used.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added \cs{if@memoldfont}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@memoldfont
+  \@memoldfontfalse
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memerror}
+% \begin{macro}{\@memwarn}
+% Two macros to save some space when reporting errors or warnings.
+% The macros take the same arguments, ignoring the first in each case,
+% as |\ClassError| and |\ClassWarning|, e.g., \\
+% |\@memwarn{Message}| \\
+% instead of \\
+% |\ClassWarning{memoir}{Message}|.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memerror} and \cs{@memwarn}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@memerror}{\ClassError{memoir}}
+\newcommand*{\@memwarn}{\ClassWarning{memoir}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifsamename}
+% \begin{macro}{\nametest}
+%    The macro |\nametest{|\meta{name1}|}{|\meta{name2}|}| tests whether the
+% characters forming the two arguments are the same or not. If they are the
+% same then |\ifsamename| is set TRUE, otherwise it is set FALSE. \meta{name1}
+% and \meta{name2} must both be either macro names (including the backslash)
+% or must both not be macro names. That is, you cannot do |\nametest{\cs}{cs}|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifsamename
+\newcommand{\nametest}[2]{%
+  \samenamefalse
+  \begingroup
+  \def\@memtempa{#1} \def\@memtempb{#2}
+  \ifx \@memtempa\@memtempb
+    \endgroup
+    \samenametrue
+  \else
+    \endgroup
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifm@m@And}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Andtrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Andfalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifm@m@Or}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Ortrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Orfalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifm@m@Xor}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Xortrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Xorfalse}
+% These are for `if A and B', `if A or B' and `if A xor B'.
+%
+% For A and B:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \m@m@Andfalse
+% \ifA
+%   \ifB
+%     \m@mAndtrue
+%   \fi
+% \fi
+% \end{verbatim}
+% For A or B:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \m@m@Ortrue
+% \ifA
+% \else
+%   \ifB
+%   \else
+%     \m@m@Orfalse
+%   \fi
+% \fi
+% \end{verbatim}
+% For A xor B:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \m@m@Xortrue
+% \ifA
+%   \ifB
+%     \m@m@Xfalse
+%   \fi
+% \else
+%   \ifB
+%   \else
+%     \m@m@Xorfalse
+%   \fi
+% \fi
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/09}{Added \cs{ifm@m@And}, \cs{ifm@m@Or} and \cs{ifm@m@Xor}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifm@m@And
+\newif\ifm@m@Or
+\newif\ifm@m@Xor
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Deleted \cs{fillline} and \cs{makecommand} as
+% they were not used}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\kill@lastcounter}
+% |\kill@lastcounter{|\meta{cntr}|}|\footnote{With thanks to Stefan Ulrich
+% (\texttt{ulrich@cis.uni-muenchen.de}) who answered a question on this
+% on \ctt, 2001/07/09. (Also answered by Heiko Oberdiek,
+% \texttt{oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de}).}
+%  kills the counter \meta{cntr}. This macro is an extension to the
+% suggestions as it also makes the last count register reusable.
+% \emph{The macro must only be used when the last allocated counter is to
+% be killed.}
+% For example with:\\
+% |\newcounter{fred} \kill@lastcounter{fred} \newcounter{fred}| \\
+% there is no error with the second |\newcounter|.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added \cs{kill@counter}}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Ensured \cs{kill@counter} zeroed the counter}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\kill@lastcounter}[1]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Deallocate the last counter register. From \theTeXbook, |\count10| is
+% the number of the last register. The counter should be zeroed before being
+% deallocated otherwise an immediatally following \cs{newcount} may not
+% be zero when allocated\footnote{Discovered and fix provided by Robert 
+% Schlicht on 2005/08/31.}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \count\count10 \z@
+  \advance\count10 \m@ne
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the internal counter definition to |\relax|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\let\csname c@#1\endcsname\relax}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@name@p@xdf}
+% \begin{macro}{\@name@unresp@xdef}
+% \begin{macro}{\@namelet}
+% \begin{macro}{\@namelongdef}
+%  Utility definition macros, along the lines of the kernel's \cs{@namedef}.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@namelet} and friends (from patch v1.8)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@name@p@xdef}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\protected@xdef\csname #1\endcsname}
+\newcommand{\@name@unresp@xdef}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\unrestored@protected@xdef\csname #1\endcsname}
+\newcommand{\@namelet}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname}
+\newcommand{\@namelongdef}[1]{%
+  \long\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memjustarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\memgobble}
+% Utility macros \emph{that are not to be changed by any user!}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added \cs{memjustarg} and \cs{memgobble}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\memjustarg}[1]{#1}
+\newcommand{\memgobble}[1]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memfakeusepackage}
+% \cs{@memfakeusepackage}\marg{pack} fools \LaTeX{} into thinking
+% that the \meta{pack.sty} package has been loaded.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@memfakeusepackage} (from patch v1.9)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@memfakeusepackage}[1]{%
+  \@namelet{ver@#1.sty}\@empty}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\EmulatedPackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\EmulatedPackageWithOptions}
+%  There was some discussion on CTT\footnote{\textit{Re: breakurl + pdfetex 
+% for generating .dvi}, March 2005.} about how to prevent loading of
+% a package. My response was to use \cs{@memfakusepackage}. Donald Arseneau
+% came up with this comprehensive solution (there was a little discussion
+% about naming with my final suggestion as here). \\
+% \cs{EmulatedPackage}\marg{package}\oarg{date} \\
+% \cs{EmulatedPackageWithOptions}\marg{option-list}\marg{package}\oarg{date} \\
+%
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/04}{Added \cs{EmulatedPackage} and
+%          \cs{EmulatedPackageWithOptions}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*{\EmulatedPackage}{}
+\renewcommand*{\EmulatedPackage}[1]{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@emulated@package{#1}}%
+               {\@emulated@package{#1}[]}%]
+}
+\providecommand*{\EmulatedPackageWithOptions}{}
+\renewcommand*{\EmulatedPackageWithOptions}[2]{%
+  \PassOptionsToPackage{#1}{#2}%
+  \EmulatedPackage{#2}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@emulated@package}
+% The workhorse for the user commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@emulated@package#1[#2]{%
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname ver@#1.\@pkgextension\endcsname{#2}%
+  \@ifundefined{opt@#1.\@pkgextension}%
+    {\@namedef{opt@#1.\@pkgextension}{}}{}%
+  \wlog{Package #1 \if,\csname opt@#1.\@pkgextension\endcsname,\else
+        (with options \csname opt@#1.\@pkgextension\endcsname)\fi
+        emulated by \@currname.}%
+}
+\@onlypreamble\EmulatedPackage
+\@onlypreamble\EmulatedPackageWithOptions
+\@onlypreamble\@emulated@package
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifpdf}
+% This can be used to check whether or not a document is being processed
+% by \LaTeX{} or pdf\LaTeX. 
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Made checking of \cs{pdfouput} more robust}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Prohibit loading the ifpdf package (mempatch v3.9)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifpdf
+\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+\else
+  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
+  \else
+    \ifcase\pdfoutput
+    \else
+      \pdftrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\fi
+%%\@memfakeusepackage{ifpdf}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\phantomsection}
+% A command needed if the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used, for putting
+% before certain |\addcontentsline| commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\phantomsection}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nofiles}
+% The kernel's \cs{nofiles}, which surprisingly may be called \emph{before} 
+% the class is loaded, lets \cs{makeindex} to \cs{relax}. This could 
+% cause problems\footnote{As reported by Heiko Oberdiek on 2005/07/09.}
+% with my initial version of \cs{makeindex}.
+% Here's the kernel \cs{nofiles} definition:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\nofiles{%
+%   \@fileswfalse%  flag for suppressing \immediate \writes
+%   \typeout{No auxiliary output files.^^J}%
+%   \long\def\protected@write##1##2##3%
+%     {\write\m@ne{}\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}%
+%   \let\makeindex\relax
+%   \let\makeglossary\relax}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% To get it to work for when \cs{makeindex}es optional argument is
+% used I let \cs{makeindex} itself deal with \cs{nofiles} (and
+% also \cs{makeglossary}).
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Modified the kernel's \cs{nofiles}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \renewcommand*{\nofiles}{%
+   \@fileswfalse%  flag for suppressing \immediate \writes
+   \typeout{No auxiliary output files.^^J}%
+   \long\def\protected@write##1##2##3%
+     {\write\m@ne{}\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}%
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Extending an existing macro}
+%
+%
+%    My usual technique for modifying the code of an existing
+% macro was to use |\renewcommand|. However it slowly became apparent that
+% many of such modifications merely consisted of adding some code at
+% either the start or end of the existing definition. In June 2000 I 
+% posed a question
+% on the |comp.text.tex| newsgroup about this, and 
+% Michael Downes\footnote{\texttt{epsmjd@ams.org}} and
+% Heiko Oberdiek\footnote{\texttt{oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de}} 
+% were kind enough to respond.
+% The responses arrived almost simultaneously, both
+% supplying methods for adding code at the end of a macro defined to take
+% one argument. Michael Downes' response included a remark about it probably
+% being too much effort to formulate a general way of doing this.
+% Heiko Oberdiek almost immediately replied with such a generalisation.
+%
+%    The following code, which I have extracted from a package that I
+% wrote but which I did not submit to CTAN, incorporates the work of both
+% Michael and Heiko. I have added a bit. All errors are my responsibility.
+% Michael went on the write the \Lpack{patchcmd} package which is
+% a generalisation of the facilities below and so there was no need for
+% my more restricted package.
+% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Replaced \cs{appendiarg} with \cs{addtodef}
+%                             and friends}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\wo@dmacro}
+%    Heiko Oberdiek suggested\footnote{Via email on 2000/07/12.} that
+% \meta{macro} should be tested for being the name of a macro, rather than
+% using the normal \LaTeX{} test against it being undefined. He supplied
+% the code for performing the macro name test.
+%
+% |\wo@dmacro| is a helper for handling the string `macro:'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\wo@dmacro{%
+  \string m\string a\string c\string r\string o\string :%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\wo@difmacro@begingroup}
+% This seems to take two arguments: 
+% \cs{wo@difmacro@begingroup}\marg{macro}\marg{code}, where 
+% \meta{macro} should be the name of a defined macro and \meta{code}
+% is code to be executed if and only if \meta{macro} \emph{is} a
+% defined macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\wo@difmacro@begingroup#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Start a group.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Test if |#1| is a defined macro; |\wo@dparsemacro| does most of the work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \edef\x{%
+      \noexpand\wo@dparsemacro\meaning#1\wo@dmacro\string -%
+    }%
+    \x\@nil{#1}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\wo@dparsemacro}
+% This is called by |\wo@difmacro@begingroup|. If \meta{macro} is not
+% a defined macro it prints a warning and closes the group begun by
+% |\wo@difmacro@begingroup|. Otherwise it process the \meta{code} which
+% \emph{must} close the group.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \edef\x{\endgroup
+    \def\noexpand\wo@dparsemacro##1\wo@dmacro##2\string -}%
+\x#3\@nil#4{%
+  \ifx\\#3\\%
+    \endgroup
+    \@memwarn{\string `\string #4\string ' is not a macro}%
+    \expandafter\@gobble
+  \else
+    \expandafter\@firstofone
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addtodef}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtodef*}
+% \begin{macro}{\wo@daddtodef}
+% The command |\addtodef{|\meta{macro}|}{|\meta{start-stuff}|}{|\meta{end-stuff}|}|
+% adds stuff at the start and/or end of an argumentless  macro. 
+% Initially the code for appending was a reimplementation of the
+% kernel |\g@addto@macro| command (from \file{ltclass.dtx}).
+% Later, at Michael Downes' suggestion, I combined
+% appending and prepending stuff into a single command. 
+% Actually, there is no real need to have both
+% |\addtodef| and |\addtodef*| as the body of the command
+% being amended has no argument,
+% but both versions are provided for consistency.
+%
+%    The kernel |\@star@or@long| and |\l@ngrel@x| commands 
+% (in \file{ltdefns.dtx}) are used to handle 
+% the potential |*| after the command name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addtodef{\@star@or@long\wo@daddtodef}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The |\@star@or@long| command dealt with a possible |*| and now
+% |\wo@daddtodef| does the work. It picks up the three arguments
+% that the user thinks belong to |\addtodef|, namely \meta{macro},
+% \meta{start-stuff} and \meta{end-stuff}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\wo@daddtodef#1#2#3{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Check if \meta{macro} has been defined. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \wo@difmacro@begingroup{#1}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \meta{macro} is defined then store the tokens corresponding to the 
+% body of \meta{macro} and the extra \meta{-stuff} in token registers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@temptokena{#2}%
+    \toks@\expandafter{#1#3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do an expanded definition for |\x|, so that calling |\x|
+% will |\def| a new version of \meta{macro}, whose body consists of the
+% saved tokens (i.e., the orginal body plus the extra stuff). 
+% As Michael Downes noted, single letter control sequences do not take any of
+% \TeX's hash table space.
+% |\l@ngrel@x|
+% has been previously set to either |\long| or |\relax| by |\@star@or@long|,
+% and so may make the new definition of \meta{macro} to be |\long|. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \edef\x{\endgroup 
+         \l@ngrel@x\def\noexpand#1{\the\@temptokena \the\toks@}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, call |\x| to perform the new definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \x
+  }%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addtoiargdef}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtoiargdef*}
+% \begin{macro}{\wo@daddtoiargdef}
+%  This adds stuff at the start and/or end of a macro that takes one argument.
+% It is a modification of Michael Downes' appending 
+% code\footnote{Posted to \ctt{} on 15~June 2000,\\
+% URL: \url{http://www.dejanews.com/getdoc.xp?AN=635057844}.}
+% which was:
+% \begin{small}\begin{verbatim}
+% \def\appendef#1#2{%
+%   \begingroup
+%     \toks@\expandafter{#1{##1}#2}%
+%     \edef\x{\endgroup \def\noexpand#1####1{\the\toks@}}%
+%   \x}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \par\end{small}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addtoiargdef{\@star@or@long\wo@daddtoiargdef}
+\long\def\wo@daddtoiargdef#1#2#3{%
+  \wo@difmacro@begingroup{#1}{%
+    \@temptokena{#2}%
+    \toks@\expandafter{#1{##1}#3}%
+    \edef\x{\endgroup 
+       \l@ngrel@x\def\noexpand#1####1{\the\@temptokena \the\toks@}}%
+    \x
+  }%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For the record, Heiko Oberdiek produced the following 
+% version\footnote{Posted to \ctt{} on 16~June 2000,\\
+% URL: \url{http://www.dejanews.com/getdoc.xp?AN=635095381}.}
+% which avoids the use of a token register.
+% \begin{small}\begin{verbatim}
+% \newcommand{\appendiargdef}[2]{%
+%   \long\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter
+%   ##\expandafter1\expandafter{#1{##1}#2}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \par\end{small}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Continuing the saga, Michael came up with a pretty general solution for
+% modifying a macro with any number (up to 9) of arguments which he
+% sent to me on 2000/07/13; this became
+% the \Lpack{patchcmd} package which is on CTAN. I'm sure that Michael 
+% would have given me permission to include it here if he had not tragically
+% passed away in 2003. I miss his encouragement, advice, and skills.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd}
+% \cs{patchcmd}\marg{macro}\marg{start-stuff}\marg{end-stuff} inserts
+% \meta{start-stuff} at the beginning of the definition of \meta{macro}
+% and \meta{end-stuff} at the end of the definition. \meta{macro}
+% can have 0--9 arguments and be defined by \cs{newcommand} (and associates)
+% or with \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}. For macros that use \cs{futurelet}
+% (e.g., those with starred forms or optional arguments) only prepending
+% works --- any non-empty \meta{end-stuff} will mess things up. \cs{patchcmd}
+% does not work with macros that have delimited arguments.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/05}{Added \cs{patchcmd}}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Michael Downes' patchcmd 2000/07/31 v1.03 %%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\patchcommand}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\patchcmd@a\meaning#1??->@\@nil#1%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@a}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\patchcmd@a#1#2#3->#4#5\@nil#6{%
+  \ifx @#4\relax \patchcmdError#6#1%
+    \expandafter\@gobbletwo % discard the other two arguments
+  \else
+    \if l#2\toks@{\patchcmd@e{}#6}% l in this position means \long
+    \else \toks@{\patchcmd@e*#6}%   not \long
+    \fi
+    \patchcmd@b #3@#4#5 ? ? ? \@nil#6%
+    \expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@b}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\patchcmd@b#1:#2@#3#4 #5#6 #7 #8\@nil#9{%
+  \if \ifx @#7@\expandafter
+      \ifx\csname #6\endcsname#9T\else F\fi\else F\fi T%
+    \toks@\expandafter{\expandafter\patchcommand\csname #6 \endcsname}%
+  \else
+    \ifx @#2@% No arguments
+      \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@ 0}%
+    \else
+      \patchcmd@c 0#2{\string##}0%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@c}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\patchcmd@c#1#2#3{%
+  \if\string###2%      % yes it's a # token
+    \ifodd 0#31 % and it's followed by a number
+      \if 0#3\patchcmd@d#1\fi % number=0? then we're done
+    \else \patchcmd@d D% # not a number: must be a delimited arg
+    \fi
+  \else \patchcmd@d D% not a # token: must be a delmited arg
+  \fi
+  \patchcmd@c#3}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@d}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\patchcmd@d#1{%
+  \if D#1%
+%%%    \PackageError{patchcmd}{Cannot change a macro that has
+%%%      delimited arguments}\@ehd
+    \@memerror{%
+      Cannot change a macro that has delimited arguments}{\@ehd}
+  \else
+    \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@ #1}%
+  \fi
+  \begingroup
+  \aftergroup\@gobble
+  \let\patchcmd@c\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@e}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\patchcmd@e#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \begingroup
+  \edef\@##1{%
+    \@temptokena\noexpand\expandafter{%
+      \noexpand#2%
+        \ifnum#3>0 {####1}\ifnum#3>1 {####2}\ifnum#3>2 {####3}%
+        \ifnum#3>3 {####4}\ifnum#3>4 {####5}\ifnum#3>5 {####6}%
+        \ifnum#3>6 {####7}\ifnum#3>7 {####8}\ifnum#3>8 {####9}%
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+      ##1%
+    }%
+  }
+  \@{#5}%
+  \edef\@##1{\endgroup
+    \noexpand\renewcommand#1\noexpand#2\ifcase#3 \else [#3]\fi
+    {##1\the\@temptokena}}%
+  \@{#4}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\patchcmdError}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\patchcmdError#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+  \toks@{Not redefinable}%
+  \ifcat\relax\noexpand#1% Is it a control sequence?
+    \begingroup
+    \let#1=?\ifx ?\relax % Is it "\relax"?
+      \endgroup % accept current value of \toks@
+    \else \endgroup
+      \if\ifx\relax#1u\else #2\fi u%
+        \toks@{Not defined}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \edef\@{\endgroup
+%%%    \noexpand\PackageError{patchcmd}{%
+%%%      \the\toks@: \string#1}\noexpand\@ehd}%
+    \noexpand\@memerror{%
+      \the\toks@: \string#1}\noexpand\@ehd}%
+  \@}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% end of patchcmd code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% Prevent later loading of the original \Lpack{patchcmd} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%\@memfakeusepackage{patchcmd}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%
+% \section{Declaration of Options} \label{sec:opt}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Setting Paper Sizes}
+%
+%    The variables |\paperheight| and |\paperwidth| should reflect the
+%    physical paper size after trimming. 
+%
+%    Option \Lopt{letterpaper} will be the default.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stockheight}
+% \begin{macro}{\stockwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\trimtop}
+% \begin{macro}{\trimedge}
+% The lengths |\stockheight| and |\stockwidth| should be the height and 
+% width of the stock sheet before trimming. For example, this is the 
+% physical size
+% of a single sheet that might be laser-printed. The lengths |\trimtop|
+% and |\trimedge| are the amount that will be trimmed off the top and fore
+% edge of the physical sheet.
+% For desk printer output the size of the trimmed sheet is often the
+% same as the physical sheet. In other words the |\paper...| and |\stock...|
+% sizes are the same and the trims are zero. This class assumes that this
+% is the normal case.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\stockheight}
+\newlength{\stockwidth}
+\newlength{\trimtop}
+\newlength{\trimedge}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Declare the stock size options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{a3paper}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {420mm}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {297mm}}
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {297mm}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {210mm}}
+\DeclareOption{a5paper}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {210mm}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {148mm}}
+\DeclareOption{a6paper}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {148mm}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {105mm}}
+\DeclareOption{b3paper}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {500mm}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {353mm}}
+\DeclareOption{b4paper}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {353mm}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {250mm}}
+\DeclareOption{b5paper}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {250mm}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {176mm}}
+\DeclareOption{b6paper}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {176mm}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {125mm}}
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {11in}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {8.5in}}
+\DeclareOption{legalpaper}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {14in}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {8.5in}}
+\DeclareOption{executivepaper}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {10.5in}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {7.25in}}
+\DeclareOption{ebook}
+   {\setlength\stockheight {9in}%
+    \setlength\stockwidth  {6in}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The \Lopt{landscape} option switches the values of the height and width,
+% assuming that the dimensions were originally given for portrait 
+% orientation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{landscape}
+  {\setlength\@tempdima  {\stockheight}
+   \setlength\stockheight{\stockwidth}
+   \setlength\stockwidth {\@tempdima}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Choosing the type size}
+%
+%    The type size options are handled by defining |\@ptsize| to contain
+%    the last digit of the size in question and branching on |\ifcase|
+%    statements. This is done for historical reasons to stay compatible
+%    with other packages that use the |\@ptsize| variable to select
+%    special actions. It makes the declarations of size options less
+%    than 10pt difficult. In this class \texttt{9} is used for the 
+%    \Lopt{9pt} option, assuming that the class will never define a 
+%    \Lopt{19pt} option.
+%
+%    Option \Lopt{10pt} will be the default.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added 17pt option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{0}
+\DeclareOption{9pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{9}}
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{0}}
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{1}}
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{2}}
+\DeclareOption{14pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{4}}
+\DeclareOption{17pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{7}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%  \subsection{Two-side or one-side printing}
+%
+%    For two-sided printing we use the switch |\if@twoside|. In
+%    addition we have to set the |\if@mparswitch| to get any margin
+%    paragraphs into the outside margin. The default is \Lopt{twoside}.
+% \begin{macro}{\if@twoside}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mparswitch}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue  \@mparswitchtrue}
+\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse \@mparswitchfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%  \subsection{Two column printing}
+%
+%    Two-column and one-column printing is again realized via a switch
+%    which is defined in the kernel. The default is single column printing.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\@twocolumnfalse}
+\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@twocolumntrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%  \subsection{The \Lopt{draft} option}
+%
+%    If the user requests \Lopt{draft} we show any overfull boxes,
+%    marginal notes are allowed, and any copyright notices are not
+%    printed. For symmetry, we also define a \Lopt{final} option
+%    which is the default.
+%
+%    The user can use the |\ifdraftdoc| flag to add additional effects: \\
+% |\ifdraftdoc <additional code> \fi|
+% \begin{macro}{\ifdraftdoc}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifdraftdoc\draftdocfalse
+\setlength{\overfullrule}{\z@}
+\DeclareOption{final}{\setlength{\overfullrule}{\z@}
+                      \draftdocfalse
+                      \msdocfalse}
+\DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength\overfullrule{5pt}%
+                      \draftdoctrue
+                      \msdocfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The \Lopt{ms} option}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmsdoc}
+%    The \Lopt{ms} option makes the document look as though it was produced
+% on a typewriter. We use a flag for remembering this. The user may also
+% use the flag for specifying \Lopt{ms} effects.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifmsdoc
+  \msdocfalse
+\DeclareOption{ms}{%
+  \msdoctrue
+  \draftdocfalse
+  \setlength\overfullrule{\z@}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The \Lopt{showtrims} option}
+%
+%    The \Lopt{showtrims} option will display crosses at the corners
+% of the logical pages showing where the stock should be trimmed.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifshowtrims}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifshowtrims
+  \showtrimsfalse
+\DeclareOption{showtrims}{\showtrimstrue}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The \Lopt{article} option}
+%
+%    The \Lopt{article} option typesets as a simulation of the
+% \Lpack{article} class.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added article option}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifartopt}
+% |\ifartopt| is a flag (TRUE) if the \Lopt{article} option is called.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifartopt
+  \artoptfalse
+\DeclareOption{article}{\artopttrue}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The \Lopt{subfigure} option}
+%
+% The \Lopt{subfigure} option has been made a no-op since version 1.1.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added subfigure option}
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Effectively removed subfigure option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{subfigure}{%
+  \ClassWarningNoLine{memoir}{The subfigure option is not required}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The openright, openleft and openany options}
+%
+%    The \Lopt{openright} option specifies that Chapters must begin on 
+% recto pages. The \Lopt{openleft} option specifies that Chapters
+% must begin on verso pages and the \Lopt{openany} option lets Chapters 
+% start on any page.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/24}{Added the openleft option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{openright}{\@openrighttrue}
+\DeclareOption{openany}{\@openrightfalse}
+\DeclareOption{openleft}{\@openlefttrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\openright}
+% \begin{macro}{\openany}
+% \begin{macro}{\openleft}
+% Commands that can be used to change the option in the middle of the 
+% document\footnote{Openleft provided to meet a request by 
+% Vladimir G.~Ivanovic (\texttt{vladimir@acm.org}) in September 2001.}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\openright}{\@openrighttrue\@openleftfalse%
+  \gdef\clearforchapter{\cleartorecto}}
+\newcommand{\openany}{\@openrightfalse\@openleftfalse%
+  \gdef\clearforchapter{\clearpage}}
+\newcommand{\openleft}{\@openlefttrue
+  \gdef\clearforchapter{\cleartoverso}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Equation numbering on the left}
+%
+% The \Lopt{leqno} option prints equation numbers on the left. This
+% is implemented via an external class option file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{leqno}{\input{leqno.clo}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Flush left math displays}
+%
+% The \Lopt{fleqn} option redefines the displayed math environments
+% so that they are left adjusted with an indent of |\mathindent|
+% from the current left margin. This
+% is implemented via an external class option file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{fleqn}{\input{fleqn.clo}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Open bibliography}
+%
+% The \Lopt{openbib} option redefines the |thebibliography| so that each
+% block starts on a new line, and succeeding lines in a block are
+% indented by |\bibindent|.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/11/28}{Replaced \cs{AtEndOfPackage} with \cs{AtEndOfClass}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{openbib}{%
+  \AtEndOfClass{%
+    \renewcommand\@openbib@code{%
+      \advance\leftmargin\bibindent
+      \itemindent -\bibindent
+      \listparindent \itemindent
+      \parsep \z@
+     }%
+    \renewcommand\newblock{\par}}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Old font commands}
+%
+% The \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option enables commands like |\bf| and friends.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added the oldfontcommands option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{oldfontcommands}{%
+  \@memoldfonttrue}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Executing Options} \label{sec:xopt}
+%
+%    Here we execute the default options to initialize certain
+%    variables. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ExecuteOptions{final,letterpaper,10pt,onecolumn,openright,twoside}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The |\ProcessOptions| command causes the execution of the code
+%    for every option \Lopt{foo}
+%    which is declared and for which the user typed
+%    the \Lopt{foo} option in his
+%    |\documentclass| command.  For every option \Lopt{bar} he typed,
+%    which is not declared, the option is assumed to be a global option.
+%    All options will be passed as document options to any
+%    |\usepackage| command in the document preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cleartorecto}
+% A repeat of |\cleardoublepage|; clears to a recto (odd-numbered) page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cleartorecto{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
+  \hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
+  \newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cleartoverso}
+% Clears to a verso (even-numbered) page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cleartoverso{\clearpage\if@twoside 
+  \ifodd\c@page\hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
+  \newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+
+%    Set |\clearforchapter| according to the options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@openleft
+  \openleft
+\else
+  \if@openright
+    \openright
+  \else
+    \openany
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Now that all the options have been executed we can load the
+%    chosen class option file that contains all size dependent code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnum\@ptsize = 9\relax
+  \input{mem\@ptsize.clo}
+\else
+  \input{mem1\@ptsize.clo}
+\fi
+%</class>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Fonts and spaces} \label{sec:docl}
+% \label{sec:maincode}
+%
+%  In this section we deal with most of the aspects that are related
+% to font sizes, and spacing that is related to the size of the body font.
+%
+% \subsection{Fonts}
+%
+%    \LaTeX\ offers the user commands to change the size of the font,
+%    relative to the `main' size. Each relative size changing command
+%    |\size| executes the command
+%    |\@setfontsize||\size|\meta{font-size}\meta{baselineskip} where:
+%
+%    \begin{description}
+%    \item[\meta{font-size}] The absolute size of the font to use from
+%        now on.
+%
+%    \item[\meta{baselineskip}] The normal value of |\baselineskip|
+%        for the size of the font selected. (The actual value will be
+%        |\baselinestretch| * \meta{baselineskip}.)
+%    \end{description}
+%
+%    A number of commands, defined in the \LaTeX\ kernel, shorten the
+%    following  definitions and are used throughout. They are listed in 
+% Table~\ref{tab:sh}.
+%
+% \begin{table}
+% \centering
+% \caption{Shorthand font point size commands}\label{tab:sh}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll@{\qquad}ll@{\qquad}ll}
+%  \verb=\@vpt= & 5 & \verb=\@vipt= & 6 & \verb=\@viipt= & 7 \\
+%  \verb=\@viiipt= & 8 & \verb=\@ixpt= & 9 & \verb=\@xpt= & 10 \\
+%  \verb=\@xipt= & 10.95 & \verb=\@xiipt= & 12 & \verb=\@xivpt= & 14.4\\
+%  \verb=\@xviipt= & 17.28 & \verb=\@xxpt= & 20.74 & \verb=\@xxvpt= & 24.88\\
+%  \end{tabular}
+%  \end{table}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalsize}
+% \begin{macro}{\@normalsize}
+%
+%    The user level command for the main size is |\normalsize|.
+%    Internally \LaTeX\ uses |\@normalsize| when it refers to the
+%    main size. |\@normalsize| will be defined to work like
+%    |\normalsize| if the latter is redefined from its default
+%    definition (that just issues an error message). Otherwise
+%    |\@normalsize| simply selects a 9pt/11pt size.
+%
+%    The |\normalsize| macro also sets new values for\\
+%    |\abovedisplayskip|, |\abovedisplayshortskip| and
+%    |\belowdisplayshortskip|.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed baseline skip from 17.28pt to 17.5pt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+\renewcommand{\normalsize}{%
+%<*9pt>
+   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@ixpt\@xpt
+   \abovedisplayskip 9\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4.5\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 5.5\p@ \@plus 2.5\p@ \@minus 3\p@
+%</9pt>
+%<*10pt>
+   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt
+   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xipt{13.6}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xiipt{14.5}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+%</12pt>
+%<*14pt>
+   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xivpt{17.5}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 14\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus8\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 7\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+%</14pt>
+%<*17pt>
+   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xviipt{22}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 15\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus8\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus4\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 8\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus3\p@
+%</17pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The |\belowdisplayskip| is always equal to the
+%    |\abovedisplayskip|. The parameters of the first level list are
+%    always given by |\@listI|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+   \let\@listi\@listI}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    We initially choose the normalsize font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\normalsize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\small}
+%    This code is similar to that for |\normalsize|.
+% (Robert Schlicht\footnote{\texttt{w.m.l@gmx.net}, via email on 2004/03/11.}
+% noted that in some cases \% signs were missing after \verb?\@setfontsize?).
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/12}{Added missing percent signs to some uses of
+%                             \cs{@setfontsize}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\small}{%
+%<*9pt>
+    \@setfontsize\small\@viiipt{9.5}%
+    \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@
+    \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 2\p@
+    \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
+    \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+                \topsep 2\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
+                \parsep 1\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+                \itemsep \parsep
+%%                \itemindent\z@
+                }%
+%</9pt>
+%<*10pt>
+   \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{11}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+               \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+%%               \itemindent\z@
+              }%
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+   \@setfontsize\small\@xpt\@xiipt
+   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+               \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+%%               \itemindent\z@
+              }%
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+   \@setfontsize\small\@xipt{13.6}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
+               \parsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+%%               \itemindent\z@
+              }%
+%</12pt>
+%<*14pt>
+   \@setfontsize\small\@xiipt{14.5}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 11\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
+               \parsep 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+%%               \itemindent\z@
+              }%
+%</14pt>
+%<*17pt>
+   \@setfontsize\small\@xivpt{17}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 7\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus3\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 11\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
+               \parsep 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+%%               \itemindent\z@
+              }%
+%</17pt>
+   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotesize}
+%    This code is similar to that for |\normalsize|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\footnotesize}{%
+%<*9pt>
+    \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viipt{8}%
+    \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@
+    \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 2\p@
+    \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
+    \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+                \topsep 2\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
+                \parsep 1\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+                \itemsep \parsep
+%%                \itemindent\z@
+               }%
+%</9pt>
+%<*10pt>
+   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viiipt{9.5}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus2\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+%%               \itemindent\z@
+              }%
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@ixpt{11}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+               \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+%%               \itemindent\z@
+              }%
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xpt\@xiipt
+   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+               \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+%%               \itemindent\z@
+              }%
+%</12pt>
+%<*14pt>
+   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xipt{13.6}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+               \parsep 4\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+%%               \itemindent\z@
+              }%
+%</14pt>
+%<*17pt>
+   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xiipt{14}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \topsep 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+               \parsep 4\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \itemsep \parsep
+%%               \itemindent\z@
+              }%
+%</17pt>
+   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\miniscule}
+% \begin{macro}{\scriptsize}
+% \begin{macro}{\tiny}
+% \begin{macro}{\large}
+% \begin{macro}{\Large}
+% \begin{macro}{\LARGE}
+% \begin{macro}{\huge}
+% \begin{macro}{\Huge}
+% \begin{macro}{\HUGE}
+%    These are all much simpler than the previous macros, they just
+%    select a new fontsize, but leave the parameters for displays and
+%    lists alone. The class provides two additional sizes, \cs{miniscule}
+% and \cs{HUGE}, with respect to the usual set.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{miniscule} and \cs{HUGE} font sizes}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Twiddled some font sizes to get regular steps}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{2002/08/27}{Fixed 12pt scriptsize bug}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*9pt>
+\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vpt{6}}
+\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt{6}}
+\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@vipt{7}}
+\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xpt{12}}
+\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xipt{13.6}}
+\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xiipt{14.5}}
+\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xivpt{18}}
+\newcommand{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xviipt{22}}
+\newcommand{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xxpt{25}}
+%</9pt>
+%<*10pt>
+\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vpt{6}}
+\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt{7}}
+\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt{8}}
+\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xipt{13.6}}
+\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xiipt{14.5}}
+\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xivpt{18}}
+\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xviipt{22}}
+\newcommand{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxpt{25}}
+\newcommand{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xxvpt{30}}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vipt{7}}
+\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@viipt{8}}
+\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5}}
+\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14.5}}
+\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18}}
+\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22}}
+\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25}}
+\newcommand{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30}}
+\let\HUGE=\Huge
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@viipt{8}}
+\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@viiipt{9.5}}
+\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@ixpt\@xpt}
+\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xivpt{18}}
+\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xviipt{22}}
+\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxpt{25}}
+\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxvpt{30}}
+\let\Huge=\huge
+\let\HUGE=\huge
+%</12pt>
+%<*14pt>
+\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@viiipt{9.5}}
+\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@ixpt{10}}
+\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xpt{12}}
+\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xviipt{22}}
+\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xxpt{25}}
+\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxvpt{30}}
+\let\huge=\LARGE
+\let\Huge=\LARGE
+\let\HUGE=\LARGE
+%</14pt>
+%<*17pt>
+\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@ixpt{10}}
+\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@xpt{12}}
+\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xipt{13.6}}
+\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xxpt{25}}
+\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xxvpt{30}}
+\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxvpt{30}}
+\let\LARGE=\Large
+\let\huge=\Large
+\let\Huge=\Large
+\let\HUGE=\Large
+%</17pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
+%<*class>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\captionsize}
+%  This internal command holds the font size for captions. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\captionsize}{\normalsize}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Paragraphing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\normallineskip}
+%    These parameters control \TeX's behaviour when two lines tend to
+%    come too close together.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\lineskip{1\p@}
+\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch}
+%    This is used as a multiplier for |\baselineskip|. The default is
+%    to \emph{not} stretch the baselines.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\onelineskip}
+%
+% |\parskip| is additional vertical space between paragraphs;  default
+% is zero.
+%
+%
+%    |\onelineskip| is the default space between baselines.
+% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed \cs{onelineskip} from 17.28pt to 17.5pt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\parskip{0\p@ \@plus \p@}
+%</class>
+%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
+%<9pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{\@xpt\p@}
+%<10pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{\@xiipt\p@}
+%<11pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{13.6\p@}
+%<12pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{14.5\p@}
+%<14pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{17.5\p@}
+%<17pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{22\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parindent}
+%    |\parskip| gives extra vertical space between paragraphs and
+%    |\parindent| is the width of the paragraph indentation. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twocolumn
+  \setlength\parindent{1em}
+\else
+%<9pt>  \setlength\parindent{12\p@}
+%<10pt>  \setlength\parindent{15\p@}
+%<11pt>  \setlength\parindent{17\p@}
+%<12pt>  \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
+%<14pt>  \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
+%<17pt>  \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\smallskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\medskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
+% The values for these three parameters are set in the LaTeX kernel.
+% Historically they have been size invariant.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\smallskipamount{3\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
+\setlength\medskipamount{6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\bigskipamount{12\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}%
+%    The commands |\nopagebreak| and |\nolinebreak| put in penalties
+%    to discourage these breaks at the point they are put in.
+%    They use |\@lowpenalty|, |\@medpenalty| or |\@highpenalty|,
+%    dependent on their argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
+\@lowpenalty   51
+\@medpenalty  151
+\@highpenalty 301
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty}
+%    These penalties are used to discourage club and widow lines.
+%    The default values are 150 each, but we want stronger discouragement.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\clubpenalty  1000
+\widowpenalty 1000
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty}
+%    Discourage, but do not prevent, widows in front of a math display
+%    and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break
+%    after a display without a penalty. The default values are
+%    used, therefore we only show them here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \displaywidowpenalty 50
+% \predisplaypenalty   10000
+% \postdisplaypenalty  0
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\interlinepenalty}
+%    Allow the breaking of a page in the middle of a paragraph.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \interlinepenalty 0
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\brokenpenalty}
+%    We allow the breaking of a page after a hyphenated line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \brokenpenalty 100
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% 
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical spacing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\headheight}
+% \begin{macro}{\headsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\topskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\footskip}
+%    The |\headheight| is the height of the box that will contain the
+%    running head. In this class it is point size dependent (normally it
+% is a constant 12pt). 
+%
+% The |\headsep| is the distance between the bottom
+%    of the running head and the top of the text. 
+%
+% The |\topskip| is the
+%    |\baselineskip| for the first line on a page; 
+%    \LaTeX's output routine will not work properly if it has the
+%    value 0pt, so do not do that!
+%
+%    The distance from the baseline of the box which contains the
+%    running footer to the baseline of last line of text is controlled
+%    by the |\footskip|.
+% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed \cs{headheight} from 16pt to 17.5pt}
+% \changes{v0.11 (mem11.clo)}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{headheight} from 13pt to 13.6pt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</class>
+%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
+%<*9pt>
+\setlength\headheight{11\p@}
+\setlength\headsep{.225in}
+\setlength\topskip{9\p@}
+\setlength\footskip{.33in}
+%</9pt>
+%<*10pt>
+\setlength\headheight{12\p@}
+\setlength\headsep{.25in}
+\setlength\topskip{10\p@}
+\setlength\footskip{.35in}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+\setlength\headheight{13.6\p@}
+\setlength\headsep{.275in}
+\setlength\topskip{11\p@}
+\setlength\footskip{.38in}
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+\setlength\headheight{14\p@}
+\setlength\headsep{.275in}
+\setlength\topskip{12\p@}
+\setlength\footskip{30\p@}
+%</12pt>
+%<*14pt>
+\setlength\headheight{17.5\p@}
+\setlength\headsep{.30in}
+\setlength\topskip{14.4\p@}
+\setlength\footskip{.4in}
+%</14pt>
+%<*17pt>
+\setlength\headheight{22\p@}
+\setlength\headsep{.30in}
+\setlength\topskip{14.4\p@}
+\setlength\footskip{.4in}
+%</17pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maxdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@maxdepth}
+%    The \TeX\ primitive register |\maxdepth| has a function that is
+%    similar to that of |\topskip|. The register |\@maxdepth| should
+%    always contain a copy of |\maxdepth|. In both plain \TeX\ and
+%    \LaTeX~2.09 |\maxdepth| had a fixed value of \texttt{4pt}; in
+%    native \LaTeX 2e mode we let the value depend on the typesize. We
+%    set it so that |\maxdepth| $+$ |\topskip| $=$ typesize $\times
+%    1.5$. As it happens, in these classes |\topskip| is equal to the
+%    typesize, therefor we set |\maxdepth| to half the value of
+%    |\topskip|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\maxdepth{.5\topskip}
+\setlength\@maxdepth\maxdepth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Footnotes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep}
+%    |\footnotesep| is the height of the strut placed at the beginning
+%    of every footnote. It equals the height of a normal |\footnotesize|
+% strut, so no extra space appears between footnotes
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<9pt>\setlength\footnotesep{6.0\p@}  %% ????????
+%<10pt>\setlength\footnotesep{6.65\p@}
+%<11pt>\setlength\footnotesep{7.7\p@}
+%<12pt>\setlength\footnotesep{8.4\p@}
+%<14pt>\setlength\footnotesep{10.0\p@} %% ????????
+%<17pt>\setlength\footnotesep{12\p@} %% ????????
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footins}
+%    |\skip\footins| is the space between the last line of the main
+%    text and the top of the first footnote.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<9pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{8\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%<10pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{9\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%<11pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{10\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%<12pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{10.8\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%<14pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{13\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%<17pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{14\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 3\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Floats}
+%
+% \paragraph{Floats on a text page}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\floatsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\textfloatsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\intextsep}
+%    When a floating object is placed on a page with text, these
+%    parameters control the separation between the float and the other
+%    objects on the page. These parameters are used for both
+%    one-column mode and single-column floats in two-column mode.
+%
+%    |\floatsep| is the space between adjacent floats that are moved
+%    to the top or bottom of the text page.
+%
+%    |\textfloatsep| is the space between the main text and floats
+%    at the top or bottom of the page.
+%
+%    |\intextsep| is the space between in-text floats and the text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*9pt>
+\setlength\floatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\intextsep   {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%</9pt>
+%<*10pt>
+\setlength\floatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\intextsep   {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+\setlength\floatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\intextsep   {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+\setlength\floatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\intextsep   {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</12pt>
+%<*14pt>
+\setlength\floatsep    {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\intextsep   {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</14pt>
+%<*17pt>
+\setlength\floatsep    {15\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\textfloatsep{25\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
+\setlength\intextsep   {16\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
+%</17pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\dbltextfloatsep}
+%    When floating objects that span the whole |\textwidth| are placed
+%    on a text page and \LaTeX{} is in twocolumn mode the separation
+%    between the float and the text is controlled by |\dblfloatsep|
+%    and |\dbltextfloatsep|.
+%
+%    |\dblfloatsep| is the space between adjacent floats that are moved
+%    to the top or bottom of the text page.
+%
+%    |\dbltextfloatsep| is the space between the main text and floats
+%    at the top or bottom of the page.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*9pt>
+\setlength\dblfloatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</9pt>
+%<*10pt>
+\setlength\dblfloatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+\setlength\dblfloatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+\setlength\dblfloatsep    {14\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</12pt>
+%<*14pt>
+\setlength\dblfloatsep    {14\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</14pt>
+%<*17pt>
+\setlength\dblfloatsep    {15\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{25\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
+%</17pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \paragraph{Floats on their own page or column}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fptop}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fpsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fpbot}
+%    When floating objects are placed on separate pages the layout of
+%    such pages is controlled by these parameters. At the top of the
+%    page |\@fptop| amount of stretchable whitespace is inserted, at
+%    the bottom of the page we get an |\@fpbot| amount of stretchable
+%    whitespace. Between adjacent floats the |\@fpsep| is inserted.
+%
+%    These parameters are used for the placement of floating objects
+%    in one column mode, or in single column floats in two column
+%    mode.
+%
+%    Note that at least one of the two parameters |\@fptop| and
+%    |\@fpbot| should contain a |plus ...fil| to allow filling the
+%    remaining empty space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*9pt>
+\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@fpsep{9\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</9pt>
+%<*10pt>
+\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@fpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@fpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@fpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</12pt>
+%<*14pt>
+\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@fpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</14pt>
+%<*17pt>
+\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@fpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</17pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfptop}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpbot}
+%    Double column floats in two column mode are handled with similar
+%    parameters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*9pt>
+\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpsep{7\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</9pt>
+%<*10pt>
+\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</12pt>
+%<*14pt>
+\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</14pt>
+%<*17pt>
+\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</17pt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The measure}
+%
+% The width of a line of text (and therefore the text block) is termed
+% the \emph{measure}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lxvchars}
+% The length |\lxvchars| is the approximate length of a normal
+% text line containing 65 characters (a typesetters rule of thumb is
+% that there should be about 60--70 characters per line).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<9pt>\setlength\lxvchars{276\p@}  %
+%<10pt>\setlength\lxvchars{300\p@} % standard 345pt
+%<11pt>\setlength\lxvchars{324\p@} % standard 360pt
+%<12pt>\setlength\lxvchars{336\p@} % standard 390pt
+%<14pt>\setlength\lxvchars{408\p@} %
+%<17pt>\setlength\lxvchars{444\p@} %
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\xlvchars}
+% The length |\xlvchars| is the approximate length of a normal
+% double column text line containing 45 characters 
+% (a typesetters rule of thumb is
+% that there should be about 40--50 characters per column line).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<9pt>\setlength\xlvchars{192\p@}  %
+%<10pt>\setlength\xlvchars{204\p@} % 
+%<11pt>\setlength\xlvchars{216\p@} % 
+%<12pt>\setlength\xlvchars{240\p@} % 
+%<14pt>\setlength\xlvchars{288\p@} %
+%<17pt>\setlength\xlvchars{312\p@} %
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparpush}
+% |\marginparsep| is the horizontal space between the text block and 
+% marginal notes, while |\marginparpush| is the minimum vertical
+% separation between the notes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twocolumn
+  \setlength\marginparsep{10\p@}
+\else
+  \setlength\marginparsep{7\p@}
+\fi
+%<9pt|10pt|11pt>\setlength{\marginparpush}{5\p@}
+%<12pt|14pt>\setlength{\marginparpush}{7\p@}
+%<17pt>\setlength{\marginparpush}{10\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
+%<*class>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Page Layout}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The typeblock and margins}
+%
+%    All margin dimensions are measured from a point one inch from the
+%    top and lefthand side of the page.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setlxvchars}
+% \begin{macro}{\setxlvchars}
+% These were suggested and supplied by Morten H{\o}gholm (18 May 2003).
+%
+% |\setlxvchars|\oarg{fontspec} sets |\lxvchars| to the length of a line
+% containing 65 characters in the \meta{fontspec}. 
+%
+% Similarly
+% |\setxlvchars|\oarg{fontspec} sets |\xlvchars| for 45 characters.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{setlxvchars} and \cs{setxlvchars}
+%                              (from patch v1.6)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setlxvchars}[1][\normalfont]{\begingroup
+  #1
+  \settowidth{\lxvchars}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}%
+  \setlength{\lxvchars}{2.042\lxvchars}%
+  \addtolength{\lxvchars}{33.41pt}%
+  \global\lxvchars=\lxvchars
+  \endgroup}
+\newcommand{\setxlvchars}[1][\normalfont]{\begingroup
+  #1
+  \settowidth{\xlvchars}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}%
+  \setlength{\xlvchars}{1.415\xlvchars}%
+  \addtolength{\xlvchars}{23.03pt}%
+  \global\xlvchars=\xlvchars
+  \endgroup}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setrectanglesize}
+%  The macro |\setrectanglesize{|\meta{H}|}{|\meta{W}|}{|\meta{r}|}| 
+% calculates the height and width of a rectangle given any two out of
+% the three arguments. An unvalued argument is denoted by |*|.
+%
+% Table~\ref{tab:setrect} shows the argument combinations and the result
+% for each combination.
+% \begin{table}
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \centering
+% \caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setrectanglesize}}\label{tab:setrect}
+% \begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
+%  H & W & r & Result  \\ \hline
+%  * & W & r & $H = rW$  \\{}
+%  * & W & * & $H = W$   \\{}
+%  * & * & r & ambiguous   \\{}
+%  * & * & * & ambiguous   \\{}
+%  H & W & r & $H, W$  \\
+%  H & W & * & $H, W$   \\
+%  H & * & r & $W = rH$  \\
+%  H & * & * & $W = H$   \\
+%  \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+% \end{table}
+%
+% The
+% calculated height and width are stored in |\@tempdima| and |\@tempdimb|
+% respectively. Both lengths are set to zero if there is an error.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setrectanglesize}[3]{%
+  \nametest{#1}{*}%
+  \ifsamename                           % H = *
+    \nametest{#2}{*}%
+    \ifsamename                         % W = *
+      \@memerror{%
+        The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
+        The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}
+      \@tempdima = \z@
+      \@tempdimb = \z@
+    \else                               % W
+      \nametest{#3}{*}%
+      \ifsamename                       % r = *
+        \@tempdimb = #2\relax
+        \@tempdima = \@tempdimb
+      \else                             % r
+        \@tempdimb = #2\relax
+        \@tempdima = #3\@tempdimb
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else                                 % H
+    \nametest{#2}{*}%
+    \ifsamename                         % W = *
+      \nametest{#3}{*}%
+      \ifsamename                       % r = *
+        \@tempdima = #1\relax
+        \@tempdimb = \@tempdima
+      \else                             % r
+        \@tempdima = #1\relax
+        \@tempdimb = #3\@tempdima
+      \fi
+    \else                               % W
+      \@tempdima = #1\relax
+      \@tempdimb = #2\relax
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setfillsize}
+% Consider a set of 4 lengths, $T$, $L$, $C$, and $R$, such that
+% $T = L + C + R$, where $T$ is a fixed size and normally $C$ is also fixed.
+% Also $L$ and $R$ may be specified independently of each other or as a
+% ratio (i.e., $L = rR$ or $R = rL$).
+%  The macro 
+% |\setfillsize{|\meta{T}|}{|\meta{C}|}{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}|
+% maintains these constraints among the variables, where an unvalued 
+% argument is denoted by |*|. 
+%
+% Table~\ref{tab:setfill} shows the argument combinations and the result
+% for each combination.
+% \begin{table}
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \centering
+% \caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setfillsize}}\label{tab:setfill}
+% \begin{tabular}{cccc|ll} \hline
+%  C & L & R & r & Result                     &   \\ \hline
+%  * & * & R & r & $L = rR$,                  & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
+%  * & * & R & * & $L = R$,                   & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
+%  * & * & * & r & ambigous                   & \\{}
+%  * & * & * & * & ambiguous                  & \\{}
+%  * & L & R & r & $L$, $R$,                  & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
+%  * & L & R & * & $L$, $R$,                  & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
+%  * & L & * & r & $R = rL$,                  & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
+%  * & L & * & * & $R = L$,                   & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
+%  C & * & R & r & $L = T - C - R$            & $C$ \\
+%  C & * & R & * & $L = T - C - R$,           & $C$ \\
+%  C & * & * & r & $L + R = T - C$, $R = rL$, & $C$ \\
+%  C & * & * & * & $L + R = T - C$, $R = L$,  & $C$ \\
+%  C & L & R & r & ambiguous                  & $C$ \\
+%  C & L & R & * & ambiguous                  & $C$ \\ 
+%  C & L & * & r & $R = T - C - L$,           & $C$ \\
+%  C & L & * & * & $R = T - C - L$,           & $C$ \\
+%  \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+% \end{table}
+%
+%
+% The
+% calculated values of |C|, |L| and |R| are stored |\@tempdimc|, 
+% |\@tempdima| and |\@tempdimb| respectively. If there is an error
+% the lengths are set to zero.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setfillsize}[5]{%
+  \nametest{#2}{*}%
+  \ifsamename                                % C = *
+    \nametest{#3}{*}%
+    \ifsamename                              % L = *
+      \nametest{#4}{*}%
+      \ifsamename                            % R = *
+        \@memerror{%
+          The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
+          The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}
+        \@tempdima = \z@
+        \@tempdimb = \z@
+        \@tempdimc = \z@
+      \else                                  % R 
+        \nametest{#5}{*}%
+        \ifsamename                          % r = *
+          \@tempdimb = #4\relax
+          \@tempdima = \@tempdimb
+          \@tempdimc = #1\relax
+          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
+          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
+        \else                                % r 
+          \@tempdimb = #4\relax
+          \@tempdima = #5\@tempdimb
+          \@tempdimc = #1\relax
+          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
+          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \else                                    % L 
+      \nametest{#4}{*}%
+      \ifsamename                            % R = *
+        \nametest{#5}{*}%
+        \ifsamename                          % r = *
+          \@tempdima = #3\relax
+          \@tempdimb = \@tempdima
+          \@tempdimc = #1\relax
+          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
+          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
+        \else                                % r 
+          \@tempdima = #3\relax
+          \@tempdimb = #5\@tempdima
+          \@tempdimc = #1\relax
+          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
+          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
+        \fi
+      \else                                  % R
+        \@tempdima = #3\relax
+        \@tempdimb = #4\relax
+        \@tempdimc = #1\relax
+        \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
+        \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else                                      % C is valued
+    \nametest{#3}{*}%
+    \ifsamename                              % L = *
+      \nametest{#4}{*}%
+      \ifsamename                            % R = *
+        \nametest{#5}{*}%
+        \ifsamename                          % r = *
+          \@tempdimc = #2\relax
+          \@tempdima = #1\relax
+          \advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimc
+          \@tempdima = 0.5\@tempdima
+          \@tempdimb = \@tempdima
+        \else                                % r (CODE PERHAPS FIXED)
+          \@tempdimc = #2\relax         % C
+          \@tempdimb = #1\relax         % T
+          \advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdimc % T - C
+          \@tempdima = 1000sp
+          \@tempdima = #5\@tempdima        % 1000r sp
+          \advance\@tempdima by 1000sp   % 1000(1+r)sp
+          \@tempcnta = \@tempdima        % 1000(1+r)
+          \@tempdima = \@tempdimb        % T - C
+          \divide\@tempdima by \@tempcnta  % (T-C)/1000(1+r) pts
+          \@tempdima = 1000\@tempdima      % (T-C)/(1+r)  pts = L
+          \advance\@tempdimb by -\@tempdima % = R
+        \fi
+      \else                                  % R 
+        \@tempdimc = #2\relax
+        \@tempdimb = #4\relax
+        \@tempdima = #1\relax
+        \advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimc
+        \advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimb
+      \fi
+    \else                                    % L 
+      \nametest{#4}{*}%
+      \ifsamename                            % R = *
+        \@tempdimc = #2\relax
+        \@tempdima = #3\relax
+        \@tempdimb = #1\relax
+        \advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdimc
+        \advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdima
+      \else                                  % R
+        \@memerror{%
+          The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
+          The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}%
+        \@tempdima = \z@
+        \@tempdimb = \z@
+        \@tempdimc = #2\relax
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setstocksize}
+% \begin{macro}{\settrims}
+% \begin{macro}{\settrimmedsize}
+% |\setstocksize{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{width}|}| sets the height
+% and width of the stock material and 
+% |\settrims{|\meta{top}|}{|\meta{edge}|}| sets the trim lengths
+% for the top and side (fore edge) of the stock.
+% The macro |\settrimmedsize{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{ratio}|}|
+% sets the size for the trimmed page, based on |\setrectanglesize|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setstocksize}[2]{%
+  \setlength{\stockheight}{#1}%
+  \setlength{\stockwidth}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\settrims}[2]{%
+  \setlength{\trimtop}{#1}%
+  \setlength{\trimedge}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\settrimmedsize}[3]{%
+  \setrectanglesize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \setlength{\paperheight}{\@tempdima}%
+  \setlength{\paperwidth}{\@tempdimb}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\settypeblocksize}
+% |\settypeblocksize{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{ratio}|}|
+% calulates the |\textheight| and |\textwidth| from two out of the
+% three arguments. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\settypeblocksize}[3]{%
+  \setrectanglesize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdima}%
+  \setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimb}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\spinemargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\foremargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\setlrmargins}
+% |\setlrmargins{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (spine)
+% and Right (fore edge) margins with constant typeblock.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\spinemargin}
+\newlength{\foremargin}
+\newcommand{\setlrmargins}[3]{%
+  \setfillsize{\paperwidth}{\textwidth}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimc}%
+  \setlength{\spinemargin}{\@tempdima}%
+  \setlength{\foremargin}{\@tempdimb}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setlrmarginsandblock}
+% |\setlrmarginsandblock{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (spine)
+% and Right (fore edge) margins with variable typeblock.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setlrmarginsandblock}[3]{%
+  \setfillsize{\paperwidth}{*}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimc}%
+  \setlength{\spinemargin}{\@tempdima}%
+  \setlength{\foremargin}{\@tempdimb}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\uppermargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\lowermargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\setulmargins}
+% |\setulmargins{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (upper)
+% and Right (lower) margins with constant typeblock.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\uppermargin}
+\newlength{\lowermargin}
+\newcommand{\setulmargins}[3]{%
+  \setfillsize{\paperheight}{\textheight}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdimc}%
+  \setlength{\uppermargin}{\@tempdima}%
+  \setlength{\lowermargin}{\@tempdimb}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setulmarginsandblock}
+% |\setulmarginsandblock{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (upper)
+% and Right (lower) margins with variable typeblock.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setulmarginsandblock}[3]{%
+  \setfillsize{\paperheight}{*}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdimc}%
+  \setlength{\uppermargin}{\@tempdima}%
+  \setlength{\lowermargin}{\@tempdimb}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\headdrop}
+% \begin{macro}{\setheaderspaces}
+% |\setheaderspaces{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (head margin)
+% and Right (headsep) spacing with constant headheight.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\headdrop}
+\newcommand{\setheaderspaces}[3]{%
+  \setfillsize{\uppermargin}{\headheight}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \setlength{\headheight}{\@tempdimc}%
+  \setlength{\headdrop}{\@tempdima}%
+  \setlength{\headsep}{\@tempdimb}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setheadfoot}
+% |\setheadfoot{|\meta{headheight}|}{|\meta{footskip}|}|
+% sets the headheight and the footskip.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setheadfoot}[2]{%
+  \setlength{\headheight}{#1}%
+  \setlength{\footskip}{#2}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setcolsepandrule}
+% |\setcolsepandrule{|\meta{colsep}|}{|\meta{thickness}|}|
+% sets the column separation and the rule thickness.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/20}{Changed \cs{setcolseprule} to 
+% \cs{setcolsepandrule} to match the documentation.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setcolsepandrule}[2]{%
+  \setlength{\columnsep}{#1}%
+  \setlength{\columnseprule}{#2}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setmarginnotes}
+% |\setmarginnotes{|\meta{sep}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{push}|}|
+% sets the marginpar parameters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setmarginnotes}[3]{%
+  \setlength{\marginparsep}{#1}%
+  \setlength{\marginparwidth}{#2}%
+  \setlength{\marginparpush}{#3}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%    Initialise the paper size and trimming to their default values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\settrimmedsize{\stockheight}{\stockwidth}{*}
+\settrims{\z@}{\z@}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+%    What now follows is the standard class's method for setting up
+% the dimensions.
+%
+%    Set |\@tempdimb| to size-dependent initial line length and
+% set |\@tempdima| to the maximum textwidth for the paper width, 
+% an inch margin on either side. In the standard classes the initial
+% line length is about 14\% greater than |\lxvchars|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\@tempdimb}{1.14\lxvchars}
+\setlength\@tempdima{\paperwidth}
+  \addtolength\@tempdima{-2in}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
+% Now set the |\textwidth| depending on the number of columns. In twocolumn
+% mode each column should be no wider than |\@tempdimb|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twocolumn
+  \ifdim\@tempdima>2\@tempdimb\relax
+    \setlength\textwidth{2\@tempdimb}
+  \else
+    \setlength\textwidth{\@tempdima}
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In onecolumn
+% the text should not be wider than the minumum of the paperwidth (less
+% 2in for the margins) and the maximum length of the character line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+  \ifdim\@tempdima>\@tempdimb\relax
+    \setlength\textwidth{\@tempdimb}
+  \else
+    \setlength\textwidth{\@tempdima}
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Adjust the width to be a whole number of points.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@settopoint\textwidth
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%  
+% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
+%    The |\textheight| is the height of the text block, excluding
+% headers and footers. This is set according to the |\paperheight|,
+% to an integral number of lines, and allowing a 1in margin at the
+% top and bottom and a further 1.5in for headers and footers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\@tempdima{\paperheight}
+  \addtolength\@tempdima{-3.5in}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Divide this height by the |\baselineskip| to get the number of lines.
+% Then (re)calculate the |\textheight| and finally add the |\topskip|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \divide\@tempdima\baselineskip
+\@tempcnta=\@tempdima
+\setlength\textheight{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}
+  \addtolength\textheight{\topskip}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    The margins are calculated. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin}
+%    The margins depend on the paper size, also for two sided
+% printing the inner margin is made smaller than the outer.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twoside
+  \setlength\@tempdima       {\paperwidth}
+  \addtolength\@tempdima     {-\textwidth}
+  \setlength\oddsidemargin   {.4\@tempdima}
+  \addtolength\oddsidemargin {-1in}
+  \setlength\marginparwidth  {.6\@tempdima}
+  \addtolength\marginparwidth{-\marginparsep}
+  \addtolength\marginparwidth{-0.4in}
+\else
+  \setlength\@tempdima       {\paperwidth}
+  \addtolength\@tempdima     {-\textwidth}
+  \setlength\oddsidemargin   {.5\@tempdima}
+  \addtolength\oddsidemargin {-1in}
+  \setlength\marginparwidth  {.5\@tempdima}
+  \addtolength\marginparwidth{-\marginparsep}
+  \addtolength\marginparwidth{-0.8in} % don't know why this isn't .4
+\fi
+\ifdim\marginparwidth>2in
+  \setlength\marginparwidth{2in}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set these values to integer numbers of points, and calculate the
+% |\evensidemargin|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@settopoint\oddsidemargin
+\@settopoint\marginparwidth
+
+\setlength\evensidemargin  {\paperwidth}
+\addtolength\evensidemargin{-2in}
+\addtolength\evensidemargin{-\textwidth}
+\addtolength\evensidemargin{-\oddsidemargin}
+\@settopoint\evensidemargin
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
+%    The |\topmargin| is the distance below the top of the printable
+% area (1in below the top of the paper) and the top of the box
+% containing the running head.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\topmargin  {\paperheight}
+\addtolength\topmargin{-2in}
+\addtolength\topmargin{-\headheight}
+\addtolength\topmargin{-\headsep}
+\addtolength\topmargin{-\textheight}
+\addtolength\topmargin{-\footskip}
+\addtolength\topmargin{-.5\topmargin}
+\@settopoint\topmargin
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% That is the end of the classical algorithm. Now calculate the 
+% user-friendly dimensions. The calculations are simpler than in
+% the general case as the |\paperwidth| and |\paperheight| is the 
+% same as the |\stockwidth| and |\stockheight|. 
+%
+%    We can get the spine 
+% and edge margins from the |\oddsidemargin|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\spinemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+\addtolength{\spinemargin}{1in}
+\setlrmargins{\spinemargin}{*}{*}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Similarly we can get the upper and lower margins from the
+% |\topmargin|, |\headheight| and |\headskip|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\uppermargin}{\topmargin}
+\addtolength{\uppermargin}{1in}
+\addtolength{\uppermargin}{\headheight}
+\addtolength{\uppermargin}{\headsep}
+\setulmargins{\uppermargin}{*}{*}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memznegtest}
+% DA suggested this in a private email (2003/002/13) to make error
+% checking and reporting a bit more (space) efficient. Use like \\
+% |\@memznegtest{\marginparsep}| instead of \\
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \ifdim\marginparsep>\z@\else
+%    \@memerror{\protect\marginparsep\space is zero or negative}{\@ehd}%
+% \fi
+% \end{verbatim}
+% If its length variable argument is zero or less it reports an error.
+% 
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memznegtest}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@memznegtest}[1]{%
+  \ifdim#1>\z@\else
+    \@memerror{\protect#1\space is zero or negative}{\@ehd}%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memnegtest}
+% Reports an error if its length variable argument is negative.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memnegtest}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@memnegtest}[1]{%
+  \ifdim#1<\z@
+    \@memerror{\protect#1\space is negative}{\@ehd}%
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\checkthelayout}
+% This macro checks that the current layout dimensions are sensible and
+% checks the arithmetic.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Added \cs{checkthelayout}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\checkthelayout}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% First check the dimensions are not negative.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@memnegtest{\trimedge}
+  \@memnegtest{\trimtop}
+  \@memznegtest{\stockwidth}
+  \@memznegtest{\paperwidth}
+  \@memznegtest{\textwidth}
+  \@memznegtest{\spinemargin}
+  \@memznegtest{\foremargin}
+  \@memznegtest{\marginparsep}
+  \@memznegtest{\marginparwidth}
+  \@memznegtest{\stockheight}
+  \@memznegtest{\paperheight}
+  \@memznegtest{\textheight}
+  \@memznegtest{\uppermargin}
+  \@memznegtest{\lowermargin}
+  \@memznegtest{\headheight}
+  \@memznegtest{\headsep}
+  \@memznegtest{\footskip}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Carry on regardless. We need to adjust the |\textheight| and the
+% |\lowermargin| to get an integral number of lines.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@tempdima = \textheight
+    \divide\@tempdima \baselineskip
+  \@tempcnta=\@tempdima
+  \setlength{\textheight}{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}
+    \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}
+  \setulmargins{\uppermargin}{*}{*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Check that all the sums add up correctly, or
+% at least to within a small (|\@tempdimb|) error.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@tempdimb = -1pt  
+  \@tempdima=\stockwidth
+  \advance\@tempdima -\trimedge
+  \advance\@tempdima -\paperwidth
+  \ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
+    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
+    \@memerror{\protect\paperwidth\space and/or 
+                        \protect\trimedge\space 
+                        are too large for \protect\stockwidth\space
+                        by \the\@tempdima}%
+                       {\@ehd}
+  \fi
+  \@tempdima = \paperwidth
+  \advance\@tempdima -\foremargin
+  \advance\@tempdima -\textwidth
+  \advance\@tempdima -\spinemargin
+  \ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
+    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
+    \@memerror{\protect\spinemargin\space and/or 
+                        \protect\textwidth\space and/or
+                        \protect\foremargin\space 
+                        are too large for \protect\paperwidth\space
+                        by \the\@tempdima}%
+                       {\@ehd}
+  \fi
+  \@tempdima = \stockheight
+  \advance\@tempdima -\trimtop
+  \advance\@tempdima -\paperheight
+  \ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
+    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
+    \@memerror{\protect\paperheight\space and/or 
+                        \protect\trimtop\space 
+                        are too large for \protect\stockheight\space
+                        by \the\@tempdima}%
+                       {\@ehd}
+  \fi
+  \@tempdima = \paperheight
+  \advance\@tempdima -\uppermargin
+  \advance\@tempdima -\textheight
+  \advance\@tempdima -\lowermargin
+  \ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
+    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
+    \@memerror{\protect\uppermargin\space and/or 
+                        \protect\textheight\space and/or 
+                        \protect\lowermargin\space 
+                        are too large for \protect\paperheight\space
+                        by \the\@tempdima}%
+                       {\@ehd}
+  \fi
+  \@tempdima = \uppermargin
+  \advance\@tempdima -\headheight
+  \advance\@tempdima -\headsep
+  \ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
+    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
+    \@memerror{\protect\headheight\space and/or 
+                        \protect\headsep\space 
+                        are too large for \protect\uppermargin\space
+                        by \the\@tempdima}%
+                       {\@ehd}
+  \fi
+  \@tempdima = \lowermargin
+  \advance\@tempdima -\footskip
+  \ifdim\@tempdima<\z@
+    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
+    \@memerror{\protect\footskip
+                        is too large for \protect\lowermargin\space
+                        by \the\@tempdima}%
+                       {\@ehd}
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fixthelayout}
+%   Calculate the normal
+% \LaTeX{} page layout parameter values. We'll do the heights first
+% as they are independent of the number of columns and the side printing.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Added \cs{fixthelayout}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\fixthelayout}{%
+  \topmargin = \trimtop
+    \advance\topmargin \uppermargin
+    \advance\topmargin -\headsep
+    \advance\topmargin -\headheight
+    \advance\topmargin -1in\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Now the |\oddsidemargin|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \oddsidemargin = \stockwidth
+    \advance\oddsidemargin -\trimedge
+    \advance\oddsidemargin -\paperwidth
+    \advance\oddsidemargin \spinemargin
+    \advance\oddsidemargin -1in\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    And the |\evensidemargin|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \evensidemargin = \trimedge
+    \advance\evensidemargin \foremargin
+    \advance\evensidemargin -1in\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%    Set the values to the nearest whole point.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@settopoint\textwidth
+  \@settopoint\oddsidemargin
+  \@settopoint\evensidemargin
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\typeoutlayout}
+% Why not type out the calculated versions of the designed values?
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Added \cs{typeoutlayout}}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/25}{Added column info to \cs{typeoutlayout}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\typeoutlayout}{%
+  \typeout{}
+  \typeout{******************************************************}
+  \typeout{Stock height and width: 
+                 \the\stockheight\space by \the\stockwidth}
+  \typeout{Top and edge trims: 
+                 \the\trimtop\space and \the\trimedge}
+  \typeout{Page height and width: 
+                 \the\paperheight\space by \the\paperwidth}
+  \typeout{Text height and width: 
+                 \the\textheight\space by \the\textwidth}
+  \typeout{Spine and edge margins: 
+                 \the\spinemargin\space and \the\foremargin}
+  \typeout{Upper and lower margins: 
+                 \the\uppermargin\space and \the\lowermargin}
+  \typeout{Headheight and headsep: 
+                 \the\headheight\space and \the\headsep}
+  \typeout{Footskip: 
+                 \the\footskip}
+  \typeout{Columnsep and columnseprule: 
+                 \the\columnsep\space and \the\columnseprule}
+  \typeout{Marginparsep and marginparwidth: 
+                 \the\marginparsep\space and \the\marginparwidth}
+  \typeout{******************************************************}
+  \typeout{}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\checkandfixthelayout}
+% This macro checks and fixes the layout, and reports the result.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Replaced \cs{fixpagelayout} by \cs{checkandfixthelayout}}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Partitioned \cs{checkandfixthelayout}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\checkandfixthelayout}{%
+  \checkthelayout
+  \fixthelayout
+  \typeoutlayout}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fixpdflayout}
+% \begin{macro}{\fixdvipslayout}
+% Page layout with pdf\LaTeX{} seems a bit iffy.
+% At the suggestion of Lars Madsen, help with 
+% setting viewer (e.g., ghostview)
+% window sizes for dvi/ps. \cs{fixdvipslayout} does for \file{dvi} output
+% as \cs{fixpdflayout} does for \file{pdf} output.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{fixpdflayout} (from patch v1.6)}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/01}{Added \cs{fixdvipslayout} }
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\fixpdflayout}{%
+  \pdfpageheight=\the\stockheight
+  \pdfpagewidth=\the\stockwidth
+  \ifdim\pdfvorigin=0pt\pdfvorigin=1in\fi
+  \ifdim\pdfhorigin=0pt\pdfhorigin=1in\fi}
+\newcommand*{\fixdvipslayout}{%
+  \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\the\stockwidth,\the\stockheight}}}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \ifpdf
+    \ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne
+      \fixdvipslayout
+    \else
+      \fixpdflayout
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \fixdvipslayout
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% With a landscape document when going \texttt{latex -> dvips} the 
+% resulting \file{.ps} file
+% may apear upside down in \texttt{ghostview}. If this happens, try putting
+% the following in the document preamble:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \addtodef{\fixdvipslayout}{}{%
+%   \special{!TeXDict begin /landplus90{true}store end }}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% See \texttt{http://www.radicaleye.com.dvips.html} (DVIPS Home Page) for
+% an explanation.
+%
+%  Some other potential specials for PostScript printing may be 
+% (at least for an HP 5SiMx LaserJet duplex printer):
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \special{!TeXDict begin <</Duplex true>> 
+%                         setpagedevice end} % duplex
+% \special{!TeXDict begin <</Tumble true>> 
+%                         setpagedevice end} % short side binding
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\typeoutstandardlayout}
+% Types out the current values of the standard page layout parameters.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/25}{Added \cs{typeoutstandardlayout}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\typeoutstandardlayout}{%
+  \typeout{}
+  \typeout{******************************************************}
+  \typeout{Page height and width: 
+                \the\paperheight\space by \the\paperwidth}
+  \typeout{Text height and width: 
+               \the\textheight\space by \the\textwidth}
+  \typeout{Oddside and evenside margins: 
+                \the\oddsidemargin\space and \the\evensidemargin}
+  \typeout{Topmargin and footskip: 
+                \the\topmargin\space and \the\footskip}
+  \typeout{Headheight and headsep: 
+                \the\headheight\space and \the\headsep}
+  \typeout{Columnsep and columnseprule: 
+                \the\columnsep\space and \the\columnseprule}
+  \typeout{Marginparsep and marginparwidth: 
+                \the\marginparsep\space and \the\marginparwidth}
+  \typeout{******************************************************}
+  \typeout{}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Float placement parameters}
+%
+%
+% All float parameters are given default values in the \LaTeX{}
+% kernel. For this reason counters only need to be set with
+% |\setcounter| and other parameters are set using |\renewcommand|.
+%
+% \paragraph{Limits for the placement of floating objects}
+%
+% The settings here make it easier to place floats than with the
+% standard classes.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@topnumber}
+%    The \Lcount{topnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
+%    floats that can appear on the top of a text page (classically 2)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{topnumber}{3}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\topfraction}
+%    This indicates the maximum part of a text page that can be
+%    occupied by floats at the top (classically 0.7).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\topfraction}{.85}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@bottomnumber}
+%    The \Lcount{bottomnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
+%    floats that can appear on the bottom of a text page (classically 1).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bottomfraction}
+%    This indicates the maximum part of a text page that can be
+%    occupied by floats at the bottom (classically 0.3).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{.5}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@totalnumber}
+%    This indicates the maximum number of floats that can appear on
+%    any text page (classically 3).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textfraction}
+%    This indicates the minimum part of a text page that has to be
+%    occupied by text (classically 0.2).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\textfraction}{.1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\floatpagefraction}
+%    This indicates the minimum part of a page that has to be
+%    occupied by floating objects before a `float page' is 
+%    produced (classically 0.5).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{.7}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@dbltopnumber}
+%    The \Lcount{dbltopnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
+%    two column floats that can appear on the top of a two column text
+%    page (classically 2).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{3}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dbltopfraction}
+%    This indicates the maximum part of a two column text page that
+%    can be occupied by two column floats at the top (classically 0.7).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{.85}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatpagefraction}
+%    This indicates the minimum part of a page that has to be
+%    occupied by two column wide floating objects before a `float
+%    page' is produced (classically 0.5).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\dblfloatpagefraction}{.7}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Page Styles}
+%
+%    The page style \pstyle{foo} is defined by defining the command
+%    |\ps@foo|.   This command should make only local definitions.
+%    There should be no stray spaces in the definition, since they
+%    could lead to mysterious extra spaces in the output.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@evenhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\@oddhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\@evenfoot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@oddfoot}
+%    The |\ps@...| command defines the macros |\@oddhead|,
+%    |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|, and |\@evenfoot| to define the running
+%    heads and feet---e.g., |\@oddhead| is the macro to produce the
+%    contents of the heading box for odd-numbered pages.  It is called
+%    inside an |\hbox| of width |\textwidth|.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Marking conventions}
+%
+%    To make headings determined by the sectioning commands, the page
+%    style defines the commands |\chaptermark|, |\sectionmark|,
+%    \ldots,\\
+%     where |\chaptermark{|\meta{TEXT}|}| is called by
+%    |\chapter| to set a mark, and so on.
+%
+%    The |\...mark| commands and the |\...head| macros are defined
+%    with the help of the following macros.  (All the |\...mark|
+%    commands should be initialized to no-ops.)
+%
+%    \LaTeX{} extends \TeX's |\mark| facility by producing two kinds
+%    of marks, a `left' and a `right' mark, using the following
+%    commands:
+%    \begin{flushleft}
+%     |\markboth{|\meta{LEFT}|}{|\meta{RIGHT}|}|: Adds both marks.
+%
+%     |\markright{|\meta{RIGHT}|}|: Adds a `right' mark.
+%
+%     |\leftmark|: Used in the |\@oddhead|, |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|
+%                  or |\@evenfoot| macros, it gets the current `left'
+%                  mark.  |\leftmark| works like \TeX's |\botmark|
+%                  command.
+%
+%     |\rightmark|: Used in the |\@oddhead|, |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|
+%                   or  |\@evenfoot| macros, it gets the current
+%                   `right' mark. |\rightmark| works like \TeX's
+%                   |\firstmark| command.
+%    \end{flushleft}
+%
+%    The marking commands work reasonably well for right marks
+%    `numbered within' left marks--e.g., the left mark is changed by a
+%    |\chapter| command and the right mark is changed by a |\section|
+%    command.  However, it does produce somewhat anomalous results if
+%    two |\markboth|'s occur on the same page.
+%
+%
+%    Commands like |\tableofcontents| that should set the marks in some
+%    page styles use a |\@mkboth| command, which is |\let| by the
+%    pagestyle command (|\ps@...|)  to |\markboth| for setting the
+%    heading or to |\@gobbletwo| to do nothing.
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Defining the page styles}
+%
+%    This class provides a set of commands for the user to define new
+% pagestyles. Essentially defining a pagestyle consists of defining the
+% macros |\@evenhead{}|, |\@oddhead{}|, |\@evenfoot{}|, and |\@oddfoot{}|.
+% For this class, each header and footer is treated as three parts: a left,
+% center, and right part. In this case, defining a pagestyle consists of
+% specifying these 12 portions of the running headers and footers. The
+% width of the headers/footers may also be specified, rules may be drawn
+% below the headers and/or above the footers, and the complete header and/or
+% footer may be offset with respect to the textblock when the width is not
+% the same as the textwidth.
+%
+%    In the following \meta{style} is the name of a pagestyle being defined
+% (e.g., |ruled|).
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makeevenhead}
+% The command 
+% |\makeevenhead{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{left}|}{|\meta{center}|}{|\meta{right}|}|
+% specifies that the left, center and right portions of the even header for
+% pagestyle \meta{style} are defined as the other thre arguments, respectiveley.
+% Internally it defines the commands |\styleeheadl|, |\styleeheadc| and
+% |\styleeheadr| to be \meta{left}, \meta{center} and \meta{right} respectively.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makeevenhead}[4]{%
+  \@namedef{#1eheadl}{#2}
+  \@namedef{#1eheadc}{#3}
+  \@namedef{#1eheadr}{#4}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makeoddhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\makeevenfoot}
+% \begin{macro}{\makeoddfoot}
+%  These three macros are similar to |\makeevenhead| except that they are
+% for the oddhead, evenfoot and oddfoot.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makeoddhead}[4]{%
+  \@namedef{#1oheadl}{#2}
+  \@namedef{#1oheadc}{#3}
+  \@namedef{#1oheadr}{#4}
+}
+\newcommand{\makeevenfoot}[4]{%
+  \@namedef{#1efootl}{#2}
+  \@namedef{#1efootc}{#3}
+  \@namedef{#1efootr}{#4}
+}
+\newcommand{\makeoddfoot}[4]{%
+  \@namedef{#1ofootl}{#2}
+  \@namedef{#1ofootc}{#3}
+  \@namedef{#1ofootr}{#4}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makerunningwidth}
+%  The macro |\makerunningwidth{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{length}|}| sets the
+% width of the headers and footers of pagestyle \meta{style} to be \meta{length}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makerunningwidth}[2]{%
+  \@namedef{#1runwidth}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalrulethickness}
+% \begin{macro}{\footruleheight}
+% \begin{macro}{\footruleskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\makeheadrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\makefootrule}
+% |\normalrulethickness| is the thickness of a normal horizontal 
+% or vertical rule. 
+% |\footruleheight| is the height of a normal rule above a footer (actually zero).
+% |\footruleskip| is a distance sufficient to ensure that a foot rule 
+% will appear between the bottom of the textblock and above any actual footer.
+%
+% (There was a \ctt{} thread \textit{ngerman, fancyhdr and \cs{footrulewidth} --- bug?}
+%  in December 2002 that bears on the definitions below).
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Make \cs{normalrulethickness} a length, 
+%                            not a macro (patch 1.1)}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Initialise \cs{footruleheight} to 0pt, not
+%                            \cs{z@skip} (patch 1.1)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\normalrulethickness}
+  \setlength{\normalrulethickness}{0.4pt}
+\newcommand{\footruleheight}{0pt}
+\newcommand{\footruleskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The macro |\makeheadrule{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{height}|}|
+% specifies the width and height of the header rule for \meta{style}. 
+%
+% Similarly
+% |\makefootrule{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{skip}|}|
+% specifies the width, height and skip for the footrule.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makeheadrule}[3]{%
+  \@namedef{#1headrule}{%
+    \hrule\@width #2\@height #3 \vskip-#3}
+}
+\newcommand{\makefootrule}[4]{%
+  \@namedef{#1footrule}{%
+    \vskip-#4\vskip-#3
+    \hrule\@width #2\@height #3 \vskip #4}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%  
+% \begin{macro}{\makeheadposition}
+% |\makeheadposition{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{eheadpos}|}{|\meta{oheadpos}|}{|\meta{efootpos}|}{|\meta{ofootpos}|}|
+% specifies the horizontal positioning of the even and odd headers and footers,
+% respectively, 
+% for the pagestyle \meta{style}. Each of the \meta{...pos} arguments may be
+% either |flushleft|, |center| or |flushright|, with the obvious meanings.
+% An empty argument (or an unrecognised one) is equivalent to |center|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makeheadposition}[5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do the even head position first.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \nametest{flushleft}{#2}
+  \ifsamename
+    \@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\hss}
+  \else
+    \nametest{flushright}{#2}
+    \ifsamename
+      \@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\relax}
+    \else
+      \@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\hss}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And similarly for the odd head and even \& odd footers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}   
+  \nametest{flushleft}{#3}
+  \ifsamename
+    \@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\hss}
+  \else
+    \nametest{flushright}{#3}
+    \ifsamename
+      \@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\relax}
+    \else
+      \@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\hss}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \nametest{flushleft}{#4}
+  \ifsamename
+    \@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\hss}
+  \else
+    \nametest{flushright}{#4}
+    \ifsamename
+      \@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\relax}
+    \else
+      \@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\hss}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \nametest{flushleft}{#5}
+  \ifsamename
+    \@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\hss}
+  \else
+    \nametest{flushright}{#5}
+    \ifsamename
+      \@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\relax}
+    \else
+      \@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\hss}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makepsmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\makepshook}
+% The macro |\makepsmarks{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{code}|}| specifies that
+% \meta{code} is the definition of the hook for pagestyle \meta{style}.
+% |\makepshook| is a deprecated version of |\makepsmarks|.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Added \cs{makepsmarks} and deprecated 
+%                                  \cs{makepshook}}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/14}{Deleted \cs{makepshook}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makepsmarks}[2]{\@namedef{#1pshook}{#2}}
+%%%% \newcommand{\makepshook}[2]{%
+%%%%   \@memwarn{\protect\makepshook\space is deprecated.\MessageBreak
+%%%%                         Use \protect\makepsmarks\space instead}
+%%%%   \@namedef{#1pshook}{#2}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mhe@dreset}
+% To cater for potential baselineskip changes, such as \verb?\linespread{2}?,
+% we have to ensure they don't percolate into the header/footer.
+% (See CTT thread \textit{memoir + linespread}, 2004/02/11)
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added \cs{m@mhe@dreset}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\m@mhe@dreset}{\def\baselinestretch{1}\normalsize}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makepagestyle}
+%  At last we can put everything together for defining a new pagestyle,
+% via the macro |\makepagestyle{|\meta{style}|}| which initially sets up 
+% a new pagestyle \meta{style} corresponding the the \LaTeX{} |empty|
+% pagestyle. The prior macros can then be used to make modifications
+% to the style.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Now 2 stage process for defining \cs{@evenhead}
+%                            and friends}
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added \cs{m@mhe@dreset} at several points in
+%                             \cs{makepagestyle} (from patch 2.1)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makepagestyle}[1]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% First define the macro |\ps@style|, which in turn defines the macros
+% |\@evenhead|, |\@oddhead|, |\@evenfoot| and |\@oddfoot|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{ps@#1}{%
+    \@namedef{#1@evenhead}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The code for the definition of |\@evenhead| and friends is based on code
+% from Piet van Oostrum's \Lpack{fancyhdr} package~\cite{FANCYHDR}. The three
+% parts of the header are put into parboxes, with fills between them, and
+% the whole lot is put into a box the width of the header. Fillers are put
+% before and after the main box which control the header position.
+%
+% First the left filler which is either |\relax| or |\hss|, and then
+% start the main box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \@nameuse{#1evenhpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
+        \vbox{\hbox{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The left part of the header.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \raggedright\@nameuse{#1eheadl}\strut}}\hfill
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The center part of the header.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+              \parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \centering\@nameuse{#1eheadc}\strut}\hfill
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The right part of the header.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1eheadr}\strut}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, the header rule and finish with the right filler, which
+% is either |\relax| or |\hss|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@nameuse{#1headrule}}}\@nameuse{#1evenhpr}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The code for the |\@oddhead|, |\@evenfoot| and |\@oddfoot| follows
+% a similar pattern. Here is |\@oddhead|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@namedef{#1@oddhead}{%
+      \@nameuse{#1oddhpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
+        \vbox{\hbox{%
+        \rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \raggedright\@nameuse{#1oheadl}\strut}}\hfill
+              \parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \centering\@nameuse{#1oheadc}\strut}\hfill
+        \llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1oheadr}\strut}}}%
+        \@nameuse{#1headrule}}}\@nameuse{#1oddhpr}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And |\@evenfoot|. For the footers the rules come \emph{before} any foot
+% entries.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@namedef{#1@evenfoot}{%
+      \@nameuse{#1evenfpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
+        \vbox{\@nameuse{#1footrule}\hbox{%
+        \rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \raggedright\@nameuse{#1efootl}\strut}}\hfill
+              \parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \centering\@nameuse{#1efootc}\strut}\hfill
+        \llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1efootr}\strut}}}%
+        }}\@nameuse{#1evenfpr}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Lastly the |\@oddfoot|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@namedef{#1@oddfoot}{%
+      \@nameuse{#1oddfpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
+        \vbox{\@nameuse{#1footrule}\hbox{%
+        \rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \raggedright\@nameuse{#1ofootl}\strut}}\hfill
+              \parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \centering\@nameuse{#1ofootc}\strut}\hfill
+        \llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
+          \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1ofootr}\strut}}}%
+        }}\@nameuse{#1oddfpr}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now we define |\@evenhead| etc., in terms of |#1@evenhead|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\@evenhead{\@nameuse{#1@evenhead}}
+    \def\@oddhead{\@nameuse{#1@oddhead}}
+    \def\@evenfoot{\@nameuse{#1@evenfoot}}
+    \def\@oddfoot{\@nameuse{#1@oddfoot}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% To finish off the definition of |\ps@style|, add in a hook which can be
+% defined so that it adds additional code, if required.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@nameuse{#1pshook}
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The final part of setting up the new pagestyle is defining all the macros
+% called by |\ps@style|, and giving them default values. Make the headers
+% and footers empty.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \makeevenhead{#1}{}{}{}
+  \makeoddhead{#1}{}{}{}
+  \makeevenfoot{#1}{}{}{}
+  \makeoddfoot{#1}{}{}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Make the headers/footers the same width as the |\textwidth|, center
+% them, and ensure
+% that the rules have zero height so that they will be invisible.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \makerunningwidth{#1}{\textwidth}
+  \makeheadposition{#1}{}{}{}{}
+  \makeheadrule{#1}{\textwidth}{0pt}
+  \makefootrule{#1}{\textwidth}{\footruleheight}{\footruleskip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, there is no addtional code needed, so make the hook empty, and
+% we are done.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \makepsmarks{#1}{}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aliaspagestyle}
+% The command |\aliaspagestyle{|\meta{aliasl}|}{|\meta{original}|}|
+% defines the \meta{alias} pagestyle to be an alias for the
+% \meta{original} pagestyle.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\aliaspagestyle}[2]{%
+  \@namedef{ps@#1}{\@nameuse{ps@#2}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\copypagestyle}
+% The command |\copypagestyle{|\meta{new}|}{|\meta{original}|}|
+% defines the \meta{new} pagestyle to be a copy of the
+% \meta{original} pagestyle.
+%
+% It first makes the \meta{new} (empty) pagestyle then defines the internals
+% in terms of the \meta{original} internals.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{copypagestyle}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\copypagestyle}[2]{%
+  \makepagestyle{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do the headers and footers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \makeevenhead{#1}{\@nameuse{#2eheadl}}%
+               {\@nameuse{#2eheadc}}{\@nameuse{#2eheadr}}%
+  \makeoddhead{#1}{\@nameuse{#2oheadl}}%
+               {\@nameuse{#2oheadc}}{\@nameuse{#2oheadr}}%
+  \makeevenfoot{#1}{\@nameuse{#2efootl}}%
+               {\@nameuse{#2efootc}}{\@nameuse{#2efootr}}%
+  \makeoddfoot{#1}{\@nameuse{#2ofootl}}%
+              {\@nameuse{#2ofootc}}{\@nameuse{#2ofootr}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \makerunningwidth{#1}{\@nameuse{#2runwidth}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Specify the |\headposition|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\@nameuse{#2evenhpl}}%
+  \@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\@nameuse{#2oddhpl}}%
+  \@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\@nameuse{#2evenfpl}}%
+  \@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\@nameuse{#2oddfpl}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Specify the head and foot rules.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{#1headrule}{\@nameuse{#2headrule}}%
+  \@namedef{#1footrule}{\@nameuse{#2footrule}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And pick up the hook.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \makepsmarks{#1}{\@nameuse{#2pshook}}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifonlyfloats}
+% |\ifonlyfloats|\marg{yes}\marg{no} processes \meta{yes} if the macro is
+% called on a page consisting only of floats, otherwise \meta{no} is 
+% processed. |\if@fcolmade| is specified in \file{ltoutput.dtx}.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/14}{Added \cs{ifonlyfloats}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ifonlyfloats}[2]{\if@fcolmade #1\else #2\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mergepagefloatstyle}
+% |\mergepagefloatstyle|\marg{style}\marg{textstyle}\marg{floatstyle}
+% makes a new page style \meta{style} that is \meta{textstyle} on normal
+% pages but uses \meta{floatstyle} on float-only pages. Both \meta{textstyle}
+% and \meta{floatstyle} must have been previously defined.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Added \cs{mergepagefloatstyle}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mergepagefloatstyle}[3]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure that the two styles have been called, otherwise we get some
+% undefined errors.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@nameuse{ps@#3} \@nameuse{ps@#2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Specify the pagestyle's headers and footers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{ps@#1}{
+  \def\@evenhead{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@evenhead}}%
+                {\@nameuse{#2@evenhead}}}
+  \def\@oddhead{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@oddhead}}%
+               {\@nameuse{#2@oddhead}}}
+  \def\@evenfoot{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@evenfoot}}%
+                {\@nameuse{#2@evenfoot}}}
+  \def\@oddfoot{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@oddfoot}}%
+               {\@nameuse{#2@oddfoot}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the hook to the \meta{textstyle} on the assumption that that is
+% more complex that required for a float page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{#1pshook}{\@nameuse{#2pshook}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% That's it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    The pagestyles \pstyle{empty} and \pstyle{plain} are defined 
+%    in \file{latex.dtx}. However, I will redefine them here, just in
+% case someone takes a fancy to modifying them.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@empty}
+% The \pstyle{empty} pagestyle is simple, it's just what we get when
+% we call |\makepagestyle|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makepagestyle{empty}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@plain}
+% The \pstyle{plain} pagestyle is also simple, it just puts the
+% page number at the bottom middle of the page.
+% We call |\makepagestyle{plain}| and then adjust as required.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makepagestyle{plain}
+  \makeevenfoot{plain}{}{\thepage}{}
+  \makeoddfoot{plain}{}{\thepage}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
+%    The \pstyle{headings} pagestyle behaves differently for
+% twosided and onesided printing. This is a rewrite of the
+% standard style.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@headings}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twoside
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The footer is empty and the header contains the page number and
+% one of the marks.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \makepagestyle{headings}
+    \makepsmarks{headings}{%
+      \let\@mkboth\markboth
+      \def\chaptermark##1{%
+        \markboth{\MakeUppercase{%
+          \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+            \if@mainmatter
+              \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
+            \fi
+          \fi
+          ##1}}{}}%
+      \def\tocmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\contentsname}}{}}%
+      \def\lofmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\listfigurename}}{}}%
+      \def\lotmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\listtablename}}{}}%
+      \def\bibmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\bibname}}{}}%
+      \def\indexmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\indexname}}{}}%
+      \def\sectionmark##1{%
+        \markright{\MakeUppercase{%
+          \ifnum \c@secnumdepth > \z@
+            \thesection. \ %
+          \fi
+          ##1}}}%
+    }
+    \makeevenhead{headings}{\thepage}{}{\slshape\leftmark}
+    \makeoddhead{headings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
+\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For one sided printing even and odd pages are treated the same,
+% so no need to bother with the evenhead, and
+% just the |\rightmark| is used.     
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \makepagestyle{headings}
+    \makepsmarks{headings}{%
+      \let\@mkboth\markboth
+      \def\chaptermark##1{%
+        \markright{\MakeUppercase{%
+          \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+            \if@mainmatter
+              \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
+            \fi
+          \fi
+          ##1}}}%
+      \def\tocmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\contentsname}}}%
+      \def\lofmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\listfigurename}}}%
+      \def\lotmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\listtablename}}}%
+      \def\bibmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\bibname}}}%
+      \def\indexmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\indexname}}}%
+    }
+    \makeoddhead{headings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings}
+%    The \pstyle{myheadings} page style is simpler because the user
+% has to specify the contents using |\markboth| and |\markright|
+% commands. This is the definition used in the standard classes.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@myheadings}}
+%    \begin{verbatim}}
+% \newcommand{\ps@myheadings}{%
+%   \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+%   \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil{\slshape\leftmark}}%
+%   \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
+%   \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+%   \let\chaptermark\@gobble
+%   \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+% }
+% \end{verbatim}
+% Translating that into our terms we get:
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Changed the code for creating the myheadings pagestyle}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Further change to myheadings pagestyle code}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makepagestyle{myheadings}
+  \makepsmarks{myheadings}{%
+    \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+    \let\chaptermark\@gobble
+    \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+    \def\tocmark{}%
+    \def\lofmark{}%
+    \def\lotmark{}%
+    \def\bibmark{}%
+    \def\indexmark{}%
+  }
+  \makeevenhead{myheadings}{\thepage}{}{\slshape\leftmark}
+  \makeoddhead{myheadings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (Kai von Fintel (\texttt{fintel@mit.edu}) emailed me on 2003/02/24
+% saying that the original |\let\tocmark\@gobble| in the myheadings
+% pagestyle did nasty things
+% to the ToC, etc. Now using |\def\tocmark{}|.)
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@cleared}
+%  The standard classes use the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle for the first page
+% of a chapter. This class uses the \pstyle{chapter} instead, which is
+% aliased to \pstyle{plain}. Similarly for parts. 
+% Further, |\cleardoublepage| uses whatever
+% pagestyle is in effect for the empty verso page. I find that this
+% looks odd if the header contains a chapter name. This class uses
+% the \pstyle{cleared} pagestyle in this case. I have aliased this
+% to \pstyle{empty}; the \pstyle{plain} would be another reasonable choice.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\aliaspagestyle{chapter}{plain}
+\aliaspagestyle{part}{plain}
+\aliaspagestyle{cleared}{empty}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
+% A slight adjustment to the kernel definition to set a pagestyle.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
+  \hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
+  \newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@ruled}
+%    Partly to show how it is done, the class provides a \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
+% In this style the headers and footers are the same width as the textblock,
+% there is a rule under the header, page numbers are set in the footers
+% at the outside of the page. Even page headers have the chapter number
+% and title at the left, and odd page headers have the section title
+% at the right.
+%
+%    Start by making the (empty) \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makepagestyle{ruled}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% There is no need to change the default width (which is the |\textwidth|),
+% nor the default positions (centered),
+% nor to make the footrule visible. We do, though, have to put the page
+% numbers into the footers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makeevenfoot{ruled}{\thepage}{}{}
+\makeoddfoot{ruled}{}{}{\thepage}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Make the header rule visible and equal to the |\textwidth|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makeheadrule{ruled}{\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ruledmarks}
+% We have to make sure that the |\chapter| and |\section| commands make
+% the appropriate marks for use in the headers. We use the hook for this.
+% Note that contrary to normal \LaTeX{} practice, the titles are not
+% automatically upper-cased. The marks for the tocbibinds also need adjusting.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{@ruledmarks} to cater for tocbibind}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@ruledmarks}{%
+  \let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \def\chaptermark##1{%
+    \markboth{%
+      \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+        \if@mainmatter
+          \thechapter. \ %
+        \fi
+      \fi
+      ##1}{}}
+  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright{##1}}
+  \def\tocmark{\markboth{\contentsname}{}}
+  \def\lofmark{\markboth{\listfigurename}{}}
+  \def\lotmark{\markboth{\listtablename}{}}
+  \def\bibmark{\markboth{\bibname}{}}
+  \def\indexmark{\markboth{\indexname}{}}
+}
+\makepsmarks{ruled}{\@ruledmarks}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We can now define the even page header which is to have the chapter title
+% at the left. As the chapter mark did no upper-casing we will print it
+% using small caps, but just use the normal font for section title on
+% the odd page header.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makeevenhead{ruled}{\scshape\leftmark}{}{}
+\makeoddhead{ruled}{}{}{\rightmark}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% This is all that we need to do for the \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@Ruled}
+%    Also define a \pstyle{Ruled} pagestyle similar to \pstyle{ruled} except that the
+% headers and footers are 10\% wider than the textblock, sticking out
+% into the fore edge.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makepagestyle{Ruled}
+\makerunningwidth{Ruled}{1.1\textwidth}
+\makeheadposition{Ruled}{flushright}{flushleft}{flushright}{flushleft}
+\makeevenfoot{Ruled}{\thepage}{}{}
+\makeoddfoot{Ruled}{}{}{\thepage}
+\makeheadrule{Ruled}{1.1\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
+\makepsmarks{Ruled}{\@ruledmarks}
+\makeevenhead{Ruled}{\scshape\leftmark}{}{}
+\makeoddhead{Ruled}{}{}{\rightmark}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\headwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@companion}
+% A \pstyle{companion} pagestyle like the one in the 
+% \textit{\LaTeX{} Companion} series.
+% We need the |\headwidth| length for this.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@companion}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\headwidth}
+
+\makepagestyle{companion}
+\setlength{\headwidth}{\textwidth}
+  \addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparsep}
+  \addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparwidth}
+\makerunningwidth{companion}{\headwidth}
+\makeheadrule{companion}{\headwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
+\makeheadposition{companion}{flushright}{flushleft}{}{}
+\makepsmarks{companion}{%
+  \let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \def\chaptermark##1{\markboth{##1}{##1}}    % left mark & right marks
+  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright{%
+    \ifnum \c@secnumdepth>\z@
+      \thesection. \ %
+    \fi
+    ##1}}
+  \def\tocmark{\markboth{\contentsname}{\contentsname}}
+  \def\lofmark{\markboth{\listfigurename}{\listfigurename}}
+  \def\lotmark{\markboth{\listtablename}{\listtablename}}
+  \def\bibmark{\markboth{\bibname}{\bibname}}
+  \def\indexmark{\markboth{\indexname}{\indexname}}
+}
+\makeevenhead{companion}{\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}{}%
+                        {\normalfont\bfseries\leftmark}
+\makeoddhead{companion}{\normalfont\bfseries\rightmark}{}%
+                       {\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Page numbering}
+%
+%    The kernel includes the |\pagenumbering| command for setting the
+% style (arabic, roman, etc.) of the page numbers, and at the same
+% time it resets the page counter. I want a version that resets the style
+% but not the number\footnote{Added to meet a request by Daniel Richard G.
+% (\texttt{skunk@mit.edu}) September 2001.}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering*}
+% |\pagenumbering{|\meta{style}|}| is the normal version whereas
+% the starred version does not reset the counter.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{pagenumbering} and \cs{pagenumbering*} }
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\pagenumbering}{%
+  \@ifstar{\@smempnum}{\@mempnum}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\@smempnum}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@smempnum}[1]{%
+  \gdef\thepage{\csname @#1\endcsname \c@page}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mempnum}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@mempnum}[1]{%
+  \@smempnum{#1}\global\c@page \@ne}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@storedpagenumber}
+% A counter to store the page number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{storedpagenumber}
+  \setcounter{storedpagenumber}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\savepagenumber}
+% \begin{macro}{\restoregenumber}
+% |\savepagenumber| saves the current page number and |\restorepagenumber|
+% sets the page number to the stored value.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/24}{Added \cs{savepagenumber} and \cs{restorepagenumber}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\savepagenumber}{\global\c@storedpagenumber \c@page}
+\newcommand{\restorepagenumber}{\global\c@page \c@storedpagenumber}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Titles and abstracts}
+%
+% \subsection{Titles}
+%
+%    For books the title is usually designed specifically for the particular
+% work, so originally the class did not provide a |\maketitle| command or 
+% any of the |\title| and other commands that normally go along with this. 
+%    After some thought I decided to add in the code from the 
+% \Lpack{titling} package~\cite{TITLING}. However, in this case life
+% is a bit simpler as there is no pre-existing class code.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added titling code}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pretitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bspretitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\posttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bsposttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\preauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bspreauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\postauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bspostauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\predate}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bspredate}
+% \begin{macro}{\postdate}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bspostdate}
+%    To provide some flexibilty in the titling style of the document,
+% user level commands are provided that can be changed to reconfigure
+% the appearance resulting from |\maketitle|. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\pretitle}[1]{\def\@bspretitle{#1}}
+\newcommand{\posttitle}[1]{\def\@bsposttitle{#1}}
+\newcommand{\preauthor}[1]{\def\@bspreauthor{#1}}
+\newcommand{\postauthor}[1]{\def\@bspostauthor{#1}}
+\newcommand{\predate}[1]{\def\@bspredate{#1}}
+\newcommand{\postdate}[1]{\def\@bspostdate{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% These are defined initially
+% to mimic the normal \LaTeX{} style.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \pretitle{\begin{center}\LARGE}
+  \posttitle{\par\end{center}\vskip 0.5em}
+  \preauthor{\begin{center}
+    \large \lineskip .5em%
+    \begin{tabular}[t]{c}}
+  \postauthor{\end{tabular}\par\end{center}}
+  \predate{\begin{center}\large}
+  \postdate{\par\end{center}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehooka}
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookb}
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookc}
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookd}
+% The four hooks which will be called by |\maketitle|. These are initially
+% vacuous.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\maketitlehooka}{}
+\newcommand{\maketitlehookb}{}
+\newcommand{\maketitlehookc}{}
+\newcommand{\maketitlehookd}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkseries}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bsmarkseries}
+% \begin{macro}{\symbolthanksmark}
+%  These are for specifying the kind of series for thanks markers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\thanksmarkseries}[1]{%
+  \def\@bsmarkseries{\renewcommand{\thefootnote}%
+                     {\@nameuse{#1}{footnote}}}}
+\newcommand{\symbolthanksmark}{\thanksmarkseries{\fnsymbol}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\continuousmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bscontmark}
+% These are for (non) zeroing of the footnote counter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@bscontmark}{\setcounter{footnote}{0}}
+\newcommand{\continuousmarks}{\def\@bscontmark{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanksheadextra}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bsthanksheadpre}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bsthanksheadpost}
+% These are for inserting stuff before and after a mark in the titling.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\thanksheadextra}[2]{%
+  \def\@bsthanksheadpre{#1}%
+  \def\@bsthanksheadpost{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanksfootextra}
+% These are for inserting stuff before and after a thanks mark in the 
+% footnoting.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Deprecated \cs{thanksfootextra}}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Removed \cs{thanksfootpre} and \cs{thanksfootpost}}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/14}{Removed \cs{thanksfootextra}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%% \newcommand{\thanksfootextra}[2]{%
+%%%%  \@memwarn{Use \protect\thanksmarkstyle\space instead of
+%%%%                        \protect\thanksfootextra}%
+%%%%  \def\thanksfootpre{#1}%
+%%%%  \def\thanksfootpost{#2}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanksmark}
+% This adds a thanks mark. The |\footnotemark| could have been used directly
+% but it is fragile in a moving argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\thanksmark}[1]{\footnotemark[#1]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanksgap}
+% This specifies some horizontal space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{\hspace{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tamark}
+% This stores the current definition of |\@thefnmark|. For some reason
+% using |\@thefnmark| directly only gave the last value.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tamark}{\@thefnmark}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkwidth}
+% A length determining the size of the box for typesetting
+% a thanks marker.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\thanksmarkwidth}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarksep}
+% A length determining the inset of thanks footnotes.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Replaced \cs{thanksmargin} by \cs{thanksmarksep}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\thanksmarksep}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thanksscript}
+% |\thanksscript| is a wrapper round the actual mark stuff to be typeset. 
+% The user can define this via |\thanksmarkstyle|\marg{code}.
+% The default is a superscript mark.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{thanksmarkstyle}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\thanksmarkstyle}[1]{\def\thanksscript##1{#1}}
+\thanksmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makethanksmarkhook}
+% A vacuous macro used as a hook into |\makethanksmark|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makethanksmarkhook}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanksfootmark}
+% This typesets the thanks footnote mark.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Complete rewrite of \cs{thanksfootmark}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\thanksfootmark}{%
+  \ifdim\thanksmarkwidth < \z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Negative width, mark is in the margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \llap{\hb@xt@ -\thanksmarkwidth{%
+          \hss\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
+          \hspace*{-\thanksmarkwidth}}%
+  \else
+    \ifdim\thanksmarkwidth = \z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Zero width, mark is at (inside) the margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      {\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Positive width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \hb@xt@\thanksmarkwidth{\hss\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makethanksmark}
+% This sets the general indentations for the thanks footnote, 
+% and typesets the mark. The code is a simplified version of that
+% for typesetting ToC entries.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Minor changes to \cs{makethanksmark}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makethanksmark}{%
+  \leavevmode%
+  \parindent 1em\noindent
+  \leftskip\thanksmarksep\relax
+  \advance\leftskip\thanksmarkwidth \null\nobreak\hskip-\leftskip\relax
+  \makethanksmarkhook\relax
+  \thanksfootmark}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\usethanksrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\cancelhanksrule}
+%  Simple macros that let |\footnoterule| to another rule definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\usethanksrule}{\let\footnoterule\thanksrule}
+\newcommand{\cancelthanksrule}{\let\footnoterule\@bsfootnoterule}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%    Now set up the rest of the thanks defaults, styling having been
+% done earlier.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\thanksmarkseries{fnsymbol}  % symbols
+\thanksheadextra{}{}
+\setlength{\thanksmarkwidth}{1.8em}
+\setlength{\thanksmarksep}{-\thanksmarkwidth}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\thanksrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bsfootnoterule}
+% These are saved versions of the |\footnoterule| definition as it
+% is at the end of the preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \let\thanksrule\footnoterule
+  \let\@bsfootnoterule\footnoterule
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\droptitle}
+% A titling block has |\droptitle| amount of additional vertical space 
+% above it (normally zero).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\droptitle}
+\setlength{\droptitle}{0pt}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
+% The following is a
+% modification of |\maketitle| as in the \Lpack{article}, \Lpack{report},
+% and \Lpack{book} classes. It sets the pagestyle to \pstyle{title}.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2004/01/21}{Removed the \cs{rlap} from \cs{@makefnmark}
+%                            in \cs{maketitle} so multiple \cs{thanks}
+%                            work per \cs{footnote}}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fix to remove extra blank page when
+%   \cs{maketitle} (and \cs{@maketitle}) is used within adjustwidth
+%    inside a titlingpage (mempatch v3.2)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\maketitle}{\par
+  \begingroup
+    \@bsmarkseries
+    \def\@makefnmark{\@textsuperscript{%
+       \normalfont\@bsthanksheadpre \tamark \@bsthanksheadpost}}%
+    \long\def\@makefntext##1{\makethanksmark ##1}
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \ifnum \col@number=\@ne
+        \@maketitle
+      \else
+        \twocolumn[\@maketitle]%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \ifdim\pagetotal>\z@
+        \newpage
+      \fi
+      \global\@topnum\z@
+      \@maketitle
+    \fi
+    \thispagestyle{title}\@thanks
+  \endgroup
+  \@bscontmark  %  \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+  }
+\aliaspagestyle{title}{plain}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@titlefootkill}
+% |\@mem@titlefootkill|\marg{note} Warn about footnotes in titles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@mem@titlefootkill}[1]{%
+  \@memwarn{Do not use \string\footnote\space in 
+            \string\maketitle.\MessageBreak
+            Use \protect\thanks\space instead}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle}
+% Our version of |\@maketitle|.
+% Footnotes are killed in the title; see the thread `|\title|, |\author|
+% and |\footnote| feature in memoir class', February 2003.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Killed footnote in titles (from patch v1.4)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@maketitle}{%               
+  \let\footnote\@mem@titlefootkill
+  \ifdim\pagetotal>\z@
+    \newpage
+  \fi
+  \null
+  \vskip 2em%
+        \vspace*{\droptitle}
+  \maketitlehooka
+  {\@bspretitle \@title \@bsposttitle}
+  \maketitlehookb
+  {\@bspreauthor \@author \@bspostauthor}
+  \maketitlehookc
+  {\@bspredate \@date \@bspostdate}
+  \maketitlehookd
+  \par
+  \vskip 1.5em}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{titlingpage}
+%  The |titlingpage| environment sets the pagestyle to be \pstyle{titlingpage},
+% disables the footnote rule and ensures that the page is single
+% column. At the end it switches back to twocolumn if neccessary,
+% and then starts a new page as number 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{titlingpage}%
+  {\let\footnoterule\relax
+   \let\footnotesize\small
+   \if@twocolumn
+     \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+   \else
+     \@restonecolfalse
+   \fi
+   \thispagestyle{titlingpage}%
+   \setcounter{page}{\@ne}%
+  }{%
+   \thispagestyle{titlingpage}%
+   \if@restonecol \twocolumn \fi
+   \if@twoside \cleardoublepage \else \clearpage \fi
+   \setcounter{page}{\@ne}}
+\aliaspagestyle{titlingpage}{empty}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\emptythanks}
+% This macro discards all prior |\thanks| texts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\emptythanks}{\global\let\@thanks\@empty}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\andnext}
+%  The kernel |\and| macro puts space between author's names. The
+% |\andnext| macro puts a newline between the names.
+% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{andnext}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\andnext}{%
+  \end{tabular}\\ \begin{tabular}[t]{c}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bsmtitlempty}
+%    |\@bsmtitlempty| is a helper macro to save some macro space. 
+% It empties some elements of |\maketitle|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@bsmtitlempty}{%
+  \global\let\maketitle\relax
+  \global\let\@maketitle\relax
+  \global\let\title\relax
+  \global\let\author\relax
+  \global\let\date\relax
+  \global\let\thanksmarkseries\relax
+  \global\let\thanksheadextra\relax
+  \global\let\thanksfootextra\relax
+  \global\let\thanksmark\relax
+  \global\let\thanksgap\relax
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\keepthetitle}
+% This macro undefines all the titling commands except for
+% |\thetitle|, |\theauthor| and |\thedate|.
+% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Xhanged \cs{keepthetitle} to cater for \cs{andnext}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\keepthetitle}{%
+  \@bsmtitlempty
+  \global\let\thanks\relax
+  \global\let\and\relax
+  \global\let\andnext\relax
+  \global\let\@thanks\@empty
+  \global\let\@title\@empty
+  \global\let\@author\@empty
+  \global\let\@date\@empty
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\killtitle}
+% |\killtitle| undefines the remaining macros of |\maketitle|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\killtitle}{%
+  \keepthetitle
+  \global\let\thetitle\relax
+  \global\let\theauthor\relax
+  \global\let\thedate\relax
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\thetitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\theauthor}
+% \begin{macro}{\thedate}
+%    In order to make the |\title|, etc., values available for printing
+% their definitions (in \file{ltsect.dtx}) need extending to save their 
+% arguments. We have to make sure that extraneous material,
+% like |\thanks|, is excluded from the saved texts.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Gobble footnotes in \cs{title}, \cs{author}
+%               and \cs{date} (from patch v1.4)}
+% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{andnext} handling to \cs{author}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\addtoiargdef{\title}{%
+  \begingroup\let\footnote\@gobble}{%
+  \begingroup
+    \renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
+    \renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
+    \renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
+    \protected@xdef\thetitle{#1}
+  \endgroup\endgroup}
+\addtoiargdef{\author}{%
+  \begingroup\let\footnote\@gobble}{%
+  \begingroup
+    \renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
+    \renewcommand{\and}{\unskip, }
+    \renewcommand{\andnext}{\unskip, }
+    \renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
+    \renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
+    \protected@xdef\theauthor{#1}
+  \endgroup\endgroup}
+\addtoiargdef{\date}{%
+  \begingroup\let\footnote\@gobble}{%
+  \begingroup
+    \renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
+    \renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
+    \renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
+    \protected@xdef\thedate{#1}
+  \endgroup\endgroup}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Abstracts}
+%
+% Books usually do not have abstracts, but I decided to add in the code 
+% from the \Lpack{abstract} 
+% package~\cite{ABSTRACT}.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added code for abstracts}
+%
+%
+% We just have the \Lpack{report} or \Lpack{article} style for the
+% abstract with no \Lopt{titlepage} option. The original code,
+% from \file{classes.dtx} for this is:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newenvironment{abstract}{%
+%   \if@twocolumn
+%     \section*{\abstractname}
+%   \else
+%     \small
+%     \begin{center}%
+%       {\bfseries \abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}}%%
+%     \end{center}%
+%     \quotation
+%   \fi}%
+%   {\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+%    The following |\if...| commands are for implementing various options.
+% \begin{macro}{\if@bsonecol}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifadd@bstotoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifnumber@bs}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@bsrunin}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@bsonecol
+  \@bsonecoltrue
+\newif\ifadd@bstotoc
+  \add@bstotocfalse
+\newif\ifnumber@bs
+  \number@bsfalse
+\newif\if@bsrunin
+  \@bsruninfalse
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\abstractcol}
+% \begin{macro}{\abstractintoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\abstractnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\abstractrunin}
+% These are the use-level commands for setting the options. If
+% the abstract is runin, then it must not be numbered otherwise
+% adding it to the ToC might result in something peculiar.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\abstractcol}{\@bsonecolfalse}
+\newcommand{\abstractintoc}{\add@bstotoctrue}
+\newcommand{\abstractnum}{\number@bstrue\@bsruninfalse}
+\newcommand{\abstractrunin}{\@bsrunintrue\number@bsfalse}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% 
+%    The next set of macros comprise the 
+% implementation of the |abstract| environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\abstractnamefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\abstracttextfont}
+%    These two macros are for specifying the fonts for typesetting the
+% abstract's title and text. They are initialised for the default case
+% (i.e., no class options).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\abstractnamefont}{\normalfont\small\bfseries}
+\newcommand{\abstracttextfont}{\normalfont\small}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\absnamepos}
+% \begin{macro}{\abstitleskip}
+%    |\absnamepos| specifies the environment in which the abstract's title
+% name will be typeset, and the length |\abstitleskip| is an adjustement
+% to the vertical space between the title and the abstract's text. These
+% are initialised for the default case.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\absnamepos}{center}
+\newlength{\abstitleskip} \setlength{\abstitleskip}{-0.5em}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\absleftindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\abs@leftindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\absrightindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\absparindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\absparsep}
+%    The abstract's text is typeset as a single item list, called 
+% |@bstr@ctlist|. These lengths set the left and right margin indents, the
+% paragraph indentation, and the inter-paragraph vertical space. Their
+% initial values are all class option-dependent.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{abs@leftindent} per Lars Madsen (mempatch v3.0)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\absleftindent} 
+\newdimen\abs@leftindent
+  \abs@leftindent=\leftmargin
+\newlength{\absrightindent}
+\newlength{\absparindent}
+\newlength{\absparsep}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\abslabeldelim}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bslabeldelim}
+% The contents of |\abslabeldelim| are typeset after a run-in heading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\abslabeldelim}[1]{\def\@bslabeldelim{#1}}
+\abslabeldelim{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bsrunintitle}
+% This macro typeset the run-in heading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@bsrunintitle}{%
+  \hspace*{\abstitleskip}{\abstractnamefont\abstractname\@bslabeldelim}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setup@bstract}
+%    Now arrange to set all the class option-dependent values.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Used \cs{abs@leftindent} in \cs{setup@bstract} (mempatch v3.0)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setup@bstract}{%
+  \if@twocolumn
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Values for the \Lopt{twocolumn} class option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@bsonecol 
+      \abs@leftindent=\absleftindent
+    \else
+      \abs@leftindent=\z@
+      \renewcommand{\abstractnamefont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
+      \renewcommand{\abstracttextfont}{\normalfont}
+      \renewcommand{\absnamepos}{flushleft}
+      \setlength{\abstitleskip}{-2ex}
+    \fi
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Values for the default, if not already initialised.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \abs@leftindent=\absleftindent
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, values that apply for all cases.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \setlength{\absrightindent}{\absleftindent}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\absparindent}{\parindent}
+                 \setlength{\absparsep}{\parskip}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{@bstr@ctlist}
+%    The abstract's text is typeset within the |@bstr@ctlist| list environment.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Used \cs{abs@leftindent} in \cs{@bstr@ctlist} (mempatch v3.0)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{@bstr@ctlist}{%
+  \list{}{%
+          %%\topsep        \z@
+          \partopsep     \z@
+          \listparindent \absparindent
+          \itemindent    \listparindent
+          \leftmargin    \abs@leftindent
+          \rightmargin   \absrightindent
+          \parsep        \absparsep}%
+  \item\relax}
+  {\endlist}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\put@bsintoc}
+%    This macro adds the abstract's title to the ToC. It does nothing if
+% the abstract is being numbered.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\put@bsintoc}{%
+  \ifadd@bstotoc
+    \ifnumber@bs\else
+      \phantomsection
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\abstractname}
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\num@bs}
+%    This macro generates a numbered abstract heading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\num@bs}{\chapter{\abstractname}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{abstract}
+%  At last we are in position to define the |abstract| environment. This
+% follows very much along the lines of the standard class definitions, but with
+% macros inserted at strategic points.
+%
+% The \Lopt{twocolumn} option and the default case. These use the same code
+% as any style differences are embedded in the new macros.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{abstract}{%
+  \setup@bstract
+  \if@bsrunin\else
+    \ifnumber@bs \num@bs \else
+      \begin{\absnamepos}\abstractnamefont\abstractname\end\absnamepos%
+      \vspace{\abstitleskip}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \put@bsintoc%
+  \begin{@bstr@ctlist}\if@bsrunin\@bsrunintitle\fi\abstracttextfont}%
+  {\par\end{@bstr@ctlist}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{onecolabstract}
+%  An environment for typesetting a single column abstract, 
+% particularly as the optional argument to the |\twocolumn| command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{onecolabstract}{%
+  \begin{@twocolumnfalse}\begin{abstract}}{%
+  \end{abstract}\end{@twocolumnfalse}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanks}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bs@thanks}
+%    We have to keep the contents of the |\thanks| commands as normally these
+% are emptied by the |\maketitle| command. I do this by extending the definition
+% of the |\thanks| (from \file{ltsect.dtx}) command, 
+% so that |\@bs@thanks| has a copy of the contents
+% of |\@thanks|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\addtoiargdef{\thanks}{}{%
+  \protected@xdef\@bs@thanks{\@bs@thanks
+    \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{#1}}%
+}
+\let\@bs@thanks\@empty
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\saythanks}
+% This macro typesets any |\thanks| commands \emph{after} using 
+% |onecolabstract|. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\saythanks}{\begingroup
+  \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}\@bs@thanks
+  \endgroup\global\let\@bs@thanks\@empty}
+  
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% 
+% \section{Parts, chapters and other divisions}
+%
+% \subsection{Building blocks} The definitions in this part of a
+%    class file usually make use of two internal macros, |\@startsection| and
+%    |\secdef|. To understand
+%    what is going on here, we describe their syntax.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@startsection}
+%    The macro |\@startsection| has 6 required arguments, optionally
+%    followed by  a $*$, an optional argument and a required argument:
+%
+%    |\@startsection|\meta{name}\meta{level}\meta{indent}^^A
+%                    \meta{beforeskip}\meta{afterskip}\meta{style}
+%            optional *\\
+%    \null\hphantom{\bslash @startsection}^^A
+%            |[|\meta{altheading}|]|\meta{heading}
+%
+%    It is a generic command to start a section, the arguments have
+%    the following meaning:
+%
+%    \begin{description}
+%    \item[\meta{name}] The name of the user level command, e.g.,
+%          `section'.
+%    \item[\meta{level}] A number, denoting the depth of the section
+%          --- e.g., chapter = 0, section = 1, etc.  A section number
+%          will be printed if and only if \meta{level} $<=$  the value
+%          of the \Lcount{secnumdepth} counter.
+%    \item[\meta{indent}] The indentation of the heading from the left
+%          margin
+%    \item[\meta{beforeskip}] The absolute value of this argument
+%          gives the skip to leave above the heading. If it is
+%          negative, then the paragraph indent of the text following
+%          the heading is suppressed.
+%    \item[\meta{afterskip}] If positive, this gives the skip to leave
+%          below the heading, else it gives the skip to leave to the
+%          right of a run-in heading.
+%    \item[\meta{style}] Commands to set the style of the heading.
+%    \item[$*$] When this is missing the heading is numbered and the
+%          corresponding counter is incremented.
+%    \item[\meta{altheading}] Gives an alternative heading to use in
+%          the table of contents and in the running heads. This should
+%          be present when the $*$ form is used.
+%    \item[\meta{heading}] The heading of the new section.
+%    \end{description}
+%  A sectioning command is normally defined to |\@startsection| and
+%  its first six arguments.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\secdef}
+%    The macro |\secdef| can be used when a sectioning command is
+%    defined without using |\@startsection|. It has two arguments:
+%
+%    |\secdef|\meta{unstarcmds}\meta{starcmds}
+%
+%    \begin{description}
+%    \item[\meta{unstarcmds}] Used for the normal form of a
+%          sectioning command.
+%    \item[\meta{starcmds}] Used for the $*$-form of a
+%          sectioning command.
+%    \end{description}
+%
+%    You can use |\secdef| as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       \def\chapter { ... \secdef \CMDA \CMDB }
+%       \def\CMDA    [#1]#2{ ... }  % Command to define
+%                                   % \chapter[...]{...}
+%       \def\CMDB    #1{ ... }      % Command to define
+%                                   % \chapter*{...}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@hangfrom}
+% Internally the |\@startsection| macro uses |\@hangfrom{NUM}|, where
+% |NUM| is the sectional number, to produce a hanging paragraph. That is,
+% the second and later lines of a multiline title are indented from the
+% left margin by the width of the number.
+% The definition of |\@hangfrom|, from \file{ltsect.dtx}, is:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@hangfrom#1{\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#1}}%
+%   \hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% To get a normal paragraphed title you can do: \\
+% |\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{#1}| \\
+% or as a block paragraph: \\
+% |\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{\noindent #1}| \\
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@seccntformat}
+% The |\@startsection| macro also uses |\@seccntformat{NUM}| to format
+% the section number, including the space after it. Its definition,
+% from \file{ltsect.dtx}, is
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% This is the command to change if you need different number formatting. For
+% example the combination
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\llap{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}}
+% \renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{\noindent #1}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% will hang the section numbers in the margin.
+%
+% \begin{table}
+% \centering
+% \caption{Document division levels}\label{tab:levels}
+% \begin{tabular}{lr} \hline
+% Division & Level \\ \hline
+% part          & -1 \\
+% chapter       &  0 \\
+% section       &  1 \\
+% subsection    &  2 \\
+% subsubsection &  3 \\
+% paragraph     &  4 \\
+% subparagraph  &  5 \\ 
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+%
+%     The values used for the document division levels are the same
+% as defined by the standard \LaTeX{} classes and are given in 
+% Table~\ref{tab:levels}.
+%
+% \subsection{Mark commands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\partmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\chaptermark}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectionmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsectionmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsectionmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraphmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraphmark}
+%  The default initialisations of the |\...mark| commands for use in
+% the pagestyles. Most are already defined in the kernel but they are
+% all noted here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\partmark}[1]{}
+\newcommand*{\chaptermark}[1]{}
+% \newcommand*{\sectionmark}[1]{}
+% \newcommand*{\subsectionmark}[1]{}
+% \newcommand*{\subsubsectionmark}[1]{}
+% \newcommand*{\paragraphmark}[1]{}
+% \newcommand*{\subparagraphmark}[1]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibmark}
+%  Marks for the bibliography, which may be filled with |\bibname|.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{bibmark}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\bibmark}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indexmark}
+% Marks for the index, which may be filled with |\indexname|.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{indexmark}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\indexmark}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\glossarymark}
+% Marks for the glossary, which may be filled with \cs{glossaryname}.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added \cs{glossarymark}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glossarymark}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Define Counters}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@secnumdepth}
+%    The value of the counter \Lcount{secnumdepth} gives the depth of
+%    the highest-level sectioning command that is to produce section
+%    numbers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@section}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@subparagraph}
+%    These counters are used for the sectioning numbers. The macro\\
+%    |\newcounter{|\meta{newctr}|}[|\meta{oldctr}|]|\\
+%     defines\meta{newctr} to be a counter, which is reset to zero when
+%    counter \meta{oldctr} is stepped. Counter \meta{oldctr} must
+%    already be defined.
+%
+%    Part and chapter are the top level document divisions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{part}
+\newcounter{chapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The lower level divisions get reset by higher level divisions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{section}[chapter]
+\newcounter{subsection}[section]
+\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
+\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
+\newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thepart}
+% \begin{macro}{\thechapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesection}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\theparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesubparagraph}
+%    For any counter \Lcount{CTR}, |\theCTR| is a macro that defines
+%    the printed version of counter \Lcount{CTR}.  It is defined in
+%    terms of the following macros:
+%
+%    |\arabic{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
+%    \Lcount{COUNTER} as an arabic numeral.
+%
+%    |\roman{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
+%    \Lcount{COUNTER} as a lowercase roman numeral.
+%
+%    |\Roman{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
+%    \Lcount{COUNTER} as an uppercase roman numeral.
+%
+%    |\alph{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of \Lcount{COUNTER}
+%    as a lowercase letter: $1 =$~a, $2 =$~ b, etc.
+%
+%    |\Alph{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of \Lcount{COUNTER}
+%    as an uppercase letter: $1 =$~A, $2 =$~B, etc.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\thepart}{\@Roman\c@part}
+\renewcommand{\thechapter}{\@arabic\c@chapter}
+\renewcommand{\thesection}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@section}
+\renewcommand{\thesubsection}{%
+              \thesection.\@arabic\c@subsection}
+\renewcommand{\thesubsubsection}{%
+              \thesubsection.\@arabic\c@subsubsection}
+\renewcommand{\theparagraph}{%
+              \thesubsubsection.\@arabic\c@paragraph}
+\renewcommand{\thesubparagraph}{%
+              \theparagraph.\@arabic\c@subparagraph}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapapp}
+% |\@chapapp| is initially defined as |\chaptername|. The |\appendix|
+% command redfines it as |\appendixname|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@chapapp}{\chaptername}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Front, main and back matter}
+%
+% These are the three main logical divisions in a book. As noted earlier,
+% the boolean |\if@mainmatter| is TRUE iff the main matter is being
+% processed. Chapters will be unnumbered when |\if@mainmatter| is FALSE.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter*}
+% The |\frontmatter| command starts roman numbering and turns off 
+% chapter numbering.
+% It ensures that lower level divisions will not have chapter numbers,
+% nor will figures or tables. It
+% also ensures that the next page will be recto.
+% The starred version makes no changes to the page numbering\footnote{The
+% starred versions were added to meet a request by Daniel Richard G.
+% (\texttt{skunk@mit.edu}) in September 2001.}.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{frontmatter} switches off numbering via
+%                the secnumdepth counter}
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{frontmatter*} command}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\frontmatter}{%
+  \@ifstar{\@smemfront}{\@memfront}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\@smemfront}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@smemfront}{%
+  \cleardoublepage
+  \@mainmatterfalse
+  \setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}
+  \counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
+  \counterwithout{table}{chapter}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@memfront}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@memfront}{%
+  \@smemfront\pagenumbering{roman}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mainmatter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mainmatter*}
+% The |\mainmatter| command starts arabic numbering and turns on chapter numbering.
+% It sets numbering to the normal state. It
+% also ensures that the next page will be recto. The starred version does 
+% not change the page numbering.
+%
+% Romano Giannetti suggested that |\mainmatter| (and |\backmatter|) should
+% be almost no-ops with the article option.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{mainmatter} switches on section numbering
+%                via the secnumdepth counter}
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{mainmatter*} command}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mainmatter}{%
+  \@ifstar{\@smemmain}{\@memmain}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\@smemmain}
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Modified \cs{@smemmain} to reset the secnumdepth
+%                counter to maxsecnumdepth}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Included cognizance of article option in \cs{@smemmain}
+%                            (from patch v1.7)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@smemmain}{
+  \@mainmattertrue
+  \setcounter{secnumdepth}{\value{maxsecnumdepth}}
+  \ifartopt
+    \clearpage
+  \else
+    \cleardoublepage
+    \counterwithin{figure}{chapter}
+    \counterwithin{table}{chapter}
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@memmain}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@memmain}{%
+  \@smemmain\pagenumbering{arabic}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\backmatter}
+% This command turns off chapter numbering but leaves the page numbering alone. 
+% It twiddles the numbering caption numbering.
+% The back matter may start on any new page.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{backmatter} uses the secnumdepth counter}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Included cognizance of article option in \cs{backmatter}
+%                            (from patch v1.7)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\backmatter}{%
+  \ifartopt
+    \clearpage
+  \else
+    \if@openright
+      \cleardoublepage
+    \else
+      \clearpage
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \@mainmatterfalse
+  \setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}
+  \ifartopt\else
+    \counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
+    \counterwithout{table}{chapter}
+    \setcounter{figure}{0}
+    \setcounter{table}{0}
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%  
+%
+% \subsection{Part}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% |\part{|\meta{title}|}| starts a new Part called \meta{title}.
+% The actual typesetting of the title is done by |\@part| or |\@spart|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\part}{%
+  \@setuppart
+  \secdef\@part\@spart}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\midpartskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartskip}
+% These three macros are the skips before, in the middle, and after the
+% Part heading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\beforepartskip}{\null\vfil}
+\newcommand{\midpartskip}{\par\vskip 20pt}
+\newcommand{\afterpartskip}{\vfil\newpage}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setuppart}
+% This macro does the work of setting up for the |\part| command.
+% A single column page, normally recto, with a \pstyle{part} pagestyle is started.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@setuppart}{%
+  \if@openright
+    \cleardoublepage
+  \else
+    \clearpage
+  \fi
+  \thispagestyle{part}%
+  \if@twocolumn
+    \onecolumn
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \else
+    \@tempswafalse
+  \fi
+  \beforepartskip}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\partnamefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\partnumfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttitlefont}
+% These three macros specify the fonts for the part name and number, and
+% for the part title, respectively.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Rewrote the typesetting for Part titles}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\partnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
+\newcommand{\partnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
+\newcommand{\parttitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printpartname}
+% \begin{macro}{\partnamenum}
+% \begin{macro}{\printpartnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\printparttitle}
+% Macros to print the various parts of a Part heading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\printpartname}{\partnamefont \partname}
+\newcommand{\partnamenum}{\space}
+\newcommand{\printpartnum}{\partnumfont \thepart}
+\newcommand{\printparttitle}[1]{\parttitlefont #1}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mempartinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\mempartstarinfo}
+% \verb?\mempartinfo{\thepart}{short}{long}? \\
+% \verb?\mempartstarinfo{long}? \\
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\mempartinfo}[3]{}
+\newcommand*{\mempartstarinfo}[1]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% |\@part{|\meta{short}|]{|\meta{long}|}| typesets the title of a |\part|
+% part. There is a number if |\secnumdepth| is greater than -2.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Used \cs{partnumberline} in \cs{@part}}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@part}}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Replaced \cs{markboth} by \cs{partmark} 
+%          in \cs{@part} courtesy of Frederic Connes (mempatch v3.11)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@part[#1]#2{%
+  \M@gettitle{#1}%
+  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+    \refstepcounter{part}%
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{part}%
+      {\protect\partnumberline{\thepart}#1}%
+    \mempartinfo{\thepart}{#1}{#2}%
+  \else
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+    \mempartinfo{}{#1}{#2}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Empty the marks, center the title on the page, and set the normal font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \partmark{#1}%
+  {\centering
+   \interlinepenalty \@M
+   \normalfont
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Print the number, if there is one, then the title below. Macro |\@endpart|
+% tidies everything up at the end.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+     \printpartname \partnamenum \printpartnum
+     \midpartskip
+   \fi
+   \printparttitle{#2}\par}%
+  \@endpart}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% |\@spart{|\meta{long}|}| formats the title of a |\part*| part. It is 
+% simpler than |\@part| because there is no  number to print.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@spart}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@spart#1{%
+  \M@gettitle{#1}%
+  \mempartstarinfo{#1}%
+  {\centering
+   \interlinepenalty \@M
+   \normalfont
+   \printparttitle{#1}\par}%
+  \@endpart}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@endpart}
+% This finishes off both |\@part| and |\@spart|. The current page is flushed.
+% In the standard \Lpack{book} class if 
+% two-sided mode is on a blank page is then produced. I think that this looks
+% odd when the \Lopt{openany} option is in force, so here it only produces
+% an extra blank page if both \Lopt{twoside} and \Lopt{openright} are
+% in effect. If necessary, two
+% column mode is switched back on.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@endpart{\afterpartskip
+  \if@twoside
+    \if@openright
+      \null
+      \thispagestyle{empty}%
+      \newpage
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@tempswa
+    \twocolumn
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Chapter}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+%    The command to start a new chapter. Chapters always start on a new page
+% with a \pstyle{chapter} pagestyle. Floats are not allowed at the top of the page.
+% The typesetting is done by either \cs{@chapter} or \cs{@schapter}.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{chapter} for article option}
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/24}{Changed chapter page clearing to \cs{clearforchapter}}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{New optarg in \cs{chapter} for short heading}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Made article chapter start on a newline (mempatch v3.5)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\chapter{%
+  \ifartopt\par\else
+    \clearforchapter
+    \thispagestyle{chapter}
+    \global\@topnum\z@
+  \fi
+  \@afterindentfalse
+  \@ifstar{\@m@mschapter}{\@m@mchapter}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@m@mchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\ch@pt@c}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@empty}
+% Intermediate and support macros for the extra optional argument
+% to \cs{chapter}. Have to do this long windedly otherwise dear old
+% \Lpack{hyperref} barfs.
+%
+% The code for two optional arguments is based on a posting
+% to \ctt{} by Robin Fairbairns (1997/04/12 \textit{Re: Several optional 
+% arguments for macro?}). 
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/04}{Major changes to \cs{chapter} macros (from Morten Hogholm 2005/08/30)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@m@mchapter}[1][]{%
+  \def\ch@pt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@chapter}{\@chapter[]}%
+}
+\def\m@m@empty{\@empty}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memchapinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\memchapstarinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\memappchapinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\memappchapstarinfo}
+% \verb?\memchapinfo{num}{toc}{head}{full}? \\
+% \verb?\memchapstarinfo{short}{full}?
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/06}{Added \cs{memchapterinfo}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\memchapinfo}[4]{}
+\newcommand*{\memchapstarinfo}[2]{}
+\newcommand*{\memappchapinfo}[4]{}
+\newcommand*{\memappchapstarinfo}[2]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\f@rtoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\f@rhdr}
+% \cs{@chapter}\oarg{tocmark}\marg{title}
+% typesets the title of a \cs{chapter}. 
+% There is a number if \cs{secnumdepth} is greater than -1 and \cs{@mainmatter}
+% is TRUE. 
+%
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Complete rewrite of \cs{@chapter}}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{numberline} to \cs{chapternumberline}
+%                            in \cs{@chapter}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
+  \ifx\ch@pt@c\@empty % no optional args
+    \def\f@rtoc{#2}%
+    \def\f@rhdr{#2}%
+  \else                  % at least one opt arg
+    \let\f@rtoc\ch@pt@c
+    \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+      \let\f@rhdr\ch@pt@c
+    \else
+      \def\f@rhdr{#1}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \m@m@Andfalse
+  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+    \if@mainmatter
+      \m@m@Andtrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifm@m@And
+    \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Store the (short) title via |\chaptermark|, and add some whitespace to
+% the LoF and LoT. Then fiddle when we are using two columns, calling
+% |\@makechapterhead| to do the typesetting.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{@chapter} for article option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \chaptermark{\f@rhdr}
+  \ifartopt
+    \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+    \@afterheading
+  \else
+    \insertchapterspace
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
+    \else
+      \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+    \fi
+    \@afterheading
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Vittorio De Martino (\texttt{demartino.vittoria@grtn.it}) on
+% 31 March 2003 reported that for articled chapters, which do not do
+% any |\clearpage|, |\addcontents| had to come after the title.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Changed \cs{@chapter} to match patches v1.n}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifm@m@And
+    \ifanappendix
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{appendix}{%
+        \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
+      \memappchapinfo{\thechapter}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
+    \else
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{%
+        \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
+      \memchapinfo{\thechapter}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}%
+    \ifanappendix
+      \memappchapinfo{}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
+    \else
+      \memchapinfo{}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Add hook for title referencing.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@chapter}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\f@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\f@rtoc}\fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makechapterhead}
+% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{chapter}. Leave some whitespace and prepare to
+% set |\raggedright|.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to 
+%                            \cs{@makechapterhead}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
+  \chapterheadstart%  \vspace*{50\p@}%
+  {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If there is a number, typeset it, otherwise call |\printchapternonum|..
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \ifm@m@And
+     \printchaptername \chapternamenum \printchapternum 
+     \afterchapternum % \par\nobreak \vskip 20\p@
+   \else
+     \printchapternonum
+   \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Typeset the title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \interlinepenalty\@M
+   \printchaptertitle{#1} % \Huge \bfseries #1
+   \afterchaptertitle % \par\nobreak \vskip 40\p@
+  }}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\insertchapterspace}
+% By default, a \cs{chapter} inserts some vertical space into the LoF and LoT.
+% The macro \cs{insertchapterspace} performs the insertion.
+% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Added \cs{insertchapterspace}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\insertchapterspace}{%
+  \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}%
+  \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chs@def@ult}
+% This sets up all the definitions used in \cs{@makechapterhead}
+% and \cs{@makeschapterhead}.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to \cs{@chs@def@ult}}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterheadstart}
+% \begin{macro}{\printchaptername}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapternamenum}
+% \begin{macro}{\printchapternum}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterchapternum}
+% \begin{macro}{\printchapternum}
+% \begin{macro}{\printchapternonum}
+% \begin{macro}{\printchaptertitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterchaptertitle}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@chs@def@ult}{%
+  \def\chapterheadstart{\vspace*{\beforechapskip}}
+  \def\printchaptername{\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
+  \def\chapternamenum{\space}
+  \def\printchapternum{\chapnumfont \thechapter}
+  \def\afterchapternum{\par\nobreak\vskip \midchapskip}
+  \def\printchapternonum{}
+  \def\printchaptertitle##1{\chaptitlefont ##1}
+  \def\afterchaptertitle{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterchapskip}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\chapnamefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapnumfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\chaptitlefont}
+% Fonts for setting the chapter number, name (e.g., Chapter) and title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
+\newcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
+\newcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\beforechapskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\midchapskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterchapskip}
+% Lengths separating the various parts of a chapter heading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\beforechapskip}\setlength{\beforechapskip}{50pt}
+\newlength{\midchapskip}\setlength{\midchapskip}{20pt}
+\newlength{\afterchapskip}\setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@m@mschapter}
+% This deals with the new optional argument for starred chapters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@m@mschapter}[2][\@empty]{%
+  \@schapter{#2}%
+  \ifx \@empty#1
+    \def\f@rhdr{#2}%
+  \else   % opt arg
+    \def\f@rhdr{#1}%
+    \setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}%
+    \chaptermark{#1}%
+    \setcounter{secnumdepth}{\value{maxsecnumdepth}}%
+  \fi
+  \ifanappendix
+    \memappchapstarinfo{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
+  \else
+    \memchapstarinfo{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
+% \cs{@schapter}\marg{long} typesets the title of a 
+% \cs{chapter*}. It is easier than the \cs{@chapter} as there is no number
+% to worry about.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{@schapter} for article option}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Major rewrite of \cs{@schapter}}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@schapter}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@schapter}[1]{%
+  \ifartopt
+    \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
+    \@afterheading
+  \else
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
+    \else
+      \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
+    \fi
+    \@afterheading
+  \fi
+  \M@gettitle{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makeschapterhead}
+% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{chapter*}, and is similar to \cs{@makechapterhead}.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to 
+%                            \cs{@makeschapterhead}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
+  \chapterheadstart
+  {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
+   \printchapternonum
+   \interlinepenalty\@M
+   \printchaptertitle{#1}
+   \afterchaptertitle
+  }
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Chapter styling}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makechapterstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterstyle}
+% \cs{chapterstyle}\marg{style} is like \cs{pagestyle}, except it's for 
+% chapters. 
+%
+% \cs{makechapterstyle}\marg{style}\marg{text} creates
+% or overrides the \meta{style} chapter style defining it as \meta{text}
+% So, \verb?\makechapterstyle{fred}{code}? specifies that the chapter style 
+% \pstyle{fred}
+% is defined as the macro \verb?\chs@fred{code}?, 
+% and \verb?\chapterstyle{fred}? calls the macro \cs{chs@fred}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makechapterstyle}[2]{\@namedef{chs@#1}{\@chs@def@ult #2}}
+\newcommand{\chapterstyle}[1]{\@nameuse{chs@#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Set the \pstyle{default} chapter style.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added code when making the default chapterstyle}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makechapterstyle{default}{%
+  \renewcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
+  \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
+  \renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
+  \setlength{\beforechapskip}{50pt}
+  \setlength{\midchapskip}{20pt}
+  \setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
+}
+\chapterstyle{default}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chs@section}
+% The \pstyle{section} chapter style. It prints the heading as though it
+% were a section.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Made \cs{chapnumfont} change in section chapterstyle explicit}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makechapterstyle{section}{%
+  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
+  \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
+  \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
+  \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\space}
+  \renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chs@article}
+% The \pstyle{article} chapter style. It prints the heading as though it
+% were a section in an \Lpack{article} class document.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added article chapterstyle}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Made \cs{chapnumfont} change in article chapterstyle explicit}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Replaced \cs{space} by \cs{quad} in article chapterstyle
+%               (from patch v1.7)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makechapterstyle{article}{%
+  \renewcommand{\chapterheadstart}{\vspace{\beforechapskip}}
+  \setlength{\beforechapskip}{3.5ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
+  \setlength{\afterchapskip}{2.3ex \@plus .2ex}
+  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
+  \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
+  \renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
+  \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
+  \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\quad}
+  \renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chs@hangnum}
+% The \pstyle{hangnum} style puts the chapter number in the margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makechapterstyle{hangnum}{%
+  \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\chaptitlefont}
+  \settowidth{\chapindent}{\chapnumfont 999}
+  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
+  \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
+  \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{%
+    \noindent\llap{\makebox[\chapindent][l]{\chapnumfont \thechapter}}}
+  \renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chapindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\chs@companion}
+% The \pstyle{companion} style is like that in the \textit{\LaTeX{} Companion}
+% series. It requires the |\chapindent| length. The user needs
+% to be careful to have a wide enough spine margin on verso pages
+% if the title may appear on a verso page.
+% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/24}{Changed adjustwidth* to adjustwidth in companion chapterstyle}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\chapindent}
+
+\makechapterstyle{companion}{%
+  \renewcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\scshape}
+  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{\raggedleft\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
+  \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Huge}
+  \setlength{\chapindent}{\marginparsep}
+  \addtolength{\chapindent}{\marginparwidth}
+  \renewcommand{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
+    \begin{adjustwidth}{}{-\chapindent}
+      \raggedleft \chaptitlefont ##1\par\nobreak
+    \end{adjustwidth}}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chs@demo}
+% An exotic chapter style for demonstration purposes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makechapterstyle{demo}{
+  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{\centering}
+  \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \numtoName{\c@chapter}}
+  \renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\sffamily}
+  \renewcommand{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
+    \hrule\vskip\onelineskip \raggedleft \chaptitlefont ##1}
+  \renewcommand{\afterchaptertitle}%
+               {\vskip\onelineskip \hrule\vskip \afterchapskip}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Lower level headings}
+%
+%    These commands all make use of \cs{@startsection}. However,
+% for the purposes of the class the kernel version needs modification
+% to support:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item make short pages (where a section heading is moved to the top
+%       of the next page) ragged bottom;
+% \item provide headings with two optional arguments.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%
+%    We will tweak \cs{@startsection} so that a short page (where a section
+% heading is moved from the bottom of the page to the top of the next)
+% can be set \cs{raggedbottom}. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifraggedbottomsection}
+% |\raggedbottomsectiontrue| for ragged short pages.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{ifraggedbottomsection}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifraggedbottomsection
+  \raggedbottomsectionfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bottomsectionskip}
+% Decreasing this length increases short page bottom flushness.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{bottomsectionskip}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\bottomsectionskip}
+  \setlength{\bottomsectionskip}{10mm}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We will add a second optional argument for \cs{section}, etc.
+% See the \ctt{} thread \textit{`Long headers'} 15 Jan 2003.
+%
+% The kernel \cs{@dblarg} is used in situations where the default
+% value for an optional argument is the same as the required argument.
+% Schematically, \\
+% |\@dblarg -> Main, Main| \\
+% The macros \cs{@trplargomm} and \cs{@trplargoom} are extensions to this
+% idea for two optional arguments.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@trplargomm}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xtrplargomm}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xxtrplarg}
+% |\@trplargomm -> Opt, Main, Main|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@trplargomm}[1]{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@xtrplargomm{#1}}%
+               {\@xxtrplarg{#1}}}
+\long\def\@xtrplargomm#1[#2]{\@dblarg{#1[#2]}}
+\newcommand{\@xxtrplarg}[2]{#1[{#2}][{#2}]{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@trplargoom}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xtrplargoom}
+% |\@trplargoom -> Opt, Opt, Main|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@trplargoom}[1]{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@xtrplargoom{#1}}%
+               {\@xxtrplarg{#1}}}
+\long\def\@xtrplargoom#1[#2]{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{#1[{#2}]}%
+               {#1[{#2}][{#2}]}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memsecinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\memsecstarinfo}
+% \verb?\memsecinfo{secname}{\thenum}{toc}{head}{title}? \\
+% \verb?\memsecstarinfo{secname}{title}? \\
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\memsecinfo}[5]{}
+\newcommand*{\memsecstarinfo}[2]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@msecn@me}
+% Change kernel \cs{@startsection} to: \\
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Make short pages raggedbottom. This is based on the thread 
+% \textit{Can \cs{flushbottom} and \cs{section} be made to live together?} 
+% on \ctt{} in September 2002.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Modified \cs{@startsection} for raggedbottoming}
+% \item add an extra optional argument.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added extra optional arg to \cs{@startsection}
+%                            (from patch v1.4)}
+% \end{itemize}
+% The original is in \file{ltsect.dtx}. \\
+% \cs{@startsection}\marg{name}\marg{level}\marg{indent} \\
+% \hspace*{1.5in} \marg{beforeskip}\marg{afterskip}\marg{style}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\@startsection}[6]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do raggedbottom stuff.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifraggedbottomsection\if@nobreak\else
+    \vskip\z@\@plus\bottomsectionskip
+    \penalty\z@
+    \vskip\z@\@plus -\bottomsectionskip
+  \fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Save the section name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\m@msecn@me{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The original code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+  \par
+  \@tempskipa #4\relax
+  \@afterindenttrue
+  \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
+    \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
+  \fi
+  \if@nobreak
+    \everypar{}%
+  \else
+    \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For the extra optional argument, change the original \verb?\@dblarg{\@sect{...?
+% below to \verb?\@trplargoom{\M@sect{...?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifstar
+    {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}%
+    {\@trplargoom{\M@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\M@sect}
+% At least the \Lpack{hyperref} and \Lpack{nameref} packages, and
+% possibly other packages,  modify the kernel \cs{@sect} assuming 8 args.
+% That's why I've called my version, which has 9 args, something 
+% else (i.e., \cs{M@sect}). This version also has the support
+% for title referencing. \\
+% \cs{M@sect}\marg{name}\marg{level}\marg{indent}\marg{beforeskip}\marg{afterskip}\marg{style}\\ \hspace*{0.5in} \oarg{toc}\oarg{head}\marg{title}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{M@sect}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\M@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7][#8]#9{%
+  \ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{#8}\else\M@gettitle{#7}\fi
+  \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+    \let\@svsec\@empty
+    \memsecinfo{#1}{}{#7}{#8}{#9}%
+  \else
+    \refstepcounter{#1}%
+    \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
+    \memsecinfo{#1}{\@nameuse{the#1}}{#7}{#8}{#9}%
+  \fi
+  \@tempskipa #5\relax
+  \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+    \begingroup
+      #6{%
+      \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
+        \interlinepenalty \@M #9\@@par}%
+    \endgroup
+    \csname #1mark\endcsname{#8}%
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+      \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
+        \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+      \fi
+      #7}%
+  \else
+    \def\@svsechd{%
+      #6{\hskip #3\relax
+     \@svsec #9}%
+     \csname #1mark\endcsname{#8}%
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+       \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
+        \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+       \fi
+       #7}}%
+  \fi
+  \@xsect{#5}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% Add hook for name reference to \cs{section*} etc. \\
+% \cs{@ssect}\marg{indent}\marg{beforeskip}\marg{afterskip}\marg{style}\marg{title}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@mem@old@ssect\@ssect
+\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \M@gettitle{#5}%
+  \memsecstarinfo{#1}{\m@msecn@me}{#5}%
+  \@mem@old@ssect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
+% of the first paragraph. 
+% By default the heading is set in a \verb?\Large\bfseries? font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\section}{%
+  \sechook%
+  \@startsection{section}{1}%  level 1
+      {\secindent}%            heading indent
+      {\beforesecskip}%        skip before the heading
+      {\aftersecskip}%         skip after the heading
+      {\normalfont\secheadstyle}} % font
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sechook}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsechook}
+% |\sechook| is called at the start of a |\section| and 
+% |\setsechook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\sechook}{}
+\newcommand{\setsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\sechook}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\secindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\secheadstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsecindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\setaftersecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsecheadstyle}
+% |\secindent| is the indentation of the section heading from the left margin,
+% |\beforesecskip| and |\aftersecskip| specify the white space before
+% and after the heading, and |\secheadstyle| specifies the heading style.
+% These are set to the default values for the \Lpack{book} class,
+% except that the heading will be |\raggedright|, thus preventing
+% hyphenation. The
+% |\set...| commands are for the user to change the values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\secindent}
+\newcommand{\setsecindent}[1]{\setlength{\secindent}{#1}}
+  \setsecindent{\z@}
+\newskip\beforesecskip
+\newcommand{\setbeforesecskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforesecskip}{#1}}
+  \setbeforesecskip{-3.5ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
+\newskip\aftersecskip
+\newcommand{\setaftersecskip}[1]{\setlength{\aftersecskip}{#1}}
+  \setaftersecskip{2.3ex \@plus .2ex}
+\newcommand{\secheadstyle}{}
+\newcommand{\setsecheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\secheadstyle}{#1}}
+  \setsecheadstyle{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
+% of the first paragraph.
+% By default the heading is set in a |\large\bfseries| font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\subsection}{%
+  \subsechook%
+  \@startsection{subsection}{2}%  level 2
+      {\subsecindent}%            heading indent
+      {\beforesubsecskip}%        skip before the heading
+      {\aftersubsecskip}%         skip after the heading
+      {\normalfont\subsecheadstyle}} % font
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subsechook}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsubsechook}
+% |\subsechook| is called at the start of a |\subsection| and 
+% |\setsubsechook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\subsechook}{}
+\newcommand{\setsubsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsechook}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subsecindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesubsecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersubsecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsecheadstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsubsecindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubsecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubsecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsubsecheadstyle}
+% The macros for controlling |\subsection| headings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\subsecindent}
+\newcommand{\setsubsecindent}[1]{\setlength{\subsecindent}{#1}}
+  \setsubsecindent{\z@}
+\newskip\beforesubsecskip
+\newcommand{\setbeforesubsecskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforesubsecskip}{#1}}
+  \setbeforesubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
+\newskip\aftersubsecskip
+\newcommand{\setaftersubsecskip}[1]{\setlength{\aftersubsecskip}{#1}}
+  \setaftersubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}
+\newcommand{\subsecheadstyle}{}
+\newcommand{\setsubsecheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsecheadstyle}{#1}}
+  \setsubsecheadstyle{\large\bfseries\raggedright}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
+% of the first paragraph.
+% By default the heading is set in a |\normalsize\bfseries| font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\subsubsection}{%
+  \subsubsechook%
+  \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}%  level 3
+      {\subsubsecindent}%            heading indent
+      {\beforesubsubsecskip}%        skip before the heading
+      {\aftersubsubsecskip}%         skip after the heading
+      {\normalfont\subsubsecheadstyle}} % font
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsechook}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsechook}
+% |\subsubsechook| is called at the start of a |\subsubsection| and 
+% |\setsubsubsechook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\subsubsechook}{}
+\newcommand{\setsubsubsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsubsechook}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsecindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesubsubsecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersubsubsecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsecheadstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsecindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubsubsecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubsubsecskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsecheadstyle}
+% The macros for controlling |\subsubsection| headings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\subsubsecindent}
+\newcommand{\setsubsubsecindent}[1]{%
+            \setlength{\subsubsecindent}{#1}}
+  \setsubsubsecindent{\z@}
+\newskip\beforesubsubsecskip
+\newcommand{\setbeforesubsubsecskip}[1]{%
+            \setlength{\beforesubsubsecskip}{#1}}
+  \setbeforesubsubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
+\newskip\aftersubsubsecskip
+\newcommand{\setaftersubsubsecskip}[1]{%
+            \setlength{\aftersubsubsecskip}{#1}}
+  \setaftersubsubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}
+\newcommand{\subsubsecheadstyle}{}
+\newcommand{\setsubsubsecheadstyle}[1]{%
+            \renewcommand{\subsubsecheadstyle}{#1}}
+  \setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries\raggedright}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
+% A runin heading with white space above and to the right of the heading.
+% By default the heading is set in a |\normalsize\bfseries| font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\paragraph}{%
+  \parahook%
+  \@startsection{paragraph}{4}%  level 4
+      {\paraindent}%            heading indent
+      {\beforeparaskip}%        skip before the heading
+      {\afterparaskip}%         skip after the heading
+      {\normalfont\paraheadstyle}} % font
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parahook}
+% \begin{macro}{\setparahook}
+% |\parahook| is called at the start of a |\paragraph| and 
+% |\setparahook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\parahook}{}
+\newcommand{\setparahook}[1]{\renewcommand{\parahook}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\paraindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeparaskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterparaskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\paraheadstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\setparaindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\setbeforeparaskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\setafterparaskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\setparaheadstyle}
+% The macros for controlling |\paragraph| headings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\paraindent}
+\newcommand{\setparaindent}[1]{\setlength{\paraindent}{#1}}
+  \setparaindent{\z@}
+\newskip\beforeparaskip
+\newcommand{\setbeforeparaskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforeparaskip}{#1}}
+  \setbeforeparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
+\newskip\afterparaskip
+\newcommand{\setafterparaskip}[1]{\setlength{\afterparaskip}{#1}}
+  \setafterparaskip{-1em}
+\newcommand{\paraheadstyle}{}
+\newcommand{\setparaheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\paraheadstyle}{#1}}
+  \setparaheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
+% A runin heading with white space above and to the right of the heading.
+% By default the heading is set in a |\normalsize\bfseries| font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\subparagraph}{%
+  \subparahook%
+  \@startsection{subparagraph}{5}%  level 5
+      {\subparaindent}%            heading indent
+      {\beforesubparaskip}%        skip before the heading
+      {\aftersubparaskip}%         skip after the heading
+      {\normalfont\subparaheadstyle}} % font
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subparahook}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsubparahook}
+% |\subparahook| is called at the start of a |\subparagraph| and 
+% |\setsubparahook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\subparahook}{}
+\newcommand{\setsubparahook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subparahook}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subparaindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesubparaskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersubparaskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparaheadstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsubparaindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubparaskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubparaskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\setsubparaheadstyle}
+% The macros for controlling |\subparagraph| headings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\subparaindent}
+\newcommand{\setsubparaindent}[1]{%
+            \setlength{\subparaindent}{#1}}
+  \setsubparaindent{\parindent}
+\newskip\beforesubparaskip
+\newcommand{\setbeforesubparaskip}[1]{%
+            \setlength{\beforesubparaskip}{#1}}
+  \setbeforesubparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
+\newskip\aftersubparaskip
+\newcommand{\setaftersubparaskip}[1]{%
+            \setlength{\aftersubparaskip}{#1}}
+  \setaftersubparaskip{-1em}
+\newcommand{\subparaheadstyle}{}
+\newcommand{\setsubparaheadstyle}[1]{%
+            \renewcommand{\subparaheadstyle}{#1}}
+  \setsubparaheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sethangfrom}
+% The macro |\sethangfrom{|\meta{code}|}| is a user-level command
+% for changing the definition of |\@hangfrom|. Use |#1| in \meta{code}
+% for the argument to |\@hangfrom| (or |##1| if used inside another macro).
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{sethangfrom}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\sethangfrom}[1]{\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setsecnumformat}
+% The macro |\setsecnumformat{|\meta{code}|}| is a user-level command
+% for changing the definition of |\@seccntformat|. Use |#1| in \meta{code}
+% for the argument to |\@seccntformat| (or |##1| if used inside another macro).
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{setsecnumformat}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setsecnumformat}[1]{\renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hangsecnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\defaultsecnum}
+% These are declarations for putting sectional numbers in the margin,
+% or the default sectional number formatting.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{hangsecnum} and \cs{defaultsecnum}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\hangsecnum}{%
+  \def\@seccntformat##1{\llap{\csname the##1\endcsname\quad}}}
+\newcommand{\defaultsecnum}{%
+  \def\@seccntformat##1{\csname the##1\endcsname\quad}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Anonymous headings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\plainbreak}
+% |\plainbreak{|\meta{num}|}| generates \meta{num} blanks lines and
+% suppresses the indentation of a following paragraph. The starred
+% version, |\plainbreak*|, does not suppress paragraph indentation.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added starred version of \cs{plainbreak}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\plainbreak}{\@ifstar{\@spbreak}{\@pbreak}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pbreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spbreak}
+% These are the internal forms for the two versions of |\plainbreak|.
+% The code for |\@pbreak| is almost a straight copy of code posted to
+% \ctt{} by Donald Arseneau on 2001/03/26.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@pbreak}[1]{\par
+  \penalty -100
+  \vskip #1\onelineskip \@plus 2\onelineskip
+  \penalty -20
+  \vskip \z@ \@plus -2\onelineskip
+  \@afterindentfalse
+  \@afterheading}
+\newcommand*{\@spbreak}[1]{\par
+  \penalty -100
+  \vskip #1\onelineskip \@plus 2\onelineskip
+  \penalty -20
+  \vskip \z@ \@plus -2\onelineskip
+  \@afterindenttrue
+  \@afterheading}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fancybreak}
+% |\fancybreak{|\meta{text}|}| typesets \meta{text} centered. For example,
+% |\fancybreak{{*}\\{* * *}\\{*}}|. It suppresses indentation of the 
+% following paragraph. The starred version leaves indentation as is.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added starred version of \cs{fancybreak}}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Tweaked \cs{fancybreak} to remove underfull hbox}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\fancybreak}{\@ifstar{\@sfbreak}{\@fbreak}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fbreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sfbreak}
+% These are the internal forms for the two versions of |\fancybreak|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@fbreak}[1]{\par
+  \penalty -100
+  \noindent\parbox{\linewidth}{\centering #1}\null
+  \penalty -20
+%%  \vskip -\onelineskip
+  \@afterindentfalse
+  \@afterheading}
+\newcommand{\@sfbreak}[1]{\par
+  \penalty -100
+  \noindent\parbox{\linewidth}{\centering #1}\null
+  \penalty -20
+%%  \vskip -\onelineskip
+  \@afterindenttrue
+  \@afterheading}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\plainfancybreak}
+% The |\plainfancybreak{|\meta{space}|}{|\meta{num}|}{|\meta{text}|}| acts
+% like |\plainbreak{|\meta{num}|}| in the middle of a page and like
+% |\fancybreak{|\meta{text}|}| at the bottom of a page. The \meta{space}
+% argument is the vertical space required for the \meta{num} blank lines
+% and some additional lines of text. From experiments, it seems that
+% \meta{space} should be at least (3+\meta{num}) lines (|\onelineskip|).
+% There is also a starred version, |\plainfancybreak*|, to match the other
+% starred break commands.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{plainfancybreak} and supporting macros}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\plainfancybreak}{\@ifstar{\@spfbreak}{\@pfbreak}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pfbreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spfbreak}
+% These are the internal macros for the unstarred and starred versions
+% of |\plainfancybreak|. They essentially do the same thing, except they call, 
+% respectively, the unstarred and starred internal versions of |\plainbreak|
+% and |\fancybreak|. The code for checking the amount of space left on the
+% page is from an early, and abandoned, version of the code for |\needspace|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@pfbreak}[3]{\par
+  \@tempdimc\pagegoal \advance\@tempdimc-\pagetotal
+  \ifdim #1>\@tempdimc \@fbreak{#3}\else \@pbreak{#2}\fi}
+\newcommand{\@spfbreak}[3]{\par
+  \@tempdimc\pagegoal \advance\@tempdimc-\pagetotal
+  \ifdim #1>\@tempdimc \@sfbreak{#3}\else \@spbreak{#2}\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% From the thread \textit{Customizing section hooks in memoir.cls} on \ctt{}
+% in October 2002 it appeared that |\plainfancybreak| may be fragile.
+% Donald Arseneau said that |\plainfancybreak| guessed at the amount
+% of space available and gave code based on a modified output routine
+% to make it more robust. The following code is based on that thread.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added lots of code for new \cs{fpbreak}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pen@ltyabovefpbreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\pen@ltybelowfpbreak}
+% Penalities for communication with the output routine.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\pen@ltyabovepfbreak}{2}
+\newcommand*{\pen@ltybelowpfbreak}{-4}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakskip}
+% The vertical space taken by the plain and fancy breaks.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\pfbreakskip}
+  \setlength{\pfbreakskip}{2\baselineskip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakdisplay}
+% This is the fancybreak display, which must fit into |\pfbreakskip|
+% vertical space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{*\quad*\quad*}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pfbre@kdispl@y}
+% Typesets |\pfbreakdisplay| vertically and horizontally centered.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pfbre@kdispl@y{\vbox to 1\pfbreakskip{\vss
+  \hb@xt@ \columnwidth{\hss \pfbreakdisplay \hss}%
+  \vss}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nopfbreakOutput}
+% Save the current output routine.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\nopfbreakOutput{\the\output}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakOutput}
+% Special output to handle the |\pfbreak|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pfbreakOutput{%
+  \ifnum\outputpenalty=\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
+    \nopfbreakOutput
+    \pfbre@kdispl@y
+    \nobreak
+    \vskip-\pfbreakskip
+  \else\ifnum\outputpenalty=\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
+    \unvbox 255\relax
+    \nobreak
+    \vskip-\pfbreakskip
+    \pfbre@kdispl@y
+    \break
+  \else
+    \nopfbreakOutput
+  \fi
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output}
+% Use the new |\pfbreak| output routine.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\output={\pfbreakOutput}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pfbreak}
+% Typesets a plain break in the middle of the page, otherwise
+% a fancybreak at either the bottom or top of the page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\pfbreak}{\@ifstar{\@spfbreakgap}{\@pfbreakgap}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pfbreakgap}
+% Unstarred version of |\pfbreak|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@pfbreakgap}{%
+  \par {%
+  \skip@\lastskip
+  \nobreak
+  \vskip -\ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \maxdepth
+          \else\ifdim\prevdepth>-1000pt\prevdepth
+            \else\ifinner 0pt
+              \else \pagedepth
+          \fi \fi \fi
+  \vskip -\skip@
+  \ifdim\skip@<\pfbreakskip
+    \advance\skip@ -1\skip@ \advance\skip@ 1\pfbreakskip
+  \fi
+  \penalty\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
+  \vskip\skip@
+  \penalty\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
+  }
+  \@afterindentfalse
+  \@afterheading
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@spfbreakgap}
+% Starred version of |\pfbreak|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@spfbreakgap}{%
+  \par {%
+  \skip@\lastskip
+  \nobreak
+  \vskip -\ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \maxdepth
+          \else\ifdim\prevdepth>-1000pt\prevdepth
+            \else\ifinner 0pt
+              \else \pagedepth
+          \fi \fi \fi
+  \vskip -\skip@
+  \ifdim\skip@<\pfbreakskip
+    \advance\skip@ -1\skip@ \advance\skip@ 1\pfbreakskip
+  \fi
+  \penalty\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
+  \vskip\skip@
+  \penalty\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
+  }
+  \@afterindenttrue
+  \@afterheading
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%    While on the subject of breaks\ldots
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\noprelistbreak}
+% Putting this immediately before a list (e.g., |itemize|) should
+% prevent a page break at that point.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{noprelistbreak}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\noprelistbreak}{\@nobreaktrue\nopagebreak}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Appendices}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifanappendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\anappendixtrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\anappendixfalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% In the standard \Lpack{book} class the |\appendix| command does the 
+% following:
+%    \begin{itemize}
+%    \item Resets the chapter and section counters to zero
+%    \item Sets |\@chapapp| to |\appendixname|.
+%    \item Redefines |\thechapter| to produce alphabetic appendix numbers.
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{ifanappendix} (mempatch v3.12)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifanappendix
+  \anappendixfalse
+\newcommand{\appendix}{\par
+  \setcounter{chapter}{0}%
+  \setcounter{section}{0}%
+  \gdef\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
+  \gdef\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}%
+  \anappendixtrue}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}  
+% \end{macro}  
+% \end{macro}  
+% \end{macro}  
+%
+%
+% This class provides additional appendixing capabilities.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixpage*}
+% The command to typeset a page announcing the start of the appendices.
+% It is based on the |\part| definition. The normal version
+% makes an entry in the ToC but the starred version does not.
+% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Changed implementation of \cs{appendixpage}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\appendixpage}{%
+  \@ifstar{\@sapppage}{\@apppage}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memapppageinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\memapppagestarinfo}
+% \verb?\memapppageinfo{\appendixpagename}? \\
+% \verb?\memapppagestarinfo{\appendixpagename}? \\
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\memapppageinfo}[1]{}
+\newcommand*{\memapppagestarinfo}[1]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@apppage}
+% |\@apppage| typesets an appendix page and makes an entry in the ToC.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@apppage{%
+  \@setuppart
+  \addappheadtotoc
+  \partmark{\appendixpagename}%
+  \memapppageinfo{\appendixpagename}%
+  {\centering
+   \interlinepenalty \@M
+   \normalfont
+   \printparttitle{\appendixpagename}\par}%
+  \@endpart}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sapppage}
+% |\@sapppage| typesets an appendix page and does not make an entry in the ToC.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sapppage{%
+  \@setuppart
+  \partmark{\appendixpagename}%
+  \memapppagestarinfo{\appendixpagename}%
+  {\centering
+   \interlinepenalty \@M
+   \normalfont
+   \printparttitle{\appendixpagename}\par}%
+  \@endpart}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addappheadtotoc}
+% This command adds an `appendices' line to the ToC. The style is the same
+% as used in \Lpack{tocbibind} for the `List of figures' line. That is,
+% as a Chapter heading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addappheadtotoc{\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\appendixtocname}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ppsavesec}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pprestoresec}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ppsaveapp}
+% \begin{macro}{\restoreapp}
+%  For the |appendices| environment we need to save and restore the
+% main document division number and the appendix number. The |\restoreapp|
+% command is the one for the user.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{@ppsavesec}
+\newcounter{@ppsaveapp}
+\setcounter{@ppsaveapp}{0}
+\newcommand{\@ppsavesec}{%
+  \setcounter{@ppsavesec}{\value{chapter}}}
+\newcommand{\@pprestoresec}{%
+  \setcounter{chapter}{\value{@ppsavesec}}}
+\newcommand{\@ppsaveapp}{%
+  \setcounter{@ppsaveapp}{\value{chapter}}}
+\newcommand{\restoreapp}{%
+  \setcounter{chapter}{\value{@ppsaveapp}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@resets@pp}
+% Resets the appropriate sectioning counters and names. This does almost
+% exactly
+% what the default |\appendix| command does, except that it saves and 
+% restores sectional numbering. It saves the sectional number at the start
+% and restores the appendix number at the end.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@resets@pp}{%
+  \par
+  \@ppsavesec
+  \setcounter{section}{0}%
+  \setcounter{chapter}{0}%
+  \renewcommand\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
+  \renewcommand\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}%
+  \restoreapp
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{appendices}
+%  This is the heart of the package. Start it off by doing the resetting
+% done by the |\appendix| command but also save the main counters. At the
+% end of the environment save the appendix number and restore the main counters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{appendices}%
+  {\@resets@pp\anappendixtrue}%
+  {\@ppsaveapp\@pprestoresec\anappendixfalse}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setthesection}
+% The user commands for specifying the numbering style for subappendices.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setthesection}{\thechapter.\Alph{section}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@resets@ppsub}
+% Similar to |\@resets@pp| except that it is for use within the 
+% |subappendices| envirionment; as such, it is a bit simpler.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@resets@ppsub}{
+  \par
+  \setcounter{section}{0}
+  \renewcommand{\thesection}{\setthesection}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifnamesubappendix}
+% Switch for adding an `appendix' name before subappendix numbers.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/13}{Added \cs{ifnamesubappendix}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifnamesubappendix
+  \namesubappendixfalse
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{subappendices}
+%  The environment for subappendices. Start it off by doing the resetting
+% of the |\section| command. 
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/13}{Modified subappendices environment}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{subappendices}{%
+  \@resets@ppsub
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Change the definition of |\addappheadtotoc| to give a |section| entry.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed bookmark for \cs{appendixpage} (mempatch v2.3)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\addappheadtotoc{\phantomsection
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixtocname}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% To implement the naming we do cunning things with the
+% |\@seccntformat| command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifnamesubappendix
+    \def\sectionname{\appendixname}
+    \def\@seccntformat##1{\@ifundefined{##1name}%
+                         {}{\csname ##1name\endcsname\ }%
+        \csname the##1\endcsname\quad}
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% That's it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@formatsecmark@pp}
+% Formats the page header for a redefined |\sectionmark|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@formatsecmark@pp}[1]{%
+  \MakeUppercase{\appendixname\space
+    \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
+      \thesection\quad
+    \fi
+    #1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Appendixpage-like pages}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{newleadpage} and friends (mempatch v3.0)}
+%
+%
+% This capability was suggested to me by Lars Madsen on 2004/11/28.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leadpagetoclevel}
+% \begin{macro}{\newleadpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\renewleadpage}
+% \verb?\newleadpage[<page-style>]{<cmdname>}{<title>}? creates new macros 
+% called \verb?\cmdname? and \verb?\cmdname*? that when called typeset a 
+% page like an  Appendixpage, with a title \verb?<title>? using
+% page style \verb?<page-style>? (default empty). The
+% plain version adds an entry to the ToC but the starred \verb?\cmdname*? 
+% does not. \cs{renewleadpage} changes the definitions.
+%
+%    The ToC entry style is set by \cs{leadpagetoclevel} (default chapter). To have a part-type entry: \\
+% \verb?\renewcommand*{\leadpagetoclevel}{part}?. \\
+% The \cs{partmark} command is used if you need to mark the title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\leadpagetoclevel}{chapter}
+\newcommand*{\newleadpage}[3][empty]{%
+  \@namedef{#2}{\@ifstar{\dlfm@msapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+                        {\dlfm@mapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}}}
+\newcommand*{\renewleadpage}[3][empty]{%
+  \@namedef{#2}{\@ifstar{\dlfm@msapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+                        {\dlfm@mapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memleadpageinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\memleadpagestarinfo}
+% \verb?\memleadpageinfo{pstyle}{name}{title}? \\
+% \verb?\memleadpagestarinfo{pstyle}{name}{title}? \\
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\memleadpageinfo}[3]{}
+\newcommand{\memleadpagestarinfo}[3]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dlfm@msapppage}
+% \begin{macro}{\dlfm@mapppage}
+% Implement the starred and regular versions of \verb?\(re)newleadpage?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\dlfm@msapppage}[3]{%
+  \@setuppart
+  \partmark{#3}%
+  \memleadpagestarinfo{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  {\centering
+  \interlinepenalty \@M
+  \normalfont
+  \printparttitle{#3}\par
+  \thispagestyle{#1}}%
+  \dlfm@m@endpart{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\dlfm@mapppage}[3]{%
+  \@setuppart
+  \phantomsection
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{\leadpagetoclevel}{#3}%
+  \partmark{#3}%
+  \memleadpageinfo{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  {\centering
+  \interlinepenalty \@M
+  \normalfont
+  \printparttitle{#3}\par
+  \thispagestyle{#1}}%
+  \dlfm@m@endpart{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dlfm@m@endpart}
+% Finishes off a part-like page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\dlfm@m@endpart}[1]{%
+  \if@twoside
+    \if@openright
+      \null
+      \thispagestyle{#1}%
+      \newpage
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@tempswa
+    \twocolumn
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Paragraphs}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Ragged}
+%
+% The kernel code for raggedright (in \file{ltmiscen.dtx}):
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\raggedright{%
+%   \let\\\@centercr\@rightskip\@flushglue \rightskip\@rightskip
+%   \leftskip\z@skip
+%   \parindent\z@}
+% %% \@flushglue = 0pt plus 1fil  %% from ltalloc.dtx
+% \end{verbatim}
+% produces very ragged text with no paragraph indent. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ragrparindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedyright}
+% |\raggedyright|\oarg{plus} provides controllable ragged right paragraphs.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/10}{Added \cs{raggedyright}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\ragrparindent
+  \setlength{\ragrparindent}{\parindent}
+\newcommand{\raggedyright}[1][2em]{%
+  \let\\\@centercr\@rightskip \z@ \@plus #1\relax \rightskip\@rightskip
+  \leftskip\z@skip
+  \parindent\ragrparindent}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Hanging}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hangfrom}
+% This is a user-level
+% version of the kernel \cs{@hangfrom} macro (only the name is
+% changed) as defined in \file{ltsec.dtx}.
+%
+% \cs{hangfrom}\marg{text} puts \meta{text} in a box and makes a hanging
+% paragraph of the following material (a bit like a description item).
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{hangfrom} (from patch v1.9)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\hangfrom}[1]{%
+  \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#1}}%
+  \hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hangpara}
+% \cs{hangpara}\marg{indent}\marg{afternum} at the start of a 
+% paragraph will make it hung. If \meta{indent} is positive the left
+% will be indented, otherwise the right. If \meta{afternum}, say N,
+% is positive the N+1 th lines onwards will be indented. For N negative,
+% the first N lines will be indented.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\hangpara}[2]{\hangindent#1\hangafter#2\noindent}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{hangparas}
+% \verb?\begin{hangparas}?\marg{indent}\marg{afternum} hangs 
+% a series of paragraphs.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{hangparas}[2]{\setlength{\parindent}{\z@}
+  \everypar={\hangpara{#1}{#2}}}{\par}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Lists}
+%
+% \subsection{General List Parameters}
+%
+% The following commands are used to set the default values for the list
+% environment's parameters. See the \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation
+% of the meanings of the parameters.  Defaults for the list
+% environment are set as follows.  First, |\rightmargin|,
+% |\listparindent| and |\itemindent| are set to 0pt.  Then, for a Kth
+% level list, the command |\@listK| is called, where `K' denotes `i',
+% '`i', ... , `vi'.  (I.e., |\@listiii| is called for a third-level
+% list.)  By convention, |\@listK| should set |\leftmargin| to
+% |\leftmarginK|.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmargini}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginii}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiv}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginv}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginvi}
+% For efficiency, level-one list's values are defined at top level, and
+% |\@listi| is defined to set only |\leftmargin|.
+%
+% In two column mode the margins should be smaller than in one column typesetting.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twocolumn
+  \setlength{\leftmargini}{2em}
+\else
+  \setlength{\leftmargini}{2.5em}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The value of |\leftmargin| has to be set at this outer level.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\leftmargin \leftmargini
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Lower level list margins are calculated so that they are indented
+% more than the label in an outer list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\leftmarginii}{2.2em}
+\setlength{\leftmarginiii}{1.87em}
+\setlength{\leftmarginiv}{1.7em}
+\if@twocolumn
+  \setlength{\leftmarginv}{.5em}
+  \setlength{\leftmarginvi}{.5em}
+\else
+  \setlength{\leftmarginv}{1em}
+  \setlength{\leftmarginvi}{1em}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itemindent}
+%    Here we set the |\itemindent| which is the extra indentation before
+%    a label.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\itemindent}{\z@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelwidth}
+%    |\labelsep| is the distance between the label and the text of an
+%    item; |\labelwidth| is the width of the label.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}
+\setlength{\labelwidth}{\leftmargini}
+  \addtolength{\labelwidth}{-\labelsep}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@beginparpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endparpenalty}
+%    These penalties are inserted before and after a list or paragraph
+%    environment. They are set to a bonus value to encourage page
+%    breaking at these points.
+% \begin{macro}{\@itempenalty}
+%    This penalty is inserted between list items.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
+\@endparpenalty   -\@lowpenalty
+\@itempenalty     -\@lowpenalty
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parsepi}
+% \begin{macro}{\topsepi}
+% \begin{macro}{\itemsepi}
+% \begin{macro}{\parsepii}
+% \begin{macro}{\topsepii}
+% \begin{macro}{\topsepiii}
+% Lists may be nested and the exact layout depends on the level
+% of nesting. These lengths are used to control the nesting-level
+% aspects.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\parsepi}
+\newlength{\topsepi}
+\newlength{\itemsepi}
+\newlength{\parsepii}
+\newlength{\topsepii}
+\newlength{\topsepiii}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\defaultlists}
+% The standard \LaTeX{} classes have list parameters that give some separation
+% between lists and |\item|s in a list. This macro sets these values,
+% which also depend on the font size.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Introduced \cs{defaultlist} and \cs{tightlist}}
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{defaultlist} and \cs{tightlist} to
+%                \cs{defaultlists} and \cs{tightlists} respectively,
+%  and their supports}
+%    \begin{macrocode} 
+\newcommand{\defaultlists}{%   %% initialise for 10pt
+  \setlength\partopsep{2\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
+  \parsepi=   4\p@   \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \topsepi=   8\p@   \@plus2\p@   \@minus4\p@
+  \itemsepi=  4\p@   \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \parsepii=  2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+  \topsepii=  4\p@   \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \topsepiii= 2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+\ifcase\@ptsize  % 0 = 10pt
+\or              % 1 = 11pt
+  \setlength\partopsep{3\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
+  \parsepi=   4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \topsepi=   9\p@   \@plus3\p@   \@minus5\p@
+  \itemsepi=  4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \parsepii=  2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+  \topsepii=  4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \topsepiii= 2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+\or              % 2 = 12pt
+  \setlength\partopsep{3\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+  \parsepi=   5\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
+  \topsepi=  10\p@   \@plus4\p@   \@minus6\p@
+  \itemsepi=  5\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
+  \parsepii=  2.5\p@ \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+  \topsepii=  5\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
+  \topsepiii= 2.5\p@ \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+\or              % 3 = 13pt  %% not available
+\or              % 4 = 14pt
+  \setlength\partopsep{4\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+  \parsepi=   6\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
+  \topsepi=  12\p@   \@plus4\p@   \@minus6\p@
+  \itemsepi=  6\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
+  \parsepii=  3\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+  \topsepii=  6\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
+  \topsepiii= 3\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+\or              % 5 = 15pt  %% not available
+\or              % 6 = 16pt  %% not available
+\or              % 7 = 17pt
+  \setlength\partopsep{5\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+  \parsepi=   7\p@   \@plus3\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \topsepi=  14\p@   \@plus6\p@   \@minus8\p@
+  \itemsepi=  7\p@   \@plus3\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \parsepii=  3\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+  \topsepii=  7\p@   \@plus3\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \topsepiii= 3.5\p@ \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+\or              % 8 = 18pt  %% not available
+\or              % 9 = 9pt
+  \setlength\partopsep{2\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
+  \parsepi=   3.5\p@ \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \topsepi=   7\p@   \@plus3\p@   \@minus5\p@
+  \itemsepi=  3.5\p@ \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \parsepii=  2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+  \topsepii=  4\p@   \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
+  \topsepiii= 2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
+\fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tightlists}
+% This macro sets the parameters for lists that have less open vertical
+% space in them. I think that these look neater than the defaults.
+% Effectively, no additional vertical space is added. If there is a
+% blank line before a list, then an extra 1/2 blank line is added before
+% \emph{and} after the list (making one blank line in total).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tightlists}{%
+  \setlength\partopsep{0.5\onelineskip \@plus 0\p@ \@minus 0\p@}
+  \parsepi=       \parskip
+  \itemsepi =     \p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+  \topsepi =   0.5\parskip
+  \parsepii =     \parskip
+  \topsepii =  0.5\parskip
+  \topsepiii = 0.5\parskip
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@listI}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listi}
+% |\@listI| defines top level and |\@listi| values of
+% |\leftmargin|, |\parsep|, |\topsep|, and |\itemsep|
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+  \parsep\parsepi
+  \topsep\topsepi
+  \itemsep\itemsepi}
+\let\@listI\@listi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We should initialise these parameters to the standard defaults
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\defaultlists
+\@listi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@listii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listiv}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listv}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listvi}
+%    Here are the same macros for the lower level lists.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
+             \labelwidth\leftmarginii
+             \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+             \topsep\topsepii
+             \parsep\parsepii
+             \itemsep\parsep}
+
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+              \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
+              \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+              \topsep\topsepiii
+              \parsep\z@
+              \partopsep \p@ \@plus\z@ \@minus\p@
+              \itemsep\topsep}
+
+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
+             \labelwidth\leftmarginiv
+             \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+
+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv
+            \labelwidth\leftmarginv
+            \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+
+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
+             \labelwidth\leftmarginvi
+             \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\firmlist}
+% \begin{macro}{\tightlist}
+% These two macros can be used at the start of a list environment to
+% reduce the vertical gaps. |\tightlist| removes all interior spaces
+% while |\firmlist| only removes some.
+% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added \cs{firmlist} and reimplemented the
+% original \cs{tightlist}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\firmlist}{%
+  \setlength{\itemsep}{0.5\itemsep}\setlength{\parskip}{0.5\parskip}}
+\newcommand{\tightlist}{%
+  \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    The space before and after a |trivlist| environment is controlled
+% by the |\topsep| and |\partopsep| skips. There are several environments,
+% such as |center|, that are defined as a |trivlist|.
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\m@msavetopsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@msavepartopsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\savetrivseps}
+% \begin{macro}{\restoretrivseps}
+% Two skips to store the |\topsep| and |\partopsep| values and a means
+% of setting them and restoring them.
+% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added methods for adjusting the space around
+%                            a trivlist}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\m@msavetopsep
+\newskip\m@msavepartopsep
+\newcommand*{\savetrivseps}{%
+  \m@msavetopsep\topsep
+  \m@msavepartopsep\partopsep}
+\newcommand*{\restoretrivseps}{%
+  \topsep\m@msavetopsep
+  \partopsep\m@msavepartopsep}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Save the initial |\topsep| and |\partopsep| values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\savetrivseps
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\zerotrivseps}
+%  A macro to zero |\topsep| and |\partopsep|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\zerotrivseps}{%
+  \topsep\z@
+  \partopsep\z@}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Enumerate}
+%
+%
+%    The enumerate environment uses four counters: \Lcount{enumi},
+%    \Lcount{enumii}, \Lcount{enumiii} and \Lcount{enumiv}, where
+%    \Lcount{enumN} controls the numbering of the Nth level
+%    enumeration.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumi}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumiv}
+%    The counters are already defined in \file{latex.dtx}, but their
+%    representation is changed here.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\theenumi}{\@arabic\c@enumi}
+\renewcommand{\theenumii}{\@alph\c@enumii}
+\renewcommand{\theenumiii}{\@roman\c@enumiii}
+\renewcommand{\theenumiv}{\@Alph\c@enumiv}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumi}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiv}
+%    The label for each item is generated by the commands\\
+%    |\labelenumi| \ldots\ |\labelenumiv|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\labelenumi}{\theenumi.}
+\newcommand{\labelenumii}{\theenumii)}
+\newcommand{\labelenumiii}{\theenumiii.}
+\newcommand{\labelenumiv}{\theenumiv.}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiv}
+%    The expansion of |\p@enumN||\theenumN| defines the output of a
+%    |\ref| command when referencing an item of the Nth level of an
+%    enumerated list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\p@enumii}{\theenumi}
+\renewcommand{\p@enumiii}{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
+\renewcommand{\p@enumiv}{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%    The following is taken directly from David Carlisle's 
+% \Lpack{enumerate} package.
+%
+% START OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE AND COMMENTARY
+%
+% This package gives the enumerate environment an optional argument
+% which determines the style in which the counter is printed.
+%
+% An occurence of one of the tokens |A a I i| or |1| produces the value
+% of the counter printed with (respectively) |\Alph \alph \Roman \roman|
+% or |\arabic|.
+%
+% These letters may be surrounded by any strings involving any other
+% \TeX\ expressions, however the tokens |A a I i 1| must be inside a
+% |{ }| group if they are not to be taken as special.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@enlab}
+% Internal token register used to build up the label command from the
+% optional argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\@enLab
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@enQmark}
+% This just expands to a `?'. |\ref| will produce this, if no counter
+% is printed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@enQmark{?}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The next four macros build up the command that will print the item
+% label. They each gobble one token or group from the optional argument,
+% and add corresponding tokens to the register |\@enLab|. They each end
+% with a call to |\@enloop|, which starts the processing of the next
+% token.
+% \begin{macro}{\@enLabel}
+% Add the counter to the label. |#2| will be one of the `special'
+% tokens |A a I i 1|, and is thrown away. |#1| will be a command
+% like |\Roman|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@enLabel#1#2{%
+  \edef\@enThe{\noexpand#1{\@enumctr}}%
+  \@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab\csname the\@enumctr\endcsname}%
+  \@enloop}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@enSpace}
+% \begin{macro}{\@enSp@ce}
+% Add a space to the label. The tricky bit is to gobble the space token,
+% as you can not do this with a macro argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@enSpace{\afterassignment\@enSp@ce\let\@memtempa= }
+\def\@enSp@ce{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab\space}\@enloop}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@enGroup}
+% Add a |{ }| group to the label.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@enGroup#1{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab{#1}}\@enloop}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@enOther}
+% Add anything else to the label
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@enOther#1{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab#1}\@enloop}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@enloop}
+% \begin{macro}{\@enloop@}
+% The body of the main loop.
+% Eating tokens this way instead of using |\@tfor| lets you see
+% spaces and {\bf all} braces. |\@tfor| would treat {\tt a} and
+% |{a}| as  special, but not |{{a}}|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@enloop{\futurelet\@entemp\@enloop@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@enloop@{%
+  \ifx A\@entemp         \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\Alph  }\else
+  \ifx a\@entemp         \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\alph  }\else
+  \ifx i\@entemp         \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\roman }\else
+  \ifx I\@entemp         \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\Roman }\else
+  \ifx 1\@entemp         \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\arabic}\else
+  \ifx \@sptoken\@entemp \let\@memtempa\@enSpace         \else
+  \ifx \bgroup\@entemp   \let\@memtempa\@enGroup         \else
+  \ifx \@enum@\@entemp   \let\@memtempa\@gobble          \else
+                         \let\@memtempa\@enOther
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Hook for possible extensions
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                         \@enhook
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+             \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% Process the current token, then look at the next.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@memtempa}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@enhook}
+% Hook for possible extensions.
+% Some packages may want to extend the number of special characters
+% that are associated with counter representations. This feature
+% was requested to enable Russian alphabetic counting, but here
+% I give an example of a footnote symbol counter, triggered by |*|.
+%
+% To enable a new counter type based on a letter, you just need
+% to add a new |\ifx| clause by analogy with the code above.
+% So for example to make |*| trigger footnote symbol counting.
+% a package should do the following.
+%
+% Initialise the hook, in case the package is loaded before
+% \textsf{enumerate}.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \providecommand\@enhook{}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Add to the hook a new |\ifx| clause that associates |*| with the
+% |\fnsymbol| counter command.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \g@addto@macro\@enhook{%
+%   \ifx *\@entemp
+%     \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\fnsymbol}%
+%   \fi}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% This code sequence should work whether it is loaded before or after
+% this enumerate package. Any number of new counter types may be added
+% in this way.
+%
+% At this point we just need initialise the hook, taking care not
+% to over write any definitions another package may already have added.
+% (PRW: as this is now in a class, it can be defined instead of
+% |\provide|d).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% \providecommand\@enhook{}
+  \newcommand\@enhook{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\enumerate}
+% The new {\tt enumerate} environment. This is the first half of the
+% original enumerate environment. If there is an optional argument, call
+% |\@@enum@| to define the label commands, otherwise call
+% |\@enum@| which is the second half of the original definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\enumerate{%
+  \ifnum \@enumdepth >3 \@toodeep\else
+      \advance\@enumdepth \@ne
+      \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}\fi
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@@enum@}{\@enum@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@enum@}
+% Handle the optional argument..
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@enum@[#1]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Initialise the loop which will break apart the optional argument.
+% The command to print the label is built up in |\@enlab|.
+% |\@enThe| will be used to define |\theenum|\,$n$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@enLab{}\let\@enThe\@enQmark
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The |\@enum@| below is never expanded, it is used to detect the end
+% of the token list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@enloop#1\@enum@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Issue a warning if we did not find one of the `special' tokens.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\@enThe\@enQmark\@warning{The counter will not be printed.%
+   ^^J\space\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces The label is: \the\@enLab}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define |\labelenum|$\,n$ and |\theenum|$\,n$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\edef\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname{\the\@enLab}%
+  \expandafter\let\csname the\@enumctr\endcsname\@enThe
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the counter to 7 so that we get the width of `vii' if roman
+% numbering is in force then set |\leftmargin|$\,n$. to the width of the
+% label plus |\labelsep|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \csname c@\@enumctr\endcsname7
+  \expandafter\settowidth
+            \csname leftmargin\romannumeral\@enumdepth\endcsname
+            {\the\@enLab\hspace{\labelsep}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally call |\@enum@| which is the second half of the original
+% definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@enum@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@enum@}
+% All the list parameters have now been defined, so call |\list|. This
+% is taken straight from the original definition of |\enumerate|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@enum@{\list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}%
+           {\usecounter{\@enumctr}\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% END OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE AND COMMENTARY
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Itemize}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemi}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
+%    Itemization is controlled by the commands: |\labelitemi|,
+%    |\labelitemii|, etc., which define
+%    the labels of the various itemization levels: the symbols used are:
+%    bullet (\textbullet), bold en-dash (\textbf{\textendash}),
+% centered asterisk (\textasteriskcentered), and centered dot
+% (\textperiodcentered).
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\labelitemi}{\textbullet}
+\newcommand{\labelitemii}{\normalfont\bfseries \textendash}
+\newcommand{\labelitemiii}{\textasteriskcentered}
+\newcommand{\labelitemiv}{\textperiodcentered}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% It seems like a reasonable idea to give the |itemize| environment
+% an optional argument to match |enumerate|. Fortunately this seems
+% to be much simpler and I might even be able to work it out for myself.
+%
+% \begin{environment}{itemize}
+% This is a hack at the kernel code for |itemize|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\itemize}[1][\@empty]{%
+  \ifnum \@itemdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else
+    \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
+    \ifx \@empty #1\else % optional argument
+      \@namedef{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}{#1}%
+    \fi
+    \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
+    \expandafter
+    \list
+      \csname\@itemitem\endcsname
+       {\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
+  \fi}
+\let\enditemize =\endlist
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsection{Description}
+%
+% The class defines two description environment, the standard one and a `block'
+% one.
+%
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Now two `description' environments.}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{description}
+%    The description environment is defined here -- while the default itemize
+%    and enumerate environments are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
+%
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{The \texttt{description} environment now matches
+%                            the standard layout.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{description}%
+               {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
+                        \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}%
+               {\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\descriptionlabel}
+%    To change the formatting of the label, you must redefine
+%    |\descriptionlabel|. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep
+                                   \normalfont\bfseries #1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{blockdescription}
+%    The `block' description environment.
+%
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Renamed original \texttt{description} environment
+%                            to \texttt{blockdescription}.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{blockdescription}%
+               {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent 0.5em \labelsep 0.5em
+                        \let\makelabel\blockdescriptionlabel}}%
+               {\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\blockdescriptionlabel}
+%    In order to change the formatting of the label, you must redefine 
+% the macro \cs{blockdescriptionlabel}. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\blockdescriptionlabel}[1]{%%% \hspace\labelsep
+                                   \normalfont\bfseries #1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Quotation}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{quotation}
+%   The quotation environment is defined by making clever use of
+%   the list environment's parameters. The lines in the environment
+%   are set smaller than |\textwidth|. The first line of a paragraph
+%   inside this environment is indented.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quotation}%
+               {\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em%
+                        \itemindent    \listparindent
+                        \rightmargin   \leftmargin
+                        \parsep        \z@ \@plus\p@}%
+                \item[]}%
+               {\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsection{Quote}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{quote}
+%   The quote environment is like the quotation environment except
+%   that paragraphs are not indented.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quote}%
+               {\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}%
+                \item[]}%
+               {\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsection{Theorem}
+%
+%    This document class does not define it's own theorem environments,
+%    the defaults, supplied by \file{latex.dtx} are available.
+%
+% \subsection{Listing of symbols and abbreviations}
+%
+%    Another element is the listing of symbols
+%    and abbreviations. 
+%
+% \begin{environment}{symbols}
+% \begin{macro}{\symbollabel}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\symbollabel}[1]{{#1 \hfill}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{symbols}{\list{}%
+    {\itemindent 0em \leftmargin 8em
+     \labelsep 1em \labelwidth 5em
+     \let\makelabel\symbollabel}}%
+    {\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\symboldef}
+%    Within a |symbols| environment the command 
+%    |\symboldef{|\meta{symbol}|}{|\meta{meaning}|}|
+%    is used to specify and explain each symbol or abbreviation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\symboldef}[2]{\item[#1] #2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Verse}
+%
+% The class provides a more flexible |verse| environment than the 
+% standard classes. This is based on the \Lpack{verse} 
+% package~\cite{VERSE}.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{Complete rewrite of verse typesetting}
+%
+% \subsection{Environments}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{vslineno}
+% We need counters for stanza and poem lines.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added poemline and modulo@vs counters}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{vslineno}
+\newcounter{poemline}
+\newcounter{modulo@vs}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\poemlines}
+% |\poemlines{|\meta{nth}|}| specifies that every \meta{nth} line of
+% a poem is to be numbered. 
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{poemlines}}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{\cs{poemlines} now just calls \cs{linenumberfrequency}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\poemlines}[1]{\linenumberfrequency{#1}%
+  \@memwarn{Use \string\linenumberfrequency\space
+                        instead of \string\poemlines}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{getmodulo@vs}}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Using \cs{getthelinenumber} instead of \cs{getmodulo@vs}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifaltindent}
+% This should be set TRUE for indenting alternate lines.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifaltindent
+  \altindentfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifpattern}
+% This should be set TRUE for indenting lines according to a pattern.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifpattern
+  \patternfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifstarpattern}
+% This should be set TRUE for indenting lines according in a |patverse*|
+% environment.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/8}{Added \cs{ifstarpattern}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifstarpattern
+  \starpatternfalse
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\vleftskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\vrightskip}
+% Skips to the left and right of a line of verse.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{vleftskip} and \cs{vrightskip}}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Changed defaults for \cs{vleftskip} and \cs{vrightskip}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\vleftskip}
+  \setlength{\vleftskip}{3em}
+\newlength{\vrightskip}
+  \setlength{\vrightskip}{1em}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stanzaskip}
+% Skip between stanzas.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added \cs{stanzaskip}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\stanzaskip}
+  \setlength{\stanzaskip}{\onelineskip}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\flagverse}
+% |\flagverse{|\meta{flag}|}| inserts \meta{flag} at the left (of a line).
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{flagverse}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\flagverse}[1]{%
+  \hskip-\vleftskip\llap{#1}\hskip\vleftskip\ignorespaces}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\versewidth}
+% The length |\versewidth| is a convenience length for the user.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\versewidth}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\vgap}
+% \begin{macro}{\vin}
+% \begin{macro}{\vindent}
+% The length |\vgap| is used as the basis for spacing. |\vin| makes
+% a horizontal space of |\vgap| and |\vindent| is the indentation
+% of wrapped lines.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\vgap} \setlength{\vgap}{1.5em}
+\newcommand{\vin}{\hspace*{\vgap}}
+\newlength{\vindent} \setlength{\vindent}{2\vgap}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\vinphantom}
+% Macro to leave blank space coresponding to a string.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{vinphantom} (patch 1.1)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\vinphantom}[1]{\leavevmode\phantom{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\vleftofline}
+% Macro to insert something immediately to the left of the start 
+% of the line.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/14}{Added \cs{vleftofline}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\vleftofline}[1]{\leavevmode\llap{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\vleftmargin}
+% Length to adjust the default left margin within a verse environment.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/18}{Added \cs{vleftmargin}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\vleftmargin
+  \vleftmargin=\leftmargini
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verselinebreak}
+% Break a verse line by inserting |\newline|. 
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Modified \cs{verselinebreak}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\verselinebreak}[1][\z@]{\newline\hspace*{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\incr@vsline}
+% Increment the line counters.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added poemline counter to \cs{incr@vsline}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\incr@vsline}{%
+  \refstepcounter{poemline}%
+  \stepcounter{vslineno}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vsifbang}
+% Like the kernel |\@ifstar| except it looks for an exclamation mark!
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsifbang}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@vsifbang}[1]{\@ifnextchar !{\@firstoftwo{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vsifgt}
+% Like the kernel |\@ifstar| except it looks for a |>| character.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{@vsifgt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@vsifgt}[1]{\@ifnextchar >{\@firstoftwo{#1}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vscentercr}
+% This puts the poem line number in the margin, increments
+% the line numbers, and then deals with the options. It is based
+% on the kernel |\@centercr|.
+% This has to handle various forms of the |\\| command: |\\|,
+% |\\*|, |\\!|, and |\\>|, together with an optional length argument.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Major rewrite of \cs{@vscentercr} and friends}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Changed \cs{@vscentercr} to use general
+%                linenumbering}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@vscentercr}{%
+  \ifhmode \unskip\else \@nolnerr\fi
+  \hfill\rlap{\kern\vrightskip\kern\rightmargin%
+              \vlvnumfont\getthelinenumber{poemline}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For |>| call |\verselinebreak| to process it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@vsifgt{\verselinebreak}{%
+  \incr@vsline
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the call is |\\*...| call |\@vsxcentercr| to handle the |*...|.
+% If the call is |\\!|, do nothing.
+% If the call is |\\![...]|, call |\@vsicentercr| to handle the |[...]|.
+% Otherwise, call |\@vsxcentercr|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \par\@ifstar{\nobreak\@vsxcentercr}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@vsifbang{\@ifnextchar[ {\@vsicentercr}{}}{\@vsxcentercr}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vsxcentercr}
+% Processes |\\*|, and either calls |\@vsicentercr| to handle a |[length]|,
+% or |\start@vsline|.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsxcentercr}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@vsxcentercr}{\addvspace{-\parskip}%
+  \@ifnextchar[ {\@vsicentercr}{\start@vsline}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vsicentercr}
+% Processes |(\\...)[length]| and then calls |\start@vsline|.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsicentercr}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@vsicentercr[#1]{\vskip #1\ignorespaces \start@vsline}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\start@vsline}
+% This is called at the start of every verse line except the first.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{ifstarpattern} to \cs{start@vsline}}
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{Used counter for vslineno, not \cs{thevslineno}
+%                in \cs{start@vsline}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\start@vsline}{%
+  \ifaltindent\ifodd\c@vslineno\else\vin\fi\fi%
+  \ifpattern\get@vsindent\fi%
+  \ifstarpattern\getstar@vsindent\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theHpoemline}
+% For the \Lpack{hyperref} package need a way of distinguishing
+% lines of a poem. See the thread \textit{PDFTEX/Hyperef hates memoir verse
+% environment?} on \ctt{} October 2002.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added verse counter and \cs{theHpoemline}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{verse}
+\setcounter{verse}{0}
+\newcommand{\theHpoemline}{\theverse.\thepoemline}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{environment}{verse}
+% The extended |verse| environment. It sets the verse line counter,
+% then defines the particular list environment adjusting the margins
+% to center according to the length parameter. If the length parameter
+% is at least the |\linewidth| then the `centering' defaults to
+% the original |verse| layout.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2001/08/03}{Initialise the line counter to 1, not 0, in
+%                all cases}
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Changes to verse environment for line numbering}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changes to verse environment for hyperref}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2002/02/27}{Let verses wider than the \cs{linewidth}
+%                            take the full width (patch(1.1)}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fix vertical spacing in the verse environment (mempatch v3.3)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{verse}[1][\linewidth]{%
+  \refstepcounter{verse}%
+  \setcounter{poemline}{0}\refstepcounter{poemline}%
+  \setcounter{vslineno}{1}%
+  \let\\=\@vscentercr
+  \list{}{\itemsep     \z@
+          \itemindent  -\vindent
+          \listparindent\itemindent
+          \leftmargin   \vleftmargin
+          \parsep       \stanzaskip
+          \ifdim #1<\linewidth%   %% short line
+            \rightmargin        \z@
+            \leftmargin         \linewidth
+            \advance\leftmargin -#1\relax
+            \advance\leftmargin -0.5\leftmargin
+            \advance\leftmargin \vindent
+          \else
+            \ifdim #1>\linewidth%  %% long line
+              \rightmargin \z@
+              \leftmargin  \vindent
+            \else%                   %% default
+              \rightmargin \leftmargin
+              \advance\leftmargin \vindent
+            \fi
+          \fi}
+  \item[]}{\endlist}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{altverse}
+% This sets |\altindenttrue| (afterwards false) and initialises the line counter.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{starpatternfalse} to altverse}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{altverse}%
+  {\starpatternfalse\patternfalse\altindenttrue
+   \setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
+  {\altindentfalse}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Patterns}
+%
+%    The pattern code is based on the idea of converting a string of
+% digits to an array of digits, and then being able to access the
+% digit at a particular position in the array.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameedef}
+% A shorthand for using |\protected@edef|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@nameedef}[1]{
+  \expandafter\protected@edef\csname #1\endcsname}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifbounderror}
+% A flag set TRUE if an attempt is made to access an array element outside
+% the array limits.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifbounderror
+  \bounderrorfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinteger}
+%  A flag to indicate if a `number' is an integer (TRUE) or not (FALSE).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifinteger
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@chrsinstr}
+% A counter for the number of characters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{chrsinstr}  % CHARactersINSTRing
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newarray}
+% |\newarray{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{low}|}{|\meta{high}|}| defines
+% an array called \meta{arrayname} (no backslash e.g. |MyArray|), 
+% with low and high limts \meta{low} and \meta{high}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newarray}[3]{%
+  \@nameedef{#1-low}{#2}%
+  \@nameedef{#1-high}{#3}%
+  \ifnum #3<#2
+    \@memerror{Limits for array #1 are in reverse order}{\@ehc}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stringtoarray}
+% |\stringtoarray{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{string}|}| puts each character
+% from \meta{string} sequentially into the \meta{arrayname} array, starting
+% with \meta{low} = 1. It checks for an empty \meta{string} and handles that
+% specially.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\stringtoarray}[2]{%
+  \def\@vsarrayname{#1}%
+  \protected@edef\the@vsstring{#2}%
+  \newarray{\@vsarrayname}{1}{1}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#2}{%
+    \c@chrsinstr \z@
+    \@namedef{\@vsarrayname-1}{}
+  }{%
+    \c@chrsinstr \@ne
+    \expandafter\@vsstringtoarray \the@vsstring\@vsend
+  }
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vsstringtoarray}
+% Recursively adds characters to the array |\@vsarrayname|, incrementing
+% the array's high limit.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@vsstringtoarray #1#2\@vsend{%
+  \@namedef{\@vsarrayname-\the\c@chrsinstr}{#1}
+  \@nameedef{\@vsarrayname-high}{\the\c@chrsinstr}
+  \@ifmtarg{#2}{%
+    \def\@vsinext{}%
+  }{%
+    \advance\c@chrsinstr \@ne
+    \def\@vsinext{%
+      \@vsstringtoarray #2\@vsend%
+    }%
+  }
+  \@vsinext
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setarrayelement}
+% |\setarrayelement{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{index}|}{|\meta{value}|}| sets
+% the \meta{arrayname} array's element at \meta{index} to \meta{value}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setarrayelement}[3]{%
+  \checkarrayindex{#1}{#2}%
+  \@nameedef{#1-#2}{#3}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\getarrayelement}
+% |\getarrayelement{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{index}|}{|\meta{value}|}|
+% defines the parameterless macro \meta{value} (e.g., |\result|) to be
+% the value at \meta{index} in the \meta{arrayname} array.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\getarrayelement}[3]{%
+  \checkarrayindex{#1}{#2}%
+  \protected@edef#3{\@nameuse{#1-#2}}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\checkarrayindex}
+% |\checkarrayindex{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{index}|}| checks that
+% the \meta{index} of the \meta{arrayname} array is valid. |\ifbounderror|
+% is set FALSE if everything is OK, otherwise it is set TRUE.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\checkarrayindex}[2]{%
+  \bounderrorfalse
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1-low\endcsname\relax%
+    \ifpattern\else
+      \@memerror{No array called #1}{\@ehc}%
+    \fi
+    \bounderrortrue
+  \fi
+  \ifnum #2<\@nameuse{#1-low}\relax%
+    \ifpattern\else
+      \@memerror{Index #2 outside limits for array #1}{\@ehc}%
+    \fi
+    \bounderrortrue
+  \fi
+  \ifnum #2>\@nameuse{#1-high}\relax%
+    \ifpattern\else
+      \@memerror{Index #2 outside limits for array #1}{\@ehc}%
+    \fi
+    \bounderrortrue
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arraytostring}
+% |\arraytostring{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{string}|}| converts the
+% characters in the \meta{arrayname} array into the parameterless macro
+% \meta{string} (e.g., |\MyString|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\arraytostring}[2]{%
+  \def#2{}%
+  \c@chrsinstr = \@nameuse{#1-low}%
+  \@vsarraytostring{#1}{#2}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vsarraytostring}
+% |\@vsarraytostring{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{string}|}| recursively
+% adds the (character) elements from \meta{arrayname} to \meta{string}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@vsarraytostring}[2]{%
+  \ifnum\c@chrsinstr>\@nameuse{#1-high}\else
+    \protected@edef#2{#2\@nameuse{#1-\thechrsinstr}}%
+    \advance\c@chrsinstr\@ne%
+    \@vsarraytostring{#1}{#2}%
+  \fi%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\checkifinteger}
+% |\checkifinteger{|\meta{num}|}| checks if \meta{num} is an integer.
+% If it is, then |\ifinteger| is set TRUE, otherwise it is set FALSE.
+% (Code based on Donald Arseneau's \Lpack{cite} package).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\checkifinteger}[1]{%
+  \protected@edef\@vsa{#1}%
+  \ifcat _\ifnum9<1\gobm{#1} _\else A\fi
+    \integertrue%
+  \else
+    \integerfalse%
+  \fi%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\gobm}
+% |\gobm{|\meta{num}|}| is defined as \meta{num}. It could be defined as: \\
+% |\newcommand{\gobm}[1]{\ifx-#1\expandafter\gobm\else#1\fi}| \\
+% which would remove a leading minus sign (hyphen) from its argument
+% (|gobm| = gobble minus sign).
+% (Code from a posting to \ctt{} by Donald Arseneau on 1997/07/21).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\gobm}[1]{#1}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indentpattern}
+% |\indentpattern{|\meta{digits}|}| stores \meta{digits} for use as
+% a verse indentation pattern.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\indentpattern}[1]{%
+  \stringtoarray{Array@vs}{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\get@vsindent}
+% |\get@vsindent| gets the indent pattern digit for the |\thevslineno|,
+% then uses this to specify the line indentation as |digit*\vgap|.
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{Changed \cs{get@vsindent} to use counter
+% value number instead of \cs{thevslineno}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\get@vsindent}{%
+  \getarrayelement{Array@vs}{\number\value{vslineno}}{\@vspat}%
+  \ifbounderror
+    \arraytostring{Array@vs}{\@vsp@t}%
+    \@memwarn{%
+      Index `\thevslineno' for pattern `\@vsp@t' is out of bounds}%
+    \def\@vspat{0}%
+  \else
+    \checkifinteger{\@vspat}%
+    \ifinteger\else
+      \arraytostring{Array@vs}{\@vsp@t}%
+      \@memwarn{%
+       `\@vspat' at index `\thevslineno' in pattern `\@vsp@t' 
+       is not a digit}%
+      \def\@vspat{0}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifcase\@vspat\else\hspace*{\@vspat\vgap}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\getstar@vsindent}
+% |\getstar@vsindent| gets the indent pattern digit for the |patverse*|
+% environment,
+% then uses this to specify the line indentation as |digit*\vgap|.
+% It lets the pattern repeat by resetting the |vslineno| counter.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{getstar@vsindent}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\getstar@vsindent}{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname Array@vs-high\endcsname\relax
+    \@memerror{A pattern has not been specified}{\@ehc}
+  \else
+    \ifnum\c@vslineno>\@nameuse{Array@vs-high}%
+      \setcounter{vslineno}{1}%
+     \fi
+     \get@vsindent
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{patverse}
+% The environment for setting verse line indents according to a pattern.
+% It starts by setting |\ifpattern| TRUE, any other flags to FALSE,
+% and initialises the line number. It ends by setting |\ifpattern| FALSE.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{starpatternfalse} to patverse}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{patverse}%
+  {\starpatternfalse\patterntrue\altindentfalse
+   \setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
+  {\patternfalse}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{patverse*}
+% The environment for setting verse line indents according to a repeating
+% pattern.
+% It starts by setting |\ifstarpattern| TRUE, any other flags to FALSE,
+% and initialises the line number. It ends by setting |\ifstarpattern| FALSE.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added patverse* environment}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{patverse*}%
+  {\starpatterntrue\patternfalse\altindentfalse
+   \setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
+  {\starpatternfalse}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Titles}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\poemtitle}
+% Typeset a poem title (like |\section| or other). The actual work
+% is done by |\@vsptitle| (plain) or |\@vssptitle| (starred).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\poemtitle}{\par%
+  \secdef\@vsptitle\@vssptitle}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\poemtoc}
+% The kind of entry |\poemtitle| is to make in the ToC.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\poemtoc}{section}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mempoeminfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\mempoemstarinfo}
+% \verb?\mempoeminfo{title}? \\
+% \verb?\mempoemstarinfo{title}? \\
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\mempoeminfo}[1]{}
+\newcommand*{\mempoemstarinfo}[1]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vsptitle}
+% Typeset a \cs{poemtitle}.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{phantomsection} to \cs{@vsptitle}}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@vsptitle}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@vsptitle[#1]#2{%
+  \phantomsection
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{\poemtoc}{#1}%
+  \M@gettitle{#1}%
+  \mempoeminfo{#1}%
+  \poemtitlemark{#1}%
+  \@vstypeptitle{#2}%
+  \@afterheading}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vssptitle}
+% Typeset a \cs{poemtitle*}.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@vssptitle}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@vssptitle#1{%
+  \M@gettitle{#1}%
+  \mempoemstarinfo{#1}%
+  \@vstypeptitle{#1}%
+  \@afterheading}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vstypeptitle}
+% This \emph{really} typesets the title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@vstypeptitle}[1]{%
+  \vspace{\beforepoemtitleskip}%
+  {\poemtitlefont #1\par}%
+  \vspace{\afterpoemtitleskip}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlemark}
+% Sets the appearance to the title of a poem, and something for a header.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\poemtitlefont}{\normalfont\large\bfseries\centering}
+\newcommand{\poemtitlemark}[1]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepoemtitleskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpoemtitleskip}
+% Lengths before and after a poem title, using approcimately \cs{section} 
+% values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\beforepoemtitleskip}
+  \setlength{\beforepoemtitleskip}{3.5ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
+\newlength{\afterpoemtitleskip}
+  \setlength{\afterpoemtitleskip}{2.3ex \@plus.2ex}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@numptitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\@numptitletrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\@numptitlefalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\NumberPoemTitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\PlainPoemTitle}
+% Following the \cs{NumberPoemTitle} declaration \cs{PoemTitle}s are numbered.
+% The \cs{PlainPoemTitle} declaration produces unnumbered titles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@numptitle
+\newcommand*{\NumberPoemTitle}{\@numptitletrue}
+\newcommand*{\PlainPoemTitle}{\@numptitlefalse}
+\NumberPoemTitle
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@poem}
+% \begin{macro}{\thepoem}
+% \begin{macro}{\theHpoem}
+% Counter for poem titles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{poem}\setcounter{poem}{0}
+  \renewcommand*{\thepoem}{\@arabic\c@poem}
+\newcommand*{\theHpoem}{\arabic{poem}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlestarmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlepstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlestarpstyle}
+% \cs{poemtitlemark}\marg{poemf@rhdr} is used for marks for a PoemTitle and 
+% \cs{poemtitlestarmark}\marg{poemf@hdr} is for marks for \cs{PoemTitle*}. 
+% The \cs{poemtitlepstyle} and \cs{poemtitlestarpstyle} macros are provided
+% as hooks so that, for example, pagestyles can be set for the regular
+% and starred versions of \cs{PoemTitle}. By default these macros do nothing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\poemtitlestarmark}[1]{}
+\newcommand*{\poemtitlepstyle}{}
+\newcommand*{\poemtitlestarpstyle}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitle}
+%    The command to produce a article style chapter-like (numbered) poem title.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/09}{Added \cs{PoemTitle}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\PoemTitle{%
+  \par
+  \@afterindentfalse
+  \@ifstar{\@m@msPoemTitle}{\@m@mPoemTitle}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@m@mPoemTitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\poemt@c}
+% Intermediate and support macros for the extra optional argument
+% to \cs{PoemTitle}. Have to do this long windedly otherwise dear old
+% \Lpack{hyperref} barfs.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@m@mPoemTitle}[1][]{%
+  \def\poemt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@PoemTitle}{\@PoemTitle[]}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memPoemTitleinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\memPoemTitlestarinfo}
+% \verb?\memPoemTitleinfo{num}{toc}{head}{full}? \\
+% \verb?\memPoemTitlestarinfo{short}{full}?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\memPoemTitleinfo}[4]{}
+\newcommand*{\memPoemTitlestarinfo}[2]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@PoemTitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\poemf@rtoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\poemf@rhdr}
+% \cs{@PoemTitle}\oarg{tocmark}\marg{title}
+% typesets the title of a \cs{PoemTitle}. 
+% There is a number for \cs{@numptitletrue} and \cs{@mainmattertrue}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@PoemTitle[#1]#2{%
+  \phantomsection
+  \ifx\poemt@c\@empty % no optional args
+    \def\poemf@rtoc{#2}%
+    \def\poemf@rhdr{#2}%
+  \else                  % at least one opt arg
+    \let\poemf@rtoc\poemt@c
+    \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+      \let\poemf@rhdr\poemt@c
+    \else
+      \def\poemf@rhdr{#1}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \m@m@Andfalse
+  \if@numptitle
+    \if@mainmatter
+      \m@m@Andtrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifm@m@And
+    \refstepcounter{poem}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Store the (short) title via \cs{poemtitlemark} and call
+% \cs{\@makePoemTitlehead} to do the typesetting.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@makePoemTitlehead{#2}%
+  \@afterheading
+  \poemtitlemark{\poemf@rhdr}%
+  \poemtitlepstyle
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Add the title to the ToC.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifm@m@And
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{\poemtoc}{%
+      \protect\numberline{\thepoem}\poemf@rtoc}%
+    \memPoemTitleinfo{\thepoem}{\poemf@rtoc}{\poemf@rhdr}{#2}%
+  \else
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{\poemtoc}{\poemf@rtoc}%
+    \memPoemTitleinfo{}{\poemf@rtoc}{\poemf@rhdr}{#2}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Add hook for title referencing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\poemf@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\poemf@rtoc}\fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makePoemTitlehead}
+% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{PoemTitle}. Leave some whitespace.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makePoemTitlehead#1{{%
+  \PoemTitleheadstart
+  \parindent \z@ \normalfont
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If there is a number, typeset it, otherwise call \cs{printPoemTitlenonum}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \ifm@m@And
+     \printPoemTitlenum 
+     \afterPoemTitlenum
+   \else
+     \printPoemTitlenonum
+   \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Typeset the title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \interlinepenalty\@M
+   \printPoemTitletitle{#1}% 
+   \afterPoemTitle 
+  }}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@PTchs@def@ult}
+% This sets up all the definitions used in \cs{@makePoemTitlehead}
+% and \cs{@makesPoemTitlehead}.
+% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitleheadstart}
+% \begin{macro}{\printPoemTitlenum}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterPoemTitlenum}
+% \begin{macro}{\printPoemTitlenonum}
+% \begin{macro}{\printPoemTitletitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterPoemTitle}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@PTchs@def@ult}{%
+  \def\PoemTitleheadstart{\vspace{\beforePoemTitleskip}}
+  \def\printPoemTitlenum{\PoemTitlenumfont \thepoem}
+  \def\afterPoemTitlenum{\par\nobreak\vskip \midPoemTitleskip}
+  \def\printPoemTitlenonum{}
+  \def\printPoemTitletitle##1{\PoemTitlefont ##1}
+  \def\afterPoemTitle{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterPoemTitleskip}
+}
+\@PTchs@def@ult
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitlenumfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitlefont}
+% Fonts for setting the Poem Title number and title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\PoemTitlenumfont}{\normalfont\large\centering}
+\newcommand*{\PoemTitlefont}{\normalfont\large\centering}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\beforePoemTitleskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\midPoemTitleskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterPoemTitleskip}
+% Lengths separating the various parts of a Poem Title heading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\beforePoemTitleskip}
+  \setlength{\beforePoemTitleskip}{1\onelineskip}
+\newlength{\midPoemTitleskip}
+  \setlength{\midPoemTitleskip}{0pt}
+\newlength{\afterPoemTitleskip}
+  \setlength{\afterPoemTitleskip}{1\onelineskip}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@m@msPoemTitle}
+% This deals with the optional argument for starred PoemTitles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@m@msPoemTitle}[2][\@empty]{%
+  \@sPoemTitle{#2}%
+  \ifx \@empty#1
+    \def\poemf@rhdr{#2}%
+  \else   % opt arg
+    \def\poemf@rhdr{#1}%
+  \fi
+  \poemtitlestarmark{\poemf@rhdr}%
+  \poemtitlestarpstyle
+  \memPoemTitlestarinfo{\poemf@rhdr}{#2}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sPoemTitle}
+% \cs{@sPoemTitle}\marg{long} typesets the title of a 
+% \cs{PoemTitle*}. It is easier than the \cs{@PoemTitle} as there is no number
+% or ToC entry to worry about.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@sPoemTitle}[1]{%
+  \@makesPoemTitlehead{#1}%
+  \@afterheading
+  \M@gettitle{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makesPoemTitlehead}
+% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{PoemTitle*}, and is similar to 
+% \cs{@makePoemTitlehead}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makesPoemTitlehead#1{{%
+  \PoemTitleheadstart
+  \parindent \z@ \normalfont
+  \printPoemTitlenonum
+  \interlinepenalty\@M
+  \printPoemTitletitle{#1}
+  \afterPoemTitle}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Setting parameters for existing environments}
+%
+% \subsection{Array and tabular}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arraycolsep}
+%    The columns in an array environment are separated by
+%    2|\arraycolsep|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\arraycolsep{5\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabcolsep}
+%    The columns in an tabular environment are separated by
+%    2|\tabcolsep|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\tabcolsep{6\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arrayrulewidth}
+%    The width of rules in the array and tabular environments is given
+%    by\\ |\arrayrulewidth|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\arrayrulewidth{.4\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\doublerulesep}
+%    The space between adjacent rules in the array and tabular
+%    environments is given by |\doublerulesep|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\doublerulesep{2\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Tabbing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabbingsep}
+%    This controls the space that the |\'| command puts in. (See
+%    \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\tabbingsep{\labelsep}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Minipage}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
+%    The macro |\@minipagerestore| is called upon entry to a minipage
+%    environment to set up things that are to be handled differently
+%    inside a minipage environment. In the current styles, it does
+%    nothing.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootins}
+%    Minipages have their own footnotes; |\skip||\@mpfootins| plays
+%    same r\^ole for footnotes in a minipage as |\skip||\footins| does
+%    for ordinary footnotes.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Framed boxes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fboxsep}
+%    The space left by |\fbox| and |\framebox| between the box and the
+%    text in it.
+% \begin{macro}{\fboxrule}
+%    The width of the rules in the box made by |\fbox| and |\framebox|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\fboxsep{3\p@}
+\setlength\fboxrule{.4\p@}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Equation and eqnarray}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
+%    The equation counter will be reset at beginning of a new chapter
+%    and the equation number will be prefixed by the chapter number.
+%
+%    This code  must follow the |\chapter| definition, or more exactly
+%    the definition of the chapter counter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@addtoreset{equation}{chapter}
+\renewcommand{\theequation}{%
+  \ifnum \c@chapter>\z@ \thechapter.\fi \@arabic\c@equation}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\jot}
+%    |\jot| is the extra space added between lines of an eqnarray
+%    environment. The default value is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \setlength\jot{3pt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@eqnnum}
+%    The macro |\@eqnnum| defines how equation numbers are to appear in
+%    equations. Again the default is used.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@eqnnum{(\theequation)}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Array and tabular}
+%
+% \subsection{Array}%
+%
+% The description and code are essentially copied from the \Lpack{array}
+% package~\cite{ARRAY}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%%%%%%%%%% Array package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%% Frank Mittelbach & David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{The construction of the preamble}
+%
+% \begin{PW}
+% PW: The original \Lpack{array} package has redundant code (caused by a quick 
+% mashing of an early \Lpack{array} and the \Lpack{newarray} packages). I
+% have tried to remove the redundancies and overlaps.
+% \end{PW}
+%
+% It is obvious that those environments will consist mainly of an
+% \cs{halign}, because \TeX\ typesets tables using this primitive.
+% That is why we will now take a look at the algorithm which determines
+% a preamble for a \cs{halign} starting with a given user preamble
+% using the options mentioned above.
+%
+% The most interesting macros of this implementation are without doubt
+% those which are responsible for the construction of the preamble for
+% the \cs{halign}. The underlying algorithm was developed by
+% \textsc{Lamport} (resp.\ \textsc{Knuth}, see texhax V87\#??), and it
+% has been extended and improved.
+%
+% The user preamble will be read \textsf{token} by \textsf{token}.  A
+% \textsf{token} is a single character like \texttt{c} or a block
+% enclosed in \verb?{...}?. For example the preamble of
+% \verb?\begin{tabular}?\linebreak[0]\verb?{lc||c@{\hspace{1cm}}}? consists of
+% the \textsf{token} \texttt{l}, \texttt{c}, \verb?|?, \verb?|?,
+% \texttt{@} and \verb?\hspace{1cm}?.
+%
+% The currently used \textsf{token} and the one, used before, are needed
+% to decide on how the construction of the preamble has to be
+% continued.
+% In the example mentioned above the \texttt{l} causes the preamble
+% to begin with \verb?\hskip\tabcolsep?. Furthermore
+% \verb?# \hfil? would be appended to define a flush left column.
+% The next \textsf{token} is a \texttt{c}. Because it was preceded by an
+% \texttt{l} it generates a new column. This is done with
+% \verb?\hskip \tabcolsep & \hskip \tabcolsep?. The column which is to
+% be centered will be appended with \verb?\hfil # \hfil?.
+% The \textsf{token} \verb?|? would then add a space of
+% \verb?\hskip \tabcolsep?
+% and a vertical line because the last
+% \textsf{tokens} was a \texttt{c}.
+% The following \textsf{token} \verb?|? would only add a space
+% \verb?\hskip \doublerulesep? because it was preceded by the
+% \textsf{token} \verb?|?. We will not discuss our example further but
+%  rather take a look at the general case of constructing preambles.
+%
+% The example shows that the desired preamble for the
+% \cs{halign} can be constructed as soon as the action of all
+% combinations
+% of the preamble \textsf{tokens} are specified. There are 18 such
+% \textsf{tokens}
+% so we have $19 \cdot 18 = 342$ combinations if we count the
+% beginning of
+% the preamble as a special \textsf{token}. Fortunately, there are many
+% combinations which generate the same spaces, so we can define
+% \textsf{token} classes. We will identify a
+% \textsf{token} within a class with a number, so we can insert the
+% formatting (for example of a column).
+% Table~\ref{tab:Klassen} lists all \textsf{token} classes and
+% their corresponding numbers.
+% \begin{table}[ht]
+% \begin{center} \ttfamily
+% ^^A   \begin{tabular}[t]{>{\ttfamily}ccc}
+%    \begin{tabular}[t]{ccc}
+%       \textsf{token} & \cs{@chclass} & \cs{@chnum} \\[2mm]
+%       c   & 0  & 0 \\
+%       l   & 0  & 1 \\
+%       r   & 0  & 2 \\
+%       p-arg    & 0  & 3 \\
+%       t-arg    & 0  & 4 \\
+%       b-arg    & 0  & 5 \\
+%       \verb?|?   & 1  & 0 \\
+%       !-arg    & 1  & 1 \\
+%       <-arg    & 2  & --- \\
+%       >-arg    & 3  & ---
+%    \end{tabular}
+%    \kern3mm \vrule \kern3mm%
+% ^^A   \begin{tabular}[t]{>{\ttfamily}ccc}
+%    \begin{tabular}[t]{ccc}
+%       \textsf{token} & \cs{@chclass} & \cs{@chnum} \\[2mm]
+%       Start    & 4  & --- \\
+%       @-arg    & 5  & --- \\
+%       !   & 6  & --- \\
+%       @   & 7  & --- \\
+%       <   & 8  & --- \\
+%       >   & 9  & --- \\
+%       p   & 10 & 3 \\
+%       t   & 10 & 4 \\
+%       b   & 10 & 5
+%    \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \caption{Classes of preamble \textsf{tokens}}
+% \label{tab:Klassen}
+% \end{table}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chclass}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\@lastchclass}
+%    The class and the number of the current \textsf{token} are saved in
+%    the
+%    \textsf{count} registers \cs{@chclass}
+%    and \cs{@chnum}, while the class of the previous
+%    \textsf{token} is stored in the
+%    \textsf{count} register \cs{lastchclass}.
+%    All of the mentioned registers are already allocated in
+%    \texttt{latex.tex},
+%    which is the reason why the following three lines of code are
+%    commented out.
+%    Later throughout the text I will not mention it again explicitely
+%    whenever I use a \verb?%? sign. These parts are already defined in
+%    \texttt{latex.tex}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \newcount \@chclass
+% \newcount \@chnum
+% \newcount \@lastchclass
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtopreamble}
+%    We will save the already constructed preamble for
+%    the \cs{halign}
+%    in the global macro \cs{@preamble}. This will then be
+%     enlarged with
+%    the command \cs{@addtopreamble}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addtopreamble#1{\xdef\@preamble{\@preamble #1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@testpach}
+%    With the help of \cs{@lastchclass} we can now define a macro
+%    which determines the class and the number of a given preamble
+%    \textsf{token}
+%    and assigns them to the registers
+%    \cs{@chclass} and \cs{@chnum}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@testpach{\@chclass
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    First we deal with the cases in which the \textsf{token}
+%    (\verb?#1?) is the argument of \texttt{!}, \texttt{@}, \texttt{<} or
+%    \texttt{>}. We can see this from the value of \cs{@lastchclass}:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum \@lastchclass=6 \@ne \@chnum \@ne \else
+  \ifnum \@lastchclass=7 5 \else
+   \ifnum \@lastchclass=8 \tw@ \else
+    \ifnum \@lastchclass=9 \thr@@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Otherwise we will assume that the \textsf{token} belongs to the
+%    class $0$
+%    and assign the corresponding number to \cs{@chnum} if our
+%    assumption is correct.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \else \z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the last \textsf{token} was a \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or a
+%    \texttt{b}, \cs{@chnum} already has the right value. This is the
+%    reason for the somewhat curious choice of the \textsf{token}
+%    numbers in class $10$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \ifnum \@lastchclass = 10 \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Otherwise we will check if \cs{@nextchar} is either a \texttt{c},
+%    \texttt{l} or an \texttt{r}.  Some applications change the
+%    catcodes of certain characters like ``\texttt{@}'' in
+%    \texttt{amstex.sty}. As a result the tests below would fail since
+%    they assume non-active character tokens. Therefore we evaluate
+%    \cs{@nextchar} once thereby turning the first token of its
+%    replacement text into a char. At this point here this should have
+%    been the only char present in \cs{@nextchar} which put into via a
+%    \cs{def}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \edef\@nextchar{\expandafter\string\@nextchar}%
+   \@chnum
+   \if \@nextchar c\z@ \else
+    \if \@nextchar l\@ne \else
+     \if \@nextchar r\tw@ \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If it is a different \textsf{token}, we know that the class was
+%    not $0$. We assign the value $0$ to \cs{@chnum} because this value
+%    is needed for the \verb?|?--\textsf{token}. Now we must check
+%    the remaining classes.  Note that the value of \cs{@chnum} is
+%    insignificant here for most classes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \z@ \@chclass
+   \if\@nextchar |\@ne \else
+    \if \@nextchar !6 \else
+     \if \@nextchar @7 \else
+      \if \@nextchar <8 \else
+       \if \@nextchar >9 \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The remaining permitted \textsf{tokens} are \texttt{p},
+%    \texttt{m} and \texttt{b} (class $10$).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  10
+  \@chnum
+  \if \@nextchar m\thr@@\else
+   \if \@nextchar p4 \else
+    \if \@nextchar b5 \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now the only remaining possibility is a forbidden \textsf{token},
+%    so we choose class $0$ and number $0$ and give an error message.
+%    Then we finish the macro by closing all \cs{if}'s.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \z@ \@chclass \z@ \@preamerr \z@ \fi \fi \fi \fi
+   \fi \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The preamble will be enlarged with the help of \cs{xdef}, but the
+% arguments of \texttt{>}, \texttt{<},~\texttt{!}\ and \texttt{@} are
+% not supposed to be expanded during the construction (we want an
+% implementation that doesn't need a \cs{protect}). So we have to find a
+% way to inhibit the expansion of those arguments.
+%
+% We will solve this problem with \textsf{token} registers. We need
+% one register for every \texttt{!}\ and \texttt{@}, while we need two
+% for every \texttt{c}, \texttt{l}, \texttt{r}, \texttt{m}, \texttt{p}
+% or \texttt{b}. This limits the number of columns of a table because
+% there are only 256 \textsf{token} registers. But then, who needs
+% tables with more than 100 columns?
+%
+% So how do we proceed? Let us assume that we had \verb?!{foo}? in the
+% user preamble and say we saved \texttt{foo} in
+% \textsf{token} register $5$. Then we call
+% \verb?\@addtopreamble{\the@toks5}? where
+% \cs{the@toks} is defined in a way that it does not expand
+% (for example it could be equivalent to \cs{relax}). Every
+% following call
+% of \cs{@addtopreamble} leaves \cs{the@toks5} unchanged in
+% \cs{@preamble}. If the construction of the preamble is completed
+% we change the definition of \cs{the@toks} to
+% \verb?\the\toks? and expand \cs{@preamble} for the last time.
+% During this process all parts of the form
+%    \cs{the@toks}\meta{Number}
+% will be substituted by the contents of the respective \textsf{token}
+% registers.
+%
+% As we can see from this informal discussion the construction of the
+% preamble has to take place within a group, so that the
+% \textsf{token} registers we use will be freed later on. For that
+% reason we keep all assignments to \cs{@preamble} global; therefore the
+% replacement text of this macro will remain the same after we leave
+% the group.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\count@}
+%    We further need a \textsf{count} register to remember which
+%    \textsf{token} register is to be used next. This will be
+%    initialized with $-1$ if we want to begin with the \textsf{token}
+%    register $0$. We use the \PlainTeX\ scratch register \cs{count@}
+%    because everything takes place locally. All we have to do is
+%    insert \cs{the@toks} \cs{the} \cs{count@} into the preamble.
+%    \cs{the@toks} will remain unchanged and \verb?\the\count@? expands into
+%    the saved number.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\prepnext@tok}
+%    The macro \cs{prepnext@tok} is in charge of preparing the next
+%    \textsf{token} register. For that purpose we increase
+%    \cs{count@} by $1$:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\prepnext@tok{\advance \count@ \@ne
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Then we locally delete any contents the
+%    \textsf{token} register might have.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \toks\count@{}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\save@decl}
+%    During the construction of the preamble the current
+%    \textsf{token} is always saved in the macro \cs{@nextchar} (see the
+%    definition of \cs{@mkpream}). The macro
+%    \cs{save@decl} saves it into the next free \textsf{token} register,
+%    i.e.\ in \verb?\toks\count@?.
+% We do not assume that the token register is free, we add the new
+% declarations to the front of the register. This is to allow user
+% preambles of the form, \verb?>{foo}>{bar}..?. Users are not encouraged to
+% enter such expressions directly, but they may result from the
+% rewriting of \cs{newcolumntype}'s.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\save@decl{\toks \count@ = \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+                  {\expandafter\@nextchar\the\toks\count@}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% How does the situation look like, if we want to add another column
+% to the preamble, i.e.\ if we have found a \texttt{c}, \texttt{l},
+% \texttt{r}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b} in the user
+% preamble?  In this case we have the problem of the \textsf{token}
+% register from \verb?>{..}? and \verb?<{..}? having to be inserted at this
+% moment because formating instructions like \cs{hfil} have to be set
+% around them. On the other hand it is not known yet, if any \verb?<{..}?
+% instruction will appear in the user preamble at all.
+%
+% We solve this problem by adding two \textsf{token} registers at a
+% time.  This explains, why we have freed the \textsf{token} registers
+% in \cs{prepnext@tok}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\insert@column}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sharp}
+%    We now define the macro \cs{insert@column} which will do
+%    this work for us.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\insert@column{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Here, we assume that the \textsf{count} register
+%    \cs{@tempcnta} has saved the value $\verb?\count@? - 1$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \the@toks \the \@tempcnta
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Next follows the \verb?#? sign which specifies the place
+%    where the text of the column shall be inserted. To avoid
+%    errors during the expansions in
+%    \cs{@addtopreamble} we hide this sign in the command
+%    \cs{@sharp} which is temporarily occupied with
+%    \cs{relax} during the build-up of the preamble.
+%    To remove unwanted spaces before and after the column text, we set
+%    an \cs{ignorespaces}  in front and a \cs{unskip} afterwards.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \ignorespaces \@sharp \unskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Then the second \textsf{token} register follows whose number should
+%    be saved in \cs{count@}.
+%    We make sure that there will be no further expansion after reading
+%    the number, by finishing with \cs{relax}. The case above is not
+%    critical since it is ended by \cs{ignorespaces}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \the@toks \the \count@ \relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mold@addamp}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@addamp}
+% \begin{macro}{\@addamp}
+%
+%    In the preamble a \verb?&? has to be inserted between any two columns;
+%    before the first column there should not be a \verb?&?. As the user
+%    preamble may start with a \verb?|? we have to remember somehow
+%    if we have already inserted a \verb?#? (i.e.\ a column). This is done
+%    with the boolean variable \cs{if@firstamp} that we test in
+%    \cs{@addamp}, the macro that inserts the \verb?&?.
+%
+% \begin{PW}
+%    PW: Later on, for horizontal lines in `continuous' tabulars,
+% I need to know how many columns there are in a tabular. I need a modified
+% kernel's \cs{@addamp} to do this and use the kernel's \cs{@curtab}
+% (a counter used in tabbing) to store the number of columns.
+%
+% \cs{m@mold@addamp} stores the kernel's definition of \cs{@addamp}, and
+% \cs{m@m@addamp} is the revised definition.
+% \end{PW}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \newif \@iffirstamp
+\let\m@mold@addamp\@addamp
+\newcommand*{\m@m@addamp}{%
+  \if@firstamp 
+    \@firstampfalse
+    \global\@curtab\@ne
+  \else
+    \@addtopreamble{&}
+    \global\advance\@curtab\@ne  
+  \fi}
+\let\@addamp\m@m@addamp
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@acol}
+% \begin{macro}{\@acolampacol}
+% \begin{macro}{\col@sep}
+%    We will now define some abbreviations for the extensions,
+%    appearing most often in the preamble build-up.
+%    Here \cs{col@sep} is a \textsf{dimen} register which is set
+%    equivalent to \cs{arraycolsep} in an \textsf{array}--environment,
+%    otherwise it is set equivalent to \cs{tabcolsep}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\col@sep
+\def\@acol{\@addtopreamble{\hskip\col@sep}}
+%    \def\@acolampacol{\@acol\@addamp\@acol}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkpream}
+% \begin{macro}{\the@toks}
+%    Now we can define the macro which builds up the preamble for the
+%    \cs{halign}.
+%    First we initialize \cs{@preamble}, \cs{@lastchclass}
+%    and the boolean variable \cs{if@firstamp}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mkpream#1{\gdef\@preamble{}\@lastchclass 4 \@firstamptrue
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    During the build-up of the preamble we cannot directly use the
+%    \verb?#? sign; this would lead to an error message in the next
+%    \cs{@addtopreamble} call.
+%    Instead, we use the command \cs{@sharp} at places where later
+%    a \verb?#? will be.
+%    This command is at first given the meaning \cs{relax};
+%    therefore it will not be expanded when the preamble
+%    is extended.
+%    In the macro \cs{@array}, shortly before the \cs{halign}
+%    is carried out, \cs{@sharp} is given its final meaning.
+%
+%    In a similar way,
+%    we deal with the commands \cs{@startpbox} and
+%    \cs{@endpbox}, although the reason is different here: these
+%    macros expand in many \textsf{tokens} which would delay the
+%    build-up of the preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \let\@sharp\relax \let\@startpbox\relax \let\@endpbox\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now we remove possible  $*$-forms and user-defined column
+%    specifiers in the user preamble by repeatedly executing the list
+%    \cs{NC@list} until the re-writes have no more effect. The
+%    expanded preamble will then be in the token register
+%    \cs{@temptokena}. Actually we need to know at this point that
+%    this is not \cs{toks0}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@temptokena{#1}\@tempswatrue
+   \@whilesw\if@tempswa\fi{\@tempswafalse\the\NC@list}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Afterwards we initialize all registers and macros, that we need
+%    for the build-up of the preamble.
+%    Since we want to start with the \textsf{token} register $0$,
+%    \cs{count@} has to contain the value $-1$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \count@\m@ne
+   \let\the@toks\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Then we call up \cs{prepnext@tok} in order to prepare the
+%    \textsf{token} register $0$ for use.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \prepnext@tok
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Having expanded all tokens defined using \cs{newcolumntype} (including
+% \verb?*?), we evaluate the remaining tokens, which are saved in
+% \cs{@temptokena}.  We use the \LaTeX--macro \cs{@tfor} to inspect each
+% token in turn.
+%    The strange appearing construction with \cs{expandafter} is
+%    based on the fact that we have to put the replacement text of
+%    \cs{@tempa} and not the macro \cs{@tempa} to this
+%    \LaTeX--macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \expandafter \@tfor \expandafter \@nextchar
+    \expandafter :\expandafter =\the\@temptokena \do
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The body of this loop (the group after the \cs{do})
+%    is executed for one \textsf{token} at a time, whereas
+%    the current \textsf{token} is saved in \cs{@nextchar}.
+%    At first we evaluate the current \textsf{token} with the already
+%    defined macro \cs{@testpach}, i.e.\ we assign to
+%    \cs{@chclass} the character class and to \cs{@chnum}
+%    the character number of this \textsf{token}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   {\@testpach
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Then we branch out depending on the value of \cs{@chclass} into
+%    different macros that extend the preamble respectively.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \ifcase \@chclass \@classz \or \@classi \or \@classii
+     \or \save@decl \or \or \@classv \or \@classvi
+     \or \@classvii \or \@classviii
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Class 9 is equivalent to class 10.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \or \@classx
+     \or \@classx \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Two cases deserve our special attention: Since the current
+%    \textsf{token} cannot have the character class $4$ (start) we
+%    have skipped this possibility. If the character class is $3$,
+%    only the content of \cs{@nextchar} has to be saved into the current
+%    \textsf{token} register; therefore we call up \cs{save@decl}
+%    directly and save a macro name.  After the preamble has been
+%    extended we assign the value of \cs{@chclass} to the counter
+%    \cs{@lastchclass} to assure that this information will be available
+%    during the next run of the loop.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@lastchclass\@chclass}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    After the loop has been finished space must still be added to
+%    the created preamble, depending on the last \textsf{token}.
+%    Depending on the value of \cs{@lastchclass} we perform
+%    the necessary operations.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \ifcase\@lastchclass
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the last class equals $0$ we add a
+%    \verb?\hskip \col@sep?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@acol \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If it equals $1$ we do not add any additional space so that the
+%    horizontal lines do not exceed the vertical ones.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Class $2$ is treated like class $0$ because a \verb?<{...}?  can
+%    only directly follow after class $0$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@acol \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Most of the other possibilities can only appear if the user
+%    preamble was defective. Class $3$ is not allowed since after a
+%    \verb?>{..}? there must always follow a \texttt{c}, \texttt{l},
+%    \texttt{r}, \texttt{p},\texttt{m} or \texttt{b}. We report an
+%    error and ignore the declaration given by \verb?{..}?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@preamerr \thr@@ \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \cs{@lastchclass} is $4$ the user preamble has been empty.
+%    To continue, we insert a \verb?#? in the preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@preamerr \tw@ \@addtopreamble\@sharp \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Class $5$ is allowed again. In this case
+%    (the user preamble ends with \verb?@{..}?) we need not
+%    do anything.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Any other case means that the arguments to \verb?@?, \texttt{!},
+%    \texttt{<}, \texttt{>}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b} have
+%    been forgotten. So we report an error and ignore the last
+%    \textsf{token}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \else  \@preamerr \@ne \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now that the build-up of the preamble is almost finished we can
+%    insert the \textsf{token} registers and therefore redefine
+%    \cs{the@toks}. The actual insertion, though, is performed
+%    later.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \def\the@toks{\the\toks}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The preamble is extended by the macros \cs{@classz} to
+% \cs{@classx} which are called by \cs{@mkpream}
+%  depending on \cs{@lastchclass}
+% (i.e. the character class of the last \textsf{token}).
+% \begin{macro}{\@classx}
+%    First we define \cs{@classx} because of its important r\^ole.
+%    When it is called we find that the current
+%    \textsf{token} is \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b}.
+%    That means that a new column has to start.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classx{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Depending on the value of \cs{@lastchclass} different actions
+%    must take place:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifcase \@lastchclass
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the last character class was $0$ we separate the columns by
+%    \verb?\hskip\col@sep? followed by \verb?&? and another
+%    \verb?\hskip\col@sep?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@acolampacol \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the last class was class $1$ --- that means that a vertical
+%    line was
+%    drawn, --- before this line a \verb?\hskip\col@sep? was inserted.
+%    Therefore there has to be only a \verb?&? followed by
+%    \verb?\hskip\col@sep?. But this \verb?&? may be inserted only
+%    if this is not the first column. This process is controlled
+%    by \cs{if@firstamp} in the macro \cs{addamp}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@addamp \@acol \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Class $2$ is treated like class $0$ because \verb?<{...}? can only
+%    follow after class $0$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@acolampacol \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Class $3$ requires no actions because all things necessary have
+%    been done by the preamble \textsf{token} \texttt{>}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Class $4$ means that we are at the beginning of the preamble.
+%    Therefore we start the preamble with \verb?\hskip\col@sep? and
+%    then call \cs{@firstampfalse}. This makes sure that a later
+%    \cs{@addamp} inserts the character
+%    \verb?&? into the preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@acol \@firstampfalse \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For class $5$ \textsf{tokens} only the character \verb?&? is inserted
+%    as a column separator. Therefore we call \cs{@addamp}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@addamp
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Other cases are impossible. For an example
+%    \verb?\@lastchclass = 6? ---a s it might appear in a
+%    preamble of the form \verb?...!p...? --- \texttt{p} would have
+%    been taken as an  argument of \texttt{!} by \cs{@testpach}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classz}
+%    If the character class of the last \textsf{token} is $0$ we have
+%    \texttt{c}, \texttt{l}, \texttt{r} or an argument of \texttt{m},
+%    \texttt{b} or\ \texttt{p}. In the first three cases the preamble
+%    must be extended the same way as if we had class $10$. The
+%    remaining two cases do not require any action because the space
+%    needed was generated by the last \textsf{token} (i.e.\
+%    \texttt{m}, \texttt{b} or \texttt{p}). Since \cs{@lastchclass} has
+%    the value $10$ at this point nothing happens when \cs{@classx} is
+%    called. So the macro \cs{@chlassz} may start like this:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classz{\@classx
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    According to the definition of \cs{insert@column} we must store
+%    the number of the \textsf{token} register in which a preceding
+%    \verb?>{..}? might have stored its argument into
+%    \cs{@tempcnta}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@tempcnta \count@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    To have \verb?\count@ = \@tmpcnta + 1? we prepare
+%    the next \textsf{token} register.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \prepnext@tok
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now the preamble must be extended with the column whose format
+%    can be determinated by \cs{@chnum}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@addtopreamble{\ifcase \@chnum
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \cs{@chnum} has the value $0$ a centered column has to be
+%    generated.
+%    So we begin with stretchable space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \hfil
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The command \cs{d@llarbegin} follows expanding into \cs{begingroup}
+%    (in the \textsf{tabular}--environment) or into \verb?$?.  Doing this
+%    (provided an appropriate setting of \cs{d@llarbegin}) we achieve
+%    that the contents of the columns of an \textsf{array}--environment
+%    are set in math mode while those of a \textsf{tabular}--environment
+%    are set in LR mode.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \d@llarbegin
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now we insert the contents of the two \textsf{token} registers
+%    and the symbol
+%    for the column entry (i.e.\ \verb?#? or
+%    more precise \cs{@sharp}) using \cs{insert@column}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \insert@column
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We end this case with \cs{d@llarend} and \cs{hfil} where \cs{d@llarend}
+%    again is either \verb?$? or \cs{endgroup}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \d@llarend \hfil \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The templates for \texttt{l} and \texttt{r} (i.e.\ \cs{@chnum} $1$
+%    or $2$) are generated the same way. Since one  \cs{hfil} is
+%    missing the text is moved to the relevant side.
+%    The \verb?\kern\z@? is needed in case of an empty column
+%    entry. Otherwise
+%    the \cs{unskip} in \cs{insert@column} removes the
+%    \cs{hfil}. Changed to \verb?\hskip1sp? so that it interacts better with
+%    \cs{@bsphack}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \hskip1sp\d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend \hfil \or
+      \hfil\hskip1sp\d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The templates for \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} and \texttt{b} mainly
+%    consist of a \textsf{box}. In case of \texttt{m} it is generated
+%    by \cs{vcenter}.  This command is allowed only in math
+%    mode. Therefore we start with a~\verb?$?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   $\vcenter
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The part of the templates which is the same in all three cases
+%    (\texttt{p}, \texttt{m} and \texttt{b})
+%    is built by the macros \cs{@startpbox} and
+%    \cs{@endpbox}. \cs{@startpbox} has an argument:
+%    the width of the column which is stored in the current
+%    \textsf{token} (i.e.\ \cs{@nextchar}).
+%    Between these two macros we find the well known
+%    \cs{insert@column}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox $\or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The templates for \texttt{p} and \texttt{b} are generated in the
+%    same way though we do not need the \verb?$? characters because we use
+%    \cs{vtop} or \cs{vbox}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \vtop \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox \or
+   \vbox \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Other values for \cs{@chnum} are impossible. Therefore we
+%    end the arguments to \cs{@addtopreamble} and \cs{ifcase}.
+%    Before we come to the end of \cs{@classz} we have to
+%    prepare the next \textsf{token} register.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \fi}\prepnext@tok}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classix}
+%    Class $9$ (\texttt{>}--\textsf{token}) prevented repeated
+% \verb?>? declarations for the same column. This restriction has been eased,
+% making class $9$ equivalent to class $10$. 
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Let \cs{@classix} to \cs{relax} (mempatch v3.10)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@classix\relax
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classviii}
+%    If the current \textsf{token} is a \texttt{<} the last character
+%    class must be $0$, or $2$ (as repeated \verb?<? expressions are allowed). 
+%    In this case it is not necessary to extend the
+%    preamble. Otherwise we output an error message, set \cs{@chclass}
+%    to $6$ and call \cs{@classvi}.  By doing this we achieve that
+%    \texttt{<} is treated like \texttt{!}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classviii{\ifnum \@lastchclass >\z@\ifnum\@lastchclass=\tw@\else
+      \@preamerr 4\@chclass 6 \@classvi \fi\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayrule}
+%    There is only one incompatibility with the original definition:
+%    the definition of \cs{@arrayrule}. In the original a line without
+%    width (e.g., the space between \verb?cc? and \verb?c|c?
+%    is equal)  is created by multiple insertions of 
+% \verb?\hskip .5\arrayrulewidth?.  
+%    We only insert a vertical line into the
+%    preamble.  This is done to prevent problems with \TeX's main
+%    memory when generating tables with many vertical lines in them
+%    (especially in the case of \textsf{floats}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arrayrule{\@addtopreamble \vline}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classvii}
+%    As a consequence it follows that in case of class $7$
+%    (\verb?@? \textsf{token})  the preamble need not to be extended.
+%    In the original definition \verb?\@lastchclass = 1?
+%    is treated by inserting \verb?\hskip .5\arrayrulewidth?.
+%    We only check if the last \textsf{token} was of class $3$ which is
+%    forbidden.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classvii{\ifnum \@lastchclass = \thr@@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If this is true we output an error message and
+%    ignore the declarations stored
+%    by the last  \verb?>{...}?, because these are overwritten
+%    by the argument of \texttt{@}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@preamerr \thr@@ \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classvi}
+%    If the current \textsf{token} is a regular \texttt{!}\ and the
+%    last class was $0$ or $2$ we extend the preamble with
+%    \verb?\hskip\col@sep?.  If the last \textsf{token} was of class $1$
+%    (for instance \verb?|?) we extend with \verb?\hskip \doublerulesep?
+%    because the construction \verb?!{...}? has to be treated like
+%    \verb?|?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classvi{\ifcase \@lastchclass
+      \@acol \or
+      \@addtopreamble{\hskip \doublerulesep}\or
+      \@acol \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now \verb?\@preamerr...? should follow because a
+%    user preamble of the form \verb?..>{..}!.? is not allowed.
+%    To save memory we call \cs{@classvii} instead which also
+%    does what we want.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \@classvii
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \cs{@lastchclass} is $4$ or $5$ nothing has to be done.
+%    Class $6$ to $10$ are not possible.
+%    So we finish the macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@classiii}
+%    In the case of character classes $2$ and $3$ (i.e.\ the argument
+%    of \texttt{<} or \texttt{>}) we only have to store the current
+%    \textsf{token} (\cs{@nextchar}) into the corresponding
+%    \textsf{token} register since the preparation and
+%    insertion of these registers
+%    are done by the macro \cs{@classz}.
+%    This is equivalent to calling \cs{save@decl} in the case of
+%    class $3$. To save command identifiers we do this call up
+%     in the macro \cs{@mkpream}.
+%
+%    Class $2$ exhibits a more complicated situation: the
+%    \textsf{token} registers have already been inserted by
+%    \cs{@classz}. So the value of \cs{count@} is too high
+%    by one. Therefore we decrease \cs{count@} by $1$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classii{\advance \count@ \m@ne
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Next we store the current \textsf{token} into the correct 
+%    \textsf{token} register by calling \cs{save@decl} and then
+%    increase the value of \cs{count@} again. At this point we
+%    can save memory once more (at the cost of time) if we use the
+%     macro \cs{prepnext@tok}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \save@decl\prepnext@tok}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classv}
+% Class $5$ is \texttt{@}-expressions (and is also called by class 1)
+% We do not expand the
+% \verb?@?-expression, but instead explicitly replace an
+% \cs{extracolsep} command by an assignment to \cs{tabskip} by a
+% method similar to the \cs{newcolumntype} system described later.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classv{\save@decl
+   \expandafter\NC@ecs\@nextchar\extracolsep{}\extracolsep\@@@
+   \@addtopreamble{\d@llarbegin\the@toks\the\count@\relax\d@llarend}%
+   \prepnext@tok}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NC@ecs}
+% Rewrite the first occurrence of \verb?\extracolsep{1in}? to
+% \verb?\tabskip1in\relax?. As a side effect discard any tokens after a
+% second \cs{extracolsep}, there is no point in the user entering two of
+% these commands anyway, so this is not really a restriction.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NC@ecs#1\extracolsep#2#3\extracolsep#4\@@@{\def\@tempa{#2}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\toks\count@={#1\tabskip#2\relax#3}\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classi}
+%    In the case of class $0$ we were able to generate the necessary
+%    space between columns by using the macro \cs{@classx}.
+%    Analogously the macro \cs{@classvi} can be used for class $1$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classi{\@classvi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Depending on \cs{@chnum} a vertical line
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \ifcase \@chnum \@arrayrule \or
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    or (in case of \verb?!{...}?) the current \textsf{token} --- stored
+%    in \cs{@nextchar} --- has to be inserted into the preamble.
+%    This corresponds to calling \cs{@classv}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \@classv \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startpbox}
+%    In \cs{@classz}  the macro \cs{@startpbox} is used.
+%    The width of the \textsf{parbox} is passed as an argument.
+%    \cs{vcenter}, \cs{vtop} or \cs{vbox} are already in the
+%    preamble. So we start with the braces for the wanted box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@startpbox#1{\bgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The argument is the width of the box. This information has to be
+%    assigned to \cs{hsize}.
+%    Then we assain default values to several parameters used in a
+%    \textsf{parbox}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \setlength\hsize{#1}\@arrayparboxrestore
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Our main problem is to obtain the same distance between succeeding
+%    lines of the \textsf{parbox}.
+%    We have to remember that the distance between two \textsf{parboxes}
+%    should be defined by \cs{@arstrut}. That means that it can be
+%    greater than the distance in a \textsf{parbox}.
+%    Therefore it is not enough to set a \cs{@arstrut} at the
+%    beginning and at the end of the \textsf{parbox}. This would
+%    dimension the distance
+%    between first and second line and the distance between the two
+%    last lines of the \textsf{parbox} wrongly.
+%    To prevent this we set an invisible rule of height
+%    \cs{@arstrutbox}
+%    at the beginning of the \textsf{parbox}. This has no effect on the
+%    depth of the first line. At the end of the \textsf{parbox} we set
+%    analogously another invisible rule which only affects the depth
+%    of the last line. It is necessary to wait inserting this strut
+%    until the paragraph actually starts to allow for things like
+%    \cs{parindent} changes via \verb?>{...}?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \everypar{%
+      \vrule \@height \ht\@arstrutbox \@width \z@
+      \everypar{}}%
+   }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@endpbox}
+%    If there are any declarations defined by \verb?>{...}?
+%    and \verb?<{...}?
+%    they now follow in the macro \cs{@classz} --- the contents
+%    of the column in between.
+%    So the macro \cs{@endpbox} must insert the \textsf{specialstrut}
+%    mentioned earlier and then close the group opened by
+%    \cs{@startpbox}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@endpbox{\@finalstrut\@arstrutbox \egroup\hfil}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Building and calling \texttt{\textbackslash halign}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@array}
+%    After we have discussed the macros needed for the evaluation
+%    of the user preamble we can define the macro \cs{@array}
+%    which uses these macros to create a \cs{halign}.
+%    It has two arguments. The first one is a position argument
+%    which can be \texttt{t}, \texttt{b} or \texttt{c}; the
+%    second one describes the wanted preamble,
+%    e.g.\ it has the form \verb?|c|c|c|?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@array[#1]#2{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    First we define a \textsf{strut} whose size basically corresponds
+%     to a normal \textsf{strut} multiplied by the factor
+%    \cs{arraystretch}.
+%    This \textsf{strut} is then  inserted into every row and enforces
+%     a minimal distance between two rows.
+%    Nevertheless, when using horizontal lines, large letters
+%    (like accented capital letters) still collide with such lines.
+%    Therefore at first we add to the height of a normal \textsf{strut}
+%    the value of the parameter \cs{extrarowheight}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@tempdima \ht \strutbox
+  \advance \@tempdima by\extrarowheight
+  \setbox \@arstrutbox \hbox{\vrule
+             \@height \arraystretch \@tempdima
+             \@depth \arraystretch \dp \strutbox
+             \@width \z@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Then we open a group, in which the user preamble is evaluated by
+%    the macro \cs{@mkpream}. As we know this must happen locally.
+%    This macro creates a preamble for a \cs{halign} and saves
+%    its result globally in the control sequence \cs{@preamble}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \begingroup
+  \@mkpream{#2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We again redefine \cs{@preamble} so that a call up of \cs{@preamble}
+%    now starts the \cs{halign}. Thus also the arguments of \texttt{>},
+%    \texttt{<}, \texttt{@} and \texttt{!}, saved in the
+%    \textsf{token} registers are inserted into the preamble.  The
+%    \cs{tabskip} at the beginning and end of the preamble is set to
+%    \textsf{0pt} (in the beginning by the use of \cs{ialign}). Also the
+%    command \cs{@arstrut} is build in, which inserts the
+%    \cs{@arstrutbox}, defined above. Of course, the opening brace after
+%    \cs{ialign} has to be implicit as it will be closed in \cs{endarray}
+%    or another macro.
+%
+%    The \cs{noexpand} in front of \cs{ialign} does no harm in standard \LaTeX{}
+%    and was added since some experimental support for using text glyphs in math
+%    redefines \cs{halign} with the result that is becomes expandable with
+%    disastrous results in cases like this. 
+%    In the kernel definition for this macro the problem does
+%    not surface because there \cs{protect} is set (which is not necessary in this 
+%    implementation as there is no arbitrary user input that can get expanded) and
+%    the experimental code made the redefinition robust. Whether this is the right
+%    approach is open to question; consider the \cs{noexpand} a curtesy to allow an
+%    unsupported redefinition of a \TeX{} primitive for the moment (as people rely
+%    on that experimental code).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \xdef\@preamble{\noexpand \ialign \@halignto
+                  \bgroup \@arstrut \@preamble
+                          \tabskip \z@ \cr}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    What we have not explained yet is the macro \cs{@halignto}
+%    that was just used. Depending on its replacement text the
+%    \cs{halign} becomes a \cs{halign} \texttt{to} \meta{dimen}.
+%    Now we close the group again. Thus
+%    \cs{@startpbox} and \cs{@endpbox} as well as all
+%    \textsf{token} registers get their former meaning back.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%     To support other packages  we include a hook
+%     into this part of the code which is a no-op in the main package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@arrayleft
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now we decide depending on the position argument in which
+%    \textsf{box} the \cs{halign} is to be put. (\cs{vcenter} may be used
+%    because we are in math mode.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \if #1t\vtop \else \if#1b\vbox \else \vcenter \fi \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now another implicit opening brace appears; then definitions
+%    which shall stay local follow. While constructing the
+%    \cs{@preamble} in \cs{@mkpream} the \verb?#? sign must be
+%    hidden in the macro \cs{@sharp} which is \cs{let} to
+%    \cs{relax} at that moment (see definition of \cs{@mkpream}).
+%    All these now get their actual meaning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \bgroup
+  \let \@sharp ##\let \protect \relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    With the above defined \textsf{struts} we fix down the distance
+%    between rows by setting \cs{lineskip} and \cs{baselineskip}
+%    to \textsf{0pt}. Since there have to be set \verb?$?'s
+%    around every column in the \textsf{array}--environment
+%     the parameter \cs{mathsurround} should
+%    also be set to \textsf{0pt}. This prevents additional space between
+%    the rows. The
+%    \PlainTeX--macro \cs{m@th} does this.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \lineskip \z@
+  \baselineskip \z@
+  \m@th
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Beside, we have to assign a special meaning (which we still have
+%    to specify) to the line separator \verb?\\?. We also have to
+%    redefine the command \cs{par} in such a way that empty lines in
+%    \cs{halign} cannot do any damage. We succeed in doing  so
+%    by choosing something that will disappear when expanding.
+%    After that we only have to call up \cs{@preamble} to
+%    start the wanted \cs{halign}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\\\@arraycr \let\tabularnewline\\\let\par\@empty \@preamble}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\extrarowheight}
+%    The \textsf{dimen} parameter used above also needs to be
+%    allocated.  As a default value we use \textsf{0pt}, to ensure
+%    compatibility with standard \LaTeX.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen \extrarowheight
+\extrarowheight=0pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arstrut}
+%    Now the insertion of \cs{@arstrutbox} through \cs{@arstut}
+%    is easy since we know exactly in which mode \TeX\ is while working
+%    on the \cs{halign} preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arstrut{\unhcopy\@arstrutbox}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{The line separator \texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arraycr}
+%    In the macro \cs{@array} the line separator \verb?\\? is
+%    \cs{let} to the command \cs{@arraycr}.
+%    Its definition starts with a special brace which I have directly
+%    copied from the original definition. It is
+%    necessary, because the \cs{futurlet} in \cs{@ifnextchar}
+%    might
+%    expand a  following \verb?&? \textsf{token} in a construction like
+%    \verb?\\ &?. This would otherwise end the alignment template at a
+%    wrong time. On the other hand we have to be careful to avoid
+%    producing a real group, i.e., \verb?{}?, because the command will also
+%    be used for the array environment, i.e., in math mode. In that
+%    case an extra \verb?{}? would produce an ord atom which could mess up
+%    the spacing. For this reason we use a combination that does not
+%    really produce a group at all but modifies the master counter so
+%    that a \verb?&? will not be considered belonging to the current
+%    \cs{halign} while we are looking for a \verb?*? or \verb?[?.
+%    For further information see
+%    \cite[Appendix D]{bk:knuth}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arraycr{\relax\iffalse{\fi\ifnum 0=`}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Then we test whether the user is using the star form and ignore
+%    a possible star (I also disagree with this procedure, because a
+%    star does not make any sense here).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifstar \@xarraycr \@xarraycr}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xarraycr}
+%    In the command \cs{@xarraycr} we test if an optional argument
+%    exists.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xarraycr{\@ifnextchar [%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If it does, we branch out into the macro \cs{@argarraycr} if
+%    not we close the special brace (mentioned above) and end the row
+%    of the \cs{halign} with a \cs{cr}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@argarraycr {\ifnum 0=`{}\fi\cr}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@argarraycr}
+%    If additional space is requested by the user this case is treated
+%    in the macro \cs{@argarraycr}. First we close the special brace
+%    and then we test if the additional space is positive.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@argarraycr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{}\fi\ifdim #1>\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If this is the case we create an invisible vertical rule with
+%    depth \verb?\dp\@arstutbox?${}+{}$\meta{wanted\ space}.
+%    Thus we achieve that all vertical lines specified
+%    in the user preamble by a \verb?|? are now
+%    generally drawn.
+%    Then the row ends with a \cs{cr}.
+%
+%    If the space is negative we end the row at once with a \cs{cr}
+%    and move back up with a \cs{vskip}.
+%
+%    While testing these macros I found out that the
+%    \cs{endtemplate}
+%    created by \cs{cr} and \verb?&? is something like an
+%    \cs{outer} primitive and therefore it should not appear in
+%    incomplete \cs{if} statements. Thus the following solution was
+%    chosen which hides the \cs{cr} in other macros when \TeX\
+%    is skipping conditional text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\@xargarraycr\else 
+  \expandafter\@yargarraycr\fi{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xargarraycr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yargarraycr}
+%    The following macros were already explained above.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xargarraycr#1{\unskip
+  \@tempdima #1\advance\@tempdima \dp\@arstrutbox
+  \vrule \@depth\@tempdima \@width\z@ \cr}
+\def\@yargarraycr#1{\cr\noalign{\vskip #1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Spanning several columns}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\multicolumn}
+%    If several columns should be held together with a special format
+%    the command \cs{multicolumn} must be used. It has three
+%    arguments: the number of columns to be covered; the format for
+%    the result column and the actual column entry.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\multicolumn#1#2#3{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    First we combine the given number of columns into a single one;
+%    then we start a new block so that the following definition is kept
+%    local.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \multispan{#1}\begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Since a \cs{multicolumn} should only describe the format of a
+%    result column, we redefine \cs{@addamp} in such a way that one gets
+%    an error message if one uses more than one \texttt{c},
+%    \texttt{l}, \texttt{r}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b} in
+%    the second argument. One should consider that this definition is
+%    local to the build-up of the preamble; an \textsf{array}-- or
+%    \textsf{tabular}--environment in the third argument of the
+%    \cs{multicolumn} is therefore worked through correctly as well.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \def\@addamp{\if@firstamp \@firstampfalse \else
+                \@preamerr 5\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Then we evaluate the second argument with the help of
+%    \cs{@mkpream}.
+%    Now we still have to insert the contents of the \textsf{token}
+%    register into the \cs{@preamble}, i.e.\ we have to say
+%    \verb?\xdef\@preamble{\@preamble}?. This is achieved shorter by
+%    writing:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@mkpream{#2}\@addtopreamble\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    After the \cs{@preamble} is created we forget all local
+%    definitions and occupations of the \textsf{token} registers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    In the special situation of  \cs{multicolumn} \cs{@preamble}
+%    is not needed as preamble for a \cs{halign} but it is directly
+%    inserted into our table. Thus instead of \cs{sharp}
+%    there has to be the column entry (\verb?#3?) wanted by the user.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \def\@sharp{#3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now we can pass the \cs{@preamble} to \TeX\ . For safety
+%    we start with an \cs{@arstrut}. This should usually be in the
+%    template for the first column however we do not know if this
+%    template was overwritten by our \cs{multicolumn}.
+%    We also add a \cs{null} at the right end to prevent any following
+%    \cs{unskip} (for example from \verb?\\[..]?) to remove the \cs{tabcolsep}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \@arstrut \@preamble
+   \null
+   \ignorespaces}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%   \subsubsection{The environment definitions}
+%
+% After these preparations we are able to define the environments. They
+% only differ in the initialisations of \cs{d@llar...}, \cs{col@sep}
+%  and \cs{@halignto}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@halignto}
+% \begin{macro}{\d@llarbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\d@llarend}
+%    In order to relieve the \textsf{save stack} we assign the
+%    replacement texts for \cs{@halignto} globally. \cs{d@llar} has to be
+%    local since otherwise nested \textsf{tabular} and \textsf{array}
+%    environments (via \cs{multicolumn}) are impossible.
+%    When the new font selection scheme is in force we have to 
+%    we surround all \cs{halign} entries 
+%    with braces. See remarks in TUGboat 10\#2. Actually we are going
+%    to use \cs{begingroup} and \cs{endgroup}. However, this is only
+%    necessary when we are in text mode. In math the surrounding
+%    dollar signs will already serve as the necessary extra grouping
+%    level. Therefore we switch the settings of \cs{d@llarbegin} and
+%    \cs{d@llarend} between groups and dollar signs.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\d@llarbegin\begingroup
+\let\d@llarend\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\array}
+%    Our new definition of \cs{array} then reads:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\array{\col@sep\arraycolsep
+  \def\d@llarbegin{$}\let\d@llarend\d@llarbegin\gdef\@halignto{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Since there might be an optional argument we call another
+%    macro which is also used by the other environments.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@tabarray}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabarray}
+%    This macro tests for an optional bracket and then calls up
+%    \cs{@@array} or \verb?\@@array[c]? (as default).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabarray{\@ifnextchar[{\@@array}{\@@array[c]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@array}
+%    This macro could then test an optional delimiter before the
+%    left brace of the main preamble argument. At this point 
+%    it simply is let to be \cs{@array}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@@array\@array
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabular*}
+%    The environments \textsf{tabular} and \textsf{tabular$*$} differ
+%    only in the initialisation of the command \cs{@halignto}. Therefore
+%    we define
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tabular{\gdef\@halignto{}\@tabular}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%     and analoguesly for the star form. We evalute the argument first 
+%     using \cs{setlength} so that users of the \texttt{calc} package can
+%     write code like\\ \verb?\begin{tabular*}{(\columnwidth-1cm)/2}...?
+%     \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname tabular*\endcsname#1{%
+       \setlength\dimen@{#1}%
+       \xdef\@halignto{to\the\dimen@}\@tabular}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabular}
+%    The rest of the job is carried out by the \cs{@tabular} macro:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabular{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    First of all we have to make sure that we start out in
+%    \textsf{hmode}.  Otherwise we might find our table dangling by
+%    itself on a line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \leavevmode
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    It should be taken into consideration that the macro \cs{@array}
+%    must be called in math mode. Therefore we open a \textsf{box},
+%    insert a \verb?$? and then assign the correct values to \cs{col@sep} and
+%    \cs{d@llar...}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \hbox \bgroup $\col@sep\tabcolsep \let\d@llarbegin\begingroup
+                                    \let\d@llarend\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now everything \textsf{tabular} specific is done and we are able to
+%    call the \cs{@tabarray} macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@tabarray}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endarray}
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayleft}
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayright}
+%    When the processing of \textsf{array} is finished we have to
+%    close the \cs{halign}
+%    and afterwards the surrounding \textsf{box} selected by
+%    \cs{@array}. To save \textsf{token} space we then redefine
+%    \cs{@preamble}
+%    because its replacement text isn't longer needed.
+%    We have to declare the hook, \cs{@arrayleft}, we put into \cs{@array} above.
+%    A similar hook `\cs{@arrayright}' is inserted into the
+%    \cs{endarray} to gain control. Both defaults to empty.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endarray{\crcr \egroup \egroup \@arrayright \gdef\@preamble{}}
+\let\@arrayleft\@empty
+\let\@arrayright\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabular*}
+%    To end a \textsf{tabular} or \textsf{tabular$*$} environment we
+%    call up \cs{endarray}, close the math mode and then the surrounding
+%    \cs{hbox}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endtabular{\endarray $\egroup}
+\expandafter\let\csname endtabular*\endcsname=\endtabular
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We should \cs{let} all macros
+% to \cs{relax} that were used in the kernel but are no longer
+%  necessary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@ampacol=\relax        \let\@expast=\relax
+\let\@arrayclassiv=\relax   \let\@arrayclassz=\relax
+\let\@tabclassiv=\relax     \let\@tabclassz=\relax
+\let\@arrayacol=\relax      \let\@tabacol=\relax
+\let\@tabularcr=\relax      \let\@@endpbox=\relax
+\let\@argtabularcr=\relax   \let\@xtabularcr=\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@preamerr}
+%    We also have to redefine the error routine \cs{@preamerr} since
+%    new kind of errors are possible.
+%    The code for this macro is not perfect yet;
+%    it still needs too much memory.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@preamerr#1{\def\@tempd{{..} at wrong position: }%
+   \ClassError{memoir}{%
+   \ifcase #1 Illegal pream-token (\@nextchar): `c' used\or %0
+    Missing arg: token ignored\or                           %1
+    Empty preamble: `l' used\or                             %2
+    >\@tempd token ignored\or                               %3
+    <\@tempd changed to !{..}\or                            %4
+    Only one column-spec. allowed.\fi}\@ehc}                %5
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Defining your own column specifiers}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newcolumntype}
+%    In \texttt{newarray.sty} the macro for specifying new columns was
+%    named \cs{newcolumn}. When the functionality was added to
+%    \texttt{array.sty} the command was renamed \cs{newcolumntype}.
+% The \cs{newcolumntype} macro gives users the chance
+% to define letters, to be used in the same way as the primitive
+% column specifiers, `c' `p' etc.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newcolumntype#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{NC@char} is so that active characters, like \verb?@? in
+% AMS\LaTeX\ may be used. Note that we need to use the possibly active token,
+% \verb?#1?, in several places, as that is the token that actually
+% appears in the preamble argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef\NC@char{\string#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% First we check whether there is already a definition for this column.
+% Unlike \cs{newcommand} we give a warning rather than an error if it is
+% defined. If it is a new column, add \cs{NC@do} \meta{column} to
+% the list \cs{NC@list}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifundefined{NC@find@\NC@char}%
+    {\@tfor\next:=<>clrmbp@!|\do{\if\noexpand\next\NC@char
+        \@memwarn{Redefining primitive column \NC@char}\fi}%
+     \NC@list\expandafter{\the\NC@list\NC@do#1}}%
+    {\@memwarn{Column \NC@char\space is already defined}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now we define a macro with an argument delimited by the new column
+% specifier, this is used to find occurences of this specifier in the
+% user preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{NC@find@\NC@char}##1#1{\NC@{##1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If an optional argument was not given, give a default argument of 0.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifnextchar[{\newcol@{\NC@char}}{\newcol@{\NC@char}[0]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\newcol@}
+% We can now define the macro which does the rewriting,
+% \cs{@reargdef} takes the same arguments as \cs{newcommand}, but
+% does not check that the command is new. For a column, say `D' with
+% one argument, define a command \cs{NC@rewrite@D} with one
+% argument, which recursively calls \cs{NC@find} on the user preamble
+% after replacing the first token or group with the replacement text
+% specified in the \cs{newcolumntype} command. \cs{NC@find} will find the
+% next occurrence of `D' as it will be \cs{let} equal to
+% \cs{NC@find@D} by \cs{NC@do}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newcol@#1[#2]#3{\expandafter\@reargdef
+     \csname NC@rewrite@#1\endcsname[#2]{\NC@find#3}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\NC@}
+% Having found an occurence of the new column, save the preamble
+% before the column in \cs{@temptokena}, then check to see if we
+% are at the end of the preamble. (A dummy occurrence of the column
+% specifier will be placed at the end of the preamble by \cs{NC@do}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NC@#1{%
+  \@temptokena\expandafter{\the\@temptokena#1}\futurelet\next\NC@ifend}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\NC@ifend}
+% We can tell that we are at the end as \cs{NC@do} will place a \cs{relax}
+% after the dummy column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NC@ifend{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If we are at the end, do nothing. (The whole preamble will now be in
+% \cs{@temptokena}.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\next\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise set the flag \cs{if@tempswa}, and rewrite the column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \else\@tempswatrue\expandafter\NC@rewrite\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\NC@do}
+% If the user has specified `C' and `L' as new columns, the list of
+% rewrites (in the token register \cs{NC@list}) will look like
+% \verb?\NC@do *? \verb?\NC@do C? \verb?\NC@do L?.
+% So we need to define \cs{NC@do} as a one argument macro which
+% initialises the rewriting of the specified column. Let us assume that
+% `C' is the argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NC@do#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% First we let \cs{NC@rewrite} and \cs{NC@find} be
+% \cs{NC@rewrite@C} and \cs{NC@find@C} respectively.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\NC@rewrite
+    \csname NC@rewrite@\string#1\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\NC@find
+    \csname NC@find@\string#1\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Clear the token register \cs{@temptokena} after putting the present
+% contents of the register in front of the token \cs{NC@find}. At the
+% end we place the tokens `\verb?C\relax?' which \cs{NC@ifend} will use
+% to detect the end of the user preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\expandafter}%
+        \expandafter\NC@find\the\@temptokena#1\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\showcols}
+% This macro is useful for debugging \cs{newcolumntype} specifications,
+% it is the equivalent of the primitive \cs{show} command for macro
+% definitions.  All we need to do is locally redefine \cs{NC@do} to take
+% its argument (say `C') and then \cs{show} the (slightly modified)
+% definition of \cs{NC@rewrite@C}. Actually as the the list always
+% starts off with \verb?\NC@do *? and we do not want to print the
+% definition of the $*$-form, define \cs{NC@do} to throw away the first
+% item in the list, and then redefine itsef to print the rest of the
+% definitions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\showcols{{\def\NC@do##1{\let\NC@do\NC@show}\the\NC@list}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\NC@show}
+% If the column `C' is defined as above, then
+% \verb?\show\NC@rewrite@C? would output\\
+% \verb?\long macro: ->\NC@find >{$}c<{$}?.
+% We want to strip the \verb?\long macro: ->? and the \cs{NC@find}. So first we
+% use \cs{meaning} and then apply the macro \cs{NC@strip} to the tokens so
+% produced and then \cs{typeout} the required string.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NC@show#1{%
+  \typeout{Column #1\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\NC@strip
+  \expandafter\meaning\csname NC@rewrite@#1\endcsname\@@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\NC@strip}
+% Delimit the arguments to \cs{NC@strip} with `\texttt{:}', `\texttt{->}',
+% a space, and \cs{@@} to pull out the required parts of the output from
+% \cs{meaning}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NC@strip#1:#2->#3 #4\@@{#2 -> #4}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\NC@list}
+% Allocate the token register used for the rewrite list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\NC@list
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The $*$--form}
+% We view the $*$-form as a slight generalisation of the system
+% described in the previous subsection. The idea is to define a $*$
+% column by a command of the form:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newcolumntype{*}[2]{%
+%    \count@=#1\ifnum\count@>0
+%       \advance\count@ by -1 #2*{\count@}{#2}\fi}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macro}{\NC@rewrite@*}\label{NC@rewrite@*}
+% This does not work however as \cs{newcolumntype} takes great care not
+% to expand anything in the preamble, and so the \cs{if} is never
+% expanded. \cs{newcolumntype} sets up various other parts of the
+% rewrite correctly though so we can define:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcolumntype{*}[2]{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now we must correct the definition of \cs{NC@rewrite@*}. The
+% following is probably more efficient than a direct translation of
+% the idea sketched above, we do not need to put a $*$ in the preamble
+% and call the rewrite recursively, we can just put \verb?#1? copies of
+% \verb?#2? into \cs{@temptokena}. (Nested $*$ forms will be expanded
+% when the whole rewrite list is expanded again, see \cs{@mkpream})
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fixed original bug in \cs{NC@rewrite@*} (mempatch v3.3)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\@namedef{NC@rewrite@*}#1#2{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Store the number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \count@#1\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Put \verb?#1? copies of \verb?#2? in the token register.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \loop
+  \ifnum\count@>\z@
+    \advance\count@\m@ne
+    \@temptokena\expandafter{\the\@temptokena#2}%
+  \repeat
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{NC@do} will ensure that \cs{NC@find} is \cs{let} equal
+% to \cs{NC@find@*}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \NC@find}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Getting the spacing around rules right}
+%
+% The Companion~\cite[p.137]{GOOSSENS94} suggests two additional
+% commands to control the allignments in case of tabulars with
+% horizontal lines. They are now added to this package.
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\extratabsurround}
+%    The extra space around a table when \cs{firsthline} or \cs{lasthline}
+%    are used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\extratabsurround}
+\setlength{\extratabsurround}{2pt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\backup@length}
+%    This register will be used internally by \cs{firsthline} and
+%    \cs{lasthline}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\backup@length}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\firsthline}
+%    This code can probably be improved but for the moment it should
+%    serve.
+%
+%    We start by producing a single tabular row without any visible
+%    content that will produce the external reference point in case
+%    \verb?[t]? is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\firsthline}{%
+  \multicolumn1c{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Within this row we calculate \cs{backup@length} to be the height
+%    plus depth of a standard line. In addition we have to add the
+%    width of the \cs{hline}, something that was forgotten in the
+%    original definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \global\backup@length\ht\@arstrutbox
+    \global\advance\backup@length\dp\@arstrutbox
+    \global\advance\backup@length\arrayrulewidth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Finally we do want to make the height of this first line be a bit
+%    larger than usual, for this we place the standard array strut
+%    into it but raised by \cs{extratabsurround}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \raise\extratabsurround\copy\@arstrutbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Having done all this we end the line and back up by the value of
+%    \cs{backup@length} and then finally place our \cs{hline}. This should
+%    place the line exactly at the right place but keep the reference
+%    point of the whole tabular at the baseline of the first row.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    }\\[-\backup@length]\hline
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lasthline}
+%    For \cs{lasthline} the situation is even worse and I got it
+%    completely wrong initially.
+%
+%    The problem in this case is that if the optional argument \verb?[b]?
+%    is used we do want the reference point of the tabular be at the
+%    baseline of the last row but at the same time do want the the
+%    depth of this last line increased by \cs{extratabsurround} without
+%    changing the placement \cs{hline}.
+%
+%    We start by placing the rule followed by an invisible row.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\lasthline}{\hline\multicolumn1c{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We now calculate \cs{backup@length} to be the height and depth of
+%    two lines plus the width of the rule.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \global\backup@length2\ht\@arstrutbox
+    \global\advance\backup@length2\dp\@arstrutbox
+    \global\advance\backup@length\arrayrulewidth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    This will bring us back to the baseline of the second last row:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    }\\[-\backup@length]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Thus if we now add another invisible row the reference point of
+%    that row will be at the baseline of the last row (and will be the
+%    reference for the whole tabular). Since this row is invisible we
+%    can enlarge its depth by the desired amount.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \multicolumn1c{%
+       \lower\extratabsurround\copy\@arstrutbox
+       }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%    Beside a larger functionality \file{array.sty} has one
+%    important difference to the standard \texttt{tabular} and
+%    \texttt{array} environments: horizontal and vertical rules make a
+%    table larger or wider, e.g., \cs{doublerulesep} really denotes
+%    the space between two rules and isn't measured from the middle of
+%    the rules.
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@xhline}
+%    For vertical rules this is implemented by the definitions above,
+%    for horizontal rules we have to take out the backspace.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\CheckCommand*\@xhline{\ifx\reserved@a\hline
+               \vskip\doublerulesep
+               \vskip-\arrayrulewidth
+             \fi
+      \ifnum0=`{\fi}}
+\renewcommand*\@xhline{\ifx\reserved@a\hline
+               \vskip\doublerulesep
+             \fi
+      \ifnum0=`{\fi}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%% end Array package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{D column specifiers} \label{sec:dcolumns}
+%
+% The description and code are essentially copied from the 
+% \Lpack{dcolumn} package~\cite{DCOLUMN}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%% Dcolumn package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% The \Lpack{dcolumn} package~\cite{DCOLUMN} defines \texttt{D} 
+% to be a column specifier
+% with three arguments.\\
+% \verb?D?\marg{sep.tex}\marg{sep.dvi}\marg{decimal places}
+% for columns which are to be aligned on a `decimal point'.
+% 
+%
+% The basic ideas behind these macros have been explained earlier.
+% However they use three
+% tricks which may be useful in other contexts.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The separator is surrounded in extra \verb?{ }?, so that it is set
+% with \cs{mathord} spacing, otherwise, for instance a `,' would have
+% extra space after it.
+% \item The separator is not given its special definition by making it
+% active, as this would not work for an entry such as \verb?& .5 &?, as the
+% first token of an alignment entry is read \emph{before} the preamble
+% part, incase it is an \cs{omit}, in which case the preamble is to be
+% omitted. Instead we switch the mathcode to (hex) 8000, which makes the
+% token act as if it were active.
+% \item Although \verb?\mathcode`.="8000?  makes \texttt{.} act as if it
+% were active, it is still not allowed in constructions such as
+% \verb?\def.{}?, even in math-mode, so we have to construct an active
+% version of the separator, this is done by making it the uppercase of
+% \verb?~?, and then using the construct\\
+% \verb?\uppercase{\def~}?\marg{definition}.\\
+% Note that the \meta{definition} is not uppercased, so the definition
+% can refer to the standard, non-active use of the separator.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DC@}
+% Set up uppercase tables as required, and then grab the first part of
+% the numerical argument into \cs{count@}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DC@#1#2#3{%
+  \uccode`\~=`#1\relax
+  \m@th
+  \afterassignment\DC@x\count@#3\relax{#1}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DC@x}
+% If \cs{count@} is negative, centre on the decimal point. If it is
+% positive either \verb?#1? will be empty in which case bad out decimal
+% part to the number of digits specified by \cs{count@} or 
+% it is none empty in which case \cs{count@} contains the
+% number of digits to the left of the point, and \verb?#1? contains a junk
+% token (probably \verb?.?) followed by the number of digits to the right
+% of the point. In either of these latter cases, \cs{DC@right} is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DC@x#1\relax#2#3{%
+  \ifnum\z@>\count@
+    \expandafter\DC@centre
+  \else
+    \expandafter\DC@right
+  \fi
+  {#2}{#3}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DC@centre}
+% If centering on the decimal point, just need to box up the two halves.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DC@centre#1#2#3{%
+  \let\DC@end\DC@endcentre
+  \uppercase{\def~}{$\egroup\setbox\tw@=\hbox\bgroup${#2}}%
+  \setbox\tw@=\hbox{${\phantom{{#2}}}$}%
+  \setbox\z@=\hbox\bgroup$\mathcode`#1="8000 }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DC@endcentre}
+% and then pad out the smaller of the two boxes so there is the same
+% amount of stuff either side of the point.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DC@endcentre{$\egroup
+    \ifdim \wd\z@>\wd\tw@
+      \setbox\tw@=\hbox to\wd\z@{\unhbox\tw@\hfill}%
+    \else
+      \setbox\z@=\hbox to\wd\tw@{\hfill\unhbox\z@}\fi
+    \box\z@\box\tw@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DC@right}
+% This deals with both the cases where a specified number of decimal
+% places is given.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DC@right#1#2#3{%
+  \ifx\relax#3\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \verb?#3? is empty, add \cs{hfill} to right align the column, and 
+% Just set \cs{DC@rl} to begin a group, so nothing fancy is done with
+% the whole number part.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \hfill
+    \let\DC@rl\bgroup
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise  set \cs{DC@rl} so that the whole number part is put in a
+% box \cs{count@} times as wide as a digit.
+% In order to share code with the other branch, then move \verb?#3? (the
+% number of decimal places) into \cs{count@} throwing away the `.' from
+% the user syntax.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \edef\DC@rl{to\the\count@\dimen@ii\bgroup\hss\hfill}%
+    \count@\@gobble#3\relax
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\DC@end\DC@endright
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Box 2 contains the decimal part, set to \cs{dimen@} which is
+% calculated below to be \cs{count@} times the width of a digit, plus
+% the width of the `decimal point'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \uppercase{\def~}{$\egroup\setbox\tw@\hbox to\dimen@\bgroup${#2}}%
+   \setbox\z@\hbox{$1$}\dimen@ii\wd\z@
+   \dimen@\count@\dimen@ii
+   \setbox\z@\hbox{${#2}$}\advance\dimen@\wd\z@
+   \setbox\tw@\hbox to\dimen@{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Box 0 contains the whole number part, either just at its natural
+% size for right aligned columns, or set to (the old value of)
+% \cs{count@} times the width of a digit. \cs{DC@rl} defined above
+% determines the two cases.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \setbox\z@\hbox\DC@rl$\mathcode`#1="8000 }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DC@endright}
+% Just finish off the second box, and then put out both boxes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DC@endright{$\hfil\egroup\box\z@\box\tw@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{D}
+% The user interface, define the {\tt D} column to take three arguments.
+% For special purposes, you may need to directly access \cs{DC@} rather
+% than the \verb?D? column, eg to get a bold version you could use
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \newcolumntype{E}[3]{>{\boldmath\DC@{#1}{#2}{#3}}c<{\DC@end}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcolumntype{D}[3]{>{\DC@{#1}{#2}{#3}}c<{\DC@end}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%% end Dcolumn package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Support for delimeters}
+%
+% The description and code are essentially from the 
+% \Lpack{delarray} package~\cite{DELARRAY}, v1.01 1994/03/14.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%% Delarray package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% The array syntax is extended by
+% supporting the notation of delimiters. To this end we extend the
+% array parsing mechanism to include a hook which can be used by this
+% (or another) package to do some additional parsing.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@array}
+%    This macro tests for an optional delimiter before the left brace
+%    of the main preamble argument. If there is no delimiter,
+%    \cs{@arrayleft} and \cs{@arrayright} are made a no-ops, and
+%    \cs{@array} is called with the positional argument. Otherwise
+%    call \cs{@del@array}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@array[#1]{\@ifnextchar\bgroup
+  {\let\@arrayleft\relax\let\@arrayright\relax\@array[#1]}%
+  {\@del@array[#1]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@del@array}
+%    We now know that we have an {\tt array} (or {\tt tabular}) with
+%    delimiters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@del@array[#1]#2#3#4{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following line is completely redundant but it does catch errors
+% involving delimiters  before the processing of the alignment begins.
+% A common error is likely to be omiting the `.' in a
+% \cs{cases}-type construction. This causes the first token of the
+% alignment to be gobbled, possibly causing lots of spurious errors
+% before the cause of the error, the missing delimiter, is discovered as
+% \cs{@arrayright} puts the alignment and the delimiters together.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \setbox\z@\hbox{$\left#2\right#4$}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In the case of a `c' argument we do not need to rebox the alignment,
+% so we can define \cs{@arrayleft} and \cs{@arrayright} just to
+% insert the delimiters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \if#1c\def\@arrayleft{\left#2}\def\@arrayright{\right#4}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we (should) have a {\tt[t]} or {\tt[b]} argument, so first we
+% store the alignment, without delimiters in box0.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \else\def\@arrayleft{\setbox\z@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Then after the alignment is finished:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@arrayright{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Calculate the amount the box needs to be lowered (this will be
+% negative in the case of \verb?[b]?). A little bit of arithmetic cf.\
+% \theTeXbook, Appendix G, rule 8. We calculate the amount this
+% way, rather than just taking the difference between the depth of box0
+% and the depth of the box defined below, as the depth of that box may
+% be affected by the delimiters if \cs{delimitershortfall} or
+% \cs{delimiterfactor} have non-standard values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \dimen@=\dp\z@
+     \advance\dimen@-\ht\z@
+     \divide \dimen@ by \tw@
+     \advance\dimen@ by\fontdimen22 \textfont\tw@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now lower the alignment and the delimiters into place.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \lower\dimen@\hbox{$\left#2\vcenter{\unvbox\z@}\right#4$}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% End the \verb?\if#1c?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now that we have defined \cs{@arrayleft} and \cs{@arrayright}, call
+% \cs{@array}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@array[#1]{#3}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%% end Delarray package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The tabularx environment}
+%
+% The code and description are essentially from David Carlisle's  
+% \Lpack{tabularx} package~\cite{TABULARX}, v2.07 1999/01/07.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%% Tabularx package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% The \Lpack{tabularx} package~\cite{TABULARX} implements a version of the \texttt{tabular}
+% environment in which the widths of certain columns are calculated so
+% that the table is is a specified width. The columns that may stretch are
+% marked by an \texttt{X} in the preamble argument.
+%
+%
+% First some registers etc.\ that we need.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\TX@col@width
+\newdimen\TX@old@table
+\newdimen\TX@old@col
+\newdimen\TX@target
+\newdimen\TX@delta
+\newcount\TX@cols
+\newif\ifTX@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now a trick to get the body of an environment into a token register,
+% without doing any expansion. This does not do any real checking of
+% nested environments, so if you should need to nest one {\ttfamily
+% tabularx} inside another, the inner one must be surrounded by \verb?{ }?.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabularx}
+%  Just save
+% the width specification separately, then clear the token register
+% \cs{toks@}.
+% Finally call \cs{TX@get@body} to begin saving the body of the table.
+% The \verb?{\ifnum0=`}\fi? allows \verb?tabularx? to appear
+% inside a \cs{halign}.^^A
+% \setbox0=\hbox{\footnotesize\verb?\iffalse{\fi\ifnum0=`}\fi?}^^A
+% \setbox2=\hbox{\footnotesize\verb?\ifnum0=`{}\fi?}^^A
+% \footnote{This adds an extra level of grouping,
+% which is not really needed. Instead, I could use \box0\ here, and
+% \box2\ below, however the code here would then have to be moved after
+% the first line, because of the footnote to page 386 of \theTeXbook,
+% and I do not think I should be writing code that is so obscure as to
+% be documented in a footnote in an appendix called ``Dirty Tricks''!}
+%
+% This mechanism of grabbing an environment body does have the
+% disadvantage (shared with the AMS alignment environments) that you
+% can not make extension environments by code such as
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newenvironment{foo}{\begin{tabularx}{XX}}{\end{tabularx}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% as the code is looking for a literal string \verb?\end{tabularx}? to stop
+% scanning. One may avoid this problem by using
+% \cs{tabularx} and \cs{endtabularx} directly in the definition:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newenvironment{foo}{\tabularx{XX}}{\endtabularx}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The scanner now looks for the end of the current environment (\verb?foo? in
+% this example.) There are some restrictions on this usage, the
+% principal one being that \cs{endtabularx} is the \emph{first} token of
+% the `end code' of the environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tabularx#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Allow \cs{tabularx} \cs{endtabularx} (but not \verb?\begin{tabularx}?
+% \verb?\end{tabularx}?) to be used in \cs{newenvironment} definitions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\TX@{\@currenvir}%
+  {\ifnum0=`}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{setlength} lets you
+% use the \Lpack{calc} package so you could use a width of, say \\
+%  \verb?(\textwidth-12pt)/2?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \setlength\TX@target{#1}%
+  \TX@typeout{Target width: #1 = \the\TX@target.}%
+  \toks@{}\TX@get@body}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+
+%  \begin{macro}{\endtabularx}
+% This does not do very much\ldots
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\endtabularx\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@get@body}
+% Place all tokens as far as the first \cs{end} into a token register.
+% Then call \cs{TX@find@end} to see if we are at \verb?\end{tabularx}?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\TX@get@body#1\end
+  {\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@#1}\TX@find@end}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@find@end}
+% If we are at \verb?\end{tabularx}?, call \cs{TX@endtabularx}, otherwise
+% add \verb?\end{...}? to the register, and call \cs{TX@get@body} again.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TX@find@end#1{%
+  \def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\TX@\expandafter\TX@endtabularx
+  \else\toks@\expandafter
+    {\the\toks@\end{#1}}\expandafter\TX@get@body\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@}
+% The string \texttt{tabularx} as a macro for testing with \cs{ifx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TX@{tabularx}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now that all the parts of the table specification are stored in
+% registers, we can begin the work of setting the table.
+%
+% The algorithm for finding the correct column widths is as follows.
+% Firstly set the table with each \texttt{X} column the width of the
+% final table. Assuming that there is at least one \texttt{X} column,
+% this will produce a table that is too wide. Divide the excess width by
+% the number of \texttt{X} columns, and reduce the column width by
+% this amount. Reset the table. If the table is not now the correct
+% width, a \cs{multicolumn} entry must be `hiding' one of the {\ttfamily
+% X} columns, and so there is one less \texttt{X} column affecting
+% the width of the table. So we reduce by 1 the number of X columns and
+% repeat the process.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@endtabularx}
+% Although I have tried to make \texttt{tabularx} look like an
+% environment, it is in fact a command, all the work is done by this
+% macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TX@endtabularx{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define the \texttt{X} column, with an internal version of the
+% \cs{newcolumntype} command. The \cs{expandafter} commands enable
+% \cs{NC@newcol}  to get the \emph{expansion} of\\
+% \verb?\tabularxcolumn{\TX@col@width}? as its
+% argument. This will be the definition of an \texttt{X} column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\TX@newcol\expandafter{\tabularxcolumn{\TX@col@width}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Initialise the column width, and the number of \texttt{X} columns.
+% The number of \texttt{X} columns is set to one, which means that
+% the initial count will be one too high, but this value is decremented
+% before it is used in the main loop.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\verb\TX@verb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Save the values of all \LaTeX\ counters; the list
+% \cs{cl@@ckpt} contains the names of all the \LaTeX\ counters that have
+% been defined so far. We expand \cs{setcounter} at this point, as it
+% results in fewer tokens being stored in \cs{TX@ckpt}, but the actual
+% resetting of the counters occurs when \cs{TX@ckpt} is expanded after
+% each trial run.
+% Actually, use something equivalent to the expansion of the
+% original definition of \cs{setcounter}, so that \verb?tabularx? works in
+% conjunction with \file{calc.sty}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@elt##1{\global\value{##1}\the\value{##1}\relax}%
+  \edef\TX@ckpt{\cl@@ckpt}%
+  \let\@elt\relax
+  \TX@old@table\maxdimen
+  \TX@col@width\TX@target
+  \global\TX@cols\@ne
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Typeout some headings (unless this is disabled).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \TX@typeout@
+    {\@spaces Table Width\@spaces Column Width\@spaces X Columns}%
+%    \end{macrocode}%
+% First attempt. Modify the \texttt{X} definition to count {\ttfamily
+% X} columns.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \TX@trial{\def\NC@rewrite@X{%
+          \global\advance\TX@cols\@ne\NC@find p{\TX@col@width}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Repeatedly decrease column width until table is the correct width,
+% or stops shrinking, or the columns become two narrow.
+% If there are no multicolumn entries, this will only take one attempt.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \loop
+    \TX@arith
+    \ifTX@
+    \TX@trial{}%
+  \repeat
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% One last time, with warnings back on (see appendix D)
+% use \texttt{tabular*} to put it in a box of the right size, in case
+% the algorithm failed to find the correct size.
+%
+% Locally make \cs{footnotetext} save its argument in a token
+% register.
+% \cs{toks@} contains the preamble specification,
+% and possible optional argument, as well as the table body.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  {\let\@footnotetext\TX@ftntext\let\@xfootnotenext\TX@xftntext
+    \csname tabular*\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter\TX@target
+      \the\toks@
+    \csname endtabular*\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now the alignment is finished, and the \verb?}? has restored the original
+% meaning of \cs{@footnotetext} expand the register \cs{TX@ftn} which will
+% execute a series of\\
+% \verb?\footnotetext[<num>]{<note>}? \\
+% commands. We need to be careful about clearing the register as we may
+% be inside a nested \texttt{tabularx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \global\TX@ftn\expandafter{\expandafter}\the\TX@ftn
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now finish off the \texttt{tabularx} environment. Note that we need
+% \verb?\end{tabularx}? here as the \verb?\end{tabularx}? in the user's
+% file is never expanded. Now use \cs{TX@} rather than \verb?tabularx?.
+%
+% We also need to finish off the group started by \verb?{\ifnum0=`}\fi? in
+% the macro \cs{tabularx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+  \expandafter\end\expandafter{\TX@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@arith}
+% Calculate the column width for the next try, setting the flag
+% \cs{ifTX@} to false if the loop should be aborted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TX@arith{%
+  \TX@false
+  \ifdim\TX@old@table=\wd\@tempboxa
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If we have reduced the column width, but the table width has not
+% changed, we stop the loop, and output the table (which will cause an
+% over-full alignment) with the previous value of \cs{TX@col@width}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \TX@col@width\TX@old@col
+    \TX@typeout@{Reached minimum width, backing up.}%
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise calculate the amount by which the current table is too wide.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \dimen@\wd\@tempboxa
+    \advance\dimen@ -\TX@target
+    \ifdim\dimen@<\TX@delta
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If this amount is less than \cs{TX@delta}, stop. (\cs{TX@delta}
+% should be non-zero otherwise we may miss the target due to rounding
+% error.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \TX@typeout@{Reached target.}%
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Reduce the number of effective \texttt{X} columns by one. (Checking
+% that we do not get 0, as this would produce an error later.) Then
+% divide excess width by the number of effective columns, and calculate
+% the new column width. Temporarily store this value (times $-1$) in
+% \cs{dimen@}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \ifnum\TX@cols>\@ne
+        \advance\TX@cols\m@ne
+      \fi
+      \divide\dimen@\TX@cols
+      \advance\dimen@ -\TX@col@width
+      \ifdim \dimen@ >\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the new width would be too narrow, abort the loop. At the moment
+% too narrow, means less than 0\,pt!
+%
+% If the loop was aborted here and the X columns were left
+% with the width of the previous run it may make the table far
+% too wide as initial guesses are always too big. Force to 
+% \cs{TX@error@width} which defaults to be 1em. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@memwarn{X Columns too narrow (table too wide)\MessageBreak}%
+        \TX@col@width\TX@error@width\relax
+      \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise save the old settings, and set the new column width. Set the
+% flag to true so that the table will be set, and the loop will be
+% executed again.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \TX@old@col\TX@col@width
+        \TX@old@table\wd\@tempboxa
+        \TX@col@width-\dimen@
+        \TX@true
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@error@width}
+% If the calculated width is negative, use this instead.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TX@error@width{1em}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@delta}
+% Accept a table that is within \cs{hfuzz} of the correct width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\TX@delta\hfuzz
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Initialise the \texttt{X} column. The definition can be empty here,
+% as it is set for each \texttt{tabularx} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcolumntype{X}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabularxcolumn}
+% The default definition of \texttt{X} is \verb?p{#1}?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tabularxcolumn#1{p{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@newcol}
+% A little macro just used to cut down the number of \cs{expandafter}
+% commands needed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TX@newcol{\newcol@{X}[0]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@trial}
+% Make a test run.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TX@trial#1{%
+  \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Any extra commands. This is used on the first run to count the number
+% of \texttt{X} columns.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    #1\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Make \cs{footnotetext} gobble its arguments. Also locally
+% clear \cs{TX@vwarn} so that the warning is generated by the {\ttfamily
+% final} run, and does not appear in the middle of the table if
+% \cs{tracingtabularx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\@footnotetext\TX@trial@ftn
+  \let\TX@vwarn\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do not nest \texttt{tabularx} environments during trial runs. This
+% would waste time, and the global setting of \cs{TX@cols} would break the
+% algorithm.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \expandafter\let\expandafter\tabularx\csname tabular*\endcsname
+   \expandafter\let\expandafter\endtabularx\csname endtabular*\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Dissable \cs{write}s during a trial run. This trick is
+% from \theTeXbook.\footnote{Actually the trick does
+% not work correctly, so it has been changed.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \def\write{\begingroup
+     \def\let{\afterassignment\endgroup\toks@}%
+        \afterassignment\let\count@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Turn off warnings (see appendix D). Also prevent them being turned
+% back on by setting the parameter names to be registers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \hbadness\@M
+    \hfuzz\maxdimen
+    \let\hbadness\@tempcnta
+    \let\hfuzz\@tempdima
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Make the table, and finish the hbox.
+% \cs{toks@} contains the preamble specification,
+% and possible optional argument, as well as the table body.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\tabular\the\toks@
+    \endtabular}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Reset all \LaTeX\ counters, by executing \cs{TX@ckpt}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \TX@ckpt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Print some statistics.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \TX@typeout@{\@spaces
+     \expandafter\TX@align
+        \the\wd\@tempboxa\space\space\space\space\space\@@
+     \expandafter\TX@align
+        \the\TX@col@width\space\space\space\space\space\@@
+     \@spaces\the\TX@cols}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@align}
+% Macro to improve the printing of the tracing info.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TX@align#1.#2#3#4#5#6#7#8#9\@@{%
+  \ifnum#1<10 \space\fi
+  \ifnum#1<100 \space\fi
+  \ifnum#1<\@m\space\fi
+  \ifnum#1<\@M\space\fi
+  #1.#2#3#4#5#6#7#8\space\space}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arraybackslash}
+% \verb?\\? hack.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\arraybackslash{\let\\\@arraycr}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tracingtabularx}
+% Print statistics on column and table widths.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tracingtabularx{%
+  \def\TX@typeout{\ClassWarningNoLine{memoir}}%
+  \def\TX@typeout@##1{\typeout{(tabularx) ##1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@typeout}
+% The default is to be to be quiet
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\TX@typeout\@gobble
+\let\TX@typeout@\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@ftn}
+% A token register for saving footnote texts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\TX@ftn
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@ftntext}
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@xftntext}
+% Inside the alignment just save up the footnote text in a token
+% register.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\TX@ftntext#1{%
+  \edef\@tempa{\the\TX@ftn\noexpand\footnotetext
+                    [\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname]}%
+  \global\TX@ftn\expandafter{\@tempa{#1}}}%
+\long\def\TX@xftntext[#1]#2{%
+  \global\TX@ftn\expandafter{\the\TX@ftn\footnotetext[#1]{#2}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@trial@ftn}
+% On trial runs, gobble footnote texts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\TX@trial@ftn#1{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% This last section was added at Version 1.02. Previous versions
+% documentented the fact that \cs{verb} did not work inside {\ttfamily
+% tabularx}, but that did not stop people using it! This usually put
+% \LaTeX\ into an irrecoverable error position, with error messages that
+% did not mention the cause of the error. The `poor man's \cs{verb}' (and
+% \cs{verb*}) defined here is based on page 382 of \theTeXbook. As
+% explained there, doing verbatim this way means that spaces are not
+% treated correctly, and so \cs{verb*} may well be useless, however I
+% consider this section of code to be error-recovery, rather than a real
+% implementation of verbatim.
+%
+% The mechanism is quite general, and any macro which wants to allow a
+% form of \cs{verb} to be used within its argument may
+% \verb?\let\verb=\TX@verb?. (Making sure to restore the real definition
+% later!)
+%
+% \cs{verb} and \cs{verb*} are subject to the following restictions:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item Spaces in the argument are not read verbatim, but may be skipped
+%       according to \TeX's usual rules.
+% \item Spaces will be added to the output after control words, even if
+%       they were not present in the input.
+% \item Unless the argument is a single space, any trailing space,
+%       whether in the original argument, or added as in (2),
+%       will be omitted.
+% \item The argument must not end with \verb?\?, so \verb?\verb|\|? is not
+%      allowed, however, because of (3), \verb?\verb|\ |? produces
+%      \verb?\?.
+% \item The argument must be balanced with respect to \verb?{? and \verb?}?. So
+%      \verb?\verb|{|? is not allowed.
+% \item A comment character like \verb?%? will not appear verbatim. It will
+%       act as usual, commenting out the rest of the input line!
+% \item The combinations \verb=?`= and \verb?!`? will appear as
+%       {\ttfamily?`} and {\ttfamily!`} if the \texttt{cmtt} font is
+%       being used.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@verb}
+% The internal definition of \cs{verb}. Spaces will be replaced by \verb?~?, so
+% for the star-form, \cs{let} \verb?~? be \verb?\verb*| |?, which we obtain as
+% \verb?\uppercase{*}?. Use \verb?{\ifnum0=`}\fi? rather than \cs{bgroup} to allow
+% \verb?&? to appear in the argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+{\uccode`\*=`\ %
+\uppercase{\gdef\TX@verb{%
+  \leavevmode\null\TX@vwarn
+  {\ifnum0=`}\fi\ttfamily\let\\\ignorespaces
+  \@ifstar{\let~*\TX@vb}{\TX@vb}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@vb}
+% Get the `almost verbatim' text using \cs{meaning}. The `\verb?!?' is added to
+% the front of the user supplied text, to ensure that the whole argument
+% does not consist of a single \verb?{ }? group. \TeX\ would strip the outer
+% braces from such a group. The `\verb?!?' will be removed later.
+%
+% Originally I followed Knuth, and had \verb?\def\@tempa{##1}?, however this
+% did not allow \verb?#? to appear in the argument. So I changed
+% this to to use a token register, and \cs{edef}. This allows \verb?#? appear,
+% but makes each one appear twice!, so later we loop through, replacing
+% \verb?##? by \verb?#?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TX@vb#1{\def\@tempa##1#1{\toks@{##1}\edef\@tempa{\the\toks@}%
+    \expandafter\TX@v\meaning\@tempa\\ \\\ifnum0=`{\fi}}\@tempa!}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@v}
+% Strip the initial segment of the \cs{meaning}, including the `\verb?!?'
+% added earlier.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TX@v#1!{\afterassignment\TX@vfirst\let\@tempa= }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% As explained above we are going to replace \verb?##? pairs by \verb?#?. To do
+% this we need non-special \verb?#? tokens.  Make \verb?*? into a parameter
+% token so that we can define macros with arguments. The normal meanings
+% will be restored by the \cs{endgroup} later.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\*=\catcode`\#
+\catcode`\#=12
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@vfirst}
+% As a special case, prevent the first character from being dropped.
+% This makes \verb?\verb*| |? produce \verb*? ?. Then call \cs{TX@v@}.
+% This is slightly tricky as I have to ensure that an
+% actual \verb?#? rather than a command \cs{let} to \verb?#? is passed on if the
+% first character is \verb?#?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\TX@vfirst{%
+  \if\@tempa#%
+    \def\@tempb{\TX@v@#}%
+  \else
+    \let\@tempb\TX@v@
+    \if\@tempa\space~\else\@tempa\fi
+  \fi
+  \@tempb}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@v@}
+% Loop through the \cs{meaning}, replacing all spaces by \verb?~?. If the last
+% character is a space it is dropped, so that \verb?\verb*|\LaTeX|? produces
+% \verb?\LaTeX? not \verb*?\LaTeX ?. The rewritten tokens are then further
+% processed to replace \verb?##? pairs.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\TX@v@*1 *2{%
+  \TX@v@hash*1##\relax\if*2\\\else~\expandafter\TX@v@\fi*2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@v@hash}
+% The inner loop, replacing \verb?##? by \verb?#?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\TX@v@hash*1##*2{*1\ifx*2\relax\else#\expandafter\TX@v@hash\fi*2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% As promised, we now restore the normal meanings of \verb?#? and \verb?*?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TX@vwarn}
+% Warn the user the first time this \cs{verb} is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TX@vwarn{%
+  \@warning{\noexpand\verb may be unreliable inside tabularx}%
+  \global\let\TX@vwarn\@empty}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%% end Tabularx package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    At this point we had better stop anyone trying to load the several
+% tabular-related packages (as effectively they are already loaded).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%\@memfakeusepackage{array}
+%%\@memfakeusepackage{dcolumn}
+%%\@memfakeusepackage{delarray}
+%%\@memfakeusepackage{tabularx}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%  
+% \subsection{Fear's rules}
+%
+%    Simon Fear disapproves of the default \LaTeX{} table rules and
+% wrote the \Lpack{booktabs} package~\cite{BOOKTABS} to provide
+% better horizontal rules. Like many typographers, he abhors vertical rules.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bktabrule}
+% The rules in this section are based on \verb?\hrule \@height#1? but this 
+% does not 
+% work for continuous tabulars. Provide a version of this that
+% can be \cs{let} when necessary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\bktabrule}[1]{%
+  \hrule \@height#1}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following is taken almost verbatim from the \Lpack{booktabs} package,
+% version~1.618, March 2003.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%% Booktabs package code       %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%% slightly modified by PRW    %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%% by permission of Simon Fear %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Danie Els is now (2005) the official maintainer of the \Lpack{booktabs} package. He provided me with
+% some updates to synchronize \Lpack{memoir}, \Lpack{booktabs} and support for \Lpack{colortbl} with \Lpack{booktabs}. I made the appropriate changes/extensions
+% on 2005/09/03 as part of version 1.618 of \Lpack{memoir}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CT@arc@}
+% This supports the \Lpack{bookhands}/\Lpack{colortbl} package combination.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \providecommand*{\CT@arc@}{}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\heavyrulewidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\lightrulewidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\cmidrulewidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\belowrulesep}
+% \begin{macro}{\belowbottomsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\aboverulesep}
+% \begin{macro}{\abovetopsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\cmidrulesep}
+% \begin{macro}{\cmidrulekern}
+% \begin{macro}{\defaultaddspace}
+% First we set up some new dimensions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\heavyrulewidth 
+\newdimen\lightrulewidth 
+\newdimen\cmidrulewidth  
+\newdimen\belowrulesep   
+\newdimen\belowbottomsep   
+\newdimen\aboverulesep   
+\newdimen\abovetopsep   
+\newdimen\cmidrulesep    
+\newdimen\cmidrulekern   
+\newdimen\defaultaddspace
+\heavyrulewidth=.08em
+\lightrulewidth=.05em
+\cmidrulewidth=.03em
+\belowrulesep=.65ex
+\belowbottomsep=\z@
+\aboverulesep=.4ex
+\abovetopsep=\z@
+\cmidrulesep=\doublerulesep
+\cmidrulekern=.5em
+\defaultaddspace=.5em
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\@cmidla}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cmidlb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@aboverulesep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@belowrulesep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@thisruleclass}
+% \begin{macro}{\@lastruleclass}
+% \begin{macro}{\@thisrulewidth}
+% And some internal counters and other things of no interest to the end user:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@cmidla
+\newcount\@cmidlb
+\newdimen\@aboverulesep
+\newdimen\@belowrulesep
+\newcount\@thisruleclass
+\newcount\@lastruleclass
+\@lastruleclass=0
+\newdimen\@thisrulewidth
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% which will be described as needed below.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\futurenonspacelet}
+% \begin{macro}{\@BTfnslone}
+% \begin{macro}{\@BTfnsltwo}
+% \begin{macro}{\@BTfnslthree}
+% Next we define a very useful macro (more-or-less straight from the
+% \theTeXbook's Dirty Tricks chapter; documented there). Use
+% \cs{futurenonspacelet} instead of \cs{futurelet} when looking for the next
+% (non-space) token after a macro that has an argument. (After a macro
+% without an argument, space is ignored anyway, so \cs{futurenonspacelet}
+% wouldn't be needed.) This hack allows users to type white
+% space between successive rule commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\futurenonspacelet#1{\def\@BTcs{#1}%
+ \afterassignment\@BTfnslone\let\nexttoken= }
+\def\@BTfnslone{\expandafter\futurelet\@BTcs\@BTfnsltwo}
+\def\@BTfnsltwo{\expandafter\ifx\@BTcs\@sptoken\let\next=\@BTfnslthree
+ \else\let\next=\nexttoken\fi \next}
+\def\@BTfnslthree{\afterassignment\@BTfnslone\let\next= }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Full width  rules}
+%
+% When we are not in a \texttt{longtable} environment, we can simply
+% implement the full width rules as a \cs{hrule} in  a \verb?\noalign{}?
+% group. But within a \texttt{longtable}, the rule has to be drawn like a
+% \verb?\cmidrule{1-\LT@cols}? (the rationale for this is explained in the
+% \texttt{longtable} documentation).
+
+% In order to allow for both, all the rule macros have to
+% open a \cs{noalign} group immediately, while they work out whether
+% they have been called within a \texttt{longtable}; if you don't do this,
+% \TeX's underlying \cs{halign} process gets hiccups.
+% I use \LaTeX's
+% dirty trick (\verb?\ifnum=0`}?) to fool the parser that the bracket
+% count is OK. The bracket really gets closed after all the skipping
+% at the end of the \cs{@BTendrule} macro.
+
+% The class 1 rules, and \cs{specialrule}, really only differ in the
+% defaults for space above and
+% below, and the width, passed to a common routine, \cs{@BTrule},
+% described below. The spaces, \cs{@aboverulesep} and \cs{@belowrulesep},
+% are set within the \cs{noalign} group, so are inherited by
+% \cs{@BTrule}. Similarly, \cs{@BTrule} knows as much as it needs to
+% about the routine that called it by examining the inherited
+% \cs{@thisruleclass}. The optional width argument is parsed by
+% \cs{@BTrule} after being set to default if absent.
+
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toprule}
+% \begin{macro}{\midrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\bottomrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\specialrule}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toprule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+  \@aboverulesep=\abovetopsep
+  \global\@belowrulesep=\belowrulesep
+  \global\@thisruleclass=\@ne
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@BTrule}{\@BTrule[\heavyrulewidth]}}
+
+\def\midrule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+  \@aboverulesep=\aboverulesep
+  \global\@belowrulesep=\belowrulesep
+  \global\@thisruleclass=\@ne
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@BTrule}{\@BTrule[\lightrulewidth]}}
+
+\def\bottomrule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+  \@aboverulesep=\aboverulesep
+  \global\@belowrulesep=\belowbottomsep
+  \global\@thisruleclass=\@ne
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@BTrule}{\@BTrule[\heavyrulewidth]}}
+
+\def\specialrule#1#2#3{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+  \@aboverulesep=#2\global\@belowrulesep=#3\global\@thisruleclass=\tw@
+  \@BTrule[#1]}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\addlinespace}
+% An \cs{addlinespace} is essentially a zero-width rule with
+% zero space above and argument (or default) space below. But because
+%  the rule is not actually drawn, but is just a \cs{vskip}, there is no
+%  need to check if we're in a longtable, so we don't need to call
+%  \cs{@BTrule} as for `real' rules. But we do share the \cs{@BTendrule}
+%  lookahead and flagsetting code (described below), and the \cs{vskip} is done there.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addlinespace{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@addspace}{\@addspace[\defaultaddspace]}}
+\def\@addspace[#1]{\global\@belowrulesep=#1\global\@thisruleclass=\tw@
+  \futurelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@BTrule}
+% All the rules (except \cs{addlinespace}) share this code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@BTrule[#1]{%
+  \global\@thisrulewidth=#1\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Save the width argument (if the user didn't give one, then the
+% calling routine will have called \cs{@BTrule} with the default) in a global
+% variable for later use when drawing the rule.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifnum\@thisruleclass=\tw@\vskip\@aboverulesep\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Specialrules always insert specified space above. (Note: addlinespaces
+% don't come here).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifnum\@lastruleclass=\z@\vskip\@aboverulesep\else
+  \ifnum\@lastruleclass=\@ne\vskip\doublerulesep\fi\fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% After text (last rule class 0), precede the rule by \cs{aboverulesep};
+% but if immediately after a
+% previous rule, insert a \cs{doublerulesep}.
+%
+% Now we work out, by a very nasty hack, if we're within a
+%  \texttt{longtable}. It's easy if \cs{longtable} isn't even defined: then we
+%  can't be. But it is not enough just to check if \texttt{longtable} is
+%  loaded --- we might be within an ordinary table rather than a
+%  longtable. So we look to see if \cs{hline} has been re-defined
+%  from its \LaTeX\ definition to be the same as
+%  \cs{LT@hline}. (Longtable currently does this redefinition when it opens a
+%  \texttt{longtable} environment, but not globally, so it is
+%  cleared it when the environment closes.) Another
+%  package could potentially do this! And \texttt{longtable} might change the
+%  way it implements this! So, it is not entirely safe, but I have
+%  found no better way so far.
+
+% We set up \cs{@BTswitch} to call \cs{@BTnormal} or \cs{@BLTrule}, as
+%  appropriate, then call it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\longtable\undefined\let\@BTswitch\@BTnormal\else
+  \ifx\hline\LT@hline\let\@BTswitch\@BLTrule
+  \else\let\@BTswitch\@BTnormal\fi\fi
+  \@BTswitch}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@BTnormal}
+% This is when we're \emph{not} within a longtable. We are already in a
+%  \cs{noalign} group, all we need do is draw an \cs{hrule} and gobble any
+%  trailing spaces, then call the closing routine with \cs{@tempa} set
+%  equal to the next token in the document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@BTnormal{\hrule
+%   \@height \@thisrulewidth\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
+\def\@BTnormal{%
+%%  \bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}
+  {\CT@arc@\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}}%
+  \futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@BLTrule}
+% This is for full width rule within a \texttt{longtable}. First we check if
+%  a kerning argument has been used; if so let \cs{@@BLTrule} read it,
+%  else call \cs{@@BLTrule} with an empty string:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@BLTrule{\@ifnextchar({\@@BLTrule}{\@@BLTrule()}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@BLTrule}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@BLTrule(#1){\@setrulekerning{#1}%
+\global\@cmidlb\LT@cols
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \cs{@setrulekerning} routine parses the kerning argument tokens
+% and sets global kerning widths accordingly (or to defaults, if user
+% hasn't set them explicitly). The global assignment to \cs{@cmidlb}
+% sets up the column count for the \cs{@cmidruleb} macro, which is
+% shared with \verb?cmidrules?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Close the currently open \cs{noalign} group. Within a \texttt{longtable},
+% rules are all to be drawn as leaders within a text box that is
+% \cs{LT@cols} columns wide.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@cmidruleb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Draw the rule. We share the \cs{@cmidruleb} code with ordinary \cs{cmidrule}s.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We have to open a new noalign immediately else \TeX{} will start a new
+%    text box where we don't want one. Then, after gobbling any
+%    unwanted white space, we call the closing routine.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@BTendrule}
+% We look one step ahead (token is in \cs{@tempa}) to see if another
+% rule follows (shame on user!). If so, we set \cs{@lastruleclass} equal
+% to \cs{@thisruleclass} (thus setting it up for the following rule). If
+% there isn't a following rule, we clear \cs{@lastruleclass} (ie set it
+% to zero), which isn't technically true since we have just drawn a
+% rule, but sets it up correctly for the next rule encountered, which
+% must be following some intervening text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@BTendrule{%
+  \ifx\@tempa\toprule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
+  \else\ifx\@tempa\midrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
+  \else\ifx\@tempa\bottomrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
+  \else\ifx\@tempa\cmidrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
+  \else\ifx\@tempa\specialrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
+  \else\ifx\@tempa\addlinespace\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
+  \else\global\@lastruleclass=\z@\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifnum\@lastruleclass=\@ne\relax\else\vskip\@belowrulesep\fi
+  \ifnum0=`{\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Special subrules}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setrulekerning}
+% The following code parses the trimming arguments (if there are any)
+%    for \cs{cmidrule} or a \cs{BLTrule}. The rule
+%     will be trimmed left and right by \cs{cmrkern@l} and \cs{cmrkern@l},
+%     which are zero by default, set to \cs{cmidrulekern} by the plain
+%     \verb?(lr)? arguments, or user set as in \verb?(r{.5em})?. We parse token by
+%     token through the arguments. The
+%     tokens \verb?r? and \verb?l? cause \cs{cmrkern@r} or \cs{cmrkern@l} to be set to
+%     \cs{cmidrulekern}. There is no lookahead to see if a width is the
+%     next token; this strategy is efficient for the plain commands,
+%     while inefficient for the qualified commands, but more importantly
+%     it is much easier to program. Tokens \verb?r? and \verb?l? also set
+%     \cs{cmrswitch} so that if the next token turns out to be
+%     \marg{wd} then the kerning will be done on the side
+%     currently specified. I have been too lazy to program an error
+%     message should one encounter tokens other than \verb?r?, \verb?l? or
+%     \marg{wd}.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fixed bug in booktabs trim command by improving character comparison code in \cs{@setrulekerning} (mempatch v3.8)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setrulekerning#1{%
+  \global\let\cmrkern@l\z@
+  \global\let\cmrkern@r\z@
+  \@tfor\@tempa :=#1\do
+  {\def\@tempb{r}%
+   \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+     \global\let\cmrkern@r\cmidrulekern
+      \def\cmrsideswitch{\cmrkern@r}%
+   \else
+     \def\@tempb{l}%
+     \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+       \global\let\cmrkern@l\cmidrulekern
+       \def\cmrsideswitch{\cmrkern@l}%
+     \else
+       \global\expandafter\let\cmrsideswitch\@tempa
+     \fi
+   \fi}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cmidrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cmidrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@cmidrule}
+% The \cs{cmidrule} re-uses \cs{@lastruleclass} in an entirely different
+%  way from the full width rules. (Maybe I should have used a
+%  different flag; it seemed efficient at the time \ldots). This
+% is (left) set to one if you are in the middle of a row of
+% \cs{cmidrules}, or starting a new one (with \cs{morecmidrules}).
+% Otherwise, when \cs{@lastruleclass} is zero, we precede the
+% rule with \cs{aboverulesep}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cmidrule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+    \@ifnextchar[{\@cmidrule}{\@cmidrule[\cmidrulewidth]}}
+\def\@cmidrule[#1]{\@ifnextchar({\@@cmidrule[#1]}{\@@cmidrule[#1]()}}
+\def\@@cmidrule[#1](#2)#3{\@@@cmidrule[#3]{#1}{#2}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@@cmidrule}
+% The above is fiddling around to set defaults for missing optional
+% arguments. We also pass to \cs{@@@cmidrule} in a different order,
+% namely =[a-b]=\verb?{width required}= \verb?{kerning commands}= (this being
+% the order in which the arguments are actually processed):
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@@cmidrule[#1-#2]#3#4{\global\@cmidla#1\relax
+    \global\advance\@cmidla\m@ne
+    \ifnum\@cmidla>0\global\let\@gtempa\@cmidrulea\else
+    \global\let\@gtempa\@cmidruleb\fi
+    \global\@cmidlb#2\relax
+    \global\advance\@cmidlb-\@cmidla
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This has set up a switch (\cs{@gtempa}) to call the relevant routine,
+% \cs{@cmidrulea} or \cs{@cmidruleb}, depending on whether we start
+% from column one or not.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \global\@thisrulewidth=#3
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% That is, set per default or given argument. Then parse any trimming
+% arguments to set, globally, \cs{cmrkern@r} and \cs{cmrkern@l} accordingly:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@setrulekerning{#4}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now insert space above if needed, close the \cs{noalign},
+% then switch to appropriate rule drawing routine as determined
+% above (\cs{let} to \cs{@gtempa}):
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum\@lastruleclass=\z@\vskip \aboverulesep\fi
+    \ifnum0=`{\fi}\@gtempa
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Having now drawn the rule,
+% open another \cs{noalign}, and call the closing routine:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@xcmidrule}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xcmidrule}
+% In this closing routine, see if another \cs{cmidrule} follows;
+% if so, backspace
+% vertical so it will line up with the one you just drew,
+% and setting \cs{@lastruleclass} to 1 will suppress
+% adding space above the next. If a \cs{morecimdrules} follows,
+% we add (positive) \cs{cmidrulesep} (and again set \cs{@lastruleclass}
+% to one). Otherwise this is the last rule of the current group
+% and we can just add \cs{belowrulesep}. Finally, we close the \cs{noalign}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xcmidrule{\ifx\@tempa\cmidrule\vskip-\@thisrulewidth
+    \global\@lastruleclass=\@ne\else
+    \ifx\@tempa\morecmidrules\vskip \cmidrulesep
+    \global\@lastruleclass=\@ne\else
+    \vskip \belowrulesep\global\@lastruleclass=\z@\fi\fi
+    \ifnum0=`{\fi}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cmidrulea}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cmidruleb}
+% This code (called below) actually draws the rules. They are drawn
+% as boxes in text, rather than in a \cs{noalign} group, which permits
+% the left and right kerning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@cmidrulea{%
+  \multispan\@cmidla&\multispan\@cmidlb
+%%    \unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill
+    \unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l{%
+    \CT@arc@\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill}%
+    \hskip \cmrkern@r\cr}
+\def\@cmidruleb{%
+  \multispan\@cmidlb
+%%    \unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill
+  \unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l{%
+    \CT@arc@\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill}%
+    \hskip \cmrkern@r\cr}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\morecmidrules}
+% This is really a dummy command; all the work is done above
+% within the \cs{cmidrule} routine. We look one step ahead there
+% to see if a \cs{morecmidrules} follows the current \cs{cmidrule},
+% and if so set the flag. Otherwise,  \cs{morecmidrules} itself
+% does nothing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\morecmidrules{\noalign{\relax}}
+
+%%%%%%%%%% end of Booktabs package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Ensure that the real \Lpack{booktabs} package can't get called.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Killed use of real booktabs package (mempatch v3.12)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%\@memfakeusepackage{booktabs}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Continuous tabulars}
+%
+%
+%    The standard \texttt{tabular} environment is wrapped inside a box
+% (see \verb?\@tabular?),
+% which means that it cannot break across pages. Equivalent environments
+% are provided which are not boxed and so can continue across page 
+% boundaries.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ctableftskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\ctabrightskip}
+% These skips are inserted at the left and right of continuous tabulars
+% so that their horizontal location can be specified.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\ctableftskip \ctableftskip=\fill
+\newskip\ctabrightskip \ctabrightskip=\fill
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ctabular*}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ctabularstar}
+% This starts off the \texttt{ctabular*} continuous tabular environment.
+% The default location is centered. NOTE: This is not for release.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname ctabular*\endcsname{%
+  \@ifnextchar[ {\@ctabularstar}{\@ctabularstar[c]}}
+\def\@ctabularstar[#1]#2{\global\@curtab\@ne
+  \ctableftskip\fill
+  \ctabrightskip\fill
+  \if l#1% left
+    \ctableftskip\z@ 
+  \else
+    \if r#1% right
+       \ctabrightskip\z@
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \setlength\dimen@{#2}%
+  \xdef\@halignto{to\the\dimen@}\NC@tabular}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ctabular}
+% \verb?\ctabular? is similar to \verb?\ctabular*? except that the
+% width is known to be \verb?\hsize?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ctabular}[1][c]{\global\@curtab\@ne
+  \ctableftskip\fill
+  \ctabrightskip\fill
+  \if l#1% left
+    \ctableftskip\z@ 
+  \else
+    \if r#1% right
+      \ctabrightskip\z@
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \gdef\@halignto{to\hsize}\NC@tabular}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NC@tabular}
+% \verb?\NC@tabular?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\NC@tabular}{%
+  \par
+  \addvspace{\topsep}
+  \col@sep\tabcolsep
+  \let\d@llarbegin\begingroup
+  \let\d@llarend\endgroup
+  \@NCtabarray}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@NCialign}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@NCialign}{\everycr{}\tabskip\ctableftskip\halign}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%  
+% \begin{macro}{\@NCtabarray}
+% Effectively a modified version of \verb?\@array? 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@NCtabarray}[1]{%
+  \@tempdima \ht\strutbox
+  \advance\@tempdima\extrarowheight
+  \setbox \@arstrutbox \hbox{\vrule
+    \@height \arraystretch \@tempdima
+    \@depth \arraystretch \dp\strutbox
+    \@width\z@}%
+  \begingroup
+%%    \@mkpream{@{\hspace{\@totalleftmargin}}#1@{}}%
+    \@mkpream{#1}%
+    \xdef\@preamble{\@NCialign \@halignto
+                    \bgroup & \tabskip\z@
+                      \@arstrut
+                      \@preamble
+                      \tabskip\ctabrightskip
+                      \cr}%
+  \endgroup
+  \let\@sharp ##\let\protect\relax
+  \lineskip\z@
+  \baselineskip\z@
+  \let\\\@arraycr
+  \let\tabularnewline\\%
+  \let\par\@empty
+  \ctabsetlines
+  \@preamble
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endctabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\endctabular*}
+% End the environments.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endctabular{%
+  \crcr \egroup
+  \gdef\@preamble{}%
+  \addvspace{\topsep}
+  \noindent}
+\expandafter\let\csname endctabular*\endcsname=\endctabular
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%  
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Horizontal lines}
+%
+%   The standard \verb?\hline? can produce odd results when used with
+% continuous tabulars, but \verb?\hhline? or \verb?\cline? are OK. 
+% I want a version of \verb?\hline?
+% that works with continuous tabulars and has an adjustable width
+% (i.e., thickness). This will be based on a modified \verb?\cline?
+%
+% For reference, here are the essentials of the kernel's definitions.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\hline{%
+%    \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi\hrule \@height \arrayrulewidth \futurelet
+%    \reserved@a\@xhline}
+% \def\@xhline{%
+%    \ifx\reserved@a\hline
+%      \vskip\doublerulesep
+%      \vskip-\arrayrulewidth
+%    \fi
+%    \ifnum0=`{\fi}}
+% \def\cline#1{\@cline#1\@nil}
+% \def\@cline#1-#2\@nil{%
+%   \omit
+%   \@multicnt#1%
+%   \advance\@multispan\m@ne
+%   \ifnum\@multicnt=\@ne\@firstofone{&\omit}\fi
+%   \@multicnt#2%
+%   \advance\@multicnt-#1%
+%   \advance\@multispan\@ne
+%   \leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill
+%   \cr
+%   \noalign{\vskip-\arrayrulewidth}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memcline}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@cline} 
+% This is a version of the kernel \verb?\cline? code that provides
+% a variable width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\memcline}[2]{\m@m@cline[#1]#2\@nil}
+\def\m@m@cline[#1]#2-#3\@nil{%
+  \omit
+  \@multicnt#2%
+  \advance\@multispan\m@ne
+  \ifnum\@multicnt=\@ne\@firstofone{&\omit}\fi
+  \@multicnt#3%
+  \advance\@multicnt-#2%
+  \advance\@multispan\@ne
+  \leaders\hrule\@height #1\hfill  % <- variable \@height value
+  \cr
+  \noalign{\vskip- #1}}            % <- variable \@height value
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memhline}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mhline}
+% A version of \verb?\hline?, based on \verb?\memcline?, taking a 
+% rule width as argument. It draws a \verb?\memcline? from the
+% first to the last (\verb?\@curtab?) column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\memhline}[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\memcline{#1}{1-\@curtab}}
+\newcommand*{\m@mhline}{\cline{1-\@curtab}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% Fear's rules also do not play well within continuous tabulars.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@BTnormal}
+% Special version of \cs{@BTnormal}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\m@m@BTnormal{%
+  \ifnum0=`{\fi}   % closes the \noalign
+  \multispan{\@curtab} \leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill\cr
+  \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+  \futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ctabsetlines}
+% Continuous tabulars cannot use the standard horizontal lines.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ctabsetlines{%
+  \let\hline\m@mhline
+  \let\@BTnormal\m@m@BTnormal
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Automated tabulations}
+%
+%
+% It can be convenient, especially while drafting a document, to have
+% a list of items put into a tabular without having to mark the ends
+% of the rows. 
+%
+% The following is based on plain \TeX{} code given on pages 307--308 of
+% \textit{TeX for the Impatient}~\cite{bk:Impatient}, which provides
+% code for typesetting in columns.
+%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\abovecolumnspenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@linestogo}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cellstogo}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cellsincolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\crtok}
+% Counters and such.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\abovecolumnspenalty
+  \abovecolumnspenalty=10000
+\newcount\@linestogo           % lines remaining to be procesed
+\newcount\@cellstogo           % cells remaining in column or row
+\newcount\@cellsincolumn         % number of lines per column
+\newtoks\crtok
+  \crtok = {\cr}%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mincolumnwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lleftskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lrightskip}
+% More things
+%   \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@mincolumnwidth
+\let\c@lleftskip\hfil   % left skip within a column
+\let\c@lrightskip\hfil % right skip within a column
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\preautotab}
+% \begin{macro}{\postautotab}
+% Hooks into the auto tabulations.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\preautotab\relax
+\let\postautotab\relax
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\autocols}
+% \verb?\autocols?\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{comma separated list}
+% arranges the elements in the \meta{comma separated list} into \meta{num}
+% columns, the elements filling each column before moving to the next.
+% That is, the elements are ordered top to bottom and left to right.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\autocols}[5][0pt]{\par\begingroup
+  \ctabsetlines
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the table position
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \if l#2 
+    \raggedright
+  \else
+    \if r#2
+      \raggedleft
+    \else
+      \centering
+    \fi
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the column position style
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\c@lleftskip\hfil
+  \let\c@lrightskip\hfil
+  \if l#4 
+    \let\c@lleftskip\relax
+  \else
+    \if r#4
+      \let\c@lrightskip\relax
+    \fi
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Count the number of entries and the minimum width (max entry width)
+% for the columns.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@mincolumnwidth\z@
+  \TX@cols=#3
+  \@curtab=#3
+  \@linestogo\z@
+  \@for\@tempa:=#5\do{
+    \advance\@linestogo\@ne
+    \settowidth{\@tempdima}{\@tempa}
+    \ifdim\@tempdima>\@mincolumnwidth
+      \@mincolumnwidth=\@tempdima
+    \fi
+  }
+  \advance\@mincolumnwidth\tabcolsep
+  \linespercol
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Specify what is to be done after every entry
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@endcolumnactions{%
+    \global\advance\@linestogo\m@ne
+    \ifnum\@cellstogo<\tw@
+      \global\advance\TX@cols\m@ne
+      \ifnum\TX@cols>\z@\linespercol\fi
+      \the\crtok
+    \else 
+        &\global\advance\@cellstogo\m@ne
+    \fi
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Calculate the width of the columns
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifdim #1 > \z@
+    \TX@col@width=#1
+    \divide\TX@col@width \TX@cols
+  \else
+    \TX@col@width=\@mincolumnwidth
+  \fi
+  \penalty\abovecolumnspenalty
+  \noindent % usually not a paragraph
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Create most of the preamble by looping to add \verb?\@cellsincolumn?-1 slots,
+% then the last one which is different.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@preamble{}
+  \begingroup
+    \let\@sharp\relax
+    \ifnum\@cellsincolumn>\@ne
+      \loop
+        \g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
+          \hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{%
+               \c@lleftskip\strut\@sharp\c@lrightskip} &}%
+        \advance\@cellsincolumn\m@ne
+      \ifnum\@cellsincolumn>\@ne
+      \repeat
+    \fi
+    \g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
+      \hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{\c@lleftskip\strut\@sharp\c@lrightskip}}%
+  \endgroup
+  \let\@sharp ##
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Start the \verb?\valign?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \tabskip\ctableftskip
+%%  \tabskip\z@
+  \valign \bgroup
+    \tabskip\z@
+    \@preamble
+    \tabskip\ctabrightskip\cr
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Add all the entries then finish off.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@for\@tempa:=#5\do{
+      \@tempa\unskip\space\@endcolumnactions}%
+    \the\crtok \egroup \par \endgroup 
+}
+  
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linespercol}
+% \verb?\linespercol? calculates the maximum number of lines that go into
+% a column, where there are \verb?\TX@cols? columns and \verb?\@linestogo?
+% lines, so that the columns are balanced as well as possible. The result
+% is \verb?\@cellstogo?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\linespercol}{%
+  \@cellsincolumn=\@linestogo
+  \divide\@cellsincolumn \TX@cols
+  \@cellstogo=\@cellsincolumn
+  \multiply\@cellstogo \TX@cols
+  \@tempcnta=\@linestogo
+  \advance\@tempcnta -\@cellstogo
+  \ifnum \@tempcnta>\z@
+    \advance\@cellsincolumn \@ne
+  \fi
+  \global\@cellstogo=\@cellsincolumn
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\autorows}
+% \verb?\autorows?\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{comma separated list}
+% arranges the elements in the \meta{comma separated list} into \meta{num}
+% columns, the elements filling each row before moving to the next.
+% That is, the elements are ordered left to right and top to bottom.
+% By default, each column is the same width, enough for the widest entry.
+% If \meta{width} is a negative length (e.g., -1pt) the columns are set 
+% to their natural 
+% widths. If \meta{width} is positive (e.g., \cs{textwidth}), column widths 
+% are equal widths so that the overal width is \meta{width}.
+% The sideways location of thre tabular is \meta{pos} (l, c, or r), and
+% the column style id \meta{style} (l, c, or r).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\autorows}[5][0pt]{\par\begingroup
+ \ctabsetlines
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the table position
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ctableftskip\fill
+  \ctabrightskip\fill
+  \if l#2 
+    \ctableftskip\z@
+  \else
+    \if r#2
+      \ctabrightskip\z@
+    \fi
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the column position style
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\c@lleftskip\hfil
+  \let\c@lrightskip\hfil
+  \if l#4 
+    \let\c@lleftskip\relax
+  \else
+    \if r#4
+      \let\c@lrightskip\relax
+    \fi
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Count the number of entries and the minimum width (max entry width)
+% for the columns.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \TX@cols=#3\relax
+  \@curtab=#3\relax
+  \@cellstogo = \TX@cols
+  \@mincolumnwidth\z@
+  \@linestogo\z@
+  \@for\@tempa:=#5\do{%
+    \advance\@linestogo\@ne
+    \settowidth{\@tempdima}{\@tempa}
+    \ifdim\@tempdima>\@mincolumnwidth
+      \@mincolumnwidth=\@tempdima
+    \fi}%
+  \advance\@mincolumnwidth\tabcolsep
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Specify what is to be done after every entry
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@endcolumnactions{%
+    \global\advance\@linestogo\m@ne
+    \global\advance\@cellstogo\m@ne
+    \ifnum\@cellstogo<\@ne
+      \global\@cellstogo=\TX@cols
+      \the\crtok
+    \else 
+      & 
+    \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Calculate the width of the columns
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifdim #1>\z@
+    \TX@col@width=#1
+  \else
+    \TX@col@width=\hsize
+  \fi
+  \divide\TX@col@width \TX@cols
+  \ifdim #1=\z@
+    \TX@col@width=\@mincolumnwidth
+  \fi
+  \penalty\abovecolumnspenalty
+  \noindent % usually not a paragraph
+  \vskip -\z@ % don't know why we need this, but looks bad without it
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Create most of the preamble by looping to add \verb?\@cellsincolumn?-1 slots,
+% then the last one which is different.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@preamble{}
+  \begingroup
+    \let\@sharp\relax
+    \ifnum\TX@cols>\@ne
+      \loop
+        \ifdim #1<\z@
+          \g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
+            \strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip &}%
+        \else
+          \g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
+            \hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{%
+                    \strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip} &}%
+        \fi
+        \advance\TX@cols\m@ne
+      \ifnum\TX@cols>\@ne
+      \repeat
+    \fi
+    \ifdim #1<\z@
+      \g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
+        \strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip}%
+    \else
+      \g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
+        \hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{\strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip}}%
+    \fi
+  \endgroup
+  \let\@sharp ##
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Start the \verb?\halign?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \tabskip\ctableftskip
+  \halign to \hsize \bgroup
+    \tabskip\z@
+    \@preamble
+%%    \tabskip\ctabrightskip\cr \preautotab
+    \tabskip\ctabrightskip\cr 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Add all the entries then finish off.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@for\@tempa:=#5\do{%
+      \@tempa\unskip\space\@endcolumnactions}%
+%%    \the\crtok \postautotab \the\crtok \egroup \endgroup \par
+    \the\crtok \egroup \endgroup \par
+}
+  
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%  
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Floating objects}
+%
+%    The file \file{latex.dtx} only defines a number of tools with
+%    which floating objects can be defined. This is done in the
+%    document class. It needs to define the following macros for each
+%    floating object of type \texttt{TYPE} (e.g., \texttt{TYPE} =
+%    figure).
+%
+%    \begin{description}
+%    \item[\texttt{\bslash fps@TYPE}]
+%        The default placement specifier for floats of type
+%        \texttt{TYPE}.
+%
+%    \item[\texttt{\bslash ftype@TYPE}]
+%        The type number for floats of type \texttt{TYPE}.  Each
+%        \texttt{TYPE} has associated a unique positive \texttt
+%        {TYPE} number, which is a power of two.  E.g., figures might
+%        have type number 1, tables type number 2, programs type
+%        number 4, etc.
+%
+%    \item[\texttt{\bslash ext@TYPE}]
+%        The file extension indicating the file on which the contents
+%        list for float type \texttt{TYPE} is stored.  For example,
+%        |\ext@figure| = `lof'.
+%
+%    \item[\texttt{\bslash fnum@TYPE}]
+%        A macro to generate the figure number for a caption. For
+%        example, |\fnum@TYPE| == `Figure |\thefigure|'.
+%
+%    \item[\texttt{\bslash @makecaption}{\meta{num}}{\meta{text}}]
+%        A macro to make a caption, with \meta{num} the value produced
+%        by |\fnum@...| and \meta{text} the text of the caption. It
+%        can assume it's in a |\parbox| of the appropriate width.
+%        This will be used for \emph{all} floating objects.
+%
+%    \end{description}
+%
+%    The actual environment that implements a floating object such as
+%    a figure is defined using the macros |\@float| and |\end@float|,
+%    which are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
+%
+%    An environment that implements a single column floating object is
+%    started with |\@float{|\texttt{TYPE}|}[|\meta{placement}|]| of type
+%    \texttt{TYPE} with \meta{placement} as the placement specifier.
+%    The default value of \meta{PLACEMENT} is defined by |\fps@TYPE|.
+%
+%    The environment is ended by |\end@float|.  E.g., |\figure| ==
+%    |\@float|{figure}, |\endfigure| == |\end@float|.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Floats}
+%
+% To define a float environment, say |fenv|, the following macros must be defined:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |\fps@fenv| The default placement specifier (normally |tbp|). 
+% \item |\ftype@fenv| The type number which is an integer and a power of 2.
+% \item |\ext@fenv| The file extension for the contents list.
+% \item |\c@fenv| A counter for the environment (for caption numbering).
+% \item |\fnum@fenv| A macro to generate the caption `number'.
+% \item |\l@fenv| A macro to produce an entry in a list of\ldots.
+% \item |\flegtocfenv| A macro to write a |\namedlegend| title to a listof file.
+% \item |\flegfenv| A macro to typeset the name of a |\namedlegend|.
+% \item |\toclevel@fenv| Holding a bookmark level (required if the
+%       \Lpack{hyperref} package will be used).
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{newflo@tctr}
+% A counter for the type number of a new float. Normally
+% figures are of type 1, tables type 2, and the next float type is then 4, and so
+% on. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{newflo@tctr}
+  \setcounter{newflo@tctr}{1}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newfloat}
+% |\newfloat[|\meta{within}|]{|\meta{fenv}|}{|\meta{ext}|}{|\meta{capname}|}|
+% creates the commands for a new float environment, \meta{fenv} (aka |X|),
+% using \meta{ext} (aka |Z|) as the
+% file extension and \meta{capname} for the caption name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newfloat}[4][\@empty]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\ftype@X}
+%  Define the float type, set it to the float counter, and double
+% the counter afterwards.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{ftype@#2}{\value{newflo@tctr}}
+  \addtocounter{newflo@tctr}{\value{newflo@tctr}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@X}
+% Create the counter for the caption, which must not have been previously
+% defined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifundefined{c@#2}{% counter is not defined
+    \ifx \@empty#1\relax
+      \newcounter{#2}
+    \else
+      \newcounter{#2}[#1]
+      \expandafter\edef\csname the#2\endcsname{%
+  \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname.\noexpand\arabic{#2}}
+    \fi}{}
+  \setcounter{#2}{0}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ext@X}
+% \begin{macro}{Zdepth}
+% Define |\ext@X| for the file extension and set the new |Zdepth| 
+% depth counter to 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{ext@#2}{#3}  % file extension
+  \@ifundefined{c@#3depth}{\newcounter{#3depth}}{}
+  \setcounter{#3depth}{1}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fps@X}
+% \begin{macro}{\fnum@X}
+% \begin{macro}{\flegX}
+% \begin{macro}{\flegtocX}
+% |\fps@X| is the default float placement specification, |\fnum@X|
+% typesets the caption name and number, and |\flegX| and |\flegtocX| are for
+% named legends.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{fps@#2}{tbp}                     % position
+  \@namedef{fnum@#2}{#4~\@nameuse{the#2}}    % caption naming
+  \@namedef{fleg#2}{#4}                      % legend naming
+  \@namedef{flegtoc#2}##1{}                  % legend name in ToC
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{X}
+% \begin{environment}{X*}
+% Finally define the new float environment, in both normal and starred
+% forms.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \newenvironment{#2}{\@float{#2}}{\end@float}
+  \newenvironment{#2*}{\@dblfloat{#2}}{\end@dblfloat}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% This ends the definition of |\newfloat|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+} % end \newfloat
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% To define subcaptions for use in a new float environment, say |fenv|, the
+% following macros must be defined~\cite{SUBFIGURE}:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item A new counter |subfenv| for subcaption numbering.
+% \item A new counter |extdepth|, where |ext| is the file extension
+%       for the contents list of |fenv|, for setting the contents depth.
+% \item |\thesubfenv| for the formatting of the subcaption number.
+% \item |\@thesubfenv| for typesetting the number.
+% \item |\@@thesubfenv| for alternative label reference.
+% \item |\p@subfenv| for prepending to the subcaption number when it is referenced.
+% \item |\ext@subfenv| the file extension for the contents list.
+% \item |\l@subfenv| for formatting the contents list entry.
+% \item |\@makesubfloatcaption| for typesetting the subcaption.
+% \item |\toclevel@subfenv| for hyperref bookmarks
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newsubfloat}
+% |\newsubfloat{|\meta{fenv}|}| creates the commands for a new
+% subfloat for \meta{fenv} (aka X).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newsubfloat}[1]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Call |\newlistentry[X]{subX}{extX}{1}| to get most of the work done.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \newlistentry[#1]{sub#1}{\@nameuse{ext@#1}}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ext@subX}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesubX}
+% \begin{macro}{\@thesubX}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@thesubX}
+% \begin{macro}{\p@subX}
+% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@subX}
+% And now for the rest of the commands for subcaptions.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{@namedef} of \cs{@@thesubenv}
+%                to \cs{newsubfloat}}
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{@namedef} of \cs{toclevel@subenv}
+%                to \cs{newsubfloat}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{ext@sub#1}{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}
+  \@namedef{thesub#1}{(\alph{sub#1})}
+  \@namedef{@thesub#1}{\@nameuse{thesub#1}%
+            \if@tightsubcap\hskip\subfloatlabelskip\else\space\fi}
+  \@namedef{@@thesub#1}{\@nameuse{thesub#1}}
+  \@namedef{p@sub#1}{\csname the#1\endcsname}
+  \@namedef{toclevel@sub#1}{1}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% By permission of Steven Douglas Cochran the class provides similar 
+% functionality as the \Lpack{subfigure} package~\cite{SUBFIGURE}.
+% This requires some changes to be made to |\@float| and |\end@float|.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifdonemaincaption}
+% This is set TRUE after the |\(cont)caption| has been called in a float.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{if@contmaincaption} to
+%          \cs{ifdonemaincaption}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifdonemaincaption
+  \donemaincaptionfalse
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dbfloat}
+% The kernel |\@float| and |\@dblfloat| macros are redefined to set
+% |\ifdonemaincaption| to FALSE, and also to zero the subfloat
+% counter, if it is defined.
+%  Ignasi Furi\`{o} reported\footnote{Private email from 
+% \texttt{ignasi.furio@uib.es}, 2003/10/17} that floats embedded in text 
+% created an extra space. This was caused by a missing \verb?%?.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Deleted spaces from \cs{@float} and
+% \cs{@dblfloat} (from patch v1.9)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@memoldfloat\@float
+\renewcommand{\@float}[1]{\donemaincaptionfalse
+  \@ifundefined{c@sub#1}{}{\csname c@sub#1\endcsname = 0\relax}%
+  \@memoldfloat{#1}}
+\let\@memolddblfloat\@dblfloat
+\renewcommand{\@dblfloat}[1]{\donemaincaptionfalse
+  \@ifundefined{c@sub#1}{}{\csname c@sub#1\endcsname = 0\relax}%
+  \@memolddblfloat{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\end@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\end@dblfloat}
+% The kernel |\end@float| and |\end@dblfloat| macros are redefined to 
+% dump out any subcaptions that have not yet been processed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@memoldefloat\end@float
+\def\end@float{%
+  \@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}\@memoldefloat}
+\let\@memoldedblfloat\end@dblfloat
+\def\end@dblfloat{%
+  \@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}\@memoldedblfloat}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Unfortunately the \Lpack{fixltx2e} package, version 1.1h (current as of 2005/09/03) makes assumptions
+% about \cs{end@float} which do not hold for memoir. The code has to be reverted back to that in version 1.0b of \Lpack{fixltx2e}.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Dealt with incompatibilities between fixltx2e and memoir's \cs{end@dblfloat} (mempatch v3.7)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{fixltx2e}{%
+  \def\end@dblfloat{%
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@endfloatbox
+      \ifnum\@floatpenalty<\z@
+        \@largefloatcheck
+        \global\dp\@currbox1sp %
+        \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+      \fi
+      \ifnum\@floatpenalty=-\@Mii \@Esphack\fi
+    \else
+      \end@float
+    \fi}}{}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Captions}
+%
+%    The caption styling 
+% is accomplished by redefining the |\@makecaption|
+% command. First, though, define and initialise the user-level commands.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@contcw}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@conthang}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@contindent}
+% For use when checking caption width and captioning styles styles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@contcw
+\newif\if@conthang
+\newif\if@contindent
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\captiondelim}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contdelim}
+%  For the caption delimeter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\captiondelim}[1]{\def\@contdelim{#1}}
+\captiondelim{: }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\captionnamefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contnfont}
+% The font for the caption name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\captionnamefont}[1]{\def\@contnfont{#1}}
+\captionnamefont{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\captiontitlefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\@conttfont}
+% The font for the caption title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\captiontitlefont}[1]{\def\@conttfont{#1}}
+\captiontitlefont{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\flushleftright}
+% \begin{macro}{\centerlastline}
+% These are in addition to the |\centering|, |\raggedleft| and |\raggedright|
+% declarations for paragraphing. |\flushleftright| sets the skips to \TeX's
+% normal (block) paragraphing values,
+% while |\centerlastline| sets the skips to give a centered last line in
+% a block paragraph.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\flushleftright}{%
+  \leftskip\z@ \rightskip\z@
+  \parfillskip=\z@ plus 1fil}
+\newcommand{\centerlastline}{%
+  \leftskip=\z@ plus 1fil
+  \rightskip=\z@ plus -1fil
+  \parfillskip=\z@ plus 2fil}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\captionstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contcstyle}
+% The paragraphing style for the caption.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\captionstyle}[1]{\def\@contcstyle{#1}}
+\captionstyle{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\captionstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\@memcshort}
+% \begin{macro}{\@memcnom}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contcshortstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contcstyle}
+% The paragraphing style for the caption.
+%
+% I had email from J{\o}rgen Larsen (\url{jl@dirac.ruc.dk}), 2003/04/09,
+% asking for separate controls for the short and long captions. \\
+%  |\captionstyle|\oarg{short}\marg{normal}.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Extended \cs{captionstyle} (from patch v1.5)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\captionstyle}{%
+  \@ifnextchar[ {\@memcshort}{\@memcnorm}}
+\def\@memcshort[#1]#2{%
+  \def\@contcshortstyle{#1}
+  \def\@contcstyle{#2}}
+\def\@memcnorm#1{%
+  \def\@contcshortstyle{#1}
+  \def\@contcstyle{#1}}
+\captionstyle{}
+  
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@contcwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\captionwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\changecaptionwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\normalcaptionwidth}
+% The macros for dealing with the caption width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\@contcwidth}
+\newcommand{\captionwidth}[1]{\setlength{\@contcwidth}{#1}}
+\captionwidth{\linewidth}
+\newcommand{\changecaptionwidth}{\@contcwtrue}
+\newcommand{\normalcaptionwidth}{\@contcwfalse}
+\normalcaptionwidth
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@contindw}
+% \begin{macro}{\hangcaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\indentcaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\normalcaption}
+% The macros for hanging and indented captions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\@contindw}
+\newcommand{\hangcaption}{\@conthangtrue\@contindentfalse}
+\newcommand{\indentcaption}[1]{\setlength{\@contindw}{#1}%
+  \@conthangfalse\@contindenttrue}
+\newcommand{\normalcaption}{\@conthangfalse\@contindentfalse}
+\normalcaption
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\precaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contpre}
+% \begin{macro}{\postcaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contpost}
+% \begin{macro}{\midbicaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contmidbi}
+% The macros for the pre- and post-caption text/commands, and
+% for the mid-caption command for bilingual captions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\precaption}[1]{\def\@contpre{#1}}
+\precaption{}
+\newcommand{\postcaption}[1]{\def\@contpost{#1}}
+\postcaption{}
+\newcommand{\midbicaption}[1]{\def\@contmidbi{#1}}
+\midbicaption{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\abovecaptionskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\belowcaptionskip}
+% Vertical space above and below a caption. Make them sum to an
+% integral number of lines.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\abovecaptionskip}
+  \setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0.5\onelineskip}
+\newlength{\belowcaptionskip}
+  \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0.5\onelineskip}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\caption}
+% For subfloat support, the (kernel) |\caption| macro needs to note that it
+% has been called.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@memoldcaption\caption
+\def\caption{\donemaincaptiontrue\@memoldcaption}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memcaptioninfo}
+% \verb?\memcaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}{short}{long}?
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{memcaptioninfo}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\memcaptioninfo}[4]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@caption}
+% For title referencing support, the (kernel) |\@caption| macro needs 
+% to store the title.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added braces around second argument of \cs{@memold@caption} (per Dan Luecking, mempatch v3.0)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@memold@caption\@caption
+\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{%
+  \M@gettitle{#2}%
+  \memcaptioninfo{#1}{\csname the#1\endcsname}{#2}{#3}%
+  \@memold@caption{#1}[{#2}]{#3}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
+%  This is a reimplementation of the kernel |\@makecaption| command.
+% As well as including the caption typesetting commands it enables
+% captions that include forced newlines (e.g., by |\\|).
+%
+% The first part is due to 
+% Donald Arseneau\footnote{Email: \texttt{asnd@triumf.ca}} from postings
+% to the \ctt{} newsgroup and Email discussions. The |\topskip| strut is
+% used whenever the caption is the first part of the float. This means,
+% among other things, that if a caption comes at the
+% top of a page, then the first line of the caption will be aligned with
+% the normal first line of a page. The |\abovecaptionskip| is only used
+% when there is something above the caption in the current float.
+% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/24}{Changed \cs{@tempa} to \cs{@memtempa} in \cs{@makecaption}}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/02/12}{Added extra centering code in \cs{@makecaption}}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added separate short/long styles in \cs{@makecaption}
+%                             (from patch v1.5)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\let\@memtempa\relax
+  \ifdim\prevdepth>-99\p@ \vskip\abovecaptionskip
+  \else \def\@memtempa{\vbox to\topskip{}}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contfnote}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contfmark}
+% The caption title will be typeset twice, firstly to measure its width
+% and secondly to actually typeset it. To avoid problems caused by
+% a footnote in the caption getting processed twice, we temporarily
+% disable the expected relevant commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\@contfnote\footnote \renewcommand{\footnote}[2][]{}
+  \let\@contfmark\footnotemark \renewcommand{\footnotemark}[1][]{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% Now measure the width of the total caption, not forgetting to take account
+% of the font specifications, and then restore the footnoting. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \sbox\@tempboxa{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim \@conttfont #2}
+  \let\footnote\@contfnote
+  \let\footnotemark\@contfmark
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the caption is less than one
+% line, then the whole caption needs to be centered on the page (otherwise
+% the short caption may be typeset flushleft).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\linewidth \centering \fi
+  \if@contcw
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For typesetting at anything other than the normal width, put the caption
+% into a |\parbox| of the specified width. This must be centered.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \centering
+    \parbox{\@contcwidth}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Henrik Holm\footnote{Email from \texttt{henrik@tele.ntnu.no} on
+% 2002/02/10.} proposed adding the next line to center short, narrow captions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\@contcwidth \centering \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@conthang
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For a hanging caption we have to measure the width of the caption name,
+% then typeset the whole caption in a hanging paragraph.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed code for hangcaption in \cs{@makecaption}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \sbox\@tempboxa{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}
+    \@contpre%
+    {\@contcstyle\hangindent=\wd\@tempboxa
+     \noindent\box\@tempboxa\@memtempa \@conttfont #2\par}
+  \else
+    \if@contindent
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% An indented caption is similar, except the amount of indentation is
+% kept in |\@contindw|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \@contpre%
+      {\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}\@memtempa 
+      {\@contcstyle\hangindent=\@contindw
+                   \hangafter=\@ne\@conttfont #2\par}% <- v1.4 
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For the normal style, just typeset the caption.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \@contpre%
+      {\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}\@memtempa 
+      {\ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\linewidth 
+         \@contcshortstyle\else \@contcstyle\fi%  <- v1.4 
+       \@conttfont #2\par}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finish off the typesetting by processing the post-text,  and if not using
+% the normal width then close off the |\parbox|, and lastly put in some
+% vertical space. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@contpost
+  \if@contcw
+    \par
+    }  % end of the \parbox
+  \fi
+  \vskip\belowcaptionskip}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Continuation captions and legends}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\contcaption}
+%    |\contcaption{|\meta{text}|}| is a user-level command. 
+%    It is a simplified
+%    version of the normal |\caption| command as it doesn't have to deal
+%    with numbering or list of \dots entries. 
+%
+% However,
+% Brent Lievers\footnote{ (\texttt{lieversb@post.queensu.ca})
+% in \ctt{} thread \textit{Figures}, 2003/11/14.} requested that \cs{label}
+% should pick up the correct caption number after a \cs{contcaption}.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Extended \cs{contcaption} (from patch v1.9)} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\contcaption}{%
+  \addtocounter{\@captype}{\m@ne}\refstepcounter{\@captype}%
+  \@contcaption\@captype}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@contcaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contcaption}
+%    |\@contcaption| is the workhorse for the |\contcaption| command. In turn,
+% it uses the |\@makecaption| command (defined in the usual classes)
+% to do most of its work. It
+% uses the number of the previous |\caption| command in the same
+% type of float and its implementation includes much of the code
+% used in the \LaTeX{} |\@caption| command.
+% 
+%    First specify |\@@contcaption{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{title}|}| 
+% to save some repetitive code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@@contcaption#1#2{%
+  \par
+  \begingroup
+     \@parboxrestore
+     \if@minipage
+       \@setminipage
+     \fi
+     \normalsize
+     \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}\par
+  \endgroup}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now for |\@contcaption{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{title}|}|. 
+% It has to flush out any subcaptions at the 
+% appropriate time, as well as typesetting the caption.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@contcaption#1#2{%
+  \if@contbotsub
+    \@memlistsubcaptions{#1}%
+    \@@contcaption{#1}{#2}%
+  \else
+    \@@contcaption{#1}{#2}%
+    \@memlistsubcaptions{#1}%
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}    
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memlegendinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\legend}
+%    The macro \cs{legend}\marg{text}is intended
+% to be used in a float environment for an `anonymous' caption, but can be
+% used anywhere.
+%
+%    The implementation is similar to the \cs{caption} command but we have
+% to eliminate printing of a delimeter.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{legend}}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{memlegendinfo}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\memlegendinfo}[1]{}
+\newcommand{\legend}[1]{%
+  \M@gettitle{#1}%
+  \memlegendinfo{#1}%
+  \par
+  \begingroup
+     \@parboxrestore
+     \if@minipage
+       \@setminipage
+     \fi
+     \normalsize
+     \captiondelim{\mbox{}}
+     \@makecaption{}{\ignorespaces #1}\par
+  \endgroup}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\namedlegend}
+% \begin{macro}{\memnamedlegendinfo}
+% \cs{namedlegend}\oarg{short-title}\marg{long-title} is like the
+% \cs{caption} command except that it does not number the caption.
+%
+% \cs{memnamedlegendinfo}\marg{type}\marg{short-title}\marg{long-title}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{memnamedlegendinfo}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\namedlegend}{\@dblarg{\@legend\@captype}}
+\newcommand*{\memnamedlegendinfo}[3]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@legend}
+% \cs{@legend}\marg{type}\oarg{short-title}\marg{long-title}
+% is the workhorse for the \cs{namedlegend} command. In turn, it calls
+% \cs{@makelegend}. It requires two commands to have been defined, namely
+% \cs{flegtoctype} and \cs{flegtype}. The command \cs{flegtoctype}\marg{text}
+% is responsible for writing a title text to the appropriate listof file.
+% \cs{flegtype} is responsible for typeseting the name of the legend.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@legend}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@legend#1[#2]#3{%
+  \M@gettitle{#2}%
+  \memnamedlegendinfo{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \par
+  \csname flegtoc#1\endcsname{#2}%
+  \begingroup
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \if@minipage
+      \@setminipage
+    \fi
+    \normalsize
+    \@makecaption{\csname fleg#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
+  \endgroup}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Non-float captions}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newfixedcaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\renewfixedcaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\providefixedcaption}
+% These commands are defined in terms of their \verb?\...command? counterparts.\\
+% Call as \verb?\...fixedcaption?\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{env}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newfixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
+  \newcommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}
+\newcommand{\renewfixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
+  \renewcommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}
+\newcommand{\providefixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
+  \providecommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bilingual captions}
+%
+%    The bilingual caption commands all use internal grouping so
+% that any changes are kept local. This has the unfortunate side-effect
+% that any |\label| command must be within the grouping otherwise the
+% wrong number is picked up. To make the coding, if not necessarily the 
+% use, of the commands simpler, I have not used the traditional style
+% of square brackets for optional caption text arguments. Instead, empty
+% `required' arguments are used as the implementation means. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\membitwonumcaptioninfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\membionenumcaptioninfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\membicaptioninfo}
+% \verb?\membitwonumcaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}?\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\\
+%  \hspace*{2in} \marg{name2}\marg{short2}\marg{long2} \\
+% \verb?\membionenumcaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}?\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\\
+%  \hspace*{2in} \marg{name2}\marg{short2}\marg{long2} \\
+% \verb?\membicaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}?\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\\
+%  \hspace{2in} \marg{name2}\marg{long2} \\
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{membitwonumcaptioninfo},
+%   \cs{membitwonumcaptioninfo} and \cs{membicaptioninfo}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\membitwonumcaptioninfo}[7]{}
+\newcommand*{\membionenumcaptioninfo}[7]{}
+\newcommand*{\membicaptioninfo}[6]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bitwonumcaption}
+%  The 6 arguments are: optional label, short and long in language 1, 
+% name in
+% language 2, and short and long in language 2. Both texts are put
+% into the List of as numbered entries.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bitwonumcaption}[6][\@empty]{%
+  \begingroup
+  \let\memcaptioninfo\@gobblefour
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
+% the normal |\caption| for language 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifmtarg{#2}{\def\m@mscapi{#3}\caption{#3}}%
+               {\def\m@mscapi{#2}\caption[#2]{#3}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do the optional labeling.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx \@empty #1\else
+    \label{#1}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Remove any extra spacing between the captions, and set the
+% NAME for the second caption. Use a command to transfer
+% the NAME to the renewal code to avoid circularity if
+% for example, we are trying to redefine |\tablename| as
+% |\tablename|. Decrement the caption counter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
+  \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
+  \edef\@memtempc{#4}%
+  \expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}%
+  \addtocounter{\@captype}{-1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now repeat for the second language caption.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@contmidbi
+  \@ifmtarg{#5}{\def\m@mscapii{#6}\caption{#6}}%
+               {\def\m@mscapii{#5}\caption[#5]{#6}}%
+  \membitwonumcaptioninfo{\@captype}{\@nameuse{the\@captype}}%
+                         {\m@mscapi}{#3}{#4}{\m@mscapii}{#6}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bionenumcaption}
+%  The 6 arguments are: optional labelling,
+%  short and long in language 1, name in
+% language 2, and short and long in language 2. Both texts are put
+% into the List of, but only the first is numbered.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bionenumcaption}[6][\@empty]{%
+  \begingroup
+  \let\memcaptioninfo\@gobblefour
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
+% the normal |\caption| for language 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifmtarg{#2}{\def\m@mscapi{#3}\caption{#3}}%
+               {\def\m@mscapi{#2}\caption[#2]{#3}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do the optional labeling.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx \@empty #1\else
+    \label{#1}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do the between captions code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
+  \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
+  \edef\@memtempc{#4}%
+  \expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Use a continuation caption for the second language, not forgetting
+% to add the appropriate unnumbered text to the List.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@contmidbi
+  \contcaption{#6}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#5}{%
+    \def\m@mscapii{#6}%
+    \addcontentsline{\csname ext@\@captype\endcsname}{\@captype}%
+      {\protect\numberline{}{\ignorespaces #6}}}{%
+    \def\m@mscapii{#5}%
+    \addcontentsline{\csname ext@\@captype\endcsname}{\@captype}%
+      {\protect\numberline{}{\ignorespaces #5}}}%
+  \membionenumcaptioninfo{\@captype}{\@nameuse{the\@captype}}%
+                         {\m@mscapi}{#3}{#4}{\m@mscapii}{#6}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bicaption}
+%  The 5 arguments are: optional labelling, 
+% short and long in language 1, name in
+% language 2, and long in language 2. 
+% Only the first text is put into the List.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bicaption}[5][\@empty]{%
+  \begingroup
+  \let\memcaptioninfo\@gobblefour
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
+% the normal |\caption| for language 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifmtarg{#2}{\def\m@mscapi{#3}\caption{#3}}%
+               {\def\m@mscapi{#2}\caption[#2]{#3}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do the optional labeling.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx \@empty #1\else
+    \label{#1}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do the between captions code and 
+% finally just use |\contcaption| for the
+% second language.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
+  \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
+  \edef\@memtempc{#4}
+  \expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}%
+  \@contmidbi
+  \contcaption{#5}%
+  \membicaptioninfo{\@captype}{\@nameuse{the\@captype}}%
+                   {\m@mscapi}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bicontcaption}
+%  The 3 arguments are long in language 1, name in
+% language 2, and long in language 2.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bicontcaption}[3]{%
+  \begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Call |\contcaption| for language 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \contcaption{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do the between captions code and use |\contcaption| for the second
+% language.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
+  \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
+  \edef\@memtempc{#2}%
+  \expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}%
+  \@contmidbi
+  \contcaption{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Support for the \Lopt{subfigure} package functionality}
+%
+% Much of the code in this section is based on the \Lpack{subfigure}
+% package code, by kind permission of its author, Steven Douglas Cochran.
+% To try and avoid clashes with the real \Lpack{subfigure} code I have
+% used different macro names, especially when I have copied the code.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contsubcstyle}
+% The paragraphing style for subcaptions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\subcaptionstyle}[1]{\def\@contsubcstyle{#1}}
+\subcaptionstyle{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@shortsubcap}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@hangsubcap}
+% \begin{macro}{\shortsubcaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\hangsubcaption}
+% \begin{macro}{\normalsubcaption}
+%  For dealing with short and hanging subcaptions. 
+% Analagous to the \Lpack{subfigure} |nooneline| and |hang| options.
+% The default is normal subcaptions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@shortsubcap
+\newif\if@hangsubcap
+\newcommand*{\shortsubcaption}{\@shortsubcaptrue}
+\newcommand*{\hangsubcaption}{\@hangsubcaptrue}
+\newcommand*{\normalsubcaption}{\@shortsubcapfalse\@hangsubcapfalse}
+\normalsubcaption
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subfloattopskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcapskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcaptopadj}
+% \begin{macro}{\subfloatbottomskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\subfloatlabelskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcapmargin}
+% These |\subfloat...| lengths are analagous to the \Lpack{subfigure} 
+% |\subfig...| lengths.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\subfloattopskip
+\newskip\subfloatcapskip
+\newskip\subfloatcaptopadj
+\newskip\subfloatbottomskip
+\newskip\subfloatlabelskip
+\newdimen\subfloatcapmargin
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@tightsubcap}
+% \begin{macro}{\loosesubcaptions}
+% \begin{macro}{\tightsubcaptions}
+% Unlike the \Lpack{subfigure} package the class provides no options for
+% subcaptions. These macros provide the \Lpack{subfigure} loose/tight
+% option functions. Set the default to tight.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@tightsubcap
+\newcommand{\loosesubcaptions}{%
+  \subfloattopskip = 10\p@
+  \subfloatcapskip  = 10\p@
+  \subfloatcaptopadj = \z@
+  \subfloatbottomskip = 10\p@
+  \subfloatlabelskip = 0.33em
+  \subfloatcapmargin = 10\p@
+  \@tightsubcapfalse
+}
+
+\newcommand{\tightsubcaptions}{%
+  \subfloattopskip = 5\p@
+  \subfloatcapskip  = \z@
+  \subfloatcaptopadj = 3\p@
+  \subfloatbottomskip = 5\p@
+  \subfloatlabelskip = 0.33em \@plus 0.07em \@minus 0.03em
+  \subfloatcapmargin = \z@
+  \@tightsubcaptrue
+}
+\tightsubcaptions
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionsize}
+% \begin{macro}{\@subcapsize}
+% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionlabelfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\@subcaplabelfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\@subcapfont}
+% These macros set the size and fonts for the subcaptions. Set the defaults
+% to |\footnotesize|, and the normal roman font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\subcaptionsize}[1]{\def\@subcapsize{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\subcaptionlabelfont}[1]{\def\@subcaplabelfont{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\subcaptionfont}[1]{\def\@subcapfont{#1}}
+\subcaptionsize{\footnotesize}
+\subcaptionlabelfont{\normalfont}
+\subcaptionfont{\normalfont}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@contkeep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@contset}
+% \begin{macro}{\subconcluded}
+% |\@contkeep| stores
+% the current subfloat number in counter |@contsubnum| and 
+% |\@contset| sets the subfloat number to the value of |@contsubnum|.
+% |\subconcluded| sets the subfloat number to zero. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \newcounter{@contsubnum}
+  \newcommand{\@contkeep}{%
+    \setcounter{@contsubnum}{\value{sub\@captype}}}
+  \newcommand{\@contset}{%
+    \setcounter{sub\@captype}{\value{@contsubnum}}}
+  \newcommand{\subconcluded}{%
+    \setcounter{sub\@captype}{0}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@contbotsub}
+% A flag indicating whether the subcaption is to be at the bottom or
+% top of the subfloat; TRUE for the subcaption at the bottom.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@contbotsub
+  \@contbotsubtrue
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subcaption}
+% |\subcaption[|\meta{list-entry}|]{|\meta{caption}|}| is a generic
+% subcaption. There is no \Lpack{subfigure} equivalent.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\subcaption}{%
+  \bgroup
+    \let\label=\memsub@label
+    \ifdonemaincaption\else
+      \advance\csname c@\@captype\endcsname\@ne
+    \fi
+    \refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep
+    \@ifnextchar [%
+      {\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}}%
+      {\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}[\@empty]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memsubcap}
+% This handles the optional argument to |\subcaption|. It sets |\@tempdima|
+% to |\hsize| as later on |\@makesubfloatcaption| uses this.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Added \cs{@tempdima} to \cs{@memsubcap}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@memsubcap#1[#2]#3{%
+  \@tempdima=\hsize
+  \vskip\subfloatcapskip
+  \ifx \@empty #2
+    \@memsubcaption{#1}{#3}{#3}%
+  \else
+    \@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \fi
+  \vskip\subfloatcapskip
+  \egroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memsubcaption}
+% |\@memsubcaption{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{list-entry}|}{|\meta{caption}|}|
+% typesets a subcaption. This is a copy of the \Lpack{subfigure} 
+% |\@subcaption| macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@memsubcaption}[3]{%
+  \ifx \relax#2\relax \else
+    \bgroup
+      \let\label\@gobble
+      \let\protect\string
+      \def\@memsubcaplabel{\@nameuse{@@the#1}}%
+      \xdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{%
+        \@memsubfigcaptionlist,%
+  {\protect\numberline{\@memsubcaplabel}\noexpand{\ignorespaces #2}}}%
+    \egroup
+  \fi
+  \@makesubfloatcaption{\@nameuse{@the#1}}{#3}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\contsubcaption}
+% |\contsubcaption[|\meta{caption}|]| is the continued version of
+% |\subcaption|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\contsubcaption}{%
+  \bgroup
+    \let\label=\memsub@label
+    \@contset
+    \refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep
+    \@ifnextchar [%
+      {\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}}%
+      {\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}[\@empty]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{subfloat}
+% The \Lpack{subfigure} documentation suggests a way of defining a |subfloat|
+% environment. This is a trivial implementation because the |\subcaption|
+% and |\contsubcaption| commands are provided by the class, and can be used
+% within a |subfloat|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{subfloat}{}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subbottom}
+% \begin{macro}{\@memsubbody}
+%    |\subbottom[|\meta{list-entry}|][|\meta{subcaption}|]{|\meta{text}|}|
+% typesets a subcaption below the \meta{text}. Most of the  work is
+% performed by the |\@memsubbody| macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\subbottom}{%
+  \@contbotsubtrue
+  \@memsubbody}
+
+\newcommand{\@memsubbody}{%
+  \bgroup
+  \let\label=\memsub@label
+  \ifdonemaincaption\else
+    \advance\csname c@\@captype\endcsname\@ne
+  \fi
+  \refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep%
+  \leavevmode
+  \@ifnextchar [%
+    {\@memsubfig}%
+    {\@memsubfig[\@empty]}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\contsubbottom}
+% \begin{macro}{\@memcontsubbody}
+%     These are the continued versions of |\subbottom| and |\@memsubbody|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\contsubbottom}{%
+  \@contbotsubtrue
+  \@memcontsubbody}
+
+\newcommand{\@memcontsubbody}{%
+  \bgroup
+  \let\label=\memsub@label
+  \@contset
+  \refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep%
+  \leavevmode
+  \@ifnextchar [%
+    {\@memsubfig}%
+    {\@memsubfig[\@empty]}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subtop}
+% \begin{macro}{\contsubtop}
+%  These are similar to |\subbottom| and |\contsubbottom| except that they
+% put the subcaption on top of the \meta{text}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\subtop}{%
+  \@contbotsubfalse
+  \@memsubbody}
+
+\newcommand{\contsubtop}{%
+  \@contbotsubfalse
+  \@memcontsubbody}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Deleted \cs{@contsubfloat} as it was not used}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfig}
+% This is a revised version of the \Lpack{subfigure} |\@subfigure| command
+% --- just the called macro names are changed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@memsubfig[#1]{%
+  \@ifnextchar [%
+    {\@memsubfloat{sub\@captype}[#1]}%
+    {\@memsubfloat{sub\@captype}[\@empty #1][#1]}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfloat}
+%    This is a modified version of the \Lpack{subfigure} |\@subfloat|
+% command Essentially the |\csname if#1topcap\endcsname| constructs are
+% replaced by |\if@contbotsub|. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@memsubfloat#1[#2][#3]#4{%
+  \@tempcnta=\@ne
+  \if@tightsubcap
+    \if@minipage
+      \@tempcnta=\z@
+    \else
+      \ifdim\lastskip=\z@
+        \@tempcnta=\@ne
+      \else
+        \@tempcnta=\tw@
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@contbotsub
+    \def\subfig@top{\subfloattopskip}%
+    \def\subfig@bottom{\subfloatbottomskip}%
+  \else
+    \def\subfig@top{\subfloatbottomskip}%
+    \def\subfig@bottom{\subfloattopskip}%
+  \fi
+  \setbox\@tempboxa \hbox{#4}%
+  \@tempdima=\wd\@tempboxa
+  \vtop\bgroup
+    \vbox\bgroup
+    \ifcase\@tempcnta
+      \@minipagefalse
+    \or
+      \vspace{\subfig@top}
+    \or
+      \ifdim \lastskip=\z@ \else
+        \@tempskipb\subfig@top\@xaddvskip
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \if@contbotsub
+      \box\@tempboxa\egroup
+      \ifx \@empty#3\relax \else
+        \vskip\subfloatcapskip
+        \@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \ifx \@empty#3\relax \else
+        \@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+        \vskip\subfloatcapskip
+        \vskip\subfloatcaptopadj
+      \fi\egroup
+      \box\@tempboxa
+    \fi
+    \vspace{\subfig@bottom}
+  \egroup
+\egroup}
+  
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The following series of macros, from \Lpack{subfigure}, control the 
+% typesetting of the subcaptions.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfigcaptionlist}
+% A copy of |\@subfigcaptionlist|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@memsubfigcaptionlist}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memlistsubcaptions}
+% A copy of |\listsubcaptions|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\memlistsubcaptions}{%
+  \@ifstar
+    {\gdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{}}%
+    {\@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memlistsubcaptions}
+% A copy of |\@listsubcaptions|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@memlistsubcaptions}[1]{%
+  \@ifundefined{@captype}{}{%
+    \@ifundefined{ext@sub#1}{}{%
+      \@for \@tempa:=\@memsubfigcaptionlist \do {%
+        \ifx \@empty\@tempa\relax \else
+          \addcontentsline{\@nameuse{ext@sub#1}}{sub#1}{\@tempa}%
+        \fi}}}%
+  \gdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makesubfloatcaption}
+%  This is a copy of |\@makesubfigurecaption|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@makesubfloatcaption}[2]{%
+  \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
+    \@subcapsize
+    {\@subcaplabelfont #1}{\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
+  \@tempdimb=-\subfloatcapmargin
+  \multiply\@tempdimb\tw@
+  \advance\@tempdimb\@tempdima
+  \hb@xt@\@tempdima{%
+    \hss
+    \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\@tempdimb
+      \memsubfig@caption{#1}{#2}%
+    \else
+      \if@shortsubcap
+        \memsubfig@caption{#1}{#2}%
+      \else
+        \box\@tempboxa
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \hss}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memsubfig@caption}
+% This is a copy of |\subfig@caption|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\memsubfig@caption}[2]{%
+  \if@hangsubcap
+    \sbox{\@tempboxa}{\@subcapsize\@subcaplabelfont #1}%
+    \addtolength{\@tempdimb}{-\wd\@tempboxa}%
+    \usebox{\@tempboxa}%
+    \memsubfig@captionpar{\@tempdimb}{%
+      {\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
+  \else
+    \memsubfig@captionpar{\@tempdimb}{{\@subcaplabelfont #1}%
+      {\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\memsubfig@captionpar}
+% This replaces |\subfig@captionpar|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\memsubfig@captionpar}[2]{%
+  \parbox[t]{#1}{\@subcapsize\@contsubcstyle #2}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\memsub@label}
+% These are copies of |\sub@label| and |\subref|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\memsub@label}{%
+  \@ifnextchar (%
+    {\sf@memsub@label}%
+    {\sf@memsub@label(Sub\@captype\space
+                     \@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}%
+                     \@nameuse{thesub\@captype})}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sf@memsub@label}
+% This is a copy of |\sf@sub@label|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sf@memsub@label(#1)#2{%
+  \protected@edef\mem@currentlabelname{#1}%
+  \sf@@memsub@label{#2}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sf@@memsub@label}
+% This is an expanded copy of |\sf@@sub@label| processed after any packages may
+% have been loaded.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{nameref}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \Lpack{nameref} package is loaded.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
+      \@bsphack
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+        \string\newlabel{#1}%
+          {{\@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
+          {\thepage}%
+          {\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
+          {\@currentHref}{}}}%
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+        \string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
+          {{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
+          {\thepage}%
+          {\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
+          {\@currentHref}{}}}%
+  \@esphack}
+  }{\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \Lpack{hyperref} package is loaded, but not \Lpack{nameref}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
+      \@bsphack
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+        \string\newlabel{#1}%
+          {{\@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
+          {\thepage}%
+          {\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
+          {\@currentHref}{}}}%
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+        \string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
+          {{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
+          {\thepage}%
+          {\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
+          {\@currentHref}{}}}%
+  \@esphack}
+  }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Neither the \Lpack{hyperref} nor the \Lpack{nameref}
+% package is loaded.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\@memoldlabel\label
+    \newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
+      \@bsphack
+      \@memoldlabel{#1}%
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+        \string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
+          {{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
+          {\thepage}}}%
+  \@esphack}
+  }{}%
+  }
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionref}
+% This is a copy of the |\subref| macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\subcaptionref}{%
+  \@ifstar{\ssc@ref}{\sc@ref}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\ssc@ref}
+% \begin{macro}{\sc@ref}
+% The implementation of the starred and unstarred forms of |\subcaptionref|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ssc@ref}[1]{\ref{sub@#1}}
+\newcommand*{\sc@ref}[1]{{\@subcaplabelfont\ref{sub@#1}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Epigraphs}
+%
+% This code comes from the \Lpack{epigraph} package~\cite{EPIGRAPH}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeepigraphskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterepigraphskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraphwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraphrule}
+%    The several length commands, which can be changed by the user with
+% |\setlength|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\beforeepigraphskip}
+  \setlength{\beforeepigraphskip}{.5\baselineskip}
+\newlength{\afterepigraphskip}
+  \setlength{\afterepigraphskip}{.5\baselineskip}
+\newlength{\epigraphwidth}
+  \setlength{\epigraphwidth}{.4\textwidth}
+\newlength{\epigraphrule}
+  \setlength{\epigraphrule}{.4\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraphsize}
+%    The size of the font to be used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\epigraphsize}{\small}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraphflush}
+% \begin{macro}{\textflush}
+% \begin{macro}{\sourceflush}
+%  The three commands to position epigraphs in the textblock and to position
+%  the components of the epigraph.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\epigraphflush}{flushright}
+\newcommand{\textflush}{flushleft}
+\newcommand{\sourceflush}{flushright}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraphfontsize}
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraphposition}
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraphtextposition}
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraphsourceposition}
+% These are declarative forms of the above. It's a bit late now, but
+% the previous macros should have been internal.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added some declarations for epigraphs.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\epigraphfontsize}[1]{\def\epigraphsize{#1}}
+\newcommand{\epigraphposition}[1]{\long\def\epigraphflush{#1}}
+\newcommand{\epigraphtextposition}[1]{\def\textflush{#1}}
+\newcommand{\epigraphsourceposition}[1]{\def\sourceflush{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@epirule}
+%  The internal command to draw a rule between text and source.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@epirule}{\rule[.5ex]{\epigraphwidth}{\epigraphrule}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@epitext}
+% The internal command to typeset the \meta{text}. Put it into a minipage of the
+% right size and typeset per |\textflush|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@epitext}[1]{%
+  \begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}\begin{\textflush} #1\\
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  Draw a rule if it will be visible, otherwise add some extra vertical space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifdim\epigraphrule>\z@ \@epirule \else \vspace*{1ex} \fi
+  \end{\textflush}\end{minipage}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@episource}
+%    The internal command for typesetting the \meta{source}, which is put 
+% into a minipage and typeset according to |\sourceflush|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@episource}[1]{%
+  \begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
+    \begin{\sourceflush} #1\end{\sourceflush}
+  \end{minipage}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraph}
+%    Having got the preliminaries out of the way, here's the user command
+% for a single epigraph. This is set in a minipage to prevent breaking
+% across a page. Position it according to |\epigraphflush|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\epigraph}[2]{\vspace{\beforeepigraphskip}
+  {\epigraphsize\begin{\epigraphflush}\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
+    \@epitext{#1}\\ \@episource{#2}
+    \end{minipage}\end{\epigraphflush}
+    \vspace{\afterepigraphskip}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\qitem}
+% \begin{macro}{\qitemlabel}
+%    |\qitem| is the epigraph list version of |\item|. 
+% Set everything inside a minipage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\qitem}[2]{{%
+  \raggedright\item \begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
+    \@epitext{#1}\\ \@episource{#2}
+  \end{minipage}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  |\qitemlabel| is needed for a list as well. It is not going to 
+% typeset anything.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\qitemlabel}[1]{\hfill}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{epigraphs}
+%  Now for the epigraph list. This is defined in terms of a |list|
+% environment. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{epigraphs}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do the vertical space, set the font size, position according to 
+% |\epigraphflush|, and put everything into a minipage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \vspace{\beforeepigraphskip}\begin{\epigraphflush}
+  \epigraphsize
+  \begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
+   \list{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  Make the list just fit the minipage (i.e., no indents).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    {\itemindent\z@ \labelwidth\z@ \labelsep\z@
+     \leftmargin\z@ \rightmargin\z@
+     \let\makelabel\qitemlabel}}%
+  {\endlist\end{minipage}\end{\epigraphflush}
+   \vspace{\afterepigraphskip}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsection{Epigraphs before a chapter title}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@epichapapp}
+% \begin{macro}{\dropchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\undodrop}
+%    Commands to drop and restore positions of chapter titles. Dropping is
+% accomplished by inserting vertical space before the |\@chapapp| command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\dropchapter}[1]{%
+  \let\@epichapapp\@chapapp
+  \renewcommand{\@chapapp}{\vspace*{#1}\@epichapapp}}
+\newcommand{\undodrop}{\let\@chapapp\@epichapapp}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Placing an epigraph before a chapter title uses the scheme outlined
+% by Piet van Oostrum~\cite{FANCYHDR}. This is to put a zero sized
+% picture into the page header. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@epirhs}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@epicenter}
+%  Two booleans for testing whether an epigraph is to be at the RH margin,
+% centered, or at the LH margin. The default is RH margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@epirhs     \@epirhstrue
+\newif\if@epicenter  \@epicentertrue
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@epipos}
+%    This routine sets the |\if@epi...| booleans according to the value of
+% |\epigraphflush|. If |\epigraphflush| is neither |center| nor |flushleft|
+% then it defaults to |flushright|. We have to use this to be upward 
+% compatible with |\epigraphflush| being set by the user with |\renewcommand|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@epipos}{
+  \long\def\@ept{flushleft}
+  \ifx\epigraphflush\@ept
+    \@epirhsfalse \@epicenterfalse
+  \else
+    \long\def\@ept{center}
+    \ifx\epigraphflush\@ept
+      \@epirhsfalse \@epicentertrue
+    \else
+      \@epirhstrue  \@epicenterfalse
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraphhead}
+% |\epigraphhead[|\meta{distance}|]{|\meta{text}|}| puts \meta{text} at
+% \meta{distance} (a number, not a length) below the header at the 
+% page position specified by |\epigraphflush|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\epigraphhead}[2][95]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We have to use |\def| instead of the normal \LaTeX{} definition commands
+% as we will keep on
+% (re)defining things. For reasons that are not fully clear to me \LaTeX{}
+% doesn't seem to like me using a |\savebox| for storing the epigraph text,
+% so I'll use a command instead.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@epitemp{\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}#2\end{minipage}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define an |epigraph| page style.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\ps@epigraph{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% There are three possible definitions for |\@oddhead| depending on the
+% value of |\epigraphflush|. We call |\@epipos| to decide which one to do.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@epipos
+    \if@epirhs
+      \def\@oddhead{\hfil\begin{picture}(0,0)
+                         \put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\@epitemp}}
+                         \end{picture}}
+    \else
+      \if@epicenter
+        \def\@oddhead{\hfil\begin{picture}(0,0)
+                           \put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\@epitemp}}
+                           \end{picture}\hfil}
+      \else
+        \def\@oddhead{\begin{picture}(0,0)
+                           \put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\@epitemp}}
+                           \end{picture}\hfil}
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+    \def\@oddfoot{\reset@font\hfil\thepage\hfil}
+    \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Make |epigraph| be the page style for this page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \thispagestyle{epigraph}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    The above produces a |plain| pagestyle with the epigraph. Life is
+% more complex if someone wants a fancy style with the epigraph. They
+% will have to do some work, though.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\the@epigraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\@epidrop}
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraphforheader}
+% |\the@pigraph| is a macro to store the contents of an epigraph, and |\@pidrop|
+% stores the \meta{distance} number.
+% |\epigraphforheader|\oarg{distance}\marg{text} defines the internal macros
+% appropriately.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{the@epigraph}, \cs{@epidrop}}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{epigraphforheader}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\the@epigraph}{}
+\newcommand{\@epidrop}{95}
+\newcommand{\epigraphforheader}[2][95]{%
+  \def\@epidrop{#1}\long\def\the@epigraph{#2}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\epigraphpicture}
+% |\epigraphpicture| puts |\the@epigraph| into a zero-sized picture at location
+% |(0,-\@epidrop)|. This can then be used as part of a fancy chapter header.
+% The coding is similar to |\epigraphhead|.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{epigraphpicture}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\epigraphpicture}{%
+  \def\@epitemp{%
+    \begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}\the@epigraph\end{minipage}}%
+  \@epipos
+  \if@epirhs
+    \begin{picture}(0,0)%
+      \put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\@epitemp}}%
+    \end{picture}%
+  \else
+    \if@epicenter
+      \begin{picture}(0,0)%
+        \put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\@epitemp}}%
+      \end{picture}%
+    \else
+      \begin{picture}(0,0)%
+        \put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\@epitemp}}%
+      \end{picture}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{The deprecated font commands}
+%
+% The class does not support the old font changing commands unless the
+% \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option is used.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memoldfonterr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@memoldfontwarn}
+% Macros for old font class error and warning. E.g., \\
+% |\@memoldfonterr{\tt}{\ttfamily}{\texttt}|
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memoldfonterr} and \cs{@memoldfontwarn}}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fiddled with the braces in \cs{@memoldfontwarn} (mempatch v3.0)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@memoldfonterr}[3]{%
+  \@memerror{Font command \protect#1\space is not supported}{%
+    Use \protect#2, or \protect#3{...}, or the oldfontcommands option}}
+\newcommand*{\@memoldfontwarn}[3]{%
+  \@memwarn{The \protect#1\space font command is deprecated.
+    \MessageBreak Use \protect#2{...} or {\protect#3... } instead}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%  Just give a single warning when an old font command is used following the
+% \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Just issue a single warning for an old font
+%                            (from patch v1.9)}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@rmwarn}
+% \begin{macro}{\rm}
+% The old command for roman font.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{rm}}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{More efficient coding of all the old font commands}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@memoldfont
+  \def\@mem@rmwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\rm}{\textrm}{\rmfamily}}
+  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\@mem@rmwarn\gdef\@mem@rmwarn{}%
+    \normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+\else
+  \def\rm{\@memoldfonterr{\rm}{\textrm}{\rmfamily}}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@sfwarn}
+% \begin{macro}{\sf}
+% The old sans font command.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sf}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@memoldfont
+  \def\@mem@sfwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\sf}{\textsf}{\sffamily}}
+  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\@mem@sfwarn\gdef\@mem@sfwarn{}%
+    \normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
+\else
+  \def\sf{\@memoldfonterr{\sf}{\textsf}{\sffamily}}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@ttwarn}
+% \begin{macro}{\tt}
+% The old typewriter font command.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{tt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@memoldfont
+  \def\@mem@ttwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\tt}{\texttt}{\ttfamily}}
+  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\@mem@ttwarn\gdef\@mem@ttwarn{}%
+    \normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
+\else
+  \def\tt{\@memoldfonterr{\tt}{\texttt}{\ttfamily}}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@bfwarn}
+% \begin{macro}{\bf}
+% The old bold font command.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{bf}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@memoldfont
+  \def\@mem@bfwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\bf}{\textbf}{\bfseries}}
+  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\@mem@bfwarn\gdef\@mem@bfwarn{}%
+    \normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
+\else
+  \def\bf{\@memoldfonterr{\bf}{\textbf}{\bfseries}}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@itwarn}
+% \begin{macro}{\it}
+% The old italic font command.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{it}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@memoldfont
+  \def\@mem@itwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\it}{\textit}{\itshape}}
+  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\@mem@itwarn\gdef\@mem@itwarn{}%
+    \normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
+\else
+  \def\it{\@memoldfonterr{\it}{\textit}{\itshape}}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@slwarn}
+% \begin{macro}{\sl}
+% The old slanted font command.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sl}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@memoldfont
+  \def\@mem@slwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\sl}{\textsl}{\slshape}}
+  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\@mem@slwarn\gdef\@mem@slwarn{}%
+    \normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
+\else
+  \def\sl{\@memoldfonterr{\sl}{\textsl}{\slshape}}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@scwarn}
+% \begin{macro}{\sc}
+% The old small caps font command.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sc}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@memoldfont
+  \def\@mem@scwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\sc}{\textsc}{\scshape}}
+  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\@mem@scwarn\gdef\@mem@scwarn{}%
+    \normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
+\else
+  \def\sc{\@memoldfonterr{\sc}{\textsc}{\scshape}}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@calwarn}
+% \begin{macro}{\cal}
+% The old calligraphic font command.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added definition of \cs{cal}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@memoldfont
+  \def\@mem@calwarn{%
+    \@memwarn{The \protect\cal\space font command is deprecated.
+    \MessageBreak Try to use \protect\mathcal\space instead}}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@mem@calwarn\gdef\@mem@calwarn{}%
+    \@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
+\else
+  \def\cal{%
+    \@memerror{Font command \protect\cal\space is not supported}{%
+    Use \protect\mathcal, or the oldfontcommands option}}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@mitwarn}
+% \begin{macro}{\mit}
+% The old math italic font command.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added definition of \cs{mit}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@memoldfont
+  \def\@mem@mitwarn{%
+    \@memwarn{The \protect\mit\space font command is deprecated.
+    \MessageBreak Try to use \protect\mathnormal\space instead}}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@mem@mitwarn\gdef\@mem@mitwarn{}%
+    \@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
+\else
+  \def\mit{%
+  \@memerror{Font command \protect\mit\space is not supported}{%
+             Use \protect\mathnormal, or the oldfontcommands option}}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\em}
+% \begin{macro}{\eminnershape}
+% \begin{macro}{\emph}
+% The old emphasis font command (the original \cs{em} is defined in the
+% kernel file \file{ltfssini.dtx}, coded here as \cs{@m@m@m}).
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Redid coding for \cs{emph} and \cs{em}}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Dont' deprecate \cs{em} and deleted \cs{@mem@emwarn} (mempatch v3.0)}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Completely redid \cs{em} and \cs{emph}, matching latest fixltx2e package (mempatch v3.3)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\em}{%
+  \@nomath\em
+  \ifdim\fontdimen\@ne\font > \z@
+    \eminnershape
+  \else
+    \itshape
+  \fi}
+\providecommand{\eminnershape}{\upshape}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\emph}{\em}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Cross Referencing} \label{sec:xref}
+%
+% \subsection{Label referencing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fref}
+% \begin{macro}{\tref}
+% \begin{macro}{\pref}
+%   These are named references to labeled figures, tables and pages. 
+% I find these
+% useful to ensure consistency throughout the document --- I don't have
+% to remember whether it is `see Figure ...' or `figure' or `Fig.' or \ldots.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\fref}[1]{\figurerefname~\ref{#1}}
+\newcommand{\tref}[1]{\tablerefname~\ref{#1}}
+\newcommand{\pref}[1]{\pagerefname~\pageref{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Pref}
+% \begin{macro}{\Cref}
+% \begin{macro}{\Sref}
+%   These are named references to labeled Part, Chapter and Sectional
+% divisions.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{Pref}, \cs{Cref} and \cs{Sref}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\Pref}[1]{\partrefname\ref{#1}}
+\newcommand{\Cref}[1]{\chapterrefname\ref{#1}}
+\newcommand{\Sref}[1]{\sectionrefname\ref{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Title referencing}
+%
+% This is based on DA's \Lpack{titleref} package~\cite{TITLEREF}. 
+% The following 
+% remarks are taken from that package.
+%
+%
+%  Titles for numbered sectioning units and for floats with captions are
+%  the same as the respective TOC, LOF, or LOT entry (even when no TOC is
+%  printed).  When a short title is provided (|\section[short]{long}|)
+%  it will be used for the |\titleref|.  This is especially useful for
+%  figure captions.  Unnumbered sections take their title reference from
+%  the printed title.  Beware!  This turns the title into a moving argument
+%  when it normally is not, and will cause weird errors if there are
+%  `fragile' commands present.
+%
+%  Enumerated lists do not have titles and simply inherit the title of
+%  their section.
+%
+%  The format of the title reference is controlled by the command
+%  |\theTitleReference|, which can be redefined with |\renewcommand|.
+%  It takes two parameters: the number and the title. The number is
+%  just the regular |\ref| and it is WRONG in unnumbered sections.
+%  Beware!  The default definition is the unadorned title.  You could
+%  do, for example, \\
+%  |\renewcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#1\ \emph{#2}}|.
+%
+%  The title of the current section is also available without |\label|:
+%  Use the command |\currenttitle| to generate a |\titleref| to the current
+%  section.  If you have redefined |\theTitleReference| to print the number
+%  with the title, be aware that the two may not correspond:  In a numbered
+%  list the number will show the current item but the title will show the
+%  current section, but in an unnumbered section the number will show
+%  some previous section number.
+%
+%  The big problem with the |[usetoc]| method is that |\titleref| will
+%  not refer to a |\label| which was given in the title or caption itself;
+%  the label must be placed after the sectioning command or the caption.
+%  If you make a title-reference to a label given in a title, you will get
+%  a warning message.
+%
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added title referencing (from patch v1.4)}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifheadnameref}
+% |\ifheadnameref|: FALSE use ToC entry, TRUE use header entry
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifheadnameref
+  \headnamereffalse
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theTitleReference}
+% |\theTitleReference|\marg{num}\marg{title} is the style for typesetting
+%  a referenced (number and) title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#2}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\label}
+% This redefinition of |\label| is intended to work with other redirections
+% of |\label|, if they record extra information in a similar way.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@mem@old@label\label
+\def\label#1{\@bsphack\begingroup
+  \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\protect\M@TitleReference
+      {\@currentlabel}{\M@currentTitle}}%
+  \@mem@old@label{#1}%
+  \endgroup \@esphack}%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@@gettitle}
+% |@mem@@gettitle|\marg{title} grabs a title text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mem@@gettitle#1{\begingroup \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+    \let\label\@mem@nestwarn 
+    \let\index\@gobble \let\glossary\@gobble
+    \let\markboth\@gobbletwo \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo 
+    \let\markright\@gobble
+    \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\def\noexpand\M@currentTitle{#1}}%
+  \expandafter\endgroup\@tempa}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@nestwarn}
+% \begin{macro}{\M@TitleReference}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@mem@nestwarn\@gobble
+\let\M@TitleReference\@firstoftwo
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titleref}
+% \begin{macro}{\currenttitle}
+% |\titleref|\marg{key} prints the title corresponding to |\label{key}|.
+% |\currenttitle| prints the latest title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\titleref}[1]{\begingroup \let\numberline\@gobble
+  \let\M@TitleReference\@mem@theTR % interrupt recursion of \ref
+  \ref{#1}\endgroup}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\currenttitle}{\begingroup \let\numberline\@gobble
+  \theTitleReference\@currentlabel\M@currentTitle\endgroup}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% % \DeclareRobustCommand\@mem@nestwarn[1]{\@memwarn%
+% %  {Label \string"#1\string" was put in a title,\MessageBreak
+% %   so the \noexpand\titleref is incorrect}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\M@currentTitle}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\M@currentTitle\@empty
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@theTR}
+% proper definition:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mem@theTR{\let\M@TitleReference\@firstoftwo \theTitleReference}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\namerefon}
+% \begin{macro}{\namerefoff}
+% Named references has turned some arguments (e.g., |\legend{text}|) into
+%  moving ones (Sven.Hartrumpf@FernUni-Hagen.de reported a problem but 
+%  not a cause, March 2003). Not everyone needs named references.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\namerefon}{\let\M@gettitle\@mem@@gettitle}
+\newcommand*{\namerefoff}{\let\M@gettitle\@gobble}
+  \namerefon
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@caption}
+% add hooks to |\@caption|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\M@old@caption\@caption 
+\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\M@gettitle{#2}\M@old@caption{#1}[{#2}]{#3}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\legend}
+% \begin{macro}{\@legend}
+% add hooks to |\legend|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\M@oldlegend\legend
+\long\def\legend#1{\M@gettitle{#1}\M@oldlegend{#1}}
+\let\M@old@legend\@legend
+\long\def\@legend#1[#2]#3{\M@gettitle{#2}\M@old@legend{#1}[{#2}]{#3}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vsptitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\@vssptitle}
+% add hooks to |\poemtitle|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\M@old@vsptitle\@vsptitle
+\long\def\@vsptitle[#1]#2{\M@gettitle{#1}\M@old@vsptitle[{#1}]{#2}}
+\let\M@old@vssptitle\@vssptitle
+\long\def\@vssptitle#1{\M@gettitle{#1}\M@old@vssptitle{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% add hooks to |\part(*)|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%\let\M@old@spart\@spart
+%%%\def\@spart#1{\M@gettitle{#1}\M@old@spart{#1}}
+%%%\let\M@old@part\@part
+%%%\def\@part[#1]{\M@gettitle{#1}\M@old@part[{#1}]}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+
+%
+% \section{Table of Contents, etc.}
+%
+%     A |\section| command writes a
+%     |\contentsline{section}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| command
+%     on the \file{.toc} file, where \meta{title} contains the
+%     contents of the entry and \meta{page} is the page number. If
+%     sections are being numbered, then \meta{title} will be of the
+%     form |\numberline{|\meta{num}|}{|\meta{heading}|}| where
+%     \meta{num} is the number produced by |\thesection|.  Other
+%     sectioning commands work similarly.
+%
+%     A |\caption| command in a `figure' environment writes
+%
+%     |\contentsline{figure}{\numberline{|\meta{num}|}{|%
+%                    \meta{caption}|}}{|\meta{page}|}|
+%
+%     on the \file{.lof} file, where \meta{num} is the number produced
+%     by |\thefigure| and \meta{caption} is the figure caption.  It
+%     works similarly for a `table' environment.
+%
+%    The command |\contentsline{|\meta{name}|}| expands to
+%    |\l@|\meta{name}.  So, to specify the table of contents, we must
+%    define |\l@chapter|, |\l@section|, |\l@subsection|, ... ; to
+%    specify the list of figures, we must define |\l@figure|; and so
+%    on.  Most of these can be defined with the |\@dottedtocline|
+%    command, which works as follows.
+%
+%    |\@dottedtocline{|\meta{level}|}{|\meta{indent}|}{|^^A
+%                      \meta{numwidth}|}{|^^A
+%                      \meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
+%
+%    \begin{description}
+%    \item[\meta{level}] An entry is produced only if\meta{ level}
+%        $<=$ value of the \Lcount{tocdepth} counter.  Note,
+%        |\chapter| is level 0, |\section| is level 1, etc.
+%    \item[\meta{indent}] The indentation from the outer left margin
+%        of the start   of the contents line.
+%    \item[\meta{numwidth}] The width of a box in which the section
+%        number is to go, if \meta{title} includes a |\numberline|
+%        command.
+%    \end{description}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep}
+%    This command uses the following three parameters, which are set
+%    with a |\newcommand| (so em's can be used to make them depend upon
+%    the font).
+%    \begin{description}
+%    \item[\texttt{\bslash @pnumwidth}] The width of a box in which the
+%        page number is put.
+%    \item[\texttt{\bslash @tocrmarg}] The right margin for multiple
+%        line entries.  One wants |\@tocrmarg| $\ge$ |\@pnumwidth|
+%    \item[\texttt{\bslash @dotsep}] Separation between dots, in mu
+%        units. Should be defined as a number like 2 or 1.7
+%    \end{description}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@pnumwidth}{1.55em}
+\newcommand{\@tocrmarg} {2.55em}
+\newcommand{\@dotsep}{4.5}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tocentryskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\tocbaseline}
+% \begin{macro}{\tocskip}
+%    We define two lengths and a utility command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\tocentryskip} \setlength{\tocentryskip}{1em}
+\newlength{\tocbaseline} \setlength{\tocbaseline}{20pt}
+\newcommand{\tocskip}[1]{%
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{New List of \ldots}
+%
+% It is apparent that users want to do at least two things that are not
+% readily provided by the standard classes: (a) change the appearance
+% of the Table of Contents, etc., headings, and (b) create new List of\ldots.
+% This class provides a means of creating new Lists whose headings are
+% parameterized, thereby killing two birds with one stone.
+%
+% In this class the tables of
+%    contents, figures etc. are always set in single-column style.
+% The titles are added to the ToC, unless the starred versions of the 
+% commands are used.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ensureonecol}
+% \begin{macro}{\restorefromonecol}
+%  The ToC, LoF, etc are always set in a single column. These two
+% macros cooperate to swith from two-columns to one column, and back again.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ensureonecol}{%
+  \if@twocolumn
+    \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+  \else
+    \@restonecolfalse
+  \fi}
+\newcommand*{\restorefromonecol}{\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/24}{Deleted \cs{ensuretwocol} and \cs{restorefromtwocol}
+%                             as they were unused}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\cftparskip}
+% The |\parskip| local to the ToC, etc, is set to the length |\cftparskip|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\cftparskip}
+\setlength{\cftparskip}{0pt}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newlistof}
+% |\newlistof{|\meta{listofcmmd}|}{|\meta{ext}|}{|\meta{listofname}|}|
+% creates the command |\listofcmmd| to typeset a new List of, where the
+% external file has the extension |.ext| and the heading title is
+% \meta{listofname}. The code for this is a heavily modified part
+% of the \Lpack{tocloft} package.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newlistof}[3]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In the following, |X| stands for the value of \meta{listofcmmd} and
+% |Z| stands for the value of \meta{ext}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ext@Z}
+% \begin{macro}{\Zdepth}
+% The file extension and listing depth, which is set to level~1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{ext@#2}{#2}
+  \@ifundefined{c@#2depth}{\newcounter{#2depth}}{}
+  \setcounter{#2depth}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Zmark}
+% The heading marks for the listing.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{@mkboth} to \cs{markboth} in \cs{Zmark}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{#2mark}{\markboth{#3}{#3}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\X}
+% Typeset the listing title and entries, 
+% with both a normal and starred version.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{#1}{\@ifstar{\@nameuse{@star#2}}{\@nameuse{@plain#2}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@starZ}
+% The starred listof version
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{@star#2}{%
+    \ensureonecol
+    \par
+    \begingroup
+%%%      \parindent\z@ \parskip\cftparskip
+      \@nameuse{@#2maketitle}
+      \@starttoc{#2}%
+    \endgroup
+    \restorefromonecol}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@plainZ}
+% The unstarred listof version
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{@plain#2}{%
+    \ensureonecol
+    \par
+    \begingroup
+%%%      \parindent\z@ \parskip\cftparskip
+      \@nameuse{@#2maketitle}
+      \phantomsection
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#3}
+      \@starttoc{#2}%
+    \endgroup
+    \restorefromonecol}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@Zmaketitle}
+% This macro typesets the title.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printZnonum} to \cs{@Zmaketitle}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{@#2maketitle}{%
+    \@nameuse{#2headstart}
+   {\parindent\z@ \parskip\cftparskip
+    \interlinepenalty\@M
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added printZnonum to \cs{newlistof}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@nameuse{print#2nonum}%
+    \@nameuse{print#2title}{#3}%
+    \@nameuse{#2mark}%
+    \thispagestyle{chapter}%
+    \@nameuse{after#2title}
+   }
+    \@afterheading}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Zheadstart}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterZtitle}
+% The macros |\Zheadstart| and |\afterZtitle|
+% control what goes before and after the title. They
+% default to the corresponding macros for chapters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{#2headstart}{\chapterheadstart}
+  \@namedef{after#2title}{\afterchaptertitle}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printZnonum}
+% This typesets something before the title and defaults
+% to |\printchapternonum|.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printZnonum} macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{print#2nonum}{\printchapternonum}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printZtitle}
+% The title is typeset by the macro |\printZtitle{|\meta{title}|}|
+% which defaults to |\printchaptertitle|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{print#2title}##1{\printchaptertitle{##1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% This is the end of the definition of |\newlistof|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+} % end \newlistof
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@starttoc}
+% A list of macro calls |\@starttoc| to read the appropriate file. I have
+% changed the kernel definition to allow a file to be read multiple times
+% by delaying killing the file until the end of the document.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{@starttoc}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\@starttoc}[1]{%
+  \begingroup\makeatletter
+    \@input{\jobname.#1}%
+    \if@filesw
+      \AtEndDocument{%
+        \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+        \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
+      }%
+    \fi
+  \@nobreakfalse
+  \endgroup}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Table of Contents}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*}
+%    These macros request that \LaTeX{} produces a table of
+%    contents. The ToC heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
+% version is used.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlistof{tableofcontents}{toc}{\contentsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    The List of Figures and List of Tables are defined later.
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{List entries}
+%
+%    Each command in the body of the text that makes an entry in the ToC,
+% or LoF or LoT needs an addtional macro to format the entry, as described
+% above. Users often want to change the formatting of the entries but
+% it is not immediately obvious how to do that.
+%
+%    I have borrowed and modified more of the code from the \Lpack{tocloft}
+% package to enable easy creation and modification the formatting of the
+% entries.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\setrmarg}
+%  User commands for setting |\@pnumwidth| and |\@tocrmarg|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setpnumwidth}[1]{\renewcommand{\@pnumwidth}{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setrmarg}[1]{\renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftdot}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftdotfill}
+% In the default ToC, a dotted line can be used to provide a leader between
+% a title and the page number. The definition of this leader is buried
+% in the |\@dottedtocline| command. The |\cftdotfill{|\meta{sep}|}|
+% command provides a parameterised version of the leader code, where
+% \meta{sep} is the separation between the dots in mu units.
+% The symbol used for the `dots' in the leader is given by the value
+% of |\cftdot|. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\cftdot}{.}
+\providecommand{\cftdotfill}[1]{%
+  \leaders\hbox{$\m@th\mkern #1 mu\hbox{\cftdot}\mkern #1 mu$}\hfill}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftnodots}
+% |\cftdotsep| holds the default dot separation. 
+% If the kerns in |\cftdotfill| are large enough, then no dots will
+% be printed. |\cftnodots| should be `large enough'.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Changed \cs{cftnodots} from 10,000 to 2,000 for 
+%                17pt option and pdflatex}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\cftdotsep}{4.5}
+\newcommand{\cftnodots}{2000}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%     Now for the trickier bits regarding the typesetting of the ToC
+% entries.
+%
+%     A \file{.toc} (also \file{.lof} and \file{.lot}) file consists
+% of a list of 
+% |\contentsline{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
+% commands, where \meta{kind} is the kind of heading (e.g., |part| or
+% |section| or |figure|), \meta{title} is the title text (including the number),
+% and \meta{page} is the page number. The entries are inserted into the
+% file by calling the 
+% |\addcontentsline{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{title}|}|
+% command, where \meta{file} is the file extension (e.g., |toc|, |lot|)
+% and the other arguments are the same as for the |\contentsline|
+% command. (Arbitrary stuff may also be put into the file via the
+% |\addtocontents{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{text}|}| command).
+% The typesetting of the |\contentsline| entries is performed by 
+% commands of the form |\l@kind|. The sectioning and captioning commands
+% call |\addcontentsline| to insert their titles into the \file{.toc}
+% etc., files.
+%
+%     For the purposes at hand it is generally impossible to treat 
+% the typesetting
+% of a title and its number separately, as both are bundled into the
+% \meta{title} argument within |\contentsline|. They could be handled
+% separately if the |\contentsline| command was suitably modified. If
+% this was done, then the |\addtocontentsline| command would also need
+% to be changed which would then require the sectioning and captioning
+% commands to be modified as well. This is certainly possible, but would
+% cause problems if any other package also modified the sectioning or
+% captioning commands, and there are several packages which do this.
+%
+%  I provide modified versions of the |\l@kind| commands. 
+% Essentially, my new definitions
+% consist of inlined versions of the code for |\@dottedtocline|.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftparfillskip}
+% The |\l@kind| commands modify (locally) the value of |\parfillskip|.
+% |\cftparfillskip| is a copy of the default \theTeXbook{}
+% |\parfillskip| definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cftparfillskip}{\parfillskip=0pt plus1fil}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\numberline}
+% The purpose of the |\numberline{|\meta{secnum}|}| command is to typeset
+% \meta{secnum} left justified in a box of width |\@tempdima|. I redefine
+% it to add three additional parameters, namely |\@cftbsnum|, 
+% |\@cftasnum| and |\@cftasnumb| 
+% (see \file{ltsect.dtx} for the original
+% definition).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{% 
+  \hb@xt@\@tempdima{\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}\@cftasnumb}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cftbsnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cftasnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cftasnumb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@cftbsnum}{}
+\newcommand{\@cftasnum}{}
+\newcommand{\@cftasnumb}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newlistentry}
+% |\newlistentry[|\meta{within}|]{|\meta{counter}|}{|\meta{ext}|}{|\meta{level-1}|}| 
+% creates a set of commands for typesetting a new kind of entry in a List of.
+% \meta{counter} is the name of the counter for the entry and must be 
+% the same as the name
+% of the entry (e.g., |subsection|). The optional \meta{within} is the
+% name of a counter within which |counter| is defined. The file extension
+% for the List of is \meta{ext} and \meta{level-1} is one less than the 
+% level of the entry in the List of.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newlistentry}[4][\@empty]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    In the following, |X| is used as the value of \meta{counter} and
+% |Z| as the value of \meta{ext}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@X}
+% \begin{macro}{\theX}
+% Check if \meta{within} and \meta{counter} have been defined. It is
+% an error if \meta{within} has not been defined. \meta{counter}
+% will be created if it has not been previously defined.
+% Set the default counter values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifundefined{c@#2}{%    check & set the counter
+    \ifx \@empty#1\relax
+      \newcounter{#2}
+    \else
+      \newcounter{#2}[#1]%
+      \expandafter\edef\csname the#2\endcsname{%
+  \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname.\noexpand\arabic{#2}}
+    \fi}{}
+  \setcounter{#2}{0}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% That finishes off the error checking. No matter what the result, the
+% rest of the new commands are defined.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@X}
+% |\l@X{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the entry.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{l@#2}##1##2{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Only typeset if the |\Zdepth| is greater than \meta{level-1}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum \@nameuse{c@#3depth} > #4\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Add some vertical space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \vskip \@nameuse{cftbefore#2skip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Start a group to keep paragraphing changes local. Set the |\leftskip|
+% to the entry's indentation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      {\leftskip \@nameuse{cft#2indent}\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the |\rightskip| to |\@tocrmarg| to leave room for the page number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \rightskip \@tocrmarg
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Ensure that the last line of an entry will be filled. Setting |\parfillskip|
+% to a negative value prevents `overfull box' messages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \parfillskip -\rightskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the paragraph's indentation to the entry's indentation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \parindent \@nameuse{cft#2indent}\relax\@afterindenttrue
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Try and prevent breaks between lines in a multiline entry.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \interlinepenalty\@M
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure we have left vertical mode.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \leavevmode
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Our version of |\numberline| expects that the width of the number box
+% is in |\@tempdima|, and that the three macros |\@cftbsnum|, |\@cftaqsnum|,
+% and |\@cftasnumb| are defined. We set all these to the values for this entry.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \@tempdima \@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}\relax
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftbsnum\csname cft#2presnum\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftasnum\csname cft#2aftersnum\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftasnumb\csname cft#2aftersnumb\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Arrange that the (entry number and) first line of the title is set at
+% the current indent, and that any subsequent lines will be further
+% indented.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \advance\leftskip\@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Print the (number and) title, prohibiting any breqaking.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       {\@nameuse{cft#2font}##1}\nobreak
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Print the leader and the page number, and then close the group.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \@nameuse{cft#2fillnum}{##2}}
+    \fi
+  }  % end of \l@#2
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now define all the layout commands used by |\l@X|. The default
+% values of these print the entry in a normal font with a dotted
+% line between the title and the page number.
+% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforeXskip}
+% The skip before the title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\newlength\csname cftbefore#2skip\endcsname
+    \setlength{\@nameuse{cftbefore#2skip}}{\z@ \@plus .2\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftXindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftXnumwidth}
+% The indent and width for the number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\newlength\csname cft#2indent\endcsname
+  \expandafter\newlength\csname cft#2numwidth\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the default values for the indent and numwidth depending on
+% the entry's level. A level of 1 corresponds to a figure entry
+% (no indent, and space for a number like N.N).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifcase #4\relax  % 0   (level 1)
+    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{0em}
+    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{2.3em}
+  \or               % 1   (level 2)
+    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{2.3em}
+    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{3.2em}
+  \or               % 2   (level 3)
+    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{5.5em}
+    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{4.1em}
+  \or               % 3   (level 4)
+    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{8.5em}
+    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{5.0em}
+  \else             % anything else
+    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{10.5em}
+    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{6.0em}
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftXfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftXpresnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftXaftersnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftXaftersnumb}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftXdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftXleader}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftXpagefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftXafterpnum}
+% And the remaining commands; the only ones that are not null are for the
+% dotsep, the font and the leader
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{cft#2font}{\normalfont}
+  \@namedef{cft#2presnum}{}
+  \@namedef{cft#2aftersnum}{}
+  \@namedef{cft#2aftersnumb}{}
+  \@namedef{cft#2dotsep}{\cftdotsep}
+  \@namedef{cft#2leader}{\normalfont\cftdotfill{\@nameuse{cft#2dotsep}}}
+  \@namedef{cft#2pagefont}{\normalfont}
+  \@namedef{cft#2afterpnum}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@X}
+% The hyperref package needs a command |\toclevel@X|, holding
+% the \meta{level-1} value.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{toclevel@#2}{#4}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftXfillnum}
+% Typeset the leader and page number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@namedef{cft#2fillnum}##1{%
+    {\@nameuse{cft#2leader}}\nobreak
+    \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{%
+      \hfil\@nameuse{cft#2pagefont}##1}\@nameuse{cft#2afterpnum}\par}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% This ends the definition of |\newlistentry|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+} % end \newlistentry
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsetindents}
+% |\cftsetindents{|\meta{entry}|}{|\meta{indent}|}{|\meta{numwidth}|}| sets
+% the \textit{indent} and \textit{numwidth} for entry \meta{entry}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cftsetindents}[3]{%
+  \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#1indent}}{#2}
+  \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#1numwidth}}{#3}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartname}
+% If you want a part entry in the ToC like: \\
+% PART I Title ... \\
+% then \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftpartname}{PART~}? \\
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{cftpartname}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\cftpartname}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
+% Can't use |\newlistentry| for this because of the initial penalty
+% and the final |\nobreak| code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\l@part}[2]{%
+  \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax
+    \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+    \addvspace{\cftbeforepartskip}%
+    \begingroup
+      {\leftskip \cftpartindent\relax
+       \rightskip \@tocrmarg
+       \parfillskip -\rightskip
+       \parindent \cftpartindent\relax\@afterindenttrue
+       \interlinepenalty\@M
+       \leavevmode    
+       \settowidth{\@tempdima}{\cftpartfont\cftpartname}%
+       \addtolength{\@tempdima}{\cftpartnumwidth}%
+       \let\@cftbsnum \cftpartpresnum
+       \let\@cftasnum \cftpartaftersnum
+       \let\@cftasnumb \cftpartaftersnumb
+       \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
+       {\cftpartfont #1}%
+       \cftpartfillnum{#2}}
+      \nobreak
+        \global\@nobreaktrue
+        \everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}%
+    \endgroup
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\partnumberline}
+% |\partnumberline| is a special version of |\numberline| output by |\part|.
+% It's default definition uis identical to |\numberline|.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{partnumberline}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\partnumberline}[1]{%
+  \hb@xt@\@tempdima{%
+    \cftpartname\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}\@cftasnumb}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforepartskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartpresnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartaftersnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartaftersnumb}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartleader}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartpagefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartafterpnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpartfillnum}
+%  These are the user commands to control the typesetting of Part entries.
+%  They are initialised to give the standard appearance.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Changed \cs{cftpartnumwidth} to cater for
+%                            use of \cs{numberline} in the ToC}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \newlength{\cftbeforepartskip}
+    \setlength{\cftbeforepartskip}{2.25em \@plus\p@}
+  \newlength{\cftpartindent}
+    \setlength{\cftpartindent}{0em}
+  \newlength{\cftpartnumwidth}
+    \setlength{\cftpartnumwidth}{1.5em}
+  \newcommand{\cftpartfont}{\large\bfseries}
+  \newcommand{\cftpartpresnum}{}
+  \newcommand{\cftpartaftersnum}{}
+  \newcommand{\cftpartaftersnumb}{}
+  \newcommand{\cftpartleader}{%
+              \large\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftpartdotsep}}
+  \newcommand{\cftpartdotsep}{\cftnodots}
+  \newcommand{\cftpartpagefont}{\large\bfseries}
+  \newcommand{\cftpartafterpnum}{}
+  \newcommand{\cftpartfillnum}[1]{%
+    {\cftpartleader}%
+    {\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss {\cftpartpagefont #1}}}%
+     \cftpartafterpnum\par}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchaptername}
+% If you want a chapter entry in the ToC like: \\
+% Chapter 1. A title ... \\
+% then \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftchaptername}{\chaptername~}? \\
+% \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftchapteraftersnum}{.}? \\
+% 
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{cftchaptername}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\cftchaptername}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@chapapp}
+% Generic chapter/appendix ToC entry typesetting.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{l@chapapp}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\l@chapapp}[3]{%
+  \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+    \cftchapterbreak
+    \vskip \cftbeforechapterskip
+    {\leftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
+     \rightskip \@tocrmarg
+     \parfillskip -\rightskip
+     \parindent \cftchapterindent\relax
+     \@afterindenttrue
+     \interlinepenalty\@M
+     \leavevmode
+     \let\@cftbsnum \cftchapterpresnum
+     \let\@cftasnum \cftchapteraftersnum
+     \let\@cftasnumb \cftchapteraftersnumb
+     \def\@chapapp@head{#3}%
+     \settowidth{\@tempdima}{\cftchapterfont\@chapapp@head}%
+     \addtolength{\@tempdima}{\cftchapternumwidth}%
+     \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
+     {\cftchapterfont #1}\nobreak
+     \cftchapterfillnum{#2}}
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
+%  |\l@chapter{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the ToC entry for
+% a |chapter| heading. It is a parameterised copy of the default |\l@chapter|
+% (see \file{classes.dtx} for the original definition). Can't use
+% |\newlistentry| for this because of the intial penalty.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{cftchapterbreak} to \cs{l@chapter}}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Defined \cs{l@chapter} in terms of \cs{l@chapapp} (mempatch v3.12)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\l@chapter}[2]{%
+  \l@chapapp{#1}{#2}{\cftchaptername}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftappendixname}
+% If you want a appendixed chapter entry in the ToC like: \\
+% Appendix A A title ... \\
+% then \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftappendixname}{\appendixname~}? \\
+% 
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{cftappendixname}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\cftappendixname}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@appendix}
+% Similar to \cs{l@chapter} but for an appendix.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{l@apendix} (mempatch v3.12)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\l@appendix}[2]{%
+  \l@chapapp{#1}{#2}{\cftappendixname}}
+\newcommand{\toclevel@appendix}{0}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chapternumberline}
+% |\chapternumberline| is a special version of |\numberline| output by 
+% |\chapter|.
+% It's default definition is identical to |\numberline|.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{chapternumberline}}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{@chapapp@head} to \cs{chapternumberline} (mempatch v3.12)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\chapternumberline}[1]{%
+  \hb@xt@\@tempdima{\@chapapp@head\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}%
+  \@cftasnumb}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforechapterskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapternumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterpresnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapteraftersnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapteraftersnumb}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterleader}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterpagefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterafterpnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterfillnum}
+%  These are the user commands to control the typesetting of Chapter entries.
+%  They are initialised to give the standard appearance.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \newlength{\cftbeforechapterskip}
+    \setlength{\cftbeforechapterskip}{1.0em \@plus\p@}
+  \newlength{\cftchapterindent}
+    \setlength{\cftchapterindent}{0em}
+  \newlength{\cftchapternumwidth}
+    \setlength{\cftchapternumwidth}{1.5em}
+  \newcommand{\cftchapterfont}{\bfseries}
+  \newcommand{\cftchapterpresnum}{}
+  \newcommand{\cftchapteraftersnum}{}
+  \newcommand{\cftchapteraftersnumb}{}
+  \newcommand{\cftchapterleader}{%
+              \bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftchapterdotsep}}
+  \newcommand{\cftchapterdotsep}{\cftnodots}
+  \newcommand{\cftchapterpagefont}{\bfseries}
+  \newcommand{\cftchapterafterpnum}{}
+  \newcommand{\cftchapterfillnum}[1]{
+    {\cftchapterleader}\nobreak
+    \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\cftchapterpagefont #1}%
+    \cftchapterafterpnum\par}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterbreak}
+% Another parameter for |\l@chapter|.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{cftchapterbreak}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \newcommand{\cftchapterbreak}{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph}
+%  |\l@section{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the ToC entry for
+% a |section| heading. Similarly |\l@subsection| and |\l@subsubsection|
+% for |\subsection| and |\subsubsection| entries, and so on.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Used \cs{newlistentry} for pararaph and 
+%                             subparagraph (from patch v1.7)}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Corrected (sub)paragraph ToC indents (mempatch v2.3)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlistentry[chapter]{section}{toc}{0}
+  \cftsetindents{section}{1.5em}{2.3em}
+\newlistentry[section]{subsection}{toc}{1}
+  \cftsetindents{subsection}{3.8em}{3.2em}
+\newlistentry[subsection]{subsubsection}{toc}{2}
+  \cftsetindents{subsubsection}{7.0em}{4.1em}
+\newlistentry[subsubsection]{paragraph}{toc}{3}
+  \cftsetindents{paragraph}{10.0em}{5.0em}
+\newlistentry[paragraph]{subparagraph}{toc}{4}
+  \cftsetindents{subparagraph}{12.0em}{6.0em}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%   The typesetting for Figures and Tables is defined later.
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Support for the \Lpack{subfigure} package}
+%
+%  The code for supporting the \Lpack{subfigure} package is, in all 
+% essentials, the same as that for the figure and table captions; only the
+% names are changed. However, the code need only be executed if the
+% \Lpack{subfigure} package is actually loaded. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cftl@subfigtab}
+%    This command redefines the |\l@subfigure| and |\l@subtable| commands. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@cftl@subfigtab}{
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subfigure}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subtable}
+%  |\l@subfigure{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the LoF entry for
+% a |subfigure| caption heading, and |\l@subtable| does the same for subtables.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlistentry[figure]{subfigure}{lof}{1}
+  \cftsetindents{subfigure}{2.3em}{2.5em}
+\newlistentry[table]{subtable}{lot}{1}
+  \cftsetindents{subtable}{2.3em}{2.5em}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%    Call the \Lpack{subfigure} package setup code only if the 
+% \Lopt{subfigure} package has been used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{subfigure}{\@cftl@subfigtab}{}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Switching page numbering}
+%
+%    It can, at times, be useful to be able to have ToC entries that have
+% no printed page numbers.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff}
+% The user level command for switching off page numbers is 
+% |\cftpagenumbersoff{|\meta{entry}|}| where \meta{entry} is the 
+% name of the entry. 
+% The macro redefines the |\cftXnumfill| command so that there is no leader
+% and the page number is ignored.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cftpagenumbersoff}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{cft#1fillnum}##1{%
+    \cftparfillskip\@nameuse{cft#1afterpnum}\par}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumberson}
+% |\cftpagenumberson{|\meta{entry}|}| is the user level command for 
+% reversing the corresponding |\cftpagenumbersoff|.
+% The macro defines the |\cftXnumfill| command to correspond to 
+% the default definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cftpagenumberson}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{cft#1fillnum}##1{%
+    {\@nameuse{cft#1leader}}\nobreak
+    \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{%
+      \hfil\@nameuse{cft#1pagefont}##1}\@nameuse{cft#1afterpnum}\par}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Chapter precis}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecis}
+% The command |\chapterprecis{|\meta{text}|}| typesets
+% \meta{text} at the point where it is called, and also adds \meta{text}
+% to the \file{.toc} file. It is expects to be called immediately after
+% a |\chapter| command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\chapterprecis}[1]{%
+  \chapterprecishere{#1}
+  \chapterprecistoc{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecishere}
+% |\chapterprecishere{|\meta{text}|}| typesets \meta{text}. It expects
+% to be called immediately after a |\chapter| command. 
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Parameterised \cs{chapterprecishere}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\chapterprecishere}[1]{%
+  \prechapterprecis #1\postchapterprecis}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\prechapterprecis}
+% \begin{macro}{\postchapterprecis}
+% These put code before and after |\chapterprecishere| text. By
+% default |\prechapterprecis| adds some negative space and starts a
+% quote environment using italics. |\postchapterprecis| ends
+% the quote environment.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{prechapterprecis} and 
+%                            \cs{postchapterprecis}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\prechapterprecis}{%
+  \vspace*{-2\baselineskip}%
+  \begin{quote}\normalfont\itshape}
+\newcommand{\postchapterprecis}{\end{quote}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\precistocfont}
+% Font for typesetting chapter precis in the ToC.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{precistocfont}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\precistocfont}{\normalfont\itshape}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecistoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\precistoctext}
+% |\chapterprecistoc{|\meta{text}|}| effectively adds \meta{text} to 
+% the \file{.toc}
+% file. The \meta{text} will be typeset within the same margins as the
+% the title text of a |\chapter| heading, using the |\precistocfont| font.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{precistoctext}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\chapterprecistoc}[1]{%
+  \addtocontents{toc}{\precistoctext{#1}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\precistoctext}[1]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Start a group to localize changes to the paragraphing. Set the 
+% left margin to the chapter indent plus the chapter number width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  {\leftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
+   \advance\leftskip \cftchapternumwidth\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set the right hand margin to |\@tocrmarg|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \rightskip \@tocrmarg\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Typeset \meta{text} using an italic font, then ensure that the paragraph
+% is finished (to use the local skips). Finally close the group and we 
+% are done.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \precistocfont #1\par}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Adding things to the ToC}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftlocalchange}
+% |\cftmakelocalchange{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{pnumwidth}|}{|\meta{tocrmarg}|}|
+% makes an entry into \meta{file} to change the |\@pnumwidth| and
+% the |\@tocrmarg| values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cftlocalchange}[3]{%
+  \addtocontents{#1}{\protect\setpnumwidth{#2} \protect\setrmarg{#3}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftaddtitleline}
+% |\cftaddtitleline{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
+% adds a |\contentsline| entry to \meta{file} with the given information.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cftaddtitleline}[4]{%
+  \addtocontents{#1}{\protect\contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cftaddnumtitleline}
+% |\cftaddnumtitleline{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{num}|}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
+% adds a |\contentsline| entry to \meta{file} with the given information.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cftaddnumtitleline}[5]{%
+  \addtocontents{#1}%
+    {\protect\contentsline{#2}{\protect\numberline{#3}%
+                              {\protect\ignorespaces #4}}{#5}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{ToC and divisional numbering}
+%
+%  Commands are provided, based on the \Lpack{tocvsec2} package, for changing
+% the section numbering level and the ToC entry level.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setclcnt}
+% Helper macro to set a sectioning-related counter. Use as
+% |\@setclcnt{|\meta{sec}|}{|\meta{counter}|}| to set \Lcount{counter}
+% to the level of \meta{sec}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@setclcnt}[2]{
+  \@tempswafalse
+  \nametest{#1}{none}
+  \ifsamename
+    \setcounter{#2}{-10}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{part}
+  \ifsamename
+    \setcounter{#2}{-1}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{chapter}
+  \ifsamename
+    \setcounter{#2}{0}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{section}
+  \ifsamename
+    \setcounter{#2}{1}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{subsection}
+  \ifsamename
+    \setcounter{#2}{2}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{subsubsection}
+  \ifsamename
+    \setcounter{#2}{3}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{paragraph}
+  \ifsamename
+    \setcounter{#2}{4}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{subparagraph}
+  \ifsamename
+    \setcounter{#2}{5}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{all}
+  \ifsamename
+    \setcounter{#2}{50}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+    \if@tempswa\else
+    \@memerror{%
+      Unknown document division name (#1)
+    }{%
+      I'll ignore it. 
+      Type \space <return> and I'll continue.\MessageBreak
+      If you haven't mistyped the name then use 
+      \protect\setcounter\space instead.}
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\settocdepth}
+% |\settocdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| is the user command for setting 
+% \Lcount{tocdepth} in the \file{.toc} file to the value corresponding to
+% \meta{sec}. 
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{settocdepth} to use \cs{changetocdepth}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\settocdepth}[1]{%
+  \@tempswafalse
+  \nametest{#1}{none}
+  \ifsamename
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{-10}}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{part}
+  \ifsamename
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{-1}}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{chapter}
+  \ifsamename
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{0}}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{section}
+  \ifsamename
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{1}}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{subsection}
+  \ifsamename
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{2}}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{subsubsection}
+  \ifsamename
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{3}}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{paragraph}
+  \ifsamename
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{4}}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{subparagraph}
+  \ifsamename
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{5}}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+  \nametest{#1}{all}
+  \ifsamename
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{50}}
+    \@tempswatrue
+  \fi
+    \if@tempswa\else
+    \@memerror{%
+      Unknown document division name (#1)
+    }{%
+      I'll ignore it. Type \space <return> and I'll continue.}
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\changetocdepth}
+% Changes the |tocdepth| counter. Make it robust as it will be written
+% to the *.toc file.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{changetocdepth}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\changetocdepth}[1]{\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maxtocdepth}
+% |\maxtocdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| can be used to initialise \Lcount{tocdepth}
+% to the value corresponding to \meta{sec}. This can only be used
+% between the end of the preamble and the |\tableofcontents| command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\maxtocdepth}[1]{%
+  \@setclcnt{#1}{tocdepth}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\setsecnumdepth}
+% |\setsecnumdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| is the user command for setting
+% \Lcount{secnumdepth} to the value for \meta{sec}. It can only be used after
+% the preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setsecnumdepth}[1]{%\leavevmode%
+  \@setclcnt{#1}{secnumdepth}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\maxsecnumdepth}
+% |\maxsecnumdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| can be used to initialise 
+% \Lcount{secnumdepth}
+% to the value corresponding to \meta{sec}.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added maxsecnumdepth counter and modified \cs{maxsecnumdepth}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{maxsecnumdepth}
+\newcommand{\maxsecnumdepth}[1]{%
+  \@setclcnt{#1}{secnumdepth}\@setclcnt{#1}{maxsecnumdepth}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+%
+%
+% \section{Bibliography}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibindent}
+% The \Lopt{open} bibliography uses an indentation of |\bibindent|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\bibindent
+  \setlength\bibindent{1.5em}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibitemsep}
+% The vertical separation between items in the bibliography list.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{bibitemsep} (from patch v1.7)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\bibitemsep}
+  \setlength{\bibitemsep}{\itemsep}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\biblistextra}
+% A hook into the |bibitemlist|.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{biblistextra} (from patch v1.7)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\biblistextra}{\itemsep=\bibitemsep}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{bibitemlist}
+%  The |thebibliography| environment starts a new document division. 
+% Internally it tweaks some typesetting aspects; principally it
+% uses |\sloppy| because good linebreaking is hard in a bibliography,
+% and |\sfcode`\.=1000\relax| causes a full stop not to produce an
+% end-of-sentence space. The implementation of the environment is
+% based on the generic |list| environment, and uses the |\c@enumiv|
+% counter for the labels. The following code is extracted from the
+% \Lpack{book} class, plus some additions.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{biblistextra} to bibitemlist (from patch v1.7)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{bibitemlist}[1]{%
+  \typeout{bibitemlist}
+  \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
+       {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
+        \leftmargin\labelwidth
+        \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
+        \@openbib@code
+        \usecounter{enumiv}%
+        \let\p@enumiv\@empty
+        \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}%
+        \biblistextra}%
+  \sloppy
+  \clubpenalty4000
+  \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
+  \widowpenalty4000%
+  \sfcode`\.\@m}%
+  {\def\@noitemerr
+    {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
+    \endlist}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+% The default is for |\newblock| to provide a small space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newblock}{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@openbib@code}
+% This a an empty hook. It will be modified if the \Lopt{openbib}
+% option is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@openbib@code\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setbiblabel}
+% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel}
+% This is the user command for setting the label for a |\bibitem|. 
+% The following sets the default definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\setbiblabel}[1]{%
+  \renewcommand*{\@biblabel}[1]{#1}}
+\setbiblabel{[#1]\hfill}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@memb@bchap}
+% \begin{macro}{\@memb@bsec}
+%  In a \ctt{} thread \textit{memoir, natbib, and chapterbib} in January 2003
+% there was a discussion on how to get all three to work together.
+% Donald Arseneau suggested that |\bibsection| be used as a `standard'
+% way of controlling the sectioning command of a bibliography. Here is
+% an implementation of that idea.
+%
+% |\@memb@bchap| is a copy of memoir's original code for the start
+% of the |thebibliography| environment which used a |\chapter*|
+% title. |\@memb@bsec| is the much simpler version for a |\section| title.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added support code for implementing \cs{bibsection}
+%                            (patch 1.3)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@memb@bchap}{%
+  \chapter*{\bibname}%
+  \bibmark
+  \ifnobibintoc\else
+    \phantomsection
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}%
+  \fi
+  \prebibhook}
+\newcommand{\@memb@bsec}{\section{\bibname}\prebibhook}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
+% Normally treat the bibliography heading as a chapter.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{bibsection} to replace memoir's
+%                            original code for the bibliography (patch 1.3)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bchap}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
+% The definition of the |thebibliography| environment in this class is not
+% quite the same as in the standard classes!
+%
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Deleted starred version of thebibliography}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Replaced initial code in the bibliography
+%                            environment by \cs{bibsection} (patch 1.3)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
+  \bibsection
+  \begin{bibitemlist}{#1}}{\end{bibitemlist}\postbibhook}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifnobibintoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibintoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\nobibintoc}
+% Flag to control whether or not to add the bibliography title to the ToC,
+% and declarations to set the flag.
+% Default is to put the title into the ToC.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{ifnobibintoc}, etc.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifnobibintoc
+\newcommand*{\bibintoc}{\nobibintocfalse}
+\newcommand*{\nobibintoc}{\nobibintoctrue}
+\bibintoc
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\prebibhook}
+% \begin{macro}{\postbibhook}
+% These two macros are called just before starting the bib items and just
+% after finishing them. By default they do nothing but can be changed
+% by the user to give, say, some introductory information.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\prebibhook}{}
+\newcommand{\postbibhook}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cite}
+% The output of the |\cite| command is produced by this macro. The default
+% is used. The \Lpack{cite} package is a good way of changing this.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \renewcommand*{\@cite}[1]{[#1]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Use with the \Lpack{natbib} and \Lpack{chapterbib} packages}
+%
+% The \Lpack{natbib} package~\cite{NATBIB} uses its own definition for
+% the |\thebibliography| environment, which knows nothing about adding
+% the Bibliography to the ToC. The following makes appropriate changes
+% to \Lpack{natbib} code to support the class.
+%
+% The \Lpack{chapterbib} package by Donald Arseneau also may make changes
+% to the |\thebibliography| environment --- perhaps memoir's version
+% or natbib's version.
+%
+%    As packages get loaded after classes, I have to try and patch any
+% non-memoir modifications at begin document time. 
+% The fixes have to be firstly for \Lpack{natbib}
+% and only after those can \Lpack{chapterbib} be considered.
+%
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added internal support for the natbib package}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Changed code supporting natbib (patch 1.3)}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added code supporting chapterbib (patch 1.3)}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\endthebibliography}
+% Natbib provides |\bibsection| for titling the bibliography. I also have
+% to extend the end of the |thebibliography| environment to cater for
+% |\postbibhook|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% natbib is loaded
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% As \Lpack{natbib} is used, change |\endthebibliography| to the class
+% definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \addtodef{\endthebibliography}{}{\vskip-\lastskip\postbibhook}
+    \@ifpackagewith{natbib}{sectionbib}{% with sectionbib option
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Lpack{natbib}'s |sectionbib| option is used,
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \renewcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bsec}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The |sectionbib| option is not used, so we have a chapter title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      {\renewcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bchap}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finished with any \Lpack{natbib} related changes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  {}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now deal with \Lpack{chapterbib} if necessary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifpackagewith{chapterbib}{sectionbib}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Lpack{chapterbib} is used with its |sectionbib| option. This is the
+% only case to worry about. Kill \Lpack{chapterbib}'s |\sectionbib| macro
+% which it calls at begin document to do its patch, then make sure
+% the class definition is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \renewcommand{\sectionbib}[2]{}
+    \renewcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bsec}}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And we've finished with this bunch of |\AtBeginDocument|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%  \section{The index}
+%
+% I allow for a single column index as well as the default double column.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifonecolindex}
+% TRUE for a one column index.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added one column index}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifonecolindex
+  \onecolindexfalse
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{theindex}
+%    The environment `theindex' can be used for indices. It makes an
+%    index with two columns, with each entry a separate paragraph. At
+%    the user level the commands |\item|, |\subitem| and |\subsubitem|
+%    are used to produce index entries of various levels. When a new
+%    letter of the alphabet is encountered an amount of |\indexspace|
+%    white space can be added.
+%
+%
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Deleted starred version of theindex}
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Changed Index pagestyle to chapter}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Make \cs{indexcolsep} work, courtesy of hazydirk (mempatch v3.11)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{theindex}{%
+  \if@twocolumn
+    \@restonecolfalse
+  \else
+    \@restonecoltrue
+  \fi
+  \ifonecolindex
+    \onecolumn
+    \chapter*{\indexname}
+    \preindexhook
+  \else
+    \setlength{\columnseprule}{\indexrule}%
+    \setlength{\columnsep}{\indexcolsep}%
+    \twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}
+               \preindexhook]%
+  \fi
+  \indexmark
+  \ifnoindexintoc\else
+    \phantomsection
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}%
+  \fi
+  \thispagestyle{chapter}\parindent\z@
+  \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+  \let\item\@idxitem}%
+  {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\twocolumn\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifnoindexintoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\indexintoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\noindexintoc}
+% Flag to control whether or not to add the index title to the ToC,
+% and declarations to set the flag.
+% Default is to put the title into the ToC.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{ifnoindexintoc}, etc.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifnoindexintoc
+\newcommand*{\indexintoc}{\noindexintocfalse}
+\newcommand*{\noindexintoc}{\noindexintoctrue}
+\indexintoc
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indexcolsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\indexrule}
+% These two lengths control the column separation and the thickness
+% of the inter-column rule.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{indexcolsep} and \cs{indexrule}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\indexcolsep} \setlength{\indexcolsep}{35pt}
+\newlength{\indexrule}   \setlength{\indexrule}{0pt}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\preindexhook}
+% A macro that is called between the index heading and the start of the
+% two columns. The user can modify it to add something.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\preindexhook}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@index}
+%   Format the index entry in the table of contents.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\l@index}{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{0pt}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@idxitem}
+% \begin{macro}{\subitem}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubitem}
+%    Thsee macros are used to format the entries in the index. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@idxitem}  {\par\hangindent 40\p@}
+\newcommand{\subitem}   {\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}
+\newcommand{\subsubitem}{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indexspace}
+%    The amount of white space that is inserted between `letter
+%    blocks' in the index.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\indexspace}{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makeindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\index}
+% \begin{macro}{\specialindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\makememindexhook}
+% This is a modified version of the kernel |\makeindex| to allow for
+% multiple indexes. It also defines |\index| (which is a modified version
+% of the standard |\index|) and |\specialindex|.
+%
+% |\makememindexhook| is a null op but can be redefined to add extra code
+% into |\makeindex|. For example, to incorporate \Lpack{ledmac}'s
+% |\edindex| into the scheme:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \renewcommand*{\makememindexhook}{%
+%    \def\edindex{\@bsphack%
+%      \@ifnextchar [{\l@d@index}{\l@d@index[\jobname]}}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Indexing macros completely redone and extended}
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/12}{Added the \cs{makememindexhook} to \cs{makeindex}}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Modified \cs{makeindex} for \cs{nofiles}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\makememindexhook}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*{\makeindex}{}
+\renewcommand*{\makeindex}[1][\jobname]{%
+  \if@filesw
+    \def\index{\@bsphack%
+      \@ifnextchar [{\@index}{\@index[\jobname]}}
+    \def\specialindex{\@bsphack\@spindex}%
+    \makememindexhook
+    \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@idxfile\endcsname
+    \expandafter\immediate\openout \csname #1@idxfile\endcsname #1.idx\relax
+    \typeout{Writing index file #1.idx }%
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Initially define, but emasculate, |\index| and |\specialindex| which are
+% defined properly by the user calling |\makeindex|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\index}[2][\jobname]{\@bsphack\@esphack}
+\newcommand{\specialindex}[3]{\@bsphack\@esphack}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
+% The command to read an \file{ind} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\printindex}[1][\jobname]{\@input@{#1.ind}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifreportnoidxfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifshowindexmark}
+% Two booleans to control reporting on unknown \file{idx} files and
+% displaying indexed items in the margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifreportnoidxfile
+  \reportnoidxfilefalse
+\newif\ifshowindexmark
+  \showindexmarkfalse
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@index}
+% |\@index[file]| is first stage of |\index|, handling the \file{idx} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@index[#1]{%
+  \@ifundefined{#1@idxfile}%
+  {\ifreportnoidxfile
+     \@memwarn{Undefined index file #1}%
+    \fi
+    \begingroup
+    \@sanitize
+    \@nowrindex}%
+  {\def\@idxfile{#1}%
+   \begingroup
+   \@sanitize
+   \@wrindexm@m}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nowrindex}
+% Called when there is no \file{idx} file to throw away the indexed item.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@nowrindex}[1]{%
+  \ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi\endgroup\@esphack}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@wrindexm@m}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@wrindexhyp}
+% The next stage in index processing is |\@wrindexm@m{item}|, 
+% which writes the \file{idx} file name
+% and indexed item to the \file{aux} file. The |\@@wrindexhyp| macro
+% provides hyperlinks in case the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@wrindexm@m}[1]{\@@wrindexhyp#1||\\}
+\def\@@wrindexhyp#1|#2|#3\\{%
+  \ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
+  \ifx\\#2\\%
+    \protected@write\@auxout{}%
+      {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|hyperpage}{\thepage}}%
+  \else
+    \def\Hy@temp@A{#2}%
+    \ifx\Hy@temp@A\HyInd@ParenLeft
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}%
+        {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2hyperpage}{\thepage}}%
+    \else
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}%
+        {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2}{\thepage}}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \endgroup
+  \@esphack}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hyperpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\hyperlink}
+% These are defined in the \Lpack{hyperref} package but we need them.
+% other hyperstuff is only used if the package itself is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\hyperpage}[1]{#1}
+\newcommand{\hyperlink}[2]{#2}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@wrindexm@m}
+% The macro |\@@wrindexm@m{file}{item}{page}| has been written into
+% the \file{aux} file. It is normally defined so that it calls
+% |\@@@wrindexm@m{item}{page}| to finally write to the \file{idx} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@@wrindexm@m}[1]{\begingroup
+  \def\@idxfile{\@nameuse{#1@idxfile}}
+  \@sanitize
+  \@@@wrindexm@m}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@@wrindexm@m}
+% \cs{@@@wrindexm@m}\marg{item}\marg{page} writes the \cs{indexentry} to 
+% the \file{idx} file. This file is read both at the beginning and end of 
+% a document so \cs{@@@wrindexm@m} must be disabled for one of these reads
+% otherwise the index entries will be doubled up. Initially I disabled it
+% after the first read. It eventually dawned on me that this meant two
+% LaTeX runs to update the \file{idx}. Enabling it for the second read
+% means that the \file{idx} file is updated at the end of each run.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Made \cs{@@@wrindexm@m} obey \cs{nofiles}}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{\cs{@@@wrindexm@m} now reads the aux
+%                  file at the end of the document}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@@@wrindexm@m}[2]{\endgroup}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \def\@@@wrindexm@m#1#2{%
+    \if@filesw
+      \immediate\write \@idxfile{\string\indexentry{#1}{#2}}%
+    \fi
+    \endgroup}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@spindex}
+% Now do similar things for \cs{specialindex}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@spindex}[2]{%
+  \@ifundefined{#1@idxfile}%
+  {\ifreportnoidxfile
+     \@memwarn{Undefined index file #1}%
+    \fi
+    \begingroup
+    \@sanitize
+    \@nowrindex}%
+  {\def\@idxfile{#1}%
+   \def\@sptheidx{#2}%
+   \begingroup
+   \@sanitize
+   \@wrspindex}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@wrspindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@wrspindexhyp}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@wrspindex}[1]{\@@wrspindexhyp#1||\\}
+\def\@@wrspindexhyp#1|#2|#3\\{%
+  \ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
+  \ifx\\#2\\%
+    \protected@write\@auxout{}%
+      {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}%
+        {#1|hyperspindexpage(\thepage)}%
+      {\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
+  \else
+    \def\Hy@temp@A{#2}%
+    \ifx\Hy@temp@A\HyInd@ParenLeft
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}%
+        {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}%
+         {#1|#2hyperspindexpage(\thepage)}%
+         {\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
+    \else
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}%
+        {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2}%
+        {\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \endgroup
+  \@esphack}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hyperspindexpage}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hyperspindexpage(#1)#2{\hyperlink{page.#1}{#2}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmemhyperindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\memhyperindextrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\memhyperindexfalse}
+% Flag to turn off \cs{hyperindexfalse} hyperrefing the index (apparently
+% \Lpack{xindy} can't cope with this. Email from Frederic Connes, 2005/07/13:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  ...You use |hyperspindex(\thepage) which xindy doesn't 
+% recognise as a valid markup-locref. And I don't know how 
+% to add it because xindy only accepts one argument in 
+% markup-locref (if the number is not a page number, it will 
+% still point to a page with that number) so replacing it 
+% with |hyperpage won't work. ...
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+%
+% The default is \cs{memhyperindextrue}. Setting \cs{memhyperindexfalse}
+% prohibits a hyper index --- setting whatever option in \Lpack{hyperref}
+% to disable hyper indexing will (probably) not work as far as \Lpack{xindy}
+% is concerned.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/04}{Added \cs{ifmemhyperindex}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifmemhyperindex
+  \memhyperindextrue
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@wrindexhyp}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@wrspindexhyp}
+% If the \Lpack{hyperref} package is not being used, or \cs{ifmemhyperindex}
+% is false, there is no need
+% to clutter up the index files. 
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/28}{Declutter index files if hyperref is not used}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed spaces in non-hyperref index files (mempatch v2.3).
+% Reported by Michael W. Daniels.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{}{\memhyperindexfalse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the \Lpack{hyperref} package is not being used, or a hyperindex
+% is not required, simplify!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifmemhyperindex\else
+    \def\@@wrindexhyp#1||\\{%
+      \ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}%
+        {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1}{\thepage}}%
+      \endgroup
+      \@esphack}%
+    \def\@@wrspindexhyp#1||\\{%
+      \ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
+      \protected@write\@auxout{}%
+        {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1}{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
+      \endgroup
+      \@esphack}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\see}
+% \begin{macro}{\seename}
+% \begin{macro}{\seealso}
+% \begin{macro}{\alsoname}
+% These definitions are taken from the \Lpack{makeidx} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\see}[2]{\emph{\seename} #1}
+\newcommand*{\seename}{see}
+\newcommand*{\seealso}[2]{\emph{\alsoname} #1}
+\newcommand*{\alsoname}{see also}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citeindexfile}
+% For the \Lpack{natbib} package, and possibly other packages that do 
+% some special indexing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\citeindexfile}{\jobname}
+\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
+  \def\NAT@index{\index[\citeindexfile]{\NAT@idxtxt}}}{}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The next part of the code is essentially the \Lpack{showidx} package.
+% I tried putting index entries into marginoars but too many on a page
+% led to the `too many floats' problem.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indexmarkstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\@indexbox}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\indexmarkstyle
+  \indexmarkstyle{\normalfont\footnotesize\ttfamily}
+\newinsert\@indexbox
+  \dimen\@indexbox\maxdimen
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\@\active
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname\string @sanitizeat\endcsname
+  {\def @{\char`\@}}
+\endgroup
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@showidx}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@showidx}[1]{%
+  \insert\@indexbox{%
+    \@sanitizeat
+    \the\indexmarkstyle
+    \hsize\marginparwidth
+    \hangindent\marginparsep \parindent\z@
+    \everypar{}\let\par\@@par \parfillskip\@flushglue
+    \lineskip\normallineskip
+    \baselineskip .8\normalbaselineskip\sloppy
+    \raggedright \leavevmode
+    \vrule \@height .7\normalbaselineskip \@width \z@\relax
+      #1\relax
+    \vrule \@height \z@ \@depth .3\normalbaselineskip \@width \z@\relax
+  }%
+  \ifhmode\penalty\@M \hskip\z@skip\fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@leftidx}
+% \begin{macro}{\@rightidx}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@leftidx}{\hskip-\marginparsep \hskip-\marginparwidth}
+\newcommand{\@rightidx}{\hskip\columnwidth \hskip\marginparsep}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkidx}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@mkidx}{\vbox to \z@{%
+  \rlap{%
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \if@firstcolumn \@leftidx \else \@rightidx \fi
+    \else
+      \if@twoside
+        \ifodd\c@page \@rightidx \else \@leftidx \fi
+      \else
+        \@rightidx
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \box\@indexbox
+  }%
+  \vss
+}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedbottom}
+% \begin{macro}{\flushbottom}
+% \begin{macro}{\@texttop}
+% These kernel macros need changing because of the new marginal insert.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\raggedbottom}{%
+  \def\@textbottom{\vskip\z@ plus.0001fil}%
+  \let\@texttop\@mkidx}
+\renewcommand{\flushbottom}{%
+  \let\@textbottom\relax
+  \let\@texttop\@mkidx}
+\let\@texttop\@mkidx
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Glossaries}
+%
+% Standard LaTeX provides little and insufficient support for
+% glossaries, just a \cs{makeglossary} and \cs{glossary} commands.
+% This class does somewhat better. The code follows along the lines
+% of that for indexes.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added glossary code}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifonecolglossary}
+% \begin{macro}{\onecolglossarytrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\onecolglossaryfalse}
+% TRUE for a one column glossary, otherwise its two column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifonecolglossary
+  \onecolglossarytrue
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{theglossary}
+% The environment \texttt{theglossary} is used for glossaries.
+% It makes a glossary with one or two columns, headed by a chapter-like
+% title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{theglossary}{%
+  \if@twocolumn
+    \@restonecolfalse
+  \else
+    \@restonecoltrue
+  \fi
+  \ifonecolglossary
+    \onecolumn
+    \chapter*{\glossaryname}
+    \preglossaryhook
+  \else
+    \setlength{\columnseprule}{\glossaryrule}
+    \setlength{\columnsep}{\glossarycolsep}
+    \twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\glossaryname}
+               \preglossaryhook]%
+  \fi
+  \glossarymark
+  \ifnoglossaryintoc\else
+    \phantomsection
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\glossaryname}
+  \fi
+  \thispagestyle{chapter}\parindent\z@
+  \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+  \begintheglossaryhook}%
+  {\atendtheglossaryhook\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\twocolumn\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\begintheglossaryhook}
+% \begin{macro}{\atendtheglossaryhook}
+% Two vacuous macros called as the last thing by \verb?\begin{theglossary}?
+% and the first thing by \verb?\end{theglossary}? These could be used,
+% for example, to insert another kind of environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\begintheglossaryhook}{}
+\newcommand*{\atendtheglossaryhook}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\preglossaryhook}
+% A vacuous macro called after the title is set and before the listing
+% starts. The user can modify it to, for example, add some explanatory
+% text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\preglossaryhook}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifnoglossaryintoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\glossaryintoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\noglossaryintoc}
+% Flag and declarations to control whether or not the glossary
+% title is added to the ToC. Default is to put the title
+% in the ToC.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifnoglossaryintoc
+\newcommand*{\glossaryintoc}{\noglossaryintocfalse}
+\newcommand*{\noglossaryintoc}{\noglossaryintoctrue}
+  \glossaryintoc
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\glossarycolsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\glossaryrule}
+% When the glossary is two column these lengths control the
+% column separation and the width of a rule between the columns.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\glossarycolsep \glossarycolsep=35\p@
+\newdimen\glossaryrule \glossaryrule=0\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\glossaryspace}
+% Vertical space between `letter blocks' in the glossary.
+% Note that this is a macro, not a length.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glossaryspace}{%
+    \par \vskip 1.0\onelineskip \@plus 5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makeglossary}
+% The preamble command to set up a glossary. Output is to the
+% \file{\#1.glo} file. We need the \cs{providecommand} in case \cs{nofiles}
+% has been called before the class. \cs{makeglossary} sets up several 
+% file-specific macros.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*{\makeglossary}{}
+\renewcommand*{\makeglossary}[1][\jobname]{%
+  \makememglossaryhook
+  \@namedef{memglsact#1}{@}%           actual
+  \@namedef{memglsnx#1}{}%             no ref
+  \@namedef{memglsn#1}{\thepage}%      num  by page
+  \@namedef{memglsnf#1}{|memjustarg}%  no special number format
+  \if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1memglofile\endcsname
+    \expandafter\immediate\openout \csname #1memglofile\endcsname #1.glo\relax
+    \typeout{Writing glossary file #1.glo }%
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makememglossaryhook}
+% A vacuous macro called at the start of the \cs{makeglossary} code.
+% It is redefinable to do something useful.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\makememglossaryhook}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\glossary}
+% The user command for a raw glossary item. The full calling
+% sequence looks like: \\
+% \cs{glossary}\oarg{file}\parg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc} \\
+% but most is accomplished by lower level macros. It calls
+% \cs{@glossary} to handle the first optional argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\glossary{\@bsphack%
+    \@ifnextchar [{\@glossary}{\@glossary[\jobname]}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@glossary}
+% \cs{@glossary}\oarg[file] handles the first of the \cs{glossary} optional
+% arguments, even though the calling sequence looks like: \\
+% \cs{@glossary}\oarg{file}\parg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc}. \\
+% It calls \cs{@@glossary} to handle the second optional argument
+% and the rest.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@glossary[#1]{%
+  \@ifnextchar ({\@@glossary[#1]}{\@@glossary[#1]()}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@glossary}
+% The base macro for \cs{glossary}. Its real calling sequence is: \\
+% \cs{@@glossary}\oarg{file}\parg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc}. \\
+% Provided the glossary output file has been set up it calls
+% \cs{@wrglom@m} to write the data, otherwise it throws away its
+% arguments.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@glossary[#1](#2)#3#4{%
+  \@ifundefined{#1memglofile}{%
+    \begingroup
+    \@sanitize
+    \endgroup
+    \@esphack%
+   }{%
+    \def\memglofile{#1}%
+    \begingroup
+    \@sanitize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Use the correct key, \verb?key? if given, otherwise \verb?term?.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+      \@wrglom@m{#3}{#3}{#4}%
+    \else
+      \@wrglom@m{#2}{#3}{#4}%
+    \fi}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@wrglom@m}
+% \cs{@wrglom@m}\marg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc} writes its three arguments,
+% plus the \meta{ref} and the \meta{num} to the \file{aux} file as the
+% arguments to the \cs{@@wrglom@m} macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@wrglom@m}[3]{%
+  \protected@write\@auxout{}%
+    {\string\@@wrglom@m{\memglofile}{#1}{#2}{#3}{\@nameuse{memglsnx\memglofile}}{\@nameuse{memglsn\memglofile}}}%
+  \endgroup
+  \@esphack}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@wrglom@m}
+% The calling sequence looks like: \\
+% \cs{@@wrglom@m}\marg{file}\marg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num} \\
+% but is actually really only \\
+% \cs{@@wrglom@m}\marg{file} \\
+% It saves the output file identifier in \cs{memglofile} and 
+% \meta{file} as \cs{m@mgf}, then calls \cs{memwritetoglo}
+% to handle the remaining `arguments'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@@wrglom@m}[1]{\begingroup
+  \def\memglofile{\@nameuse{#1memglofile}}%
+  \def\m@mgf{#1}%
+  \@sanitize
+  \memwritetoglo}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memwritetoglo}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ctualm@mwritetoglo}
+% \cs{memwritetoglo}\marg{key}\marg{name}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num}
+% will, at an appropriate time write the raw glossary data to the
+% appropriate \file{glo} file.
+%
+%    The \file{aux} file is read twice, once as one of the initial
+% actions at the start of the \texttt{document} environment, and again
+% at the end of the \texttt{document} environment. The raw glossary
+% data must only be written once from the \file{aux} to the \file{glo} file.
+% Initially \cs{memwritetoglo} is defined to do nothing, then, after the
+% \file{aux} file has been read at the beginning is redefined to do
+% its writing. 
+%
+% The Makeindex program expects its input to be like: \\
+% \verb?\glosaryentry{key@data}{num}?
+% Very cunningly the raw data is fed to the \file{glo}
+% file looking like: \\
+% \verb?\glossaryentry{key@{\memgloterm{term} \memglodesc{desc} \memgloref{ref}}{num}? \\
+% which as far as Makeindex is concerned is simply: \\
+% \verb?\glosaryentry{key@{data}}{num}? \\
+% (note where all the braces are).
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\memwritetoglo}[5]{\endgroup}
+\newcommand{\@ctualm@mwritetoglo}[5]{%
+  \immediate\write \memglofile{\string\glossaryentry{#1\@nameuse{memglsact\m@mgf}
+                    {\string\memgloterm{#2}}{\string\memglodesc{#3}}
+                    {\string\memgloref{#4}}\@nameuse{memglsnf\m@mgf}}{#5}}%
+  \endgroup}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \let\memwritetoglo\@ctualm@mwritetoglo}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\changeglossactual}
+% \begin{macro}{\changeglossref}
+% \begin{macro}{\changeglossnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\changeglossnumformat}
+% There are internal macros that are file-dependant, their names
+% being constructed from the file name plus a fixed name. The
+% \cs{makeglossary} command initializes these but the user may well need
+% to change them. In the macros below, \texttt{...actual} refers to the
+% actual character in a Makeindex configuration file (default \texttt{@}),
+% \texttt{...ref} to the \meta{ref} glossary argument, \texttt{...num}
+% to the meta{num} argument (default \cs{thepage}) and \texttt{...numformat}
+% to the Makeindex encapsulating command. Example uses are:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \changeglossactual[file]{?}
+% \changeglossref[file]{\thepage}
+% \changeglossnum[file]{\thesection}
+% \changeglossnumref[file]{|textbf}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\changeglossactual}[2][\jobname]{%
+  \@namedef{memglsact#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\changeglossref}[2][\jobname]{%
+  \@namedef{memglsnx#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\changeglossnum}[2][\jobname]{%
+  \@namedef{memglsn#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\changeglossnumformat}[2][\jobname]{%
+  \@namedef{memglsnf#1}{#2}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\glossitem}
+% The final sorted glossary data is in the form: \\
+% \cs{glossitem}\marg{term}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num} \\
+% The definition here does little.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\glossitem}[4]{#1 #2 #3 #4\par}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memgloterm}
+% \begin{macro}{\memglodesc}
+% \begin{macro}{\memgloref}
+% \begin{macro}{\memglonum}
+% These are wrappers round the \meta{term}, \meta{desc}, \meta{ref} and
+% \meta{num} elements in the final data. They are vacuous to start with.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\memgloterm}[1]{#1}
+\newcommand*{\memglodesc}[1]{#1}
+\newcommand*{\memgloref}[1]{#1}
+\newcommand*{\memglonum}[1]{#1}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printglossary}
+% \cs{printglossary}\oarg{file} inputs the glossary \file{gst} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\printglossary}[1][\jobname]{\@input@{#1.gls}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%      
+% \section{Notes}
+%
+%    
+% \subsection{Marginpars}
+%
+% A |\marginpar| is a kind of floating object --- you can't control
+% exactly where it will go. There is one problem with the kernel
+% definition of |\marginpar| in that sometimes a |\marginpar| may
+% end up on the wrong side of the page. The following is an attempt
+% to fix that using the odd/even page check provided as part of
+% the class.
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar}
+% The part of the code for |\marginpar| that deals with deciding which
+% side of the page it should be printed on is |\@addmarginpar|, buried
+% away in the |output| routine. A couple of minor changes are made
+% to the kernel code. The first is at the beginning where I have added
+% the |\checkoddpage| page checking code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addmarginpar{%
+    \checkoddpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Continue with the kernel code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@next\@marbox\@currlist{\@cons\@freelist\@marbox
+    \@cons\@freelist\@currbox}\@latexbug\@tempcnta\@ne
+    \if@twocolumn
+        \if@firstcolumn \@tempcnta\m@ne \fi
+    \else
+      \if@mparswitch
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The next line, reading \\
+% |\ifodd\c@page \else\@tempcnta\m@ne \fi| \\
+% is where the odd/even page checking is done in the kernel code. I
+% replace it with my code, and then continue with the kernel.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifoddpage \else \@tempcnta\m@ne \fi
+      \fi
+    \if@reversemargin \@tempcnta -\@tempcnta \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifnum\@tempcnta <\z@  \global\setbox\@marbox\box\@currbox \fi
+    \@tempdima\@mparbottom
+    \advance\@tempdima -\@pageht
+    \advance\@tempdima\ht\@marbox
+    \ifdim\@tempdima >\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The next line in the kernel reads: \\
+% |\@latex@warning@no@line {Marginpar on page \thepage\space moved}| \\
+% I have changed the warning message to give the user an indication
+% of the severity of the move. Then follow the kernel on to the end.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \@latex@warning@no@line {Marginpar on page 
+                               \thepage\space moved by \the\@tempdima}%
+    \else
+      \@tempdima\z@
+    \fi
+    \global\@mparbottom\@pageht
+    \global\advance\@mparbottom\@tempdima
+    \global\advance\@mparbottom\dp\@marbox
+    \global\advance\@mparbottom\marginparpush
+    \advance\@tempdima -\ht\@marbox
+    \global\setbox \@marbox
+                   \vbox {\vskip \@tempdima
+                          \box \@marbox}%
+    \global \ht\@marbox \z@
+    \global \dp\@marbox \z@
+    \kern -\@pagedp
+    \nointerlineskip
+    \hb@xt@\columnwidth
+      {\ifnum \@tempcnta >\z@
+          \hskip\columnwidth \hskip\marginparsep
+       \else
+          \hskip -\marginparsep \hskip -\marginparwidth
+       \fi
+       \box\@marbox \hss}%
+    \nointerlineskip
+    \hbox{\vrule \@height\z@ \@width\z@ \@depth\@pagedp}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{A fixed marginpar}
+%
+%
+% Introduce a non-floating marginpar.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{sidepar} and supports for a fixed 
+%                            marginpar (from patch v1.8)}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parnopar}
+% From \theTeXbook{} Exercise 14.15. It creates an `invisible' end/start paragraph,
+% and may be used for getting \TeX{} to try a pagebreak.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\parnopar}{\parfillskip=0pt\par\parskip=0pt\noindent}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sideparvshift}
+% Vertical shift for sidepar to align with text line
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\sideparvshift}
+  \setlength{\sideparvshift}{-2.08ex}% seems to work for all font sizes
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifreversesidepar}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifsideparswitch}
+% Analogues of \cs{marginpar} controls.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifreversesidepar
+%  \reversesideparfalse
+  \reversesidepartrue
+\newif\ifsideparswitch
+  \sideparswitchfalse
+\if@twoside \sideparswitchtrue \fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sidepar}
+% \cs{sidepar}\oarg{left}\marg{right} (per \cs{marginpar})
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\sidepar}{\@dblarg{\@sidepar}}
+\long\def\@sidepar[#1]#2{\@bsphack\leavevmode\vadjust{% %
+  \checkoddpage
+  \ifsideparswitch
+    \ifreversesidepar
+      \ifoddpage
+        \oddpagefalse
+      \else
+        \oddpagetrue
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \oddpagetrue
+    \ifreversesidepar
+      \oddpagefalse
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \rlap{\kern-\parindent
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \if@firstcolumn     % put at left
+        \kern -\marginparsep \kern -\marginparwidth % at left
+      \else               % put at right
+        \kern \columnwidth \kern \marginparsep % at right
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \ifoddpage            % put at right
+        \kern \textwidth \kern \marginparsep        % at right
+      \else                 % put at left
+        \kern -\marginparsep \kern -\marginparwidth % at left
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \vbox to 0pt{%
+     \kern \sideparvshift%  % vertical shift to align top text lines
+     \begin{minipage}{\marginparwidth}%
+      \ifoddpage #2\else #1\fi%
+      \end{minipage}%
+  \vss}}}\@esphack}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Sidebars}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/19}{Added experimental code for sidebars}
+%
+% On 2002/10/22 Donald Arseneau posted the following code to \ctt{} for adding
+% sidebars to plain TeX.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newinsert\sideins
+% \skip\sideins=0pt
+% \count\sideins=0
+% \dimen\sideins=2in
+% 
+% \def\sidebarvsep{25pt}
+% \def\sidebarhsep{15pt}
+% 
+% \let\mainpagecontents\pagecontents
+% 
+% \def\sidecontents{%
+%   \ifvoid\sideins\else
+%       {\advance\hsize\sidebarhsep
+%        \moveright\hsize \vtop to0pt{%
+%        \vskip-\sidebarvsep \vskip\topskip % offset by difference
+%        \unvbox\sideins \vss}%
+%     }\fi}
+% \def\pagecontents{\sidecontents\mainpagecontents}
+% \long\def\sidebar#1{
+%   \insert\sideins{%
+%     \splittopskip\sidebarvsep\relax
+%     \hsize 1.5in \rightskip=0pt plus 20pt \it
+%     \noindent \vbox to \sidebarvsep{}\ignorespaces #1%
+%     \ifhmode \unskip\strut\fi \par
+%    }%
+% }
+% 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The following is my attempt to rewrite the above into a form suitable
+% for LaTeX, and this class in particular.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sideins}
+% Create a new insert called |\sideins|, which also creates a corresponding
+% skip, count, dimen, and box. \\
+% |\skip\sideins| is the extra vertical space to allow on the page for 
+% the insert, \\
+% |\count\sideins| is the magnification factor for page breaking, \\
+% |\dimen\sideins| is the maximum insertion size (height) per page, \\
+% and the inserted material will be in |\box\sideins| when a page is output.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newinsert\sideins
+  \skip\sideins=0pt
+  \count\sideins=0
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setsidebarheight}
+% The macro |\setsidebarheight{|\meta{length}|}| sets the total
+% height of sidebars on a page to \meta{length}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setsidebarheight}[1]{\dimen\sideins= #1}
+  \setsidebarheight{20\onelineskip}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\sidebarhsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\sidebarvsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\sidebarwidth}
+% The length |\sidebarhsep| is the gap between the typeblock and the sidebar.
+% |\sidebarvsep| is the vertical gap between sidebars on a page.
+% The maximum number of sidebar lines on a page is 
+% |1 + (\dimen\sideins - \sidebarvsep)|, assuming |\dimen\sideins|
+% is defined in terms of |\onelineskip|.
+% The width of the sidebar is |\sidebarwidth|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\sidebarhsep} \setlength{\sidebarhsep}{\marginparsep}
+\newlength{\sidebarvsep} \setlength{\sidebarvsep}{2\onelineskip}
+\newlength{\sidebarwidth} \setlength{\sidebarwidth}{\marginparwidth}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sidebarfont}
+% The font for typesetting the contents of a sidebar.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\sidebarfont}{\normalfont}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sidebarform}
+% |\sidebarform| sets the `raggedness' in a sidebar. The current definition
+% is less ragged than |\raggedright|. Examples: 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  for flushleftright \renewcommand{\sidebarform}{}
+%  for raggedleft     \renewcommand{\sidebarform}{\raggedleft}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{sidebarform} (from patch v1.5)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\sidebarform}{\rightskip=\z@ \@plus 2em}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifsidebaroneside}
+% Flag for oneside.
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/04/05}{Added \cs{ifsidebaroneside}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifsidebaroneside
+  \if@twoside\sidebaronesidefalse\else\sidebaronesidetrue\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\sidebarmargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@msidebar@margin}
+% \cs{sidebarmargin}\marg{side} sets the side where sidebars will be printed.
+% Valid arguments are: left, right, outer, or inner.
+% The command is only effective for onecolumn documents with 
+% \verb?\sidebaronesidefalse?
+% (\verb?\sidebarmargin{right}? is equivalent to \verb?\sidebaronesidetrue?).
+%
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{sidebarmargin} (mempatch v3.2)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\sidebarmargin}[1]{%
+  \def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{left}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+    \gdef\m@msidebar@margin{0}%
+  \else
+    \def\@tempb{right}%
+    \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+      \gdef\m@msidebar@margin{1}%
+    \else
+      \def\@tempb{outer}%
+      \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+        \gdef\m@msidebar@margin{2}%
+      \else
+        \def\@tempb{inner}%
+        \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+          \gdef\m@msidebar@margin{3}%
+        \else
+          \@memwarn{Bad \string\sidebarmargin\space argument}%
+          \gdef\m@msidebar@margin{1}%
+        \fi
+       \fi
+     \fi
+  \fi}
+%%%% default outer
+\gdef\m@msidebar@margin{2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sidecontents}
+% This locates the horizontal position of a sidebar. On two column
+% pages it is put in the margin next to the column where |\sidebar|
+% is called, otherwise it is put in the outer (foredge) margin, except
+% for the oneside option when it is put into the right hand margin.
+% This can be separately controlled via \verb?\ifsidebaroneside?.
+% Emanuele Vicentini\footnote{\texttt{emanuelevicentini@yahoo.it},
+% private email, 2004/04/05}
+% suggested to code for the oneside option.
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/04/05}{Changed \cs{sidecontents} for oneside option} 
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Changed \cs{sidecontents} for \cs{sidebarmargin}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\sidecontents}{{%
+  \if@twocolumn%    %% put outside nearest column
+    \if@firstcolumn%  %% move to left
+      \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\sidebarwidth}%
+      \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
+      \moveleft\@tempdimc
+    \else%            %% move to right
+      \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\columnwidth}%
+      \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
+      \moveright\@tempdimc
+    \fi
+  \else%            %% put into foremargin?
+    \ifsidebaroneside%  %% put into right hand margin
+      \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\hsize}%
+      \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
+      \moveright\@tempdimc
+    \else%              %% ???
+      \ifcase\m@msidebar@margin%   0 to left
+        \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\sidebarwidth}%
+        \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
+        \moveleft\@tempdimc
+      \or%                         1 to right
+        \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\hsize}%
+        \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
+        \moveright\@tempdimc
+      \or%                         2 to outer
+        \ifodd\c@page%  %% move to right
+          \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\hsize}%
+          \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
+          \moveright\@tempdimc 
+        \else%          %% move to left
+          \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\sidebarwidth}%
+          \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
+          \moveleft\@tempdimc
+        \fi
+      \or%                        3 to inner
+        \ifodd\c@page%  %% move to left
+          \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\sidebarwidth}%
+          \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
+          \moveleft\@tempdimc
+        \else%          %% move to right
+          \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\hsize}%
+          \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
+          \moveright\@tempdimc 
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \vtop to0pt{%
+    \vskip\onelineskip
+    \unvbox\sideins \vss}%
+}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sidebar}
+% |\sidebar{|\meta{text}|}| puts \meta{text} into a sidebar.
+%
+% Florence Henry (\texttt{florence.henry@obspm.fr}) in the thread 
+% \textit{Of memoir, sidebar, and justification}, 2003/04/02, pointed
+% out that |itemize| in a |\sidebar| could overflow. DA gave the
+% solution hint.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Revised \cs{sidebar}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\sidebar}[1]{%
+  \insert\sideins{%
+    \splittopskip\sidebarvsep\relax
+    \hsize \sidebarwidth 
+    \@parboxrestore                % <- added in v1.4
+    \sidebarform \sidebarfont
+    \noindent\vbox to \sidebarvsep{}\ignorespaces #1%
+    \ifhmode\unskip\strut\fi\par}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now for the nasty bits which involve modifying the LaTeX output
+% routine --- always a dangerous thing to do!
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memold@makecol}
+% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecol}
+% A modified version of the kernel |\@makecol|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\memold@makecol\@makecol
+\gdef\mem@makecol{%
+  \ifvoid\footins
+    \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
+  \else
+    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+    \boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth
+    \@tempdima\dp\@cclv
+    \unvbox\@cclv
+    \vskip-\@tempdima
+    \vskip \skip\footins
+    \color@begingroup
+      \normalcolor
+      \footnoterule
+      \unvbox \footins
+    \color@endgroup
+    }
+  \fi
+  \ifvoid\sideins\else    %%% start of change
+    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+      \sidecontents
+      \unvbox\@outputbox
+    }
+  \fi                     %%% end of change
+  \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%
+  \global\let\@midlist\@empty
+  \@combinefloats
+  \ifvbox\@kludgeins
+    \@makespecialcolbox
+  \else
+    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht{%
+      \boxmaxdepth \maxdepth
+      \@texttop
+      \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
+      \unvbox \@outputbox
+      \vskip -\dimen@
+      \@textbottom
+    }%
+  \fi
+  \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mem@nofoot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@testifnofoot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mem@extranofoot}
+% These are from [RS] as \verb?\@doclearpage? should check for more than
+% just \verb?\footins? being void. Note that this covers all current
+% class defined inserts, including sidebars.
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added \cs{if@mem@nofoot}, 
+%                              \cs{@mem@testifnofoot}, and
+%                              \cs{@mem@extranofoot}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mem@nofoot
+\newcommand*{\@mem@testifnofoot}{%
+  \@mem@nofoottrue
+  \ifvoid\footins\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
+  \ifvoid\footinsv@r\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
+  \ifvoid\sideins\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
+  \@mem@extranofeet}
+\newcommand*{\@mem@extranofeet}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memold@doclearpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\mem@doclearpage}
+% I thought that I could get away with using the kernel's 
+% \verb?\@doclearpage? but [RS] discovered that I couldn't.
+% \changes{v1.62}{2004/03/14}{Redid \cs{@doclearpage} using [RS] code}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\memold@doclearpage\@doclearpage
+\newcommand{\mem@doclearpage}{%
+%%%%  \typeout{Redefining @doclearpage}
+  \@mem@testifnofoot
+  \if@mem@nofoot
+    \setbox\@tempboxa\vsplit\@cclv to\z@ \unvbox\@tempboxa
+    \setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv
+    \xdef\@deferlist{\@toplist\@botlist\@deferlist}%
+    \global\let\@toplist\@empty
+    \global\let\@botlist\@empty
+    \global\@colroom\@colht
+    \ifx \@currlist\@empty
+    \else
+      \@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
+      \global\let\@currlist\@empty
+    \fi
+    \@makefcolumn\@deferlist
+    \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@opcol\@makefcolumn\@deferlist}%
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \if@firstcolumn
+        \xdef\@dbldeferlist{\@dbltoplist\@dbldeferlist}%
+        \global\let\@dbltoplist\@empty
+        \global\@colht\textheight
+        \begingroup
+          \@dblfloatplacement
+          \@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist
+          \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@outputpage
+                                    \@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist}%
+        \endgroup
+      \else
+        \vbox{}\clearpage
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\box\@cclv\vfil}%
+    \@makecol\@opcol
+    \clearpage
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\memold@reinserts}
+% \begin{macro}{\mem@reinserts}
+% Almost a copy of the kernel |\@reinserts|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\memold@reinserts\@reinserts
+\gdef\mem@reinserts{%
+  \ifvoid\footins\else\insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}\fi
+  \ifvbox\@kludgeins\insert\@kludegins{\unvbox\@kludgeins}\fi
+  \ifvoid\sideins\else\sidecontents\fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecol}
+% \begin{macro}{\@doclearpage}
+% Replace the kernel version of |\@makecol| and \verb?\@doclearpage?
+% with the memoir versions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@makecol{\mem@makecol}
+\gdef\@doclearpage{\mem@doclearpage}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% I think that the original kernel version of |\@reinserts| 
+% might be alright, but you never know. If it is not, 
+% then we can treat it like |\@makecol|, for example.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Footnotes}
+%
+%    For my reference, in case I want to fiddle with it even more
+% than I have already done so, here is the kernel code (from \file{ltfloat.dtx}) 
+% for footnotes.
+% \DescribeMacro{\footins}
+% The insert for footnotes.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newinsert\footins
+%   \skip\footins=\bigskipamount
+%   \count\footins=1000
+%   \dimen\footins=8in
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\footnoterule}
+% Draws the rule separating footnotes from the main text. It is executed
+% after a \cs{vspace} of \verb?\skip\footins? and should take no vertical
+% space.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule \@width 2in \kern 2.6\p@}
+%
+% \@definecounter{footnote}
+%   \def\thefootnote{\@arabic\c@footnote}
+% \@definecounter{mpfootnote}
+%   \def\thempfootnote{\itshape\@alph\c@mpfootnote}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@makefnmark}
+% Generates the footnote marker from \cs{@thefnmark}.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
+%
+% \DeclareRobustCommand*\textsuperscript[1]{%
+%    \@textsuperscript{\selectfont#1}}
+% \def\@textsuperscript#1{%
+%    {\m@th\ensuremath{^{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}}
+%
+% \newdimen\footnotesep
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\footnote}
+% \cs{footnote}\oarg{num}\marg{text} is what the user uses for footnoting.
+% It defines \cs{@thefnmark} and calls \cs{@footnotemark} and 
+% \cs{@footnotetext} to do the work.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\footnote{\@ifnextchar[\@xfootnote{\stepcounter\@mpfn
+%   \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+%   \@footnotemark\@footnotetext}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@xfootnote}
+% Handles the optional \meta{num} argument to \cs{footnote}.
+% It defines \cs{@thefnmark} and calls \cs{@footnotemark} and 
+% \cs{@footnotetext} to do the work.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@xfootnote[#1]{%
+%   \begingroup
+%     \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
+%     \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+%   \endgroup
+%   \@footnotemark\@footnotetext}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@footnotetext}
+% \cs{@footnotetext}\marg{text} sets up for typeseting the footnote 
+% (at the bottom of the page). It calls \cs{@makefntext}\marg{text}
+% to actually do the typesetting (\cs{@makefntext} has to be supplied
+% by a class or package).
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \long\def\@footnotetext#1{%
+%   \insert\footins{%
+%     \reset@font\footnotesize
+%     \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+%     \splittopskip\footnotesep
+%     \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+%     \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+%     \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+%       \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+%     \color@begingroup
+%       \@makefntext{%
+%         \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+%     \color@endgroup}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\footnotemark}
+% \cs{footnotemark}\oarg{num} the user uses this to produce just a 
+% footnote mark in the text.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\footnotemark{%
+%    \@ifnextchar[\@xfootnotemark
+%      {\stepcounter{footnote}%
+%       \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thefootnote}%
+%       \@footnotemark}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@xfootnotemark}
+% Handles the optional \meta{num} argument to \cs{footnotemark}.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@xfootnotemark[#1]{%
+%    \begingroup
+%      \c@footnote #1\relax
+%      \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thefootnote}%
+%    \endgroup
+%    \@footnotemark}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@footnotemark}
+% Typesets the mark in the main text, via \cs{@makefnmark}.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@footnotemark{%
+%    \leavevmode
+%    \ifhmode\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
+%    \@makefnmark
+%    \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
+%    \relax}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\footnotetext}
+% \cs{footnotetext}\oarg{num}\marg{text} is user view for creating a footnote
+% without a marker in the main text.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\footnotetext{%
+%    \@ifnextchar [\@xfootnotenext
+%       {\protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+%       \@footnotetext}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@xfootnotetext}
+% Handles the optional \meta{num} argument to \cs{footnotetext}.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@xfootnotenext[#1]{%
+%   \begingroup
+%     \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
+%     \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+%   \endgroup
+%   \@footnotetext}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@mpfn}
+% \DescribeMacro{\thempfn}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@mpfn{footnote}
+% \def\thempfn{\thefootnote}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% And from \file{ltboxes.dtx} for the |minipage| environment. 
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@mpfn}
+% \DescribeMacro{\thempfn}
+% \DescribeMacro{\@footnotetext}
+% When setting up
+% the environment, it includes:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}\c@mpfootnote\z@
+% \let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@mpfootnotetext}
+% Later it defines \cs{@mpfootnotetext}\marg{text} as the minipage version
+% of \cs{@footnotetext}.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
+%   \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+%     \unvbox\@mpfootins
+%     \reset@font\footnotesize
+%     \hsize\columnwidth
+%     \@parboxrestore
+%     \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+%       \csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+%     \color@begingroup
+%       \@makefntext{%
+%         \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+%     \color@endgroup}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% That completes the kernel extracts.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
+%    Usually, footnotes are separated from the main body of the text
+%    by a small rule. This rule is drawn by the macro |\footnoterule|.
+%    We have to make sure that the rule takes no vertical space (see
+%    \file{plain.tex}) so we compensate for the natural heigth of the
+%    rule of 0.4pt by adding the right amount of vertical skip.
+%
+%    To prevent the rule from colliding with the footnote we first add
+%    a little negative vertical skip, then we put the rule and make
+%    sure we end up at the same point where we begun this operation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{%
+  \kern-3\p@
+  \hrule width .4\columnwidth
+  \kern 2.6\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And just to make sure that we are using memoir's font-dependent
+% skips:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\skip\footins=\bigskipamount
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@footnote}
+%    Footnotes are numbered per chapter. The counter is predefined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@addtoreset{footnote}{chapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    The footnote mechanism of \LaTeX{} calls the macro |\@makefntext|
+%    to produce the actual footnote. The macro gets the text of the
+%    footnote as its argument and should use |\@thefnmark| as the mark
+%    of the footnote. The macro |\@makefntext| is called when
+%    effectively inside a |\parbox| of width |\columnwidth| (i.e.,
+%    with |\hsize| = |\columnwidth|).
+%
+%   An example of what can be achieved is given by the following piece
+%   of \TeX{} code.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%          \long\def\@makefntext#1{%
+%             \@setpar{\@@par
+%                      \@tempdima = \hsize
+%                      \advance\@tempdima-10pt
+%                      \parshape \@ne 10pt \@tempdima}%
+%             \par
+%             \parindent 1em\noindent
+%             \hbox to \z@{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%    The effect of this definition is that all lines of the footnote
+%    are indented by 10pt, while the first line of a new paragraph is
+%    indented by 1em. To change these dimensions, just substitute the
+%    desired value for `10pt' (in both places) or `1em'.  The mark is
+%    flushright against the footnote.
+%
+%    The standard classes use a simpler macro, in which the
+%    footnote text is set like an ordinary text paragraph, with no
+%    indentation except on the first line of a paragraph, and the
+%    first line of the footnote. Thus, all the macro must do is set
+%    |\parindent| to the appropriate value for succeeding paragraphs
+%    and put the proper indentation before the mark.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newcommand{\@makefntext}[1]{%
+%     \parindent 1em%
+%     \noindent
+%     \hb@xt@1.8em{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% This class provides a configurable specification.
+%
+% Normally, if two or more footnotes are sequentially applied: \\
+% |...text\footnote{first}\footnote{second}...| \\
+% the markers in the text run together 
+% (e.g., \ldots text\textsuperscript{12}). 
+% The class provides a separator between the markers
+% (e.g., \ldots text\textsuperscript{1,2}).
+% The underlying ideas for this are from the \Lpack{ledmac} 
+% package~\cite{LEDMAC},
+% which in turn got them from the \Lpack{footmisc} package~\cite{FOOTMISC}.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added footnote separator (from patch v1.5)}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\multfootsep}
+% The separator between multiple footnote markers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\multfootsep}{\textsuperscript{\normalfont,}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\multiplefootnotemarker}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mmf@prepare}
+% \cs{m@mmf@prepare} is a pair of self-cancelling kerns.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\multiplefootnotemarker}{3sp}
+\newcommand*{\m@mmf@prepare}{%
+  \kern-\multiplefootnotemarker
+  \kern\multiplefootnotemarker\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mmf@check}
+% If \cs{m@mmf@check} recognises the last kern as \cs{multiplefootnotemarker}
+% it typesets \cs{multfootsep}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\m@mmf@check}{%
+  \ifdim\lastkern=\multiplefootnotemarker\relax
+    \edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}%
+    \unkern
+    \multfootsep
+    \spacefactor\@x@sf\relax
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotemark}
+% We have to modify the kernel's \cs{@footnotetext} and \cs{@footnotemark} 
+% to implement the separator.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Stop body font changes leaking into footnotes (mempatch v3.7)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\m@mold@footnotetext\@footnotetext
+\renewcommand{\@footnotetext}[1]{%
+  \rest@font\m@mold@footnotetext{#1}\m@mmf@prepare}
+\renewcommand*{\@footnotemark}{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \ifhmode
+    \edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}%
+    \m@mmf@check
+    \nobreak
+  \fi
+  \@makefnmark
+  \m@mmf@prepare
+  \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
+  \relax}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footmarkwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\footmarksep}
+% \begin{macro}{\footparindent}
+% The mark is typset right justified in a box with width |\footmarkwidth|.
+% Second and later lines of the text are offset |\footmarksep| from the
+% end of the box. Paragraphs in footnotes are indented by |\parindent|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\footmarkwidth}
+\newlength{\footmarksep}
+\newlength{\footparindent}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footmarkstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\footscript}
+% The marker is typeset according to |\footscript|\marg{marker}. This
+% can be specified by the user via |\footmarkstyle|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\footmarkstyle}[1]{\def\footscript##1{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makefootmarkhook}
+% A vacuous macro that the user can redefine to do something useful?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makefootmarkhook}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footfootmark}
+% This macro typesets the footnote marker.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\footfootmark}{%
+  \ifdim\footmarkwidth < \z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Negative width, mark is in the margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \llap{\hb@xt@ -\footmarkwidth{%
+            \hss\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
+          \hspace*{-\footmarkwidth}}%
+  \else
+    \ifdim\footmarkwidth = \z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Zero width, mark is at (inside) the margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      {\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Positive width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \hb@xt@\footmarkwidth{\hss\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makefootmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+% The class version of |\@makefntext|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\makefootmark}[1]{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \parindent \footparindent\noindent
+  \leftskip\footmarksep\relax
+  \advance\leftskip \footmarkwidth \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip\relax
+  \makefootmarkhook\relax
+  \footfootmark #1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In the thread \textit{memoir and footnote.sty trouble}, 2003/04/02,
+% Patrik Nyman (\texttt{patrik.nyman@orient.su.se}) noted that in order
+% to stop \file{footnote.sty} (from \texttt{mdwtools}) barfing my original \\
+% |\newcommand{\@makefntext}[1]{\makefootmark{#1}}| \\
+% had to be changed.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2004/11/22}{Revised \cs{@makefntext}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@makefntext}[1]{\makefootmark #1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% All that now remains for the footer part is to set the defaults.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\footmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
+\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{1.8em}
+\setlength{\footmarksep}{-1.8em}
+\setlength{\footparindent}{1em}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
+%    The footnote markers that are printed in the text to point to the
+%    footnotes should be produced by the macro |\@makefnmark|. We use
+%    the default definition for it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\renewcommand\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{%
+%                                \normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footref}
+%    Sometimes it is desireable to reference a footnote more than
+% once.
+%    If a footnote is labelled (e.g., |\footnote{text\label{fn}}|) then
+% the macro |\footref|\marg{fn} will print the footnote marker.
+% The code is essentially a much simplified version of |\footnotemark|
+% from \file{ltfloat.dtx}.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{Added \cs{footref}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\footref}[1]{%
+  \begingroup
+    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\ref{#1}}%
+  \endgroup
+  \@footnotemark}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following code for footnotes that can include verbatims is based
+% on Jeremy Gibbons \textit{`Footnotes with verbatim material'}
+% in the column \textit{`Hey --- it works'} (edited by Jeremy Gibbons), 
+% TeX and TUG NEWS, vol 2 no. 4, p 9, October 1993. I have updated
+% the basic code so that it works for LaTeX2e.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbfootnote}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xverbfootnote}
+% |\verbfootnote| is just like |\footnote| except that it can contain
+% verbatim material.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbfootnote{\@ifnextchar[\@xverbfootnote{\stepcounter\@mpfn
+  \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+  \@footnotemark\@verbfootnotetext}}
+
+\def\@xverbfootnote[#1]{%
+  \begingroup
+    \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
+    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+  \endgroup
+  \@footnotemark\@verbfootnotetext}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@verbfootnotetext}
+% This is the secret ingredient. It is based on the \cs{footnote} macro
+% in \theTeXbook{} page 363, which somehow manages to read an argument 
+% with verbatims. As Knuth says that it is subtle and involves trickery,
+% don't expect me to even try to explain anything. 
+%
+% I'm not at all sure about the color bits, though!
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed colors in \cs{verbfootnote} (mempatch v2.3)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@verbfootnotetext{%
+  \insert\footins\bgroup
+    \footnotesize
+    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \splittopskip\footnotesep
+    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+%%%%    \color@begingroup    
+    \@makefntext{\rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}\ignorespaces}%
+    \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fo@t}
+% \begin{macro}{\f@@t}
+% \begin{macro}{\f@t}
+% \begin{macro}{\@foot}
+% Guess what these do.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
+          \else \let\next\f@t\fi \next}
+\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
+\def\f@t#1{%
+  \color@begingroup
+  #1\@foot
+  \color@endgroup}
+\def\@foot{%
+  \strut\egroup
+%%%%  \color@endgroup
+  }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@verbmpfootnotetext}
+%    Footnotes in minipages are a little different, so another
+% version of |\...footnotetext|. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@verbmpfootnotetext{%
+  \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    \bgroup
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \color@begingroup
+    \@makefntext{\rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}\ignorespaces}%
+    }
+    \futurelet\next\fo@t
+} 
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
+% To get the |\verbfootnote| to work in a |minipage| we have to use
+% |\@verbmpfootnotetext| instead of |\\@verbfootnotetext|. There is
+% a nice hook in the kernel |minipage| code for this.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@minipagerestore{\let\@verbfootnotetext\@verbmpfootnotetext}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}                      
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Major extensions for footnotes}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%% major extension to footnoting 
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This all requires modifications to the output routine's \cs{@makecol}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@makecolfloats}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@makecoltext}
+% These two macros contain code common to both versions of \cs{@makecol}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@m@makecolfloats}{%
+  \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%
+  \global\let\@midlist\@empty
+  \@combinefloats}
+\newcommand{\m@m@makecoltext}{%
+  \ifvbox\@kludgeins
+    \@makespecialcolbox
+  \else
+    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht{%
+      \@texttop
+      \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
+      \unvbox \@outputbox
+      \vskip -\dimen@
+      \@textbottom}%
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@makecolintro}
+% A hook into the revised \cs{@makecol}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@m@makecolintro}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecol}
+% A version \cs{@makecol} giving the standard footnote order (bottom
+% floats after footnotes).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\mem@makecol{%
+  \m@m@makecolintro
+  \ifvoid\footins
+    \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
+  \else
+    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+    \boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth
+    \@tempdima\dp\@cclv
+    \unvbox\@cclv
+    \vskip \skip\footins
+    \color@begingroup
+      \normalcolor
+      \footnoterule
+      \unvbox \footins
+    \color@endgroup
+    }%
+  \fi
+  \m@mdoextrafeet
+  \ifvoid\sideins\else
+    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+      \sidecontents
+      \unvbox\@outputbox}%
+  \fi
+  \m@m@makecolfloats
+  \m@m@makecoltext
+  \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecolbf}
+% A version of \cs{@makecol} which puts footnotes at the bottom of the page
+% (after any bottom floats).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\mem@makecolbf{%
+  \m@m@makecolintro
+  \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
+  \m@m@makecolfloats
+  \ifvoid\footins
+  \else
+    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+    \boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth
+    \unvbox\@outputbox
+    \vskip \skip\footins
+    \color@begingroup
+      \normalcolor
+      \footnoterule
+      \unvbox \footins
+    \color@endgroup
+    }%
+  \fi
+  \m@mdoextrafeet
+  \ifvoid\sideins\else
+    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+      \sidecontents
+      \unvbox\@outputbox}%
+  \fi
+  \m@m@makecoltext
+  \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\feetabovefloat}
+% \begin{macro}{\feetbelowfloat}
+% declarations to put footnotes above bottom floats (standard \LaTeX)
+% or at the bottom of the page
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\feetabovefloat}{\gdef\@makecol{\mem@makecol}}
+\newcommand{\feetbelowfloat}{\gdef\@makecol{\mem@makecolbf}}
+\feetabovefloat
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% All sorts of extra kinds of footnotes.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mdoextrafeet}
+% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetins}
+% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetinshook}
+% These macros are hooks into \cs{@makecol}.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed memoir/listings spacing problem (from Cartsten Heinz, mempatch v2.3)}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Set \cs{boxmaxdepth} in \cs{extrafeetins} (mmempatch v3.1)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@mdoextrafeet}{\extrafeetins}
+\newcommand*{\extrafeetins}{%
+  \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+    \boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth
+    \unvbox\@outputbox
+    \ifvoid\footinsv@r\else\@footstartv@r\@footgroupv@r\fi
+    \extrafeetinshook}}
+\newcommand{\extrafeetinshook}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@reinserts}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mdodoreinextrafeet}
+% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetreinshook}
+% Redefine \cs{@reinserts} with hooks for multiple footnote kinds.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef \@reinserts{%
+  \ifvoid\footins\else\insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}\fi
+  \m@mdodoreinextrafeet
+  \ifvoid\sideins\else\sidecontents\fi
+  \ifvbox\@kludgeins\insert\@kludgeins{\unvbox\@kludgeins}\fi}
+\newcommand{\m@mdodoreinextrafeet}{%
+  \ifvoid\footinsv@r\else\insert\footinsv@r{\unvbox\footinsv@r}\fi
+  \extrafeetreinshook}
+\newcommand{\extrafeetreinshook}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\foottextfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\footinsdim}
+% \begin{macro}{\@preamfntext}
+% General macros.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\foottextfont}{\footnotesize}
+\newlength{\footinsdim}
+  \setlength{\footinsdim}{8in}   % standard for \dimen\footins
+\newcommand{\@preamfntext}{%
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \floatingpenalty \@MM
+  \splittopskip=\footnotesep
+  \splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox
+  \@parboxrestore}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% We are going to change some of the kernel footnote macros
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mold@footnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mold@mpfootnotetext}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\@footnotetext}[1]{\insert\footins{%
+  \foottextfont
+  \@preamfntext
+  \hsize\columnwidth 
+  \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+    \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+  \color@begingroup
+    \@makefntext{%
+      \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces{\foottextfont #1}%
+      \@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+  \color@endgroup}\m@mmf@prepare}
+\renewcommand{\@mpfootnotetext}[1]{%
+  \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    \foottextfont \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+      \csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+  \color@begingroup
+    \@makefntext{%
+      \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+  \color@endgroup}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Save our revised versions of \cs{@footnotetext} and \cs{@mpfootnotetext}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\m@mold@footnotetext\@footnotetext
+\let\m@mold@mpfootnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% We also to patch the minipage environment. We can use 
+% \cs{@minipagerestore} for the \texttt{begin} part, but have to 
+% modify \cs{endminipage}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mdoextrafeetmini}
+% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetminihook}
+% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@mdoextrafeetmini}{%
+  \extrafeetminihook}
+\newcommand{\extrafeetminihook}{}
+\renewcommand{\@minipagerestore}{\m@mdoextrafeetmini}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetendmini}
+% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetendminihook}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\extrafeetendmini}{%
+  \ifvoid\@mpfootinsv@r\else
+    \vskip\skip\@mpfootins
+    \normalcolor\footnoterule\mp@footgroupv@r
+  \fi
+  \extrafeetendminihook}
+\newcommand{\extrafeetendminihook}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mdoextrafeetendmini}
+% \begin{macro}{\endminipage}
+% This is our patched version of \cs{endminipage}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@mdoextrafeetendmini}{\extrafeetendmini}
+\def\endminipage{%
+  \par
+  \unskip
+  \ifvoid\@mpfootins\else
+    \vskip\skip\@mpfootins
+    \normalcolor
+    \footnoterule
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+  \fi
+  \m@mdoextrafeetendmini
+  \@minipagefalse
+  \color@endgroup
+  \egroup
+  \expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\plainfootnotes}
+% The declaration for standard footnotes; easy, just use the saved
+% versions of \cs{@footnotetext} and \cs{@mpfootnotetext}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\plainfootnotes}{%
+  \let\@footnotetext\m@mold@footnotetext
+  \let\@mpfootnotetext\m@mold@mpfootnotetext}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now for lots of somewhat tedious code, interspersed with complex
+% `Dirty Tricks' type things.
+%
+%     Robert Schlicht~\footnote{Private email, 2004/03/12, 
+% (\texttt{w.m.l@gmx.net})} [RS] has provided valuable help in tuning
+% up the code.
+% 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newfootnoteseries}
+% \cs{newfootnoteseries}\marg{series} creates the set of macros required
+% for footnote code (see the kernel code presented earlier).
+% The created macros have \meta{series} appended to their name.
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added skip setup to \cs{newfootnoteseries}}
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/24}{Use \cs{newcounter} instead of \cs{newcount}
+%                 in \cs{newfootnoteseries}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newfootnoteseries}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\newinsert\csname footins#1\endcsname%  -> \footins#1
+  \expandafter\skip\csname footins#1\endcsname \bigskipamount%
+%%%                                      - > \skip\footins#1 % [RS]
+  \newcounter{footnote#1}%                       -> \c@footnote#1
+  \@nameuse{c@footnote#1} \z@%                   -> \c@footnote#1=0
+  \global\@namelet{p@footnote#1} \@empty%        -> \p@footnote#1 
+  \@namedef{thefootnote#1}{\arabic{footnote#1}}% -> \thefootnote#1
+  \@namedef{foottextfont#1}{\foottextfont}%      -> \foottextfont#1
+  \m@makefootnote{#1}%                           -> \footnote#1
+  \m@make@xfootnote{#1}%                         -> \@xfootnote#1
+  \m@make@footnotetext{#1}%                      -> \@footnotetext#1
+  \m@makefootnotemark{#1}%                       -> \footnotemark#1
+  \m@make@xfootnotemark{#1}%                     -> \@xfootnotemark#1
+  \m@make@footnotemark{#1}%                      -> \@footnotemark#1
+  \m@makefootnotetext{#1}%                       -> \footnotetext#1
+  \m@make@xfootnotenext{#1}%                     -> \@xfootnotenext#1
+  \m@make@mpfn{#1}%                              -> \@mpfn#1
+  \m@makethempfn{#1}%                            -> \thempfn#1
+  \m@make@makefnmark{#1}%                        -> \@makefnmark#1
+  \m@makefootref{#1}%                            -> \footref#1
+  \m@makefootfootmark{#1}%                       -> \footfootmark#1
+  \m@makemakefootmark{#1}%                       -> \makefootmark#1
+  \m@makefootmarkstyle{#1}%                      -> \footmarkstyle#1
+  \@namedef{@makefntext#1}##1{\@nameuse{makefootmark#1} ##1}%
+  \m@make@footstart{#1}%                         -> \@footstart#1
+  \m@make@footgroup{#1}%                         -> \@footgroup#1
+  \expandafter\newinsert\csname @mpfootins#1\endcsname% -> \@mpfootins#1
+  \newcounter{mpfootnote#1}%                     -> \c@mpfootnote#1
+  \global\@namelet{p@mpfootnote#1}\@empty
+  \@namedef{thempfootnote#1}{\itshape\alph{mpfootnote#1}}%
+  \m@make@mpfootnotetext{#1}%                    -> \@mpfootnotetext#1
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Reset the counter per chapter, except for articles.
+% \changes{v1.6}{2004/03/14}{Added chapter reset for footnote series [RS]}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifartopt\else%  [RS]
+    \expandafter\@cons\csname cl@chapter\endcsname {{footnote#1}}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Add the footnote to the (re)insert hooks.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \g@addto@macro{\extrafeetinshook}{%
+    \ifvoid\@nameuse{footins#1}\else
+      \@nameuse{@footstart#1}\@nameuse{@footgroup#1}\fi}
+  \g@addto@macro{\extrafeetreinshook}{%
+    \ifvoid\@nameuse{footins#1}\else
+      \insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{\unvbox\@nameuse{footins#1}}\fi}
+  \g@addto@macro{\extrafeetendminihook}{%
+    \ifvoid\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\else
+      \vskip\skip\@mpfootins
+      \normalcolor\footnoterule\@nameuse{mp@footgroup#1}\fi}
+  \g@addto@macro{\extrafeetminihook}{%
+    \@namedef{@mpfn#1}{mpfootnote#1}
+    \@namedef{thempfn#1}{\@nameuse{thempfootnote#1}}
+    \csname c@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\z@
+     \expandafter\let\expandafter\@t@mp \csname @mpfootnotetext#1\endcsname
+     \expandafter\let \csname @footnotetext#1\endcsname \@t@mp}
+  \g@addto@macro{\@mem@extranofeet}{%  % [RS]
+    \ifvoid\@nameuse{footins#1}\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi}
+  \plainfootstyle{#1}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootnote}
+% \cs{m@makefootnote}\marg{series} creates  \cs{footnote<series>}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2004/01/21}{In \cs{m@makefootnote} changed \cs{advance}
+% to \cs{stepcounter} to make change global}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@makefootnote}[1]{
+  \@namedef{footnote#1}{\@ifnextchar[
+    {\@nameuse{@xfootnote#1}}{%\advance \@nameuse{c@\@mpfn#1} by \@ne
+                              \stepcounter{\@mpfn#1}%
+      \@name@p@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
+      \@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}\@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@xfootnote}
+% \cs{m@make@xfootnote}\marg{series} creates \cs{@xfootnote<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@xfootnote}[1]{
+  \@namedef{@xfootnote#1}[##1]{%
+  \begingroup
+    \csname c@\@mpfn#1\endcsname ##1\relax
+    \@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
+  \endgroup
+  \@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}\@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footnotetext}
+% \cs{m@make@footnotetext}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footnotetext<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@footnotetext}[1]{%
+  \@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
+  \insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{%
+  \@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
+  \@preamfntext
+  \hsize\columnwidth
+  \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+    \csname p@footnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
+  \color@begingroup
+    \@nameuse{@makefntext#1}{%
+      \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+  \color@endgroup}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpfootnotetext}
+% \cs{m@make@mpfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates \cs{@mpfootnotetext<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@mpfootnotetext}[1]{%
+  \@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
+    \global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
+      \unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}%
+      \@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+      \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+        \csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
+    \color@begingroup
+      \@nameuse{@makefntext#1}{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+    \color@endgroup}%
+    \m@mmf@prepare}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootnotemark}
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/24}{Changed \cs{advance} to \cs{stepcounter}
+%                 in \cs{m@makefootnotemark}}
+% \cs{m@makefootnotemark}\marg{series} creates \cs{footnotemark<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@makefootnotemark}[1]{
+\@namedef{footnotemark#1}{%
+  \@ifnextchar[ {\@nameuse{@xfootnotemark#1}}
+    {%\advance\@nameuse{c@footnote#1} by \@ne%
+     \stepcounter{footnote#1}%
+     \@name@p@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thefootnote#1}}%
+     \@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@xfootnotemark}
+% \cs{m@make@xfootnotemark}\marg{series} creates \cs{@xfootnotemark<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@xfootnotemark}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{@xfootnotemark#1}[##1]{%
+  \begingroup
+    \@nameuse{c@footnote#1} ##1\relax
+    \@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thefootnote#1}}%
+  \endgroup
+  \@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footnotemark}
+% \cs{m@make@footnotemark}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footnotemark<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@footnotemark}[1]{%
+\@namedef{@footnotemark#1}{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \ifhmode
+    \edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}%
+    \m@mmf@check
+    \nobreak
+  \fi
+  \@nameuse{@makefnmark#1}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare
+  \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
+  \relax}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootmarkstyle}
+% \cs{m@makefootmarkstyle}\marg{series} creates \cs{footmarkstyle<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@makefootmarkstyle}[1]{%
+ \@namedef{footmarkstyle#1}##1{%
+    \@namedef{footscript#1}####1{##1}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootnotetext}
+% \cs{m@makefootnotetext}\marg{series} creates \cs{footnotetext<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@makefootnotetext}[1]{%
+\@namedef{footnotetext#1}{%
+  \@ifnextchar[  {\@nameuse{@xfootnotenext#1}}%
+  {\@name@p@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
+  \@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@xfootnotenext}
+% \cs{m@make@xfootnotenext}\marg{series} creates \cs{@xfootnotenext<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@xfootnotenext}[1]{
+\@namedef{@xfootnotenext#1}[##1]{%
+  \begingroup
+    \csname c@\@mpfn#1\endcsname ##1\relax
+    \@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
+  \endgroup
+  \@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpfn}
+% \cs{m@make@mpfn}\marg{series} creates \cs{@mpfn<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@mpfn}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{@mpfn#1}{\@nameuse{footnote#1}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@makethempfn}
+% \cs{m@makethempfn}\marg{series} creates \cs{thempfn<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@makethempfn}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{thempfn#1}{\@nameuse{thefootnote#1}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@makefnmark}
+% \cs{m@make@makefnmark}\marg{series} creates \cs{@makefnmark<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@makefnmark}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{@makefnmark#1}{%
+    \hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootref}
+% \cs{m@makefootref}\marg{series} creates \cs{footref<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@makefootref}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{footref#1}##1{%
+    \begingroup
+      \@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\ref{##1}}%
+    \endgroup
+    \@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootfootmark}
+% \cs{m@makefootfootmark}\marg{series} creates \cs{footfootmark<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@makefootfootmark}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{footfootmark#1}{%
+    \ifdim\footmarkwidth < \z@
+      \llap{\hb@xt@ -\footmarkwidth{%
+            \hss\normalfont\@nameuse{footscript#1}%
+            {\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}%
+            \hspace*{-\footmarkwidth}}%
+    \else
+      \ifdim\footmarkwidth = \z@
+        {\normalfont\@nameuse{footscript#1}{\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}%
+      \else
+        \hb@xt@\footmarkwidth{%
+            \hss\normalfont\@nameuse{footscript#1}%
+            {\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}%
+      \fi
+    \fi}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@makemakefootmark}
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/23}{Removed extraneous space from \cs{m@makemakefootmark}}
+% \cs{m@makemakefootmark}\marg{series} creates \cs{makefootmark<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@makemakefootmark}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{makefootmark#1}##1{%
+    \leavevmode
+    \parindent \footparindent\noindent
+    \leftskip\footmarksep\relax
+    \advance\leftskip \footmarkwidth 
+    \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip\relax
+    \makefootmarkhook\relax
+    \@nameuse{footfootmark#1}##1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footgroup}
+% \cs{m@make@footgroup}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footgroup<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@footgroup}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\unvbox\@nameuse{footins#1}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@makemp@footgroup}
+% \cs{m@makemp@footgroup}\marg{series} creates \cs{mp@footgroup<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@makemp@footgroup}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footstart}
+% \cs{m@make@footstart}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footstart<series>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@footstart}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{@footstart#1}{%
+    \vskip\bigskipamount
+    \leftskip=\z@
+    \rightskip=\z@
+    \footnoterule}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\plainfootstyle}
+% \cs{plainfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies a plain (normal) footnote
+% style for \meta{series}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\plainfootstyle}[1]{%
+  \m@make@footnotetext{#1}%
+  \m@make@footgroup{#1}%
+  \m@make@footstart{#1}%
+  \m@make@mpfootnotetext{#1}%
+  \m@makemp@footgroup{#1}%
+  \@nameuse{footmarkstyle#1}{\textsuperscript{##1}}
+  \expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=\footinsdim
+  \expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=1000\relax}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now the basic code for footnote declarations (we will be
+% using \texttt{footnotev@r} instead of the regular \texttt{footnote}).
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footinsv@r}
+% Define the new \cs{footinsv@r} insert. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newinsert\footinsv@r
+  \skip\footinsv@r\bigskipamount
+  \count\footinsv@r=1000 % no magnifcation
+  \dimen\footinsv@r=\footinsdim
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% Create a new \verb?v@r? footnote series.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\m@make@footstart{v@r}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\@footgroupv@r}
+% Initialise the \texttt{footgroup} for the series to do nothing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@footgroupv@r}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% And also for minipages:
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootinsv@r}
+% \begin{macro}{\mp@footgroupv@r}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newinsert\@mpfootinsv@r
+\newcommand{\mp@footgroupv@r}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \Lpack{ledmac} package style footnotes (see \file{ledmac.dtx} for 
+% more detailed explanations).
+%
+% The two- and three-column notes use a macro \cs{m@mrigidbalance}
+% to split text into a number of columns. This is based on \theTeXbook,
+% page 397.
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@k}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@m@h}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\m@m@k \newdimen\m@m@h
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mrigidbalance}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mdosplits}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@msplitoff}
+% \cs{m@mrigidbalance}\marg{box}\marg{num}\marg{length} splits a
+% \meta{box} (of text) into \meta{num} columns with \meta{length}
+% space between the top baseline and the top of the \cs{vbox}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\m@mrigidbalance}[3]{\setbox0=\box#1 \m@m@k=#2 \m@m@h=#3
+  \@@line{\splittopskip=\m@m@h \vbadness=\@M \hfilneg
+  \valign{##\vfill\cr\m@mdosplits}}}
+\newcommand*{\m@mdosplits}{\ifnum\m@m@k>0 \noalign{\hfil}\m@msplitoff
+  \global\advance\m@m@k-1\cr\m@mdosplits\fi}
+\newcommand*{\m@msplitoff}{\dimen0=\ht0
+  \divide\dimen0 by\m@m@k \advance\dimen0 by\m@m@h
+  \setbox2 \vsplit0 to \dimen0
+  \unvbox2 }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Two column footnotes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\twocolumnfootnotes}
+% Declaration for two column footnotes. This causes the standard
+% \cs{footnote} and friends to internally use the \verb?v@r? series,
+% which here produces two column footnotes.
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Made [RS] change to \cs{twocolumnfootnotes}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\twocolumnfootnotes}{%
+  \@namedef{foottextfontv@r}{\foottextfont}%  % [RS]
+  \let\@footnotetext\@twocolfootnotetext
+  \dimen\footinsv@r=2\footinsdim
+  \count\footinsv@r=500\relax
+  \m@make@twocol@footgroup{v@r}%
+  \let\@footgroupv@r\@twocol@footgroupv@r
+  \let\@mpfootnotetext\@mptwocolfootnotetext 
+  \m@make@mptwocol@footgroup{v@r}%
+  \let\mp@footgroupv@r\@mptwocol@footgroupv@r}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@twocolfootnotetext}
+% \cs{@twocolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the two column version of
+% \cs{@footnotetext} for the \verb?v@r? series.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added missing percent to \cs{@twocolfootnotetext} (mempatch v3.1)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@twocolfootnotetext}[1]{\insert\footinsv@r{%
+  \foottextfont
+  \@preamfntext
+  \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+    \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+  \color@begingroup
+    \@twocolfootfmt{#1}%
+  \color@endgroup}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@preamtwofmt}
+% Give each column 0.45 of the textwidth.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@preamtwofmt}{%
+  \hsize .45\hsize
+  \parindent=\z@
+  \tolerance=5000\relax
+  \raggedright
+  \leavevmode}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@twocolfootfmt}
+% \cs{@twocolfootfmt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@twocolfootfmt}[1]{%
+  \@preamtwofmt
+  {\footfootmark\strut {\foottextfont #1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mptwocolfootnotetext}
+% \cs{@mptwocolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the two column version
+% of \cs{@mpfootnotetext} for the \verb?v@r? series for minipages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@mptwocolfootnotetext}[1]{%
+  \global\setbox\@mpfootinsv@r\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootinsv@r
+    \foottextfont \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+      \csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+  \color@begingroup
+    \@twocolfootfmt{#1}%
+  \color@endgroup}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\twocolumnfootstyle}
+% \cs{twocolumnfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies a two column footnote 
+% style for \meta{series}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\twocolumnfootstyle}[1]{%
+  \m@make@twocolfootnotetext{#1}%
+  \m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext{#1}%
+  \m@make@twocolfootfmt{#1}%
+  \m@make@twocol@footgroup{#1}%
+  \m@make@mptwocol@footgroup{#1}%
+  \m@make@footstart{#1}%
+  \@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
+     \@nameuse{@twocolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
+  \@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
+     \@nameuse{@mptwocolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
+  \@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@twocol@footgroup#1}}%
+  \@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@mptwocol@footgroup#1}}%
+  \expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=2\footinsdim
+  \expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=500\relax}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@twocolfootnotetext}
+% \cs{m@make@twocolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates 
+% \cs{@twocolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@twocolfootnotetext}[1]{%
+  \@namelongdef{@twocolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
+    \insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{
+    \@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
+    \@preamfntext
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+      \csname p@footnote#1\endcsname \@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
+    \color@begingroup
+      \@nameuse{@twocolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
+    \color@endgroup}%
+    \m@mmf@prepare}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext}
+% \cs{m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@mptwocolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext}[1]{%
+\@namelongdef{@mptwocolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
+  \global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
+    \@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+      \csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
+  \color@begingroup
+    \@nameuse{@twocolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
+  \color@endgroup}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@twocolfootfmt}
+% \cs{m@make@twocolfootfmt}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@twocolfootfmt}\meta{series} 
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Removed space from \cs{m@make@twocolfootfmt} [RS]}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@twocolfootfmt}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{@twocolfootfmt#1}##1{%
+    \@preamtwofmt
+    {\@nameuse{footfootmark#1}\strut
+     {\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}##1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@twocol@footgroup}
+% \cs{m@make@twocol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@twocol@footgroup}\meta{series} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@twocol@footgroup}[1]{%
+  \@namedef{@twocol@footgroup#1}{{%
+    \@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
+     \m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{footins#1}}{\tw@}{\splittopskip}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mptwocol@footgroup}
+% \cs{m@make@mptwocol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@mptwocol@footgroup}\meta{series}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@mptwocol@footgroup}[1]{%
+\@namedef{@mptwocol@footgroup#1}{{%
+  \@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
+  \m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}}{\tw@}{\splittopskip}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Three column footnotes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threecolumnfootnotes}
+% Declaration for three column footnotres.
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Made [RS] change to \cs{threecolumnfootnotes}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\threecolumnfootnotes}{%
+  \@namedef{foottextfontv@r}{\foottextfont}%  % [RS]
+  \let\@footnotetext\@threecolfootnotetext
+  \dimen\footinsv@r=3\footinsdim
+  \count\footinsv@r=333\relax
+  \m@make@threecol@footgroup{v@r}%
+  \let\@footgroupv@r\@threecol@footgroupv@r
+  \let\@mpfootnotetext\@mpthreecolfootnotetext 
+  \m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup{v@r}%
+  \let\mp@footgroupv@r\@mpthreecol@footgroupv@r}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@threecolfootnotetext}
+% \cs{@threecolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the three column version of
+% \cs{@footnotetext}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@threecolfootnotetext}[1]{\insert\footinsv@r{%
+  \foottextfont
+  \@preamfntext
+  \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+    \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+  \color@begingroup
+    \@threecolfootfmt{#1}%
+  \color@endgroup}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@preamthreefmt}
+% Give each column 0.3 of the text width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@preamthreefmt}{%
+  \hsize .3\hsize
+  \parindent=\z@
+  \tolerance=5000\relax
+  \raggedright
+  \leavevmode}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@threecolfootfmt}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@threecolfootfmt}[1]{%
+  \@preamthreefmt
+  {\footfootmark\strut {\foottextfont #1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpthreecolfootnotetext}
+% \cs{@mpthreecolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the three column version of
+% \cs{@mpfootnotetext}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@mpthreecolfootnotetext}[1]{%
+  \global\setbox\@mpfootinsv@r\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootinsv@r
+    \foottextfont \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+      \csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+  \color@begingroup
+    \@threecolfootfmt{#1}%
+  \color@endgroup}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threecolumnfootstyle}
+% \cs{threecolumnfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies three column footnote style
+% for \meta{series}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\threecolumnfootstyle}[1]{%
+  \m@make@threecolfootnotetext{#1}%
+  \m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext{#1}%
+  \m@make@threecolfootfmt{#1}%
+  \m@make@threecol@footgroup{#1}%
+  \m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup{#1}%
+  \m@make@footstart{#1}%
+  \@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
+    \@nameuse{@threecolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
+  \@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
+    \@nameuse{@mpthreecolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
+  \@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@threecol@footgroup#1}}%
+  \@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@mpthreecol@footgroup#1}}%
+  \expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=3\footinsdim
+  \expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=333\relax}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@threecolfootnotetext}
+% \cs{m@make@threecolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@threecolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@threecolfootnotetext}[1]{%
+\@namelongdef{@threecolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
+  \insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{
+  \@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
+  \@preamfntext
+  \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+    \csname p@footnote#1\endcsname \@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
+  \color@begingroup
+    \@nameuse{@threecolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
+  \color@endgroup}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext}
+% \cs{m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@mpthreecolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext}[1]{%
+\@namelongdef{@mpthreecolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
+  \global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
+    \@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+      \csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
+  \color@begingroup
+    \@nameuse{@threecolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
+  \color@endgroup}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@threecolfootfmt}
+% \cs{m@make@threecolfootfmt}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@threecolfootfmt}\meta{series}
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Removed space from \cs{m@make@threecolfootfmt} [RS]}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@threecolfootfmt}[1]{%
+\@namelongdef{@threecolfootfmt#1}##1{%
+  \@preamthreefmt
+  {\@nameuse{footfootmark#1}\strut 
+   {\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}##1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@threecol@footgroup}
+% \cs{m@make@threecol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@threecol@footgroup}\meta{series} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@threecol@footgroup}[1]{%
+\@namedef{@threecol@footgroup#1}{{%
+  \@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
+  \m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{footins#1}}{\thr@@}{\splittopskip}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup}
+% \cs{m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@mpthreecol@footgroup}\meta{series} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup}[1]{%
+\@namedef{@mpthreecol@footgroup#1}{{%
+  \@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
+  \m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}}{\thr@@}{\splittopskip}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Paragraphed footnotes}
+%
+% Paragraphed footnotes are based on \theTeXbook, page 398ff, in the 
+% Dirty Tricks appendix. It does a lot of box manipulations.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@munvxh}
+% \cs{m@munvxh}\marg{vbox}: unvbox, extract the last line, and unhbox it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@munvxh}[1]{%
+  \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox#1%
+    \global\setbox1=\lastbox}%
+  \unhbox1
+  \unskip
+  \unskip
+  \unpenalty
+  \hskip\m@mipn@skip}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mungebox}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@mungebox}{%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\m@munvxh0}%
+  \dp0=\z@
+  \ht0=\footfudgefactor\wd0
+  \box0
+  \penalty0}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mipn@skip}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@minterparanoteglue}
+% These are `inter-para-note-skip' and `inter-parafootnote' glue, for 
+% paragraphed footnotes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\m@mipn@skip
+\newcommand*{\m@minterparanoteglue}[1]{%
+  {\foottextfont\global\m@mipn@skip=#1\relax}}
+\m@minterparanoteglue{1em plus.4em minus.4em}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mmakehboxofhboxes}
+% Make an hbox of hboxes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\m@mmakehboxofhboxes}{\setbox0=\hbox{}%
+  \loop
+    \unpenalty
+    \setbox2=\lastbox
+  \ifhbox2
+    \setbox0=\hbox{\box2\unhbox0}
+  \repeat}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mremovehboxes}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\m@mremovehboxes}{\setbox0=\lastbox
+  \ifhbox0{\m@mremovehboxes}\unhbox0 \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footfudgefiddle}
+% TeX uses \verb?\footfufgefactor? to estimate the space required for
+% paragraphed footnotes. If it underestimates then the notes approach,
+% or cover, the footer. \verb?\footfudgefiddle? can be changed (upward) from
+% its default to improve matters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\footfudgefiddle}{64}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraphfootnotes}
+% Declaration for paragraphed footnotes.
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Made [RS] change to \cs{paragraphfootnotes}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\paragraphfootnotes}{%
+  \@namedef{foottextfontv@r}{\foottextfont}%  % [RS]
+  \let\@footnotetext\@parafootnotetext
+  \dimen\footinsv@r=\footinsdim
+  \count\footinsv@r=1000\relax
+  \m@make@para@footgroup{v@r}%
+  \let\@footgroupv@r\@para@footgroupv@r
+  \let\@mpfootnotetext\@mpparafootnotetext 
+  \m@make@mppara@footgroup{v@r}%
+  \let\mp@footgroupv@r\@mppara@footgroupv@r
+  {\foottextfont
+   \dimen0=\baselineskip
+   \multiply\dimen0 by 1024
+   \divide\dimen0 by \hsize \multiply\dimen0 by \footfudgefiddle
+   \xdef\footfudgefactor{\expandafter\strip@pt\dimen0 }}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@parafootnotetext}
+% \cs{@parafootnotetext}\marg{text} is a paragraph version of
+% \cs{@footnotetext}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@parafootnotetext}[1]{\insert\footinsv@r{
+  \foottextfont
+  \@preamfntext
+  \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+    \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+  \setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
+    \color@begingroup
+      \noindent \@parafootfmt{#1}%
+    \color@endgroup}%
+  \m@mungebox}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@parafootfmt}
+% \cs{@parafootfmt}\marg{text} is a paragraph version of
+% \cs{@footfmt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@parafootfmt}[1]{%
+  \parindent=\z@
+  \parfillskip=0pt \@plus 1fil
+  {\footfootmark\strut {\foottextfont #1}\penalty-10}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpparafootnotetext}
+% \cs{@mpparafootnotetext}\marg{text} is a paragraph version of
+% \cs{@mpfootnotetext}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@mpparafootnotetext}[1]{%
+  \global\setbox\@mpfootinsv@r\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootinsv@r
+    \foottextfont \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+      \csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
+      \color@begingroup
+      \noindent \@parafootfmt{#1}%
+      \color@endgroup}%
+  \m@mungebox}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraphfootstyle}
+% \cs{paragraphfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies paragraphed footnote style
+% for \meta{series}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\paragraphfootstyle}[1]{%
+  \m@make@parafootnotetext{#1}%
+  \m@make@mpparafootnotetext{#1}%
+  \m@make@parafootfmt{#1}%
+  \m@make@para@footgroup{#1}%
+  \m@make@mppara@footgroup{#1}%
+  \m@make@para@footstart{#1}%
+  \@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
+    \@nameuse{@parafootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
+  \@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
+    \@nameuse{@mpparafootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
+  \@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@para@footgroup#1}}%
+  \@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@mppara@footgroup#1}}%
+  \@namedef{@footstart#1}{\@nameuse{@para@footstart#1}}%
+  \expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=\footinsdim
+  \expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=1000\relax
+  {\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
+   \dimen0=\baselineskip
+   \multiply\dimen0 by 1024
+   \divide\dimen0 by \hsize \multiply\dimen0 by 64
+   \xdef\footfudgefactor{\expandafter\strip@pt\dimen0 }}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@parafootnotetext}
+% \cs{m@make@parafootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@parafootnotetext}\meta{series} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@parafootnotetext}[1]{%
+\@namelongdef{@parafootnotetext#1}##1{%
+  \insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{
+  \@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
+  \@preamfntext
+  \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+    \csname p@footnote#1\endcsname \@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
+  \setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
+    \color@begingroup
+      \noindent \@nameuse{@parafootfmt#1}{##1}%
+    \color@endgroup}%
+  \m@mungebox}%
+  \m@mmf@prepare}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpparafootnotetext}
+% \cs{m@make@mpparafootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@mpparafootnotetext}\meta{series} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@mpparafootnotetext}[1]{%
+\@namelongdef{@mpparafootnotetext#1}##1{%
+  \global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
+    \@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+      \csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
+    \setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
+      \color@begingroup
+        \noindent \@nameuse{@parafootfmt#1}{##1}%
+      \color@endgroup}%
+    \m@mungebox}%
+    \m@mmf@prepare}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@parafootfmt}
+% \cs{m@make@parafootfmt}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@parafootfmt}\meta{series} 
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Removed space from \cs{m@make@parafootfmt} [RS]}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@parafootfmt}[1]{%
+\@namelongdef{@parafootfmt#1}##1{%
+  \parindent=\z@
+  \parfillskip=0pt \@plus 1fil
+  {\@nameuse{footfootmark#1}\strut 
+   {\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}##1}\penalty-10}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@para@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@para@footgroup}\meta{series}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@para@footgroup}[1]{%
+\@namedef{@para@footgroup#1}{%
+  \unvbox\@nameuse{footins#1}
+  \m@mmakehboxofhboxes
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\unhbox0 \m@mremovehboxes}%
+  \@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
+  \noindent\unhbox0\par}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mppara@footgroup}
+% \cs{m@make@mppara@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@mppara@footgroup}\meta{series} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@mppara@footgroup}[1]{%
+\@namedef{@mppara@footgroup#1}{%
+  \unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
+  \m@mmakehboxofhboxes
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\unhbox0 \m@mremovehboxes}%
+  \@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
+  \noindent\unhbox0\par}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@make@para@footstart}
+% \cs{m@make@para@footstart}\marg{series} creates
+% \cs{@para@footstart}\meta{series} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@make@para@footstart}[1]{%
+\@namedef{@para@footstart#1}{%
+  \vskip\bigskipamount
+  \leftskip=\z@
+  \rightskip=\z@
+  \parindent=\z@
+  \vskip\skip\@nameuse{footins#1}%
+  \footnoterule}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Change marks} \label{sec:vct}
+%
+%    When preparing a manuscript it normally goes through
+%    several iterations. The commands provided may be used to identify
+%    changes made to a document during its life cycle.
+%
+% The code for this part of the class is based on the version
+% controls in the \Lpack{iso} class~\cite{ISOCLASS}.
+%
+% \subsection{Print control}
+%
+%    Members of the development group often need to see the changes
+%    between document versions, while the general public does not.
+% \begin{macro}{\ifchangemarks}
+%    This controls the appearence of the version controls defined
+%    below.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifchangemarks\changemarksfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%   The marks only work properly when the |draft| option
+%   is in effect. Also, the command |\changemarkstrue| must be
+%   put in the document preamble.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\v@rid}
+%    This acts as an alias for |\marginpar| when both |changemarks| is
+%    true and the |draft| option is in effect, otherwise it throws
+%    away its two arguments.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and \cs{@esphack} to \cs{v@rid}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\v@rid}[2]{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \ifchangemarks
+     \ifdraftdoc
+       \marginpar[#1]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi
+  \@esphack}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Change marking}
+%
+%    The following commands flag changes in the typeset document. Each of
+%    the commands takes one parameter which is intended to be a 
+%    `change number' or comment for tracking purposes. A symbol and
+% the \meta{change-id} is put into the margin near where the command 
+% is given. The marking commands should be attached to some word or 
+% punctuation mark in the text otherwise extraneous spaces may creep
+% into the final document.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and \cs{@esphack} to changemarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\added}
+%    |\added{|\meta{change-id}|}|
+%    Flags, with the symbol $\oplus$, that something has been added 
+% to the manuscript.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\added}[1]{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \ifchangemarks
+    \v@rid{\small$\oplus$ #1}{\small$\oplus$ #1}%
+  \fi
+  \@esphack}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\deleted}
+%    |\deleted{|\meta{change-id}|}|
+%    Flags, with the symbol $\neq$, that something has been deleted 
+% from the manuscript.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\deleted}[1]{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \ifchangemarks
+    \v@rid{\small$\neq$ #1}{\small$\neq$ #1}%
+  \fi
+  \@esphack}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\changed}
+%    |\changed{|\meta{change-id}|}|
+%    Flags, with the symbol $\Leftrightarrow$,  that something
+% has been changed in the text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\changed}[1]{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \ifchangemarks
+    \v@rid{\small$\Leftrightarrow$ #1}{\small$\Leftrightarrow$ #1}%
+  \fi
+  \@esphack}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Trimming marks}
+%
+% The \Lopt{showtrims} options prints trimming marks at the corners
+% of the logical page. The code for this comes from ideas gleaned
+% from Martin Schr\"{o}der's \Lpack{everyshi} package~\cite{EVERYSHI}
+% and Melchior Franz's \Lpack{crop} package~\cite{CROP}. 
+% The implementation and any errors are mine.
+%
+%    The implementation up to October 2002 was limited to putting a cross
+% at the page corners. The manual directed users to the \Lpack{crop}
+% packge if they wanted anything more. In October 2002 the implementation
+% was substantially extended. The background to this is below.
+%
+%    Before the release of version 1.7 of \Lpack{crop} in May 2002 its
+% author asked me to make some changes to \Lpack{memoir} that would be
+% helpful to him, and I did so. Later he told me that the changes were
+% unnecessary and I reverted to the original \Lpack{memoir} code.
+%
+%    On 2002/10/06 Peter Heslin (\url{peter.heslin@ucd.ie}) started a
+% thread on \url{comp.text.tex} titled `Incompatibility of memoir.cls 
+% and crop.sty' in which he said that \Lpack{memoir} and \Lpack{crop}
+% did not seem to work together. The following are some snippets from
+% that thread, identified by the various proponents.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[crop] Ah, yes. It cannot work with all those |\settrims| etc.
+%             crop.sty does only respect |\stock{width,height}|,
+%             but none of the other memoir specific trim marks stuff \ldots
+%
+% \item[crop] \ldots I'm not a memoir expert. crop.sty respects all the
+%  usual LaTeX paper dimensions and simply puts the marks around the
+% page. It works with all standard classes and the KOMA classes. memoir
+% seems to do things completely differently \ldots
+%
+%    Sorry, but I'm afraid I have to pass the problem to the memoir
+% author. \ldots
+%
+% \item[memoir] I will try and take a look at the problem but I'm
+%  not a crop expert --- I've never used it. However it seems odd to
+% me that crop doesn't work with memopir. Memoir provides a different
+% interface for specifying the page layout but then translates everything
+% to the standard length variables. \ldots
+%
+% \item[crop] You've just taken code from it |...:->|
+%
+%    crop doesn't have its own idea at all. It just uses that of DEK
+% and LaTeX, which says, that the reference point of the output box
+% in the output routine is assumed 1 inch to the left [later corrected 
+% to right] and 1 inch down
+% from the upper left (virtual) paper corner.
+%
+% \item[crop] With other words: crop changes |\hoffset| and |\voffset|,
+% in order to center the logical (virtual) page on the physical sheet
+% of paper, in the middle of the crop marks. The length macros 
+% |\evensidemargin| and |\oddsidemargin| are unchanged and refer still 
+% to the logical page (modulo 1 inch).
+%
+%    The memoir class, in contrast (mis)uses the LaTeX margins
+% |\even(odd)sidemargin| for that purpose.
+%
+%    Thus, the meaning of |\even(odd)sidemargin| is different
+% in both packages.
+% \end{description}
+%
+%     Given all the above I concluded that \Lpack{crop} would remain
+% as it was, and that in order to satisfy Peter Heslin I would have
+% to extend the trimming marks. The following is limited to extensions
+% asked for by Peter Heslin.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\trimmark}
+% This is a cross 
+% in a zero sized picture for marking the corner of a logical page. Up to 
+% version 1.0 the macro used |\setlength| for adjusting the |\unitlength|
+% but Henrik Holm\footnote{Message to \ctt{} on 2002/01/04 
+% (\texttt{h.holm@spray.no})} discovered that if the \Lpack{calc} package
+% is used then LaTeX complains about a missing number.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/04}{Removed \cs{setlength} from \cs{trimmark}. Stops
+%                 problem with the calc package.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\trimmark}{%
+  \begin{picture}(0,0)
+    \unitlength 1cm
+    \thinlines
+    \put(-2,0){\line(1,0){4}}
+    \put(0,-2){\line(0,1){4}}
+  \end{picture}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpictl}
+% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpictr}
+% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpicbl}
+% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpicbr}
+%  `L' shaped trim marks for four corners.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{Ltrimpictl}, \cs{Ltrimpictr}, \cs{Ltrimpicbl}
+%                            and \cs{Ltrimpicbr}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Ltrimpictl}{%
+  \begin{picture}(0,0)
+    \unitlength 1mm
+    \thinlines
+    \put(-2,0){\line(-1,0){18}}
+    \put(0,2){\line(0,1){18}}
+  \end{picture}}
+\newcommand*{\Ltrimpictr}{%
+  \begin{picture}(0,0)
+    \unitlength 1mm
+    \thinlines
+    \put(2,0){\line(1,0){18}}
+    \put(0,2){\line(0,1){18}}
+  \end{picture}}
+\newcommand*{\Ltrimpicbl}{%
+  \begin{picture}(0,0)
+    \unitlength 1mm
+    \thinlines
+    \put(-2,0){\line(-1,0){18}}
+    \put(0,-2){\line(0,-1){18}}
+  \end{picture}}
+\newcommand*{\Ltrimpicbr}{%
+  \begin{picture}(0,0)
+    \unitlength 1mm
+    \thinlines
+    \put(2,0){\line(1,0){18}}
+    \put(0,-2){\line(0,-1){18}}
+  \end{picture}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Ftrimpicbl}
+%    Frame the page.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{Ftrimpictl}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Ftrimpicbl}{%
+  \begin{picture}(0,0)
+    \unitlength 1pt
+    \thinlines
+    \put(0,0){\framebox(\strip@pt\paperwidth,\strip@pt\paperheight){}}
+  \end{picture}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tmarktl}
+% \begin{macro}{\tmarktr}
+% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbl}
+% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbr}
+% The trimming marks used for corner display.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{tmarktl}, \cs{tmarktr}, \cs{tmarkbl}
+%                            and \cs{tmarkbr}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\tmarktl}{\trimmark} 
+\newcommand*{\tmarktr}{\trimmark} 
+\newcommand*{\tmarkbl}{\trimmark} 
+\newcommand*{\tmarkbr}{\trimmark} 
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tmarktm}
+% \begin{macro}{\tmarkml}
+% \begin{macro}{\tmarkmr}
+% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbm}
+% The trimming marks used for mid-side display.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{tmarktm}, \cs{tmarkml}, \cs{tmarkmr}
+%                            and \cs{tmarkbm}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\tmarktm}{}
+\newcommand*{\tmarkml}{}
+\newcommand*{\tmarkmr}{}
+\newcommand*{\tmarkbm}{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\trimXmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\trimLmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\trimFrame}
+% \begin{macro}{\trimNone}
+% These are declarations for the different kinds of trimming marks.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{trimXmarks}, \cs{trimLmarks}, 
+%                            \cs{trimFrame} and \cs{trimNone}} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\trimXmarks}{%
+  \let\tmarktl\trimmark
+  \let\tmarktr\trimmark
+  \let\tmarkbl\trimmark
+  \let\tmarkbr\trimmark
+}
+\newcommand*{\trimLmarks}{%
+  \let\tmarktl\Ltrimpictl
+  \let\tmarktr\Ltrimpictr
+  \let\tmarkbl\Ltrimpicbl
+  \let\tmarkbr\Ltrimpicbr
+}
+\newcommand*{\trimFrame}{%
+  \let\tmarktl\null
+  \let\tmarktr\null
+  \let\tmarkbl\Ftrimpicbl
+  \let\tmarkbr\null
+}
+\newcommand*{\trimNone}{%
+  \let\tmarktl\relax
+  \let\tmarktr\relax
+  \let\tmarkbl\relax
+  \let\tmarkbr\relax
+  \let\tmarktm\relax
+  \let\tmarkml\relax
+  \let\tmarkmr\relax
+  \let\tmarkbm\relax
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\trimmarks}
+%    This positions four marks (|\trimmark|) at the corners of a
+% logical page. It is basically a |\vbox| with zero height and width.
+%
+% Bastiaan Niels Veelo reported (2003/07/11) odd things (e.g., some
+% macros ignored) when changing trim marks. Turns out to be related
+% to the use of |\protect|.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{trimmarks} to work properly with the oneside option}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Changed \cs{trimmarks} to use \cs{tmarktl}, etc.,
+%                            instead of four \cs{trimmark}s}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Fiddled \cs{protect} in \cs{trimmaks}
+%                            (from patch v1.7)}              
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\trimmarks}{%   
+  \vbox to \z@{\vskip-1in \vskip\trimtop % top of logical page
+    \hb@xt@\z@{\hskip-1in
+      \ifodd\c@page 
+        \hskip\stockwidth \hskip-\trimedge \hskip-\paperwidth
+      \else 
+        \if@twoside
+          \hskip\trimedge  % left of logical page
+        \else
+          \hskip\stockwidth \hskip-\trimedge \hskip-\paperwidth
+        \fi
+      \fi
+      \vbox to \paperheight{%
+        \let\protect\relax        % <- v1.4 addition
+        \hb@xt@\paperwidth{\tmarktl\hfil\tmarktm\hfil\tmarktr}%
+        \vfil
+        \hb@xt@\paperwidth{\tmarkml\hfil\tmarkmr}%
+        \vfil
+        \hb@xt@\paperwidth{\tmarkbl\hfil\tmarkbm\hfil\tmarkbr}}%
+    \hss}%
+  \vss}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sheetsequence}
+% Peter Heslin asked for the ability to add a sequential page number
+% (1 for the first page, N for the last page, no matter what value
+% the page counter has) to the trimming marks.
+%
+%    |\c@sheetsequence| is a new counter for pages starting at the 
+% beginning and independent
+% of the standard page counter. This should not be reset by anything.
+% The counter increment has to be added to the output routine.
+%
+%     This may also be useful for page N of M numbering.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added sheetsequence counter.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{sheetsequence}
+  \setcounter{sheetsequence}{1}
+  \renewcommand{\thesheetsequence}{\@arabic\c@sheetsequence}
+\g@addto@macro{\@outputpage}{\stepcounter{sheetsequence}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lastsheet}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lastpage}
+% While we're at it, might as well provide for lastpage and lastsheet counters
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added lastsheet and lastpage functions.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{lastsheet}
+  \setcounter{lastsheet}{0}
+\newcounter{lastpage}
+  \setcounter{lastpage}{0}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dol@stsheet}
+% \begin{macro}{\dol@stpage}
+% These two macros write the values of lastsheet and lastpage to the
+% \file{aux} file. They have to be called at the end of the document
+% after a |\clearpage| to flush out any floats.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{In \cs{dol@stpage} use the page counter value,
+%                            not \cs{thepage} otherwise problems with
+%                            non-arabic page numbers (patch 1.1)}
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{In \cs{dol@stpage} use the sheet counter value,
+%                              not \cs{thesheetsequence} otherwise problems
+%                              if (e.g., hangul.sty) \cs{@arabic} is redefined}
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Made \cs{dol@stsheet} and \cs{dol@stpage}
+%  obey \cs{nofiles}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\dol@stsheet}{%
+  \if@filesw
+    \addtocounter{sheetsequence}{-1}%
+    \immediate\write\@auxout%
+      {\string\setcounter{lastsheet}{\the\c@sheetsequence}}%
+    \stepcounter{sheetsequence}%
+  \fi}
+\newcommand{\dol@stpage}{%
+  \if@filesw
+    \addtocounter{page}{-1}%
+    \immediate\write\@auxout%
+      {\string\setcounter{lastpage}{\the\c@page}}%
+    \stepcounter{page}%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% I originally used this: \\
+% \verb?\AtEndDocument{\clearpage\dol@stsheet\dol@stpage}?
+% but following the CTT thread \textit{AtEndDocument produces unwanted page
+% break}, 2004/03/11, and in particular Dan Luecking's response I now
+% try as hard as possible to do it right at the end, but even this is not
+% 100\% reliable. The only way to ensure reliability is to modify the kernel
+% \verb?\enddocument? which doesn't seem to be a particularly wise thing
+% to do.
+% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Changed location of calls to \cs{dol@stsheet}
+%                             and \cs{dol@stpage}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\AtEndDocument{\clearpage\dol@stsheet\dol@stpage}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Any marks are put onto the pages by adding to the |\shipout|
+% routine.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mem@oldshipout}
+% Keep a copy of the current version of |\shipout| in |\mem@oldshipout|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mem@oldshipout\shipout
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mem@shipi}
+% \begin{macro}{\mem@shipii}
+% Effectively these will add the |\trimmarks| to the box holding
+% the contents of the page. Note that any \cs{makeindex} must come \emph{before} \Lpack{pagesel} (and \Lpack{selectp}) package.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Changed \cs{mem@shipii} for the pagesel package, courtesy James Szinger (mempatch v311)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\mem@shipi}{%
+  \ifvoid\@cclv\expandafter\aftergroup\fi\mem@shipii}
+\newcommand*\mem@shipii{%
+  \ifvoid\@cclv
+    \mem@oldshipout\box\@cclv
+  \else
+    \mem@oldshipout\vbox{\trimmarks\unvbox\@cclv}%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\shipout}
+% Our new version of |\shipout|, which is only needed for the 
+% \Lopt{showtrims} option. This adds |\mem@shipi| to the page box
+% which then calls the original version of |\shipout|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifshowtrims
+  \renewcommand*{\shipout}{\afterassignment\mem@shipi\setbox\@cclv=}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \section{Verbatims, boxes, and files}
+%
+% All the code in this section was added for version 1.2 of the class.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Section `Verbatims, boxes and files' added}
+%
+% \subsection{Modified version of the verbatim package}
+%
+% Much of this is from the \Lpack{verbatim} package code~\cite{VERBATIM}.
+% Unless indicated otherwise, the code and commentary is from that
+% package.
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Preliminaries}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\every@verbatim}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterevery@verbatim}
+%    The hook (i.e.\ token register) |\every@verbatim|
+%    is initialized to \meta{empty}.
+%
+% PW added the |\afterevery@verbatim| hook.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\every@verbatim
+  \every@verbatim={}
+\newtoks\afterevery@verbatim
+  \afterevery@verbatim={}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makeother}
+%    |\@makeother| takes as argument a character and changes
+%    its category code to $12$ (other).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makeother#1{\catcode`#112\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vobeyspaces}
+%    The macro |\@vobeyspaces| causes spaces in the input
+%    to be printed as spaces in the output.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\ =\active%
+ \def\x{\def\@vobeyspaces{\catcode`\ \active\let \@xobeysp}}
+ \expandafter\endgroup\x
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xobeysp}
+%    The macro |\@xobeysp| produces exactly one space in
+%    the output, protected against breaking just before it.
+%    (|\@M| is an abbreviation for the number $10000$.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xobeysp{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\ }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@line}
+%    We use a newly defined token register called |\verbatim@line|
+%    that will be used as the character buffer.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\verbatim@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% PW. I have extended the original \Lpack{verbatim} package code to handle
+% TABs within verbatims. Normally TeX replaces a TAB by either a single space or
+% ignores it altogether. For this purpose I have bits of code from the \Lpack{moreverb}
+% package~\cite{MOREVERB} for handling TABs.
+%
+% \textit{Code and commentary from moreverb.}
+%
+% We define a few auxiliary macros and counters for expanding tabs.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\tab@position 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xobeytab}
+% |\@xobeytab| puts enough spaces in to get to the next nominal
+% tab stop
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xobeytab{%
+  \loop
+    \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@\@xobeysp}%
+    \advance\tab@position-1
+  \ifnum\tab@position>0 \repeat
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vobeytabs}
+% |\@vobeytabs| initialises use of \cs{@xobeytab}.  Needs to be
+% executed within a group, as mustn't be allowed to leak out into the
+% wide world.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^I=\active
+  \gdef\@vobeytabs{\catcode`\^^I\active\let^^I\@xobeytab}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@tabexpand}
+% |\verbatim@tabexpand|\meta{body of line}|\@nil| processes every
+% character of a line by tail recursion, counting the characters and
+% juggling things when a tab is encountered.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@tabexpand#1{%
+  \ifx#1\@nil
+    \the\toks@
+    \expandafter\par
+  \else
+    \ifx#1\@xobeytab
+      \@xobeytab
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We can safely put |\@xobeysp| into the token register, since it
+% does precisely what we need
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@#1}%
+      \advance\tab@position\m@ne
+    \fi
+    \ifnum\tab@position=0 \tab@position\tab@size \fi
+    \expandafter\verbatim@tabexpand
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \textit{End of code and commentary from moreverb.}
+%
+% PW. Some macros for turning tabbing on and off.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabson}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabsoff}
+% \begin{macro}{\@maybeobeytabs}
+% |\tabson| turns tabbing on, and |\tabsoff| turns it off. Default
+% is no tabbing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ift@bs
+\newcommand{\tabson}[1][4]{%
+  \ifnum\@ne > #1\relax
+    \tabsoff
+  \else
+    \t@bstrue
+    \def\tab@size{#1\relax}%
+    \def\@maybeobeytabs{\@vobeytabs}%
+  \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\tabsoff}{%
+  \t@bsfalse
+  \def\tab@size{\z@}%
+  \def\@maybeobeytabs{}%
+}
+\tabsoff
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabverbatim@processline}
+% Process a line with TABs (extracted from \Lpack{moreverb}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tabverbatim@processline{\tab@position\tab@size
+  \toks@{}%
+  \expandafter\verbatim@tabexpand\the\verbatim@line\@nil}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\notabverbatim@processline}
+% Processes a line ignoring TABs (this is the original \Lpack{verbatim}
+% package definition of |\verbatim@processline|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\notabverbatim@processline{\the\verbatim@line\par}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \textit{We are now back to the \Lpack{verbatim} code.}
+%
+% The following four macros are defined globally in a way suitable for
+% the \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*} environments.
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@startline}
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@addtoline}
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@processline}
+%    |\verbatim@startline| initializes processing of a line
+%    by emptying the character buffer (|\verbatim@line|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@startline{\verbatim@line{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    |\verbatim@addtoline| adds the tokens in its argument
+%    to our buffer register |\verbatim@line| without expanding
+%    them.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@addtoline#1{%
+  \verbatim@line\expandafter{\the\verbatim@line#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Processing a line inside a \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*}
+%    environment means printing it.
+%    Ending the line means that we have to begin a new paragraph.
+%    We use |\par| for this purpose.  Note that |\par|
+%    is redefined in |\@verbatim| to force \TeX{} into horizontal
+%    mode and to insert an empty box so that empty lines in the input
+%    do appear in the output.
+% (PW changed next line from \\
+% |\def\verbatim@processline{\the\verbatim@line\par}|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@processline{\notabverbatim@processline}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@finish}
+%    As a default, |\verbatim@finish| processes the remaining
+%    characters.
+%    When this macro is called we are facing the following problem:
+%    when the |\end{verbatim}|
+%    command is encountered |\verbatim@processline| is called
+%    to process the characters preceding the command on the same
+%    line.  If there are none, an empty line would be output if we
+%    did not check for this case.
+%
+%    If the line is empty |\the\verbatim@line| expands to
+%    nothing.  To test this we use a trick similar to that on p.\ 376
+%    of the \TeX{}book, but with |$|\ldots|$| instead of
+%    the |!| tokens.  These |$| tokens can never have the same
+%    category code as a |$| token that might possibly appear in the
+%    token register |\verbatim@line|, as such a token will always have
+%    been read with category code $12$ (other).
+%    Note that |\ifcat| expands the following tokens so that
+%    |\the\verbatim@line| is replaced by the accumulated
+%    characters
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@finish{\ifcat$\the\verbatim@line$\else
+  \verbatim@processline\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{The \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*} environments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font}
+%    We start by defining the macro |\verbatim@font| that is
+%    to select the font and to set font-dependent parameters.
+%    Then we go through |\verbatim@nolig@list| to avoid
+%    certain ligatures.
+%    |\verbatim@nolig@list| is a macro defined in the \LaTeXe{} kernel
+%    to expand to
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%    \do\`\do\<\do\>\do\,\do\'\do\-
+% \end{verbatim}
+%    All the characters in this list can be part of a ligature in some
+%    font or other.
+% 
+% PW. This is the original version which I'm going to replace.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\verbatim@font{\normalfont\ttfamily
+%                    \hyphenchar\font\m@ne
+%                    \let\do\do@noligs
+%                    \verbatim@nolig@list}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setverbatimfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mverbfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font}
+% User level handle for changing the font used for verbatim text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setverbatimfont}[1]{\def\m@mverbfont{#1}}
+\setverbatimfont{\normalfont\ttfamily}
+
+\def\verbatim@font{\m@mverbfont
+                   \hyphenchar\font\m@ne
+                   \let\do\do@noligs
+                   \verbatim@nolig@list}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@verbatim}
+%    The macro |\@verbatim| sets up things properly.
+%    First of all, the tokens of the |\every@verbatim| hook
+%    are inserted.
+%    Then a \texttt{trivlist} environment is started and its first
+%    |\item| command inserted.
+%    Each line of the \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*}
+%    environment will be treated as a separate paragraph.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@verbatim{\the\every@verbatim
+  \trivlist \item \relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The following extra vertical space is for compatibility with the
+%    \LaTeX kernel: otherwise, using the |verbatim| package changes
+%    the vertical spacing of a |verbatim| environment nested within a
+%    |quote| environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The paragraph parameters are set appropriately:
+%    the penalty at the beginning of the environment,
+%    left and right margins, paragraph indentation, the glue to
+%    fill the last line, and the vertical space between paragraphs.
+%    The latter space has to be zero since we do not want to add
+%    extra space between lines.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@beginparpenalty \predisplaypenalty 
+  \leftskip\@totalleftmargin\rightskip\z@
+  \parindent\z@\parfillskip\@flushglue\parskip\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    There's one point to make here:
+%    the \texttt{list} environment uses \TeX's |\parshape|
+%    primitive to get a special indentation for the first line
+%    of the  list.
+%    If the list begins with a \texttt{verbatim} environment
+%    this |\parshape| is still in effect.
+%    Therefore we have to reset this internal parameter explicitly.
+%    We could do this by assigning $0$ to |\parshape|.
+%    However, there is a simpler way to achieve this:
+%    we simply tell \TeX{} to start a new paragraph.
+%    As is explained on p.~103 of the \TeX{}book, this resets
+%    |\parshape| to zero.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@@par
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We now ensure that |\par| has the correct definition,
+%    namely to force \TeX{} into horizontal mode
+%    and to include an empty box.
+%    This is to ensure that empty lines do appear in the output.
+%    Afterwards, we insert the |\interlinepenalty| since \TeX{}
+%    does not add a penalty between paragraphs (here: lines)
+%    by its own initiative. Otherwise a |verbatim| environment
+%    could be broken across pages even if a |\samepage|
+%    declaration were present.
+%
+%    However, in a top-aligned minipage, this will result in an extra
+%    empty line added at the top. Therefore, a slightly more
+%    complicated construct is necessary.
+%    One of the important things here is the inclusion of
+%    |\leavevmode| as the first macro in the first line, for example,
+%    a blank verbatim line is the first thing in a list item.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\par{%
+    \if@tempswa
+      \leavevmode\null\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty
+    \else
+      \@tempswatrue
+      \ifhmode\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty\fi
+    \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    But to avoid an error message when the environment
+%    doesn't contain any text, we redefine |\@noitemerr|
+%    which will in this case be called by |\endtrivlist|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@noitemerr{\@warning{No verbatim text}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now we call |\obeylines| to make the end of line character
+%    active,
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \obeylines
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    change the category code of all special characters,
+%    to $12$ (other).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\do\@makeother \dospecials
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    and switch to the font to be used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \verbatim@font
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    To avoid a breakpoint after the labels box, we remove the penalty
+%    put there by the list macros: another use of |\unpenalty|!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \everypar \expandafter{\the\everypar \unpenalty}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% PW added next code at end of |\@verbatim|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \wrapright\the\afterevery@verbatim}
+%    \end{macrocode}   
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim}
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim*}
+%    Now we define the toplevel macros.
+%    |\verbatim| is slightly changed:
+%    after setting up things properly it calls
+%    |\verbatim@start|.
+%    This is done inside a group, so that |\verbatim| can be used
+%    directly, without |\begin|.
+%
+% PW. The following is the original code, but I want a version of
+% |verbatim| that recognises TABs.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\verbatim{%
+%    \begingroup\@verbatim \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces 
+%    \verbatim@start}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    |\verbatim*| is defined accordingly.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \@namedef{verbatim*}{\begingroup\@verbatim\verbatim@start}
+% \def\endverbatim{\endtrivlist\endgroup}
+% \expandafter\let\csname endverbatim*\endcsname=\endverbatim
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% PW. My code for these is a modified version of the original \Lpack{verbatim}
+% code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim{\begingroup
+  \ift@bs
+    \def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
+  \fi
+  \@verbatim \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs\verbatim@start}
+\@namedef{verbatim*}{\begingroup
+  \ift@bs
+    \def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
+  \fi
+  \@verbatim\@maybeobeytabs\verbatim@start}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endverbatim}
+% \begin{macro}{\endverbatim*}
+%    To end the \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*}
+%    environments it is only necessary to finish the
+%    \texttt{trivlist} environment started in |\@verbatim| and
+%    close the corresponding group, and handle\footnote{Noted by
+% Zarko Cucej (\url{zarko.cucej@uni-mb.si}).} following (non-) paragraph,
+% by using \cs{@doendpe}.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@doendpe} to \cs{endverbatim} 
+%                            (from patch v1.8)}
+% \changes{v2.0a}{2004/03/01}{Refixed \cs{endverbatim}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endverbatim{\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}
+\@namelet{endverbatim*}\endverbatim
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{The \texttt{comment} environment}
+%
+%    The |\comment| macro is similar to |\verbatim*|.
+%    However, we do not need to switch fonts or set special
+%    formatting parameters such as |\parindent| or |\parskip|.
+%    We need only set the category code of all special characters
+%    to $12$ (other) and that of |^^M| (the end of line character)
+%    to $13$ (active).
+%    The latter is needed for macro parameter delimiter matching in
+%    the internal macros defined below.
+%    In contrast to the default definitions used by the
+%    |\verbatim| and |\verbatim*| macros,
+%    we define |\verbatim@addtoline| to throw away its argument
+%    and |\verbatim@processline|, |\verbatim@startline|,
+%    and |\verbatim@finish| to act as no-ops.
+%    Then we call |\verbatim@|.
+%    But the first thing we do is to call |\@bsphack| so that
+%    this environment has no influence whatsoever upon the spacing.
+%
+% PW: This is the original code for the |comment| environment, 
+% which I'm going to change.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\comment{\@bsphack
+%              \let\do\@makeother\dospecials\catcode`\^^M\active
+%              \let\verbatim@startline\relax
+%              \let\verbatim@addtoline\@gobble
+%              \let\verbatim@processline\relax
+%              \let\verbatim@finish\relax
+%              \verbatim@}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%    |\endcomment| is very simple: it only calls
+%    |\@esphack| to take care of the spacing.
+%    The |\end| macro closes the group and therefore takes care
+%    of restoring everything we changed.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \let\endcomment=\@esphack
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% PW: The remainder of this section is my code.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setupcomment}
+% |\setupcomment| does all the |\let|s in the original |\comment| code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setupcomment}{%
+  \let\do\@makeother\dospecials\catcode`\^^M\active
+  \let\verbatim@startline\relax
+  \let\verbatim@addtoline\@gobble
+  \let\verbatim@processline\relax
+  \let\verbatim@finish\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros below do no checking to see if something has (not) been defined
+% previously. It's `user beware' time.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newcomment}
+% |\newcomment|\marg{name} creates a new comment environment called 
+% \meta{name}. This is a generalisation of the original comment code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newcomment}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname{\@bsphack\setupcomment\verbatim@}%
+  \expandafter\let\csname end#1\endcsname=\@esphack}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\commentsoff}
+% |\commentsoff|\marg{name} switches off the \meta{name} comment 
+% environment by defining the relevent macros to do nothing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\commentsoff}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname{}%
+  \expandafter\def\csname end#1\endcsname{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\commentson}
+% |\commentson|\marg{name} switches on the \meta{name} comment 
+% environment. It has to do the same things as |\newcomment| does,
+% so let |\newcomment| do the work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\commentson}[1]{\newcomment{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We had better supply the |comment| environment, as promised.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcomment{comment}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% PW: That is the end of my changes and extensions to the original 
+% |comment| environment code.
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{The main loop}
+%
+% Here comes the tricky part:
+% During the definition of the macros we need to use the special
+% characters |\|, |{|, and |}| not only with their
+% normal category codes,
+% but also with category code $12$ (other).
+% We achieve this by the following trick:
+% first we tell \TeX{} that |\|, |{|, and |}|
+% are the lowercase versions of |!|, |[|, and |]|.
+% Then we replace every occurrence of |\|, |{|, and |}|
+% that should be read with category code $12$ by |!|, |[|,
+% and |]|, respectively,
+% and give the whole list of tokens to |\lowercase|,
+% knowing that category codes are not altered by this primitive!
+%
+% But first we have ensure that
+% |!|, |[|, and |]| themselves have
+% the correct category code!
+% To allow special settings of these codes we hide their setting in
+% the macro |\vrb@catcodes|.  If it is already defined our new
+% definition is skipped.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{vrb@catcodes}%
+  {\def\vrb@catcodes{%
+     \catcode`\!12\catcode`\[12\catcode`\]12}}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This trick allows us to use this code for applications where other
+% category codes are in effect.
+%
+% We start a group to keep the category code changes local.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \vrb@catcodes
+ \lccode`\!=`\\ \lccode`\[=`\{ \lccode`\]=`\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We also need the end-of-line character |^^M|,
+%    as an active character.
+%    If we were to simply write |\catcode`\^^M=\active|
+%    then we would get an unwanted active end of line character
+%    at the end of every line of the following macro definitions.
+%    Therefore we use the same trick as above:
+%    we write a tilde |~| instead of |^^M| and
+%    pretend that the
+%    latter is the lowercase variant of the former.
+%    Thus we have to ensure now that the tilde character has
+%    category code $13$ (active).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \catcode`\~=\active \lccode`\~=`\^^M
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The use of the |\lowercase| primitive leads to one problem:
+%    the uppercase character `|C|' needs to be used in the
+%    code below and its case must be preserved.
+%    So we add the command:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \lccode`\C=`\C
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now we start the token list passed to |\lowercase|.
+%    We use the following little trick (proposed by Bernd Raichle):
+%    The very first token in the token list we give to |\lowercase| is
+%    the |\endgroup| primitive. This means that it is processed by
+%    \TeX{} immediately after |\lowercase| has finished its operation,
+%    thus ending the group started by |\begingroup| above. This avoids
+%    the global definition of all macros.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \lowercase{\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@start}
+%    The purpose of |\verbatim@start| is to check whether there
+%    are any characters on the same line as the |\begin{verbatim}|
+%    and to pretend that they were on a line by themselves.
+%    On the other hand, if there are no characters remaining
+%    on the current line we shall just find an end of line character.
+%    |\verbatim@start| performs its task by first grabbing the
+%    following character (its argument).
+%    This argument is then compared to an active |^^M|,
+%    the end of line character.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\verbatim@start#1{%
+      \verbatim@startline
+      \if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If this is true we transfer control to |\verbatim@|
+%    to process the next line.  We use
+%    |\next| as the macro which will continue the work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \let\next\verbatim@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Otherwise, we define |\next| to expand to a call
+%    to |\verbatim@| followed by the character just
+%    read so that it is reinserted into the text.
+%    This means that those characters remaining on this line
+%    are handled as if they formed a line by themselves.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \else \def\next{\verbatim@#1}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Finally we call |\next|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \next}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@}
+%    The three macros |\verbatim@|, |\verbatim@@|,
+%    and |\verbatim@@@| form the ``main loop'' of the
+%    \texttt{verbatim} environment.
+%    The purpose of |\verbatim@| is to read exactly one line
+%    of input.
+%    |\verbatim@@| and |\verbatim@@@| work together to
+%    find out whether the four characters
+%    |\end| (all with category code $12$ (other)) occur in that
+%    line.
+%    If so, |\verbatim@@@| will call
+%    |\verbatim@test| to check whether this |\end| is
+%    part of |\end{verbatim}| and will terminate the environment
+%    if this is the case.
+%    Otherwise we continue as if nothing had happened.
+%    So let's have a look at the definition of |\verbatim@|:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\verbatim@#1~{\verbatim@@#1!end\@nil}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Note that the |!| character will have been replaced by a
+%    |\| with category code $12$ (other) by the |\lowercase|
+%    primitive governing this code before the definition of this
+%    macro actually takes place.
+%    That means that
+%    it takes the line, puts |\end| (four character tokens)
+%    and |\@nil| (one control sequence token) as a
+%    delimiter behind it, and
+%    then calls |\verbatim@@|.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@}
+%    |\verbatim@@| takes everything up to the next occurrence of
+%    the four characters |\end| as its argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\verbatim@@#1!end{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    That means: if they do not occur in the original line, then
+%    argument |#1| is the
+%    whole input line, and |\@nil| is the next token
+%    to be processed.
+%    However, if the four characters |\end| are part of the
+%    original line, then
+%    |#1| consists of the characters in front of |\end|,
+%    and the next token is the following character (always remember
+%    that the line was lengthened by five tokens).
+%    Whatever |#1| may be, it is verbatim text,
+%    so |#1| is added to the line currently built.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \verbatim@addtoline{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The next token in the input stream
+%    is of special interest to us.
+%    Therefore |\futurelet| defines |\next| to be equal
+%    to it before calling |\verbatim@@@|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \futurelet\next\verbatim@@@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@@}
+%    |\verbatim@@@| will now read the rest of the tokens on
+%    the current line,
+%    up to the final |\@nil| token.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\verbatim@@@#1\@nil{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the first of the above two cases occurred, i.e.\ no
+%    |\end| characters were on that line, |#1| is empty
+%    and |\next| is equal to |\@nil|.
+%    This is easily checked.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \ifx\next\@nil
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If so, this was a simple line.
+%    We finish it by processing the line we accumulated so far.
+%    Then we prepare to read the next line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+         \verbatim@processline
+         \verbatim@startline
+         \let\next\verbatim@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Otherwise we have to check what follows these |\end|
+%    tokens.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Before we continue, it's a good idea to stop for a moment
+%    and remember where we are:
+%    We have just read the four character tokens |\end|
+%    and must now check whether the name of the environment (surrounded
+%    by braces) follows.
+%    To this end we define a macro called |\@tempa|
+%    that reads exactly one character and decides what to do next.
+%    This macro should do the following: skip spaces until
+%    it encounters either a left brace or the end of the line.
+%    But it is important to remember which characters are skipped.
+%    The |\end|\meta{optional spaces}|{| characters
+%    may be part of the verbatim text, i.e.\ these characters
+%    must be printed.
+%
+%    Assume for example that the current line contains
+%    \begin{verbatim*}
+%      \end {AVeryLongEnvironmentName}
+%\end{verbatim*}
+%    As we shall soon see, the scanning mechanism implemented here
+%    will not find out that this is text to be printed until
+%    it has read the right brace.
+%    Therefore we need a way to accumulate the characters read
+%    so that we can reinsert them if necessary.
+%    The token register |\@temptokena| is used for this purpose.
+%
+%    Before we do this we have to get rid of the superfluous
+%    |\end| tokens at the end of the line.
+%    To this end we define a temporary macro whose argument
+%    is delimited by |\end\@nil| (four character tokens
+%    and one control sequence token) to be used below
+%    on the rest of the line, after appending a |\@nil| token to it.
+%    (Note that this token can never appear in |#1|.)
+%    We use the following definition of
+%    |\@tempa| to get the rest of the line (after the first
+%    |\end|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+         \def\@tempa##1!end\@nil{##1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We mentioned already that we use token register
+%    |\@temptokena|
+%    to remember the characters we skip, in case we need them again.
+%    We initialize this with the |\end| we have thrown away
+%    in the call to |\@tempa|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+         \@temptokena{!end}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We shall now call |\verbatim@test|
+%    to process the characters
+%    remaining on the current line.
+%    But wait a moment: we cannot simply call this macro
+%    since we have already read the whole line.
+%    Therefore we have to first expand the macro |\@tempa| to insert
+%    them again after the |\verbatim@test| token.
+%    A |^^M| character is appended to denote the end of the line.
+%    (Remember that this character comes disguised as a tilde.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+         \def\next{\expandafter\verbatim@test\@tempa#1\@nil~}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    That's almost all, but we still have to
+%    now call |\next| to do the work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \fi \next}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@test}
+%    We define |\verbatim@test| to investigate every token
+%    in turn.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\verbatim@test#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    First of all we set |\next| equal to |\verbatim@test|
+%    in case this macro must call itself recursively in order to
+%    skip spaces.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+           \let\next\verbatim@test
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We have to distinguish four cases:
+%    \begin{enumerate}
+%      \item The next token is a |^^M|, i.e.\ we reached
+%            the end of the line.  That means that nothing
+%            special was found.
+%            Note that we use |\if| for the following
+%            comparisons so that the category code of the
+%            characters is irrelevant.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+           \if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%            We add the characters accumulated in token register
+%            |\@temptokena| to the current line.  Since
+%            |\verbatim@addtoline| does not expand its argument,
+%            we have to do the expansion at this point.  Then we
+%            |\let| |\next| equal to |\verbatim@|
+%            to prepare to read the next line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+             \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
+               \expandafter{\the\@temptokena}%
+             \verbatim@processline
+             \verbatim@startline
+             \let\next\verbatim@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%      \item A space character follows.
+%            This is allowed, so we add it to |\@temptokena|
+%            and continue.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+           \else \if\noexpand#1
+             \@temptokena\expandafter{\the\@temptokena#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%      \item An open brace follows.
+%            This is the most interesting case.
+%            We must now collect characters until we read the closing
+%            brace and check whether they form the environment name.
+%            This will be done by |\verbatim@testend|, so here
+%            we let |\next| equal this macro.
+%            Again we will process the rest of the line, character
+%            by character.
+%            The characters forming the name of the environment will
+%            be accumulated in |\@tempc|.
+%            We initialize this macro to expand to nothing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+           \else \if\noexpand#1\noexpand[%
+             \let\@tempc\@empty
+             \let\next\verbatim@testend
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%            Note that the |[| character will be a |{| when
+%            this macro is defined.
+%      \item Any other character means that the |\end| was part
+%            of the verbatim text.
+%            Add the characters to the current line and prepare to call
+%            |\verbatim@| to process the rest of the line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+           \else
+             \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
+               \expandafter{\the\@temptokena}%
+             \def\next{\verbatim@#1}%
+           \fi\fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{enumerate}
+%    The last thing this macro does is to call |\next|
+%    to continue processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+           \next}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@testend}
+%    |\verbatim@testend| is called when
+%    |\end|\meta{optional spaces}|{| was seen.
+%    Its task is to scan everything up to the next |}|
+%    and to call |\verbatim@@testend|.
+%    If no |}| is found it must reinsert the characters it read
+%    and return to |\verbatim@|.
+%    The following definition is similar to that of
+%    |\verbatim@test|:
+%    it takes the next character and decides what to do.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\verbatim@testend#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Again, we have four cases:
+%    \begin{enumerate}
+%      \item |^^M|: As no |}| is found in the current line,
+%            add the characters to the buffer.  To avoid a
+%            complicated construction for expanding
+%            |\@temptokena|
+%            and |\@tempc| we do it in two steps.  Then we
+%            continue with |\verbatim@| to process the
+%            next line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+         \if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
+           \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
+             \expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
+           \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
+             \expandafter{\@tempc}%
+           \verbatim@processline
+           \verbatim@startline
+           \let\next\verbatim@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%      \item |}|: Call |\verbatim@@testend| to check
+%            if this is the right environment name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+         \else\if\noexpand#1\noexpand]%
+           \let\next\verbatim@@testend
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%      \item |\|: This character must not occur in the name of
+%            an environment.  Thus we stop collecting characters.
+%            In principle, the same argument would apply to other
+%            characters as well, e.g., |{|.
+%            However, |\| is a special case, since it may be
+%            the first character of |\end|.  This means that
+%            we have to look again for
+%            |\end{|\meta{environment name}|}|.
+%            Note that we prefixed the |!| by a |\noexpand|
+%            primitive, to protect ourselves against it being an
+%            active character.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+         \else\if\noexpand#1\noexpand!%
+           \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
+             \expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
+           \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
+             \expandafter{\@tempc}%
+           \def\next{\verbatim@!}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%      \item Any other character: collect it and continue.
+%            We cannot use |\edef| to define |\@tempc|
+%            since its replacement text might contain active
+%            character tokens.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+         \else \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempc\expandafter
+           {\@tempc#1}\fi\fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{enumerate}
+%    As before, the macro ends by calling itself, to
+%    process the next character if appropriate.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+         \next}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@testend}
+%    Unlike the previous macros |\verbatim@@testend| is simple:
+%    it has only to check if the |\end{|\ldots|}|
+%    matches the corresponding |\begin{|\ldots|}|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\verbatim@@testend{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We use |\next| again to define the things that are
+%    to be done.
+%    Remember that the name of the current environment is
+%    held in |\@currenvir|, the characters accumulated
+%    by |\verbatim@testend| are in |\@tempc|.
+%    So we simply compare these and prepare to execute
+%    |\end{|\meta{current environment}|}|
+%    macro if they match.
+%    Before we do this we call |\verbatim@finish| to process
+%    the last line.
+%    We define |\next| via |\edef| so that
+%    |\@currenvir| is replaced by its expansion.
+%    Therefore we need |\noexpand| to inhibit the expansion
+%    of |\end| at this point.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \ifx\@tempc\@currenvir
+         \verbatim@finish
+         \edef\next{\noexpand\end{\@currenvir}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Without this trick the |\end| command would not be able
+%    to correctly check whether its argument matches the name of
+%    the current environment and you'd get an
+%    interesting \LaTeX{} error message such as:
+%    \begin{verbatim}
+%! \begin{verbatim*} ended by \end{verbatim*}.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    But what do we do with the rest of the characters, those
+%    that remain on that line?
+%    We call |\verbatim@rescan| to take care of that.
+%    Its first argument is the name of the environment just
+%    ended, in case we need it again.
+%    |\verbatim@rescan| takes the list of characters to be
+%    reprocessed as its second argument.
+%    (This token list was inserted after the current macro
+%    by |\verbatim@@@|.)
+%    Since we are still in an |\edef| we protect it
+%    by means of|\noexpand|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                    \noexpand\verbatim@rescan{\@currenvir}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the names do not match, we reinsert everything read up
+%    to now and prepare to call |\verbatim@| to process
+%    the rest of the line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \else
+         \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
+           \expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
+           \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
+             \expandafter{\@tempc]}%
+         \let\next\verbatim@
+       \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Finally we call |\next|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \next}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@rescan}
+%    In principle |\verbatim@rescan| could be used to
+%    analyse the characters remaining after the |\end{...}|
+%    command and pretend that these were read
+%    ``properly'', assuming ``standard'' category codes are in
+%    force.\footnote{Remember that they were all read with
+%          category codes $11$ (letter) and $12$ (other) so
+%          that control sequences are not recognized as such.}
+%    But this is not always possible (when there are unmatched
+%    curly braces in the rest of the line).
+%    Besides, we think that this is not worth the effort:
+%    After a \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*} environment
+%    a new line in the output is begun anyway,
+%    and an |\end{comment}| can easily be put on a line by itself.
+%    So there is no reason why there should be any text here.
+%    For the benefit of the user who did put something there
+%    (a comment, perhaps)
+%    we simply issue a warning and drop them.
+%    The method of testing is explained in Appendix~D, p.\ 376 of
+%    the \TeX{}book. We use |^^M| instead of the |!|
+%    character used there
+%    since this is a character that cannot appear in |#1|.
+%    The two |\noexpand| primitives are necessary to avoid
+%    expansion of active characters and macros.
+%
+%    One extra subtlety should be noted here: remember that
+%    the token list we are currently building will first be
+%    processed by the |\lowercase| primitive before \TeX{}
+%    carries out the definitions.
+%    This means that the `|C|' character in the
+%    argument to the |\@warning| macro must be protected against
+%    being changed to `|c|'.  That's the reason why we added the
+%    |\lccode`\C=`\C| assignment above.
+%    We can now finish the argument to |\lowercase| as well as the
+%    group in which the category codes were changed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\verbatim@rescan#1#2~{\if\noexpand~\noexpand#2~\else
+        \@warning{Characters dropped after `\string\end{#1}'}\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The \cs{verbatiminput} command}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@in@stream}
+%    We begin by allocating an input stream (out of the 16 available
+%    input streams).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newread\verbatim@in@stream
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@readfile}
+%    The macro |\verbatim@readfile| encloses the main loop by calls to
+%    the macros |\verbatim@startline| and |\verbatim@finish|,
+%    respectively.  This makes sure
+%    that the user can initialize and finish the command when the file
+%    is empty or doesn't exist.  The \texttt{verbatim} environment has a
+%    similar behaviour when called with an empty text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@readfile#1{%
+  \verbatim@startline
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    When the file is not found we issue a warning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \openin\verbatim@in@stream #1\relax
+  \ifeof\verbatim@in@stream
+    \typeout{No file #1.}%
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    At this point we pass the name of the file to |\@addtofilelist|
+%    so that its appears appears in the output of a |\listfiles|
+%    command.
+%    In addition, we use |\ProvidesFile| to make a log entry in the
+%    transcript file and to distinguish files read in via
+%    |\verbatiminput| from others.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@addtofilelist{#1}%
+    \ProvidesFile{#1}[(verbatim)]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    While reading from the file it is useful to switch off the
+%    recognition of the end-of-line character.  This saves us stripping
+%    off spaces from the contents of the line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\endlinechar\expandafter\m@ne
+    \expandafter\verbatim@read@file
+    \expandafter\endlinechar\the\endlinechar\relax
+    \closein\verbatim@in@stream
+  \fi
+  \verbatim@finish
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@read@file}
+%    All the work is done in |\verbatim@read@file|.  It reads the input
+%    file line by line and recursively calls itself until the end of
+%    the file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@read@file{%
+  \read\verbatim@in@stream to\next
+  \ifeof\verbatim@in@stream
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For each line we call |\verbatim@addtoline| with the contents of
+%    the line. \hskip0pt plus 3cm\penalty0\hskip0pt plus -3cm
+%    |\verbatim@processline| is called next.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline\expandafter{\next}%
+    \verbatim@processline
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    After processing the line we call |\verbatim@startline| to
+%    initialize all before we read the next line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \verbatim@startline
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Without |\expandafter| each call of |\verbatim@read@file| uses
+%    space in \TeX's input stack.\footnote{A standard \TeX\ would
+%    report an overflow error if you try to read a file with more than
+%    ca.\ 200~lines.  The same error occurs if the first line of code
+%    in \S 390 of \textsl{``TeX: The Program''\/} is missing.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\verbatim@read@file
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatiminput}
+%    |\verbatiminput| first starts a group to keep font and category
+%    changes local.
+%    Then it calls the macro |\verbatim@input| with additional
+%    arguments, depending on whether an asterisk follows.
+%
+% PW. I added the TAB checking code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatiminput{\begingroup
+  \ift@bs
+    \def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
+  \fi
+  \@ifstar{\verbatim@input{\@maybeobeytabs}}%
+          {\verbatim@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@input}
+%    |\verbatim@input| first checks whether the file exists, using
+%    the standard macro |\IfFileExists| which leaves the name of the
+%    file found in |\@filef@und|.
+%    Then everything is set up as in the |\verbatim| macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@input#1#2{%
+   \IfFileExists {#2}{\@verbatim #1\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Then it reads in the file, finishes off the \texttt{trivlist}
+%    environment started by |\@verbatim| and closes the group.
+%    This restores everything to its normal settings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \verbatim@readfile{\@filef@und}\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%   If the file is not found a more or less helpful message is
+%    printed. The final |\endgroup| is  needed to close the group
+%    started in |\verbatiminput| above.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   {\typeout {No file #2.}\endgroup}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \textit{That completes my borrowings from \Lpack{verbatim}.}
+%
+% The next bunch of code implements wrapping verbatim lines so they, hopefully,
+% stay within the typeblock.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatimindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatimbreakchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\setverbatimbreak}
+% The length |\verbatimindent| is the distance continuation lines are indented
+% from the left margin. |\verbatimbreakchar| is the character to indicate
+% a wrapped line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength{\verbatimindent}
+  \setlength{\verbatimindent}{3em}
+\newcommand*{\verbatimbreakchar}{\char`\%}
+\newcommand*{\setverbatimbreak}{%
+  \vspace*{-\baselineskip}%
+  \def\@xobeysp{~\discretionary{\verbatimbreakchar}%
+    {\kern\verbatimindent}{}}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\wrappingon}
+% \begin{macro}{\wrapright}
+% \begin{macro}{\wrappingoff}
+% |\wrappingon| and |\wrappingoff| enable/prohibit wrapping. The
+% default is |\wrappingoff|.
+%
+% The macro
+% |\wrapright|  is used to set paragraph skips; without |\raggedright| lines
+% may break at the first space \emph{outside} the text area
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\wrappingon}{%
+  \def\@xobeysp{~\discretionary{\verbatimbreakchar}%
+    {\kern\verbatimindent}{}}%
+  \def\wrapright{\raggedright}%
+}
+\newcommand{\wrappingoff}{%
+  \def\@xobeysp{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\ }%
+  \def\wrapright{}%
+}
+\wrappingoff
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Writing and boxing verbatim}
+%
+%    This bunch of code is from the \Lpack{moreverb} package.
+%
+% \begin{environment}{verbatimoutput}
+% \verb?\begin{verbatimoutput}?\marg{filename} writes all text in its body to a
+% file, the name of which it is given as an argument. (The code was
+% written by Rainer Sch\"opf but the environment was called 
+% \verb?verbatimwrite?). In the code below, uncommenting \\
+% \verb?\catcode`\^^I=12? \\
+% will result in TABs being written as \verb?^^I?.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/09/27}{Changed name verbatimwrite to 
+%               verbatimoutput (but neither were mentioned in the manual)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newwrite \verbatim@out
+\def\verbatimoutput#1{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \immediate\openout \verbatim@out #1
+  \let\do\@makeother\dospecials
+  \catcode`\^^M\active %% \catcode`\^^I=12  
+  \def\verbatim@processline{%
+    \immediate\write\verbatim@out
+      {\the\verbatim@line}}%
+  \verbatim@start}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endverbatimoutput{%
+  \immediate\closeout\verbatim@out
+  \@esphack}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{fboxverbatim}
+% \texttt{fboxverbatim} puts the contents of a verbatim environment
+% in a framing box. (PW: This was originally called |boxedverbatim|).
+%
+% (Written by Victor Eijkhout.)
+%
+% Bug fix (supplied by David Carlisle) 1995/12/28, marked
+% \verb+%%%DPC%%%+
+%
+% First, redefine `processline' to produce only a line as wide
+% as the natural width of the line
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fboxverbatim{\begingroup%
+  \tabsoff %% PW otherwise box fills the width
+  \def\verbatim@processline{%
+    {\setbox0=\hbox{\the\verbatim@line}%
+    \hsize=\wd0 \the\verbatim@line\par}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now save the verbatim code in a box
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@minipagetrue%%%DPC%%%
+  \@tempswatrue%%%DPC%%%
+  \setbox0=\vbox\bgroup \verbatim
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% At the end of the environment, we (umm) simply have to stick the
+% results into a frame.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endfboxverbatim{%
+  \endverbatim
+  \unskip\setbox0=\lastbox %%%DPC%%%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now everything's in the box, so we can close it\dots
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \egroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% To change the code for centring, the next line needs a spot of
+% hacking.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \fbox{\box0}% <<<=== change here for centering,...
+\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The shortvrb package}
+%
+% The following is the \Lpack{shortvrb} package code (from |doc.dtx|
+% by Frank Mittelbach). It has been so useful to me that I wanted
+% to include it in the class.
+%
+% CODE AND COMMENTARY IS BY FRANK MITTELBACH
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeShortVerb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MakeShortVerb#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname cc\string#1\endcsname\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@shortvrbinfo{Made }{#1}%
+    \add@special{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Then the character's current catcode is stored in |\cc\|\meta{c}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter
+    \xdef\csname cc\string#1\endcsname{\the\catcode`#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The character is spliced into the definition using the same trick as
+% used in |\verb| (for instance), having activated |~| in a group.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \begingroup
+      \catcode`\~\active  \lccode`\~`#1%
+      \lowercase{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The character's old meaning is recorded in |\ac\|\meta{c} prior to
+% assigning it a new one.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \global\expandafter\let
+         \csname ac\string#1\endcsname~%
+      \gdef~{\verb~}}%
+    \endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally the character is made active.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \global\catcode`#1\active
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If we suspect that \meta{c} is already a short reference, we tell
+% the user. Now he or she is responsible if anything goes wrong\,\dots
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@shortvrbinfo\@empty{#1 already}%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeleteShortVerb}
+% Here's the means of undoing a |\MakeShortVerb|, for instance in a
+% region where you need to use the character outside a verbatim
+% environment.  It arranges for |\dospecials| and |\@sanitize| to be
+% altered appropriately, restores the saved catcode and, if necessary,
+% the character's meaning (as stored by 
+% |\MakeShortVerb|).  If the catcode wasn't stored in
+% |\cc\|\meta{c} (by |\MakeShortVerb|) the command is silently
+% ignored. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeleteShortVerb#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname cc\string#1\endcsname\relax
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@shortvrbinfo{Deleted }{#1 as}%
+    \rem@special{#1}%
+    \global\catcode`#1\csname cc\string#1\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We must not forget to reset |\cc\|\meta{c}, otherwise the check in
+% |\MakeShortVerb| for a repeated definition will not work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \global \expandafter\let \csname cc\string#1\endcsname \relax
+    \ifnum\catcode`#1=\active
+      \begingroup
+        \catcode`\~\active   \lccode`\~`#1%
+        \lowercase{%
+          \global\expandafter\let\expandafter~%
+          \csname ac\string#1\endcsname}%
+      \endgroup \fi \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@shortvrbinfo}
+% Helper function for info messages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@shortvrbinfo#1#2{%
+  \PackageInfo{shortvrb}{%
+     #1\expandafter\@gobble\string#2 a short reference
+                                          for \string\verb}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\add@special}
+% This helper macro adds its argument to the
+% |\dospecials| macro which is conventionally used by verbatim macros
+% to alter the catcodes of the currently active characters.  We need
+% to add |\do\|\meta{c} to the expansion of |\dospecials| after
+% removing the character if it was already there to avoid multiple
+% copies building up should |\MakeShortVerb| not be balanced by
+% |\DeleteShortVerb| (in case anything that uses |\dospecials| cares
+% about repetitions).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\add@special#1{%
+  \rem@special{#1}%
+  \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\dospecials\expandafter
+    {\dospecials \do #1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Similarly we have to add |\@makeother\|\meta{c} to |\@sanitize|
+% (which is used in things like |\index| to re-catcode all special
+% characters except braces).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\@sanitize\expandafter
+    {\@sanitize \@makeother #1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\rem@special}
+% The inverse of |\add@special| is slightly trickier.  |\do| is
+% re-defined to expand to nothing if its argument is the character of
+% interest, otherwise to expand simply to the argument.  We can then
+% re-define |\dospecials| to be the expansion of itself.  The space
+% after |=`##1| prevents an expansion to |\relax|!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rem@special#1{%
+  \def\do##1{%
+    \ifnum`#1=`##1 \else \noexpand\do\noexpand##1\fi}%
+  \xdef\dospecials{\dospecials}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Fixing |\@sanitize| is the same except that we need to re-define
+% |\@makeother| which obviously needs to be done in a group. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \begingroup
+    \def\@makeother##1{%
+      \ifnum`#1=`##1 \else \noexpand\@makeother\noexpand##1\fi}%
+    \xdef\@sanitize{\@sanitize}%
+  \endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% END OF MITTELBACH CODE AND COMMENTARY.
+%
+% \subsection{General verbatim boxing and line numbering}
+%
+%    A while ago I wrote a package that I never released. Here it is
+% now, updated and improved. The package was based on code originally
+% posted to \ctt{}  by Donald Arseneau on 13 July 2000.
+%
+% This is DA's posted code.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \RequirePackage{verbatim}
+% \def\boxverbflag{14 }
+%
+% \def\boxedverbatim{%
+%    \fboxsep=1em
+%    \def\verbatim@processline{\leavevmode
+%      \vrule\vbox{\advance\hsize-.8p@ \@@line
+%        {\strut\kern\fboxsep\the\verbatim@line\hss}%
+%         \kern\fbozsep}\vrule\par}%
+%    \@verbatim % but make some replacement settings
+% %   \ifdim\@totalleftmargin>\fboxsep \fboxsep\@totalleftmargin \fi
+%    \leftskip\x@skip \rightskip\z@skip
+%    \interlinepenalty\boxverbflag
+%    \parfillskip\z@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+%    \lineskip-\fboxsep \baselineskip\z@skip
+%    \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces
+%    \boxverb@toprule
+%    \verbatim@start}
+%
+% \def\endboxedverbatim{\hrule\endtrivlist}
+%
+% \@namefdef{boxedverbatim*}{\let\frenchspacing\@gobble \boxedverbatim}
+% \@namefdef{endboxedverbatim*}{\hrule\endtrivlist}
+%
+% \output=\expandafter{\expandafter\boxverb@split \the\output}
+%
+% \def\boxverb@toprule{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@
+%    \@@line{\vrule height2\fboxsep \hss \vrule}}
+%
+% \def\boxverb@split{\ifnum\outputpenalty=\boxverbflag
+%    \ifdim\dp\@cclv=\z@
+%    \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\hrule\kern-.4pt}%
+%    \null \kern-.7\topskip \boxverb@toprule
+%    \fi\fi}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% That's the end of DA's posted code
+%
+% I have extended this to provide:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%  \item A (multipage) boxed verbatim
+%  \item A (multipage) boxed verbatim input
+%  \item Normally each `page' is boxed, but start/end rules can be switched off
+%    at page boundaries
+%  \item A heading can be put at the start of `continuation' pages
+%  \item Lines of verbatim text can be numbered
+%  \item Can be `degraded' to normal verbatim environment
+%  \end{itemize}
+%
+%    Before proceeding with the main, here are some macros for aspects
+% of line numbering.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linenumberfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\vlvnumfont}
+%  Set line numbering font(s).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\linenumberfont}[1]{\def\vlvnumfont{#1}}
+%%% \linenumberfont{\small\rmfamily}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linenumberfrequency}
+% \begin{macro}{\linemodnum}
+% Set numbering intervals (number modulo). Default is modulus 0.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\linenumberfrequency}[1]{%
+  \ifnum #1< \@ne
+    \def\linemodnum{0\relax}
+    \bvcountlinesfalse
+  \else
+    \def\linemodnum{#1\relax}
+    \bvcountlinestrue
+  \fi
+}
+%%%%\linenumberfrequency{0}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\getthelinenumber}
+% |\getthelinenumber|\marg{counter} returns |\thecounter| if it is exactly
+% divisible by |\linenumberfrequency|, provided this is not zero.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\getthelinenumber}[1]{%
+  \ifnum\@ne=\linemodnum
+     \@nameuse{the#1}
+  \else
+    \ifnum\@ne<\linemodnum
+      \@tempcnta=\@nameuse{c@#1}
+      \divide\@tempcnta\linemodnum \multiply\@tempcnta\linemodnum
+      \ifnum\@tempcnta=\@nameuse{c@#1}\@nameuse{the#1}\fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    OK, on to the main code.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\boxverbflag}
+% \begin{macro}{\bvboxsep}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\boxverbflag{14 }
+\newlength{\bvboxsep}      % user can change this
+\setlength{\bvboxsep}{1em}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifbvperpage % start/end lines on every page of multipage verbatim
+\bvperpagetrue
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bvtopofpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\b@vtop}
+% Can use |\bvtopofpage| to put a heading above continued verbatims.
+% For example \\
+% |\bvtopofpage{\begin{center}\normalfont (Continued)\end{center}}| \\
+% It only works for |\bvperpagetrue|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bvtopofpage}[1]{%
+  \long\def\b@vtop{#1}
+}
+\def\b@vtop{}  % used in \boxverb@split for heading 
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theb@vlinenumber}
+% \begin{macro}{\resetbvlinenumber}
+% |\resetbvlinenumber| reinitializes the line numbering.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{bvlinectr}
+\def\theb@vlinenumber{\getthelinenumber{bvlinectr}}
+\newcommand{\resetbvlinenumber}{\setcounter{bvlinectr}{0}}
+ 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifbvcountlines}
+% TRUE for verbatim line numbers to be printed. Default is not
+% to print them. Note that |\linenumberfrequency| twiddles with this.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifbvcountlines   % TRUE to print line numbers of verbatim lines
+  \bvcountlinesfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\b@vdocount}
+% \begin{macro}{\bvnumlength}
+% Increment line number if counting. A line number is printed in
+% a space width |\bvnumlength|, which is given a temporary value here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\b@vdocount{\ifbvcountlines\stepcounter{bvlinectr}\fi}
+\newlength{\bvnumlength}       
+%% \settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\vlvnumfont 9999}
+\settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\normalfont 999}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifbvcountinside}
+% \begin{macro}{\bvnumbersinside}
+% \begin{macro}{\bvnumbersoutside}
+% Flag and commands for positioning the numbers. Default is to print
+% them inside the box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifbvcountinside  % TRUE if line numbers inside box
+  \bvcountinsidetrue
+\newcommand{\bvnumbersinside}{\bvcountinsidetrue}
+\newcommand{\bvnumbersoutside}{\bvcountinsidefalse}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\b@vdoinside}
+% \begin{macro}{\b@vdooutside}
+% Print numbers inside (outside) the box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\b@vdoinside{%
+  \ifbvcountlines\ifbvcountinside%
+    \makebox[\bvnumlength][r]{%
+      \vlvnumfont \theb@vlinenumber\space}%
+  \fi\fi}
+
+\def\b@vdooutside{%
+  \ifbvcountlines\ifbvcountinside\else%
+    \llap{\makebox[\bvnumlength][r]{%
+      \vlvnumfont \theb@vlinenumber\space}}%
+  \fi\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setupboxverb@line}
+% Use a macro for the first main part of DA's code for |\boxedverbatim|, 
+% adding lots of hooks.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setupboxverb@line}{%
+  \par
+  \ifbvperpage
+    \output=\expandafter{\expandafter\boxverb@split \the\output}
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@processline}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\verbatim@processline{\leavevmode
+    \b@vdocount%
+    \bvleftsidehook\vbox{\advance\hsize-.8\p@ \@@line
+      {\b@vdooutside\strut\kern\bvboxsep%
+       \b@vdoinside%
+       \ift@bs
+         \tabverbatim@processline
+       \else
+         \the\verbatim@line
+       \fi
+       \hss}%
+     \kern\bvboxsep}\bvrightsidehook\par}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setupbox@verb}
+% Use a macro for the second main part of DA's code, and integrate it
+% with the other verbatim codes (e.g., include |\@maybeobeytags|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setupbox@verb}{%
+  \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip
+  \interlinepenalty\boxverbflag
+  \parfillskip\z@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+  \lineskip-\bvboxsep \baselineskip\z@skip
+  \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs
+  \boxverb@toprule
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatim}
+% \begin{macro}{\endboxedverbatim}
+% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatim*}
+% \begin{macro}{\endboxedverbatim*}
+% Given the two macros above, we can write a briefer version of DA's 
+% |\boxedverbatim(*)|. 
+% As noted by Zarko Cucej\footnote{\url{zarko.cucej@uni-mb.si}}, have to handle
+% a following (no-) paragraph.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@doendpe} to \cs{endboxedverbatim}
+%                            (from patch v1.8)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\boxedverbatim{\begingroup
+  \setupboxverb@line
+  \@verbatim
+  \setupbox@verb
+  \verbatim@start
+}
+\def\endboxedverbatim{\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}
+
+\@namedef{boxedverbatim*}{\let\frenchspacing\@gobble \boxedverbatim}
+\@namelet{endboxedverbatim*}\endboxverbatim
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\boxverb@toprule{\bvtoprulehook
+  \@@line{\bvleftsidehook \bvtopmidhook \bvrightsidehook}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bvendofpage}
+% \cs{bvendofpage}\marg{spec} sets the boxed verbatim `end of page' to \meta{spec}.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Added \cs{bvendofpage} (mempatch v2.3d)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\bvendofpage}[1]{%
+  \def\boxverb@botpage{#1}}
+\bvendofpage{\hrule\kern-.4pt}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\boxverb@split}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\boxverb@split{\ifnum\outputpenalty=\boxverbflag
+  \ifdim\dp\@cclv=\z@
+%%%%    \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\hrule\kern-.4pt}%
+    \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\boxverb@botpage}%
+    \null \kern-.7\topskip \b@vtop \boxverb@toprule
+  \fi
+\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bvtoprulehook}
+% \begin{macro}{\bvendrulehook}
+% \begin{macro}{\bvleftsidehook}
+% \begin{macro}{\bvrightsidehook}
+% \begin{macro}{\bvtopmidhook}
+% The new hooks, for the top, bottom, left and right of the box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bvtoprulehook{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@}
+\def\bvendrulehook{\hrule}
+\def\bvleftsidehook{\vrule}
+\def\bvrightsidehook{\vrule}
+\def\bvtopmidhook{\rule{0\p@}{2\bvboxsep} \hss}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatiminput}
+% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatim@input}
+% |\boxedverbatiminput{filename}| read in filename contents as verbatim
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\boxedverbatiminput}{\begingroup
+  \@ifstar{\let\frenchspacing\@gobble 
+           \boxedverbatim@input\relax}%
+          {\boxedverbatim@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\boxedverbatim@input#1#2{%
+  \setupboxverb@line
+  \IfFileExists{#2}{\@verbatim #1\relax
+  \setupbox@verb
+    \verbatim@readfile{\@filef@und}%
+      \bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
+  {\typeout {No file #2.}\endgroup}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Some prepackaged boxing styles.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bvbox}
+% Original (default) boxing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bvbox}{%
+  \bvperpagetrue%
+  \renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{\vrule}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{\vrule}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{\hrule}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nobvbox}
+% No boxing
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\nobvbox}{%
+  \bvperpagefalse%
+  \renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bvtopandtail}
+% Head and foot horizontal lines only
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bvtopandtail}{%
+  \bvperpagefalse%
+  \renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{\hrule}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bvsides}
+% Side vertical lines only
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bvsides}{%
+  \bvperpagefalse%
+  \renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\vskip 3ex}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{\vrule}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{\vrule}%
+  \renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The framed package}
+%
+% The following code is the \Lpack{framed} package~\cite{FRAMED}
+% by Donald Arseneau.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Updated framed code to v0.8a of the package}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\framed}
+% \begin{macro}{\endframed}
+% \begin{macro}{\shaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\endshaded}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\framed\relax \let\endframed\relax
+\let\shaded\relax \let\endshaded\relax
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% DA sent me a pre-release copy of v0.6 of his \Lpack{framed} 
+% package~\cite{FRAMED}.
+% We also discussed good ways of embedding it into the class. One result
+% being that I defined some some items |\AtBeginDocument|, but this is
+% no longer required as DA has changed \Lpack{framed} to cooperate
+% with memoir.
+%
+% Here is a modified version of \file{framed.sty}. In particular
+% I deleted the debugging code (lines starting with \verb?|?).
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% framed.sty   v 0.8a   21-Jul-2003
+% Copyright (C) 1992-2003 by Donald Arseneau
+% These macros may be freely transmitted, reproduced, or modified
+% provided that this notice is left intact.
+% 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Create framed or shaded regions that can break across pages using 
+% \begin{framed} ... \end{framed}    -- ordinary frame box (box at margin)
+% \begin{shaded} ... \end{shaded}    -- shaded background (into margin)
+%    ... leftbar ...                 -- line on left side
+%
+% The "framed" environment puts the text into "\fbox" with the
+% settings "\fboxrule=\FrameRule" and "\fboxsep=\FrameSep".
+% You can change these lengths (using "\setlength") and you
+% can even change the definition of "\FrameCommand" to use
+% much fancier boxes.
+%
+% In fact, the "shaded" environment just redefines "\FrameCommand"
+% to use "\colorbox{shadecolor}" (and you have to define the
+% color "shadecolor").
+%
+% A page break is allowed, and even encouraged, before the framed
+% environment.  If you want to attach some text (a box title) to the
+% frame, then the text should be inserted by \FrameCommand
+%
+% The contents of the framed regions are restricted: 
+% Floats, footnotes, marginpars and head-line entries will be lost.
+% (Some of these may be handled in a later version.)
+% This package will not work with the page breaking of multicol.sty,
+% or other systems that perform column-balancing.
+%
+% The MakeFramed environment does the work. Its "settings" argument
+% should contain any adjustments to the text width (applied to \hsize,
+% and using the "\width" of the frame itself) as well as a `restore'
+% command -- \@parboxrestore or \FrameRestore or something similar.
+%
+% Expert commands:
+% \MakeFramed, \endMakeFramed: the "MakeFramed" environment
+% \FrameCommand: command to draw the frame around its argument
+% \FrameRestore: restore some text settings, but fewer than \@parboxrestore
+% \FrameRule: length register; \fboxrule for default "framed".
+% \FrameSep: length register; \fboxsep for default "framed".
+% \FrameHeightAdjust: macro; height of frame above baselineskip at 
+%                     top of page
+%
+% This is still a `pre-production' version because I can think of many
+% features/improvements that should be made.  Nevertheless, starting
+% with version 0.5 it should be bug-free.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%% BEGIN FRAMED %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%% PW -- can't have \ProvidesPpackage
+%%\ProvidesPackage{framed}[2003/07/21 v 0.8a: 
+%%    framed or shaded text with page breaks]
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifframeasnormal}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% PW added \ifframeasnormal % TRUE normal paras, FALSE minipage paras
+%% PW default is (FALSE to match DA v0.5, or TRUE to match DA v0.6)
+\newif\ifframeasnormal
+  \frameasnormaltrue
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endMakeFramed}
+% \begin{environment}{framed}
+% \begin{environment}{shaded}
+% \begin{environment}{leftbar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% PW Define some things AtBeginDocument if they have not already
+%%    been defined via someone using the framed package.
+\AtBeginDocument{\@ifundefined{framed}{%
+\def\endMakeFramed{\par
+     \kern\z@ \penalty-100 % put depth into height
+ \egroup
+ \begingroup \put@frame \endgroup}
+
+\newenvironment{framed}% using default \FrameCommand
+  {\MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
+  {\endMakeFramed}
+
+\newenvironment{shaded}{%
+  \def\FrameCommand{\colorbox{shadecolor}}%
+  \MakeFramed {\FrameRestore}}%
+ {\endMakeFramed}
+
+\newenvironment{leftbar}{%
+  \def\FrameCommand{\vrule width 3pt \hspace{10pt}}%
+  \MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
+ {\endMakeFramed}
+
+}{}} % end of AtBeginDocument
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeFramed}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% \def\MakeFramed#1{\par         %% PW change to \newcommand
+\newcommand{\MakeFramed}[1]{\par
+ % measure added width and height; call result \width and \height
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\vskip-1in \hbox{\hskip-1in 
+   \FrameCommand{\hbox{\vrule \@height .7in \@depth.3in \@width 1in}}}%
+   \vskip\z@skip}%
+ \def\width{\wd\z@}\def\height{\ht\z@}%
+ \edef\fb@frw{\the\width}\edef\fb@frh{\the\height}%
+ % insert pre-penalties and skips
+ \begingroup
+ \skip@\lastskip
+ \if@nobreak\else 
+    \penalty9999 % updates \page parameters
+    \ifdim\pagefilstretch=\z@ \ifdim\pagefillstretch=\z@
+       \edef\@tempa{\the\skip@}%
+       \ifx\@tempa\zero@glue \penalty-30
+       \else \vskip-\skip@ \penalty-30 \vskip\skip@
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    \penalty\z@
+    % Give a stretchy breakpoint that will always be taken in preference
+    % to the \penalty 9999 used to update page parameters. The cube root
+    % of 10000/100 indicates a multiplier of 0.21545, but the maximum 
+    % calculated badness is really 8192, not 10000, so the multiplier
+    % is 0.2301.  
+    \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.5\baselineskip
+    \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\height
+    \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\skip@
+    \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\topsep
+    \vskip-\skip@ \penalty 1800 \vskip\skip@
+ \fi
+ \addvspace{\topsep}%
+ \endgroup
+ % clear out pending page break
+ \penalty\@M \vskip 2\baselineskip \vskip\height
+ \penalty9999 \vskip -2\baselineskip \vskip-\height
+ \penalty9999 % updates \pagetotal
+ \fb@adjheight 
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
+   #1% Modifications to \hsize (can use \width and \height)
+   \textwidth\hsize \columnwidth\hsize 
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\put@frame}
+% |\put@frame| takes the contents of |\@tempboxa| and puts all, or a piece,
+% of it on the page with a frame (|\FrameCommand|).  It recurses until
+% all of |\@tempboxa| has been used up. (|\@tempboxa| must have zero depth.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\put@frame{\relax         
+ \ifdim\pagegoal=\maxdimen \pagegoal\vsize \fi
+ \ifinner \else
+    \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % space left on page
+  \ifdim\dimen@<2\baselineskip 
+    \eject \fb@adjheight \put@frame
+  \else % there's appreciable room left on the page
+    \begingroup % temporarily set \dimen@ to be...
+    \advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink  % maximum space available on page
+    \advance\dimen@-\fb@frh\relax % space for frame's contents
+    \expandafter\endgroup
+    % restore \dimen@ to real room left on page
+    \ifdim\dimen@>\ht\@tempboxa % whole box does fit
+    \else % box must be split
+      \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{% simulate frame and flexiblity of page:
+        \vskip \fb@frh \@plus\pagestretch \@minus.8\pageshrink
+        \kern137sp\kern-137sp\penalty-30 
+        \unvbox\@tempboxa}%
+      \edef\fb@resto@set{\boxmaxdepth\the\boxmaxdepth 
+                         \splittopskip\the\splittopskip}%  % v0.8a
+      \boxmaxdepth\z@ \splittopskip\z@
+      \setbox\tw@\vsplit\@tempboxa to\dimen@
+      \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}% natural-sized
+      % If the split-to size > (\vsize-\topskip),
+      % then set box to full size
+      \begingroup
+        \advance\dimen@\topskip
+        \expandafter\endgroup
+      \ifdim\dimen@>\pagegoal
+        \dimen@ii\pagegoal
+        \advance\dimen@ii -\topskip
+        \advance\dimen@ii \FrameHeightAdjust\relax
+      \else  % suspect this is wrong:
+        % If the split-to size > feasible room_on_page, 
+        % rebox it smaller.
+        \advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink
+        \ifdim\ht\tw@>\dimen@
+          \dimen@ii\dimen@
+        \else % use natural size
+          \dimen@ii\ht\tw@
+        \fi
+      \fi
+      % Re-box contents to desired size \dimen@ii
+      \advance\dimen@ii -\fb@frh
+      \setbox\tw@\vbox to\dimen@ii \bgroup
+      % remove simulated frame and page flexibility:
+      \vskip -\fb@frh \@plus-\pagestretch \@minus-.8\pageshrink
+      \unvbox\tw@ \unpenalty\unpenalty
+      \ifdim\lastkern=-137sp % whole box went to next page
+        \egroup \fb@resto@set \eject 
+%%%              % (\vskip for frame size was discarded) % v 0.8a
+        \fb@adjheight
+      \else %
+        \egroup \fb@resto@set  % v0.8a
+        \ifvoid\@tempboxa % it all fit after all
+           \setbox\@tempboxa\box\tw@
+        \else % it really did split
+          \ifdim\wd\tw@>\z@
+            \centerline{\FrameCommand{\box\tw@}}% ? \centerline bad idea
+           \else
+             \box\tw@
+           \fi
+           \hrule \@height\z@
+           \eject
+           \fb@adjheight
+           \put@frame
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifvoid\@tempboxa\else
+    \centerline{\FrameCommand{\box\@tempboxa}}%
+    \nointerlineskip \null %{\showoutput \showlists}
+    \penalty-30 \vskip\topsep
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fb@adjheight}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fb@adjheight{%         
+  \vbox to\FrameHeightAdjust{}% get proper baseline skip from above.
+  \penalty\@M \nointerlineskip
+  \vskip-\FrameHeightAdjust
+  \penalty\@M} % useful for tops of pages
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\zero@glue}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\zero@glue{\the\z@skip}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\FrameCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\FrameHeightAdjust}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% Define configuration commands:
+\def\FrameCommand{\fboxrule=\FrameRule \fboxsep=\FrameSep \fbox}
+\newdimen\FrameRule \FrameRule= \fboxrule
+\newdimen\FrameSep  \FrameSep = 3\fboxsep
+
+%% Height of frame above first baseline when frame starts a page:
+%%\def\FrameHeightAdjust{6pt} % PW changed the value
+\def\FrameHeightAdjust{0.6em}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\FrameRestore}
+% |\FrameRestore| has parts of |\@parboxrestore|. See how it is used in the
+% `settings' argument of |\MakeFrame|. Previous behaviour can be restored by 
+% using |\@parboxrestore| there, or redefining: 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \makeatletter 
+%   \renewcommand{\FrameRestore}{\@parboxrestore} 
+% \makeatother
+% \end{verbatim}
+% However, PW's |\ifframeasnormal| obviates the need for this.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Corrected spelling of \cs{@dischyph} in \cs{FrameRestore} (mempatch v3.5)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% PW: I have added my \ifframeasnormal to the original \FrameRestore
+%%     The commented out lines are commented out by DA in the 
+%%     framed package
+
+%\def\FrameRestore{%         %% PW change to \newcommand
+\newcommand{\FrameRestore}{%
+  \let\if@nobreak\iffalse
+  \let\if@noskipsec\iffalse
+  \let\-\@dischyph
+  \let\'\@acci\let\`\@accii\let\=\@acciii
+  \linewidth\hsize
+  \sloppy
+\ifframeasnormal\else
+  \let\par\@@par
+  \parindent\z@ \parskip\z@skip  
+  \everypar{}%
+  \@totalleftmargin\z@
+  \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \@rightskip\z@skip
+  \parfillskip\@flushglue \lineskip\normallineskip
+  \baselineskip\normalbaselineskip
+  \let\\\@normalcr
+\fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% Compatability with previous versions (temporary!):
+%%\let\fram@d=\MakeFramed  \let\endfram@d=\endMakeFramed
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%% END FRAMED %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The newfile package}
+%
+% The following code is from the \Lpack{newfile} package.
+% To try and avoid name clashes with other packages, each internal macro
+% in this package includes the character string `|stre@m|'.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newoutputstream}
+% |\newoutputam|\marg{stream} creates a new output stream called \meta{stream}.
+% Different files may be associated with the \meta{stream}. Note that
+% TeX permits no more than 16 output streams.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newoutputstream}[1]{%
+  \@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}%
+    {\expandafter\newwrite\csname #1outstre@m\endcsname
+     \csname newif\expandafter\endcsname
+       \csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname
+     \global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname
+     \expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamopen#1\endcsname\relax
+       \global\@namedef{atstreamopen#1}{}%
+     \fi
+     \expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamclose#1\endcsname\relax
+       \global\@namedef{atstreamclose#1}{}%
+     \fi
+    }%
+    {\@memwarn{Output stream #1\space is already defined}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newinputstream}
+% |\newinputstream|\marg{stream} creates a new input stream called \meta{stream}.
+% Different files may be associated with the \meta{stream}. Note that
+% TeX permits no more than 16 input streams.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newinputstream}[1]{%
+  \@ifundefined{#1instre@m}%
+    {\expandafter\newread\csname #1instre@m\endcsname
+     \csname newif\expandafter\endcsname
+       \csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname
+     \global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname
+     \expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamopen#1\endcsname\relax
+       \global\@namedef{atstreamopen#1}{}%
+     \fi
+     \expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamclose#1\endcsname\relax
+       \global\@namedef{atstreamclose#1}{}%
+     \fi
+    }%
+    {\@memwarn{Input stream #1\space is already defined}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Some checking macros will be useful as some of the checks occur in
+% multiple places.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\IfStreamOpen}
+% |\IfStreamOpen|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code}\marg{FALSE code}
+% checks if stream \meta{stream} is currently open.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\IfStreamOpen}[3]{%
+  \csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname#2\else#3\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\instre@mandopen}
+% |\instre@mandopen|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
+% is an input stream and is open. If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\instre@mandopen}[2]{%
+  \@ifundefined{#1instre@m}{%
+    \@memwarn{#1\space is not an input stream}}%
+  {\IfStreamOpen{#1}{#2}{%
+    \@memwarn{Input stream #1\space is not open}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\instre@mandclosed}
+% |\instre@mandclosed|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
+% is an input stream and is closed (not open). 
+% If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\instre@mandclosed}[2]{%
+  \@ifundefined{#1instre@m}{%
+    \@memwarn{#1\space is not an input stream}}%
+  {\IfStreamOpen{#1}{%
+    \@memwarn{Input stream #1\space is open}}{#2}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\outstre@mandopen}
+% |\outstre@mandopen|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
+% is an output stream and is open. If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\outstre@mandopen}[2]{%
+  \@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}{%
+    \@memwarn{#1\space is not an output stream}}%
+  {\IfStreamOpen{#1}{#2}{%
+    \@memwarn{Output stream #1\space is not open}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\outstre@mandclosed}
+% |\outstre@mandclosed|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
+% is an output stream and is closed (not open). 
+% If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\outstre@mandclosed}[2]{%
+  \@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}{%
+    \@memwarn{#1\space is not an output stream}}%
+  {\IfStreamOpen{#1}{%
+    \@memwarn{Output stream #1\space is open}}{#2}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\openoutputfile}
+% |\openoutputfile|\marg{filename}\marg{stream} opens the file called 
+% \meta{filename} and attaches it to the stream \meta{stream} for
+% writing. However, if the |\nofiles| command has been given the
+% file is \emph{not} attached to the stream. No more than one file can be 
+% attached to a stream at any given time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\openoutputfile}[2]{%
+  \outstre@mandclosed{#2}{%
+    \global\@namedef{#1@filename}{#1}%
+    \if@filesw 
+      \immediate\openout\@nameuse{#2outstre@m}=\@nameuse{#1@filename}%
+    \fi
+    \global\csname stre@m#2opentrue\endcsname%
+    \@nameuse{atstreamopen#2}%
+  }%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\closeoutputstream}
+% |\closeoutputstream|\marg{stream} closes the stream \meta{stream}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\closeoutputstream}[1]{%
+  \outstre@mandopen{#1}{%
+    \@nameuse{atstreamclose#1}%
+    \immediate\closeout\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}%
+    \global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\openinputfile}
+% |\openinputfile|\marg{filename}\marg{stream} opens the file called 
+% \meta{filename} and attaches it to the stream \meta{stream} for
+% reading. The file is added to the list of files. 
+% No more than one file can be attached to a stream at
+% any given time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\openinputfile}[2]{%
+  \IfFileExists{#1}{%                   file exists
+    \instre@mandclosed{#2}{% 
+      \@addtofilelist{#1}%
+      \global\@namedef{#1@filename}{#1}%
+      \immediate\openin\@nameuse{#2instre@m}=\@nameuse{#1@filename}%
+      \global\csname stre@m#2opentrue\endcsname%
+      \@nameuse{atstreamopen#2}}}%
+  {%                                    file not found
+    \typeout{No file #1.}
+  }%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\closeinputstream}
+% |\closeinputstream|\marg{stream} closes the stream \meta{stream}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\closeinputstream}[1]{%
+  \instre@mandopen{#1}{%
+     \@nameuse{atstreamclose#1}%
+     \immediate\closein\@nameuse{#1instre@m}%
+     \global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{writeverbatim}
+% |\begin{writeverbatim}|\marg{stream} writes the contents of
+% the environment as verbatim text to the given \meta{stream}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\writeverbatim#1{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \let\do\@makeother\dospecials
+  \catcode`\^^M\active
+  \def\verbatim@processline{%
+    \immediate\write\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}{\the\verbatim@line}}%
+  \verbatim@start}
+\def\endwriteverbatim{\@esphack}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addtostream}
+% |\addtostream|\marg{stream}\marg{text} writes \meta{text} to the
+% given \meta{stream}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\addtostream}[2]{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \outstre@mandopen{#1}{%
+    {\let\protect\string
+     \immediate\write\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}{#2}%
+    }}%
+  \@esphack
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifstre@mnoteof}
+% \begin{macro}{\checkstre@mnoteof}
+% |\checkstre@mnoteof|\marg{stream} sets |\ifstre@mnoteof| to TRUE if
+% \meta{stream} is not at the end of the file (i.e., it is the opposite
+% of |\ifeof|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifstre@mnoteof
+\newcommand{\checkstre@meof}[1]{%
+  \stre@mnoteoftrue\ifeof\@nameuse{#1instre@m}\stre@mnoteoffalse\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\readstream}
+% |\readstream|\marg{stream} reads the contents of
+% the given \meta{stream} as |\input| text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\readstream#1{
+  \instre@mandopen{#1}{%
+    \loop \checkstre@meof{#1} \ifstre@mnoteof
+      \read\@nameuse{#1instre@m} to\temptokstre@m
+     \temptokstre@m
+    \repeat
+    }%
+}
+  
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\readaline}
+% |\readaline|\marg{stream} reads what TeX considers to be one line
+% from the given \meta{stream} as |\input| text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\readaline#1{
+  \instre@mandopen{#1}{%
+    \ifeof\@nameuse{#1instre@m}
+      \@memwarn{No more to read from stream #1}
+    \else
+      \read\@nameuse{#1instre@m} to\temptokstre@m
+      \temptokstre@m
+    \fi
+    }%
+}
+  
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\readverbatim}
+% |\readverbatim|\marg{stream} reads the contents of
+% the given \meta{stream} as verbatim text.
+%
+% The read verbatim code is a slight variation on code from the
+% \Lpack{verbatim} package. Most of the setup is done by the macros
+% |\stre@mverb@input|\marg{setup}\marg{stream} and
+% |\verbatim@readstre@m|\marg{stream}. Finally, |\verbatim@read@file|
+% is a \Lpack{verbatim} package macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\readverbatim{\begingroup
+  \ift@bs
+    \def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
+  \fi
+  \@ifstar{\stre@mverb@input{\@maybeobeytabs}}%
+     {\stre@mverb@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stre@mverb@input}
+% \begin{macro}{\@verbinstre@m}
+% |\stre@mverb@input|\marg{setup}\marg{stream} is a stream
+% version of |\verbatim@input|. It defines |\@verbinstre@m|
+% to be \meta{stream}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\stre@mverb@input}[2]{%
+  \IfStreamOpen{#2}%
+    {\@verbatim #1\relax
+     \def\@verbinstre@m{\@nameuse{#2instre@m}}
+     \verb@readstre@m\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
+    {\@memwarn{Stream #2\space is not open}\endgroup}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verb@readstre@m}
+% |\verb@readstre@m| is the stream analogue to |\verbatim@readfile|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\verb@readstre@m}{%
+  \verbatim@startline
+  \expandafter\endlinechar\expandafter\m@ne
+  \expandafter\verbatim@read@stre@m
+  \expandafter\endlinechar\the\endlinechar\relax
+  \verbatim@finish
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@read@stre@m}
+% |\verbatim@read@stre@m| is the analogue to |\verbatim@readfile|.
+% It gets its input from the stream |\@verbinstre@m|, which is defined
+% in the |\stre@mverb@input| macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\verbatim@read@stre@m}{%
+  \read\@verbinstre@m to\next
+  \ifeof\@verbinstre@m
+  \else
+    \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline\expandafter{\next}%
+    \verbatim@processline
+    \verbatim@startline
+    \expandafter\verbatim@read@stre@m
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\readboxedverbatim}
+% |\readboxedverbatim|\marg{stream} is the equivalent of
+% |\readverbtim| except that it generates a boxed verbatim.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\readboxedverbatim}{\begingroup
+  \@ifstar{\stre@mbvin\relax}%
+          {\stre@mbvin{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stre@mbvin}
+% |\stre@mbvin|\marg{setup}\marg{stream} is the workhorse for
+% |\readboxedverbatim|, and in its turn it uses |\verb@readstre@m|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\stre@mbvin}[2]{%
+  \IfStreamOpen{#2}%
+    {\setupboxverb@line
+     \@verbatim #1\relax
+     \def\@verbinstre@m{\@nameuse{#2instre@m}}%
+     \setupbox@verb
+     \verb@readstre@m\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
+    {\@memwarn{Stream #2\space is not open}\endgroup}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Utilities}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Extra `provide' commands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\provideenvironment}
+% Works like |\providecommand| but for environments.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/04}{Added \cs{provideenvironment} and supports}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\provideenvironment}{\@star@or@long\m@mprovenv}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mprovenv}
+% This checks if the environment has been defined. If not it calls
+% the kernel code for |\newenvironment| otherwise it calls code to
+% discard arguments.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@mprovenv}[1]{\@ifundefined{#1}%
+  {\new@environment{#1}}%       % create new environment
+  {\@memwarn{Environment `#1' already defined}%
+   \m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}
+% |\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo| gobbles the |[opt][opt]{begin}{end}| arguments to 
+% |\provideenvironment|. It is actually more general than that as it will 
+% gobble any sequence of any number of optional arguments followed by
+% two required arguments. If there are no optional arguments it disposes
+% of the two required ones, other it calls a recursive procedure to
+% discard any number of optionals, then two required ones.
+%
+% |\m@mgobbleoptandtwo| recursively discards optional arguments, then finally
+% two required arguments.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}{%
+  \@ifnextchar [{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}{\@gobbletwo}}
+\def\m@mgobbleoptandtwo[#1]{%
+  \@ifnextchar [{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}{\@gobbletwo}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\providecounter}
+% Works like the other |\provide...| commands, but for counters.
+% Code is based on |\newcounter| in |ltcounts.dtx|.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/17}{Added \cs{providecounter}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\providecounter}[1]{%
+  \@ifundefined{c@#1}%
+    {\newcounter{#1}}%
+    {\@memwarn{Counter `#1' already defined}%
+      \@ifnextchar[{\m@mgobbleopt}{}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleopt}
+% Gobble an optional argument.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added \cs{m@mgobbleopt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\m@mgobbleopt[#1]{}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\providelength}
+% Works like the other |\provide...| commands, but for lengths.
+% Code is based on |\provide@command| in |ltdefns.dtx|.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/17}{Added \cs{providelength}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\providelength}[1]{%
+  \begingroup
+    \escapechar\m@ne\xdef\@gtempa{{\string#1}}%
+  \endgroup
+  \expandafter\@ifundefined\@gtempa
+    {\newlength{#1}}%
+    {\@memwarn{Length #1 already defined}}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newloglike}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mnewlog}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mnewlogs}
+% For defining a new log-like math function.
+% |\newloglike{\fun}{string}| or |\newloglike*{\fun}{string}|.
+% The starred version is for functions with limits (like an integral sign).
+% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{newloglike}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\newloglike}{\@ifstar{\m@mnewlogs}{\m@mnewlog}}
+\newcommand*{\m@mnewlogs}[2]{%
+  \newcommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}}}
+\newcommand*{\m@mnewlog}[2]{%
+  \newcommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}\nolimits}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\provideloglike}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mprovlogs}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mprovlog}
+%  The provide version of |\newloglike|.
+% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{provideloglike}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\provideloglike}{\@ifstar{\m@mprovlogs}{\m@mprovlog}}
+\newcommand*{\m@mprovlogs}[2]{%
+  \providecommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}}}
+\newcommand*{\m@mprovlog}[2]{%
+  \providecommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}\nolimits}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Changing counters}
+%
+%     In LaTeX, a new counter called, say `ctr', is created by the command
+% |\newcounter{ctr}[within]|. If the optional within argument is given
+% the the counter `ctr' is reset to zero each time the counter `within'
+% changes. The command |\thectr| typesets the value of the counter ctr.
+% This is automatically defined by |\newcounter| and is initialised
+% to typeset arabic numerals. Sometimes it may be desireable to change
+% the counter definitions.
+%
+% The following code is based on the \Lpack{chngcntr} package~\cite{CHNGCNTR}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@removefromreset}
+% This code uses David Carlisle's |\@removefromreset| command as
+% specified in the remreset package~\cite{REMRESET}.
+% It is provided here as a convenience to the user, and with
+% David Carlisle's permission.
+%
+% START OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\@removefromreset}[2]{{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname c@#1\endcsname\@removefromreset
+  \def\@elt##1{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname c@##1\endcsname\@removefromreset
+    \else
+      \noexpand\@elt{##1}%
+    \fi}%
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname cl@#2\endcsname{%
+    \csname cl@#2\endcsname}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% END OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifbothcntrs}
+% This is called as \\
+% |\@ifbothcntrs{|\meta{cntr}|}{|\meta{within}|}{<code when both are counters>}|. 
+% This tests if both \meta{cntr} and \meta{within} are counters.
+%    \begin{macrocode} 
+\newcommand{\@ifbothcntrs}[3]{%
+  \@ifundefined{c@#1}{% counter undefined
+    \@memerror{#1 is not a counter}{\@eha}}%
+  {% else counter is defined
+    \@ifundefined{c@#2}{% within undefined
+      \@memerror{#2 is not a counter}{\@eha}}%
+    {% else both counter and within  are defined
+     #3}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\counterwithin}
+% \begin{macro}{\counterwithin*}
+% \begin{macro}{\@csinstar}
+% \begin{macro}{\@csin}
+%    It is sometimes desireable to change a counter that has been defined
+% by |\newcounter{ctr}| to act as though it had been defined as 
+% |\newcounter{ctr}[within]|. The command
+% |\counterwithin{ctr}{within}| accomplishes this. By default,
+% it also redefines the |\thectr| command so that it typesets values
+% in the style |\thewithin.\arabic{ctr}|. The starred version of the
+% command suppresses the redefinition of |\thectr|. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\counterwithin}{\@ifstar{\@csinstar}{\@csin}}
+\newcommand{\@csinstar}[2]{%
+  \@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@addtoreset{#1}{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\@csin}[2]{%
+  \@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@addtoreset{#1}{#2}%
+                        \@namedef{the#1}{\@nameuse{the#2}.\arabic{#1}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\counterwithout}
+% \begin{macro}{\counterwithout*}
+% \begin{macro}{\@csoutstar}
+% \begin{macro}{\@csout}
+%    Likewise, the command |\counterwithout{ctr}{within}| changes a
+% counter that has been created by |\newcounter{ctr}[within]| to act
+% as though it had been created by |\newcounter{ctr}|. By default it
+% also redefines the |\thectr| command so that it just typesets an arabic
+% numeral. The starred version of the command suppresses the redefinition
+% of |\thectr|.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Deleted chngctr from \cs{@csoutstar} (mempatch v3.4)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\counterwithout}{\@ifstar{\@csoutstar}{\@csout}}
+\newcommand{\@csoutstar}[2]{%
+  \@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@removefromreset{#1}{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\@csout}[2]{%
+  \@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@removefromreset{#1}{#2}%
+                        \@namedef{the#1}{\arabic{#1}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Any number of |\counterwithin{ctr}{...}| and |\counterwithout{ctr}{...}|
+% commands can be issued for a given counter, ctr, if you wish to toggle
+% between the two styles. The current value of ctr is unaffected by
+% |\counterwithin| and |\counterwithout|. If you want to change the value
+% after one of these commands, use |\setcounter{ctr}{...}|, and to change
+% the typeseting style use |\renewcommand{\thectr}{...}|.
+%
+% \subsection{Odd/even page checking}
+%
+% It is difficult to check robustly if the current page is odd or even.
+% This code, which is based on the \Lpack{chngpage} package~\cite{CHNGPAGE}, 
+% provides a method that has proved (so far) to be robust.
+%    It works by writing out a label and on the next LaTeX run checks
+% the page reference for the label.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifoddpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifstrictpagecheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@cp@cntr}
+% \begin{macro}{\cplabel}
+% The boolean |\ifoddpage| is TRUE if the checked page is odd. The
+% boolean |\ifstrictpagecheck| is for turning on (TRUE) and off (FALSE)
+% the strictest method of page checking. The counter |cp@cntr| is used
+% to make unique labels, which start with |\cplabel|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifoddpage
+\newif\ifstrictpagecheck
+  \strictpagecheckfalse
+\newcounter{cp@cntr}
+\newcommand{\cplabel}{^_}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\checkoddpage}
+% This is the user level command to check for odd/even page. It does
+% a robust check for |\strictpagecheck| otherwise the simple minded
+% check. It sets |\ifoddpage| to TRUE if the page is odd, otherwise
+% it sets it to FALSE.
+%
+%    This is now fixed so that it should work for non-arabic page numbering.
+% It uses a new label/pageref variant based on the page counter value, not
+% its printed representation. This also gets rid of worrying about hyperref!!
+% The problem was discovered by Bastiaan Niels Veelo
+%
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Complete rewrite of odd page checking 
+%                            (from patch v1.6)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\checkoddpage}{%
+  \oddpagefalse%
+  \ifstrictpagecheck%
+    \stepcounter{cp@cntr}\pmemlabel{\cplabel\thecp@cntr}%
+    \@memcnta=\pmemlabelref{\cplabel\thecp@cntr}\relax
+    \ifodd\@memcnta\oddpagetrue\fi
+  \else
+    \ifodd\c@page\oddpagetrue\fi
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thepmemc@@page}
+% The value of the page counter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\thepmemc@@page{\the\c@page}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pmemprotected@write}
+% |\pmemprotected@write| is a modified version of the kernel's
+% |\protected@write|.
+%
+%  This version of the macro was provided by Romano Giannetti
+% (\url{romano@dea.icai.upco.es}) on 15 July 2003. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\pmemprotected@write#1#2#3{%
+  \begingroup
+  \let\thepmemc@@page\relax
+  #2%
+  \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+  \edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}%
+  \reserved@a
+  \endgroup
+  \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pmemlabel}
+% A version of |\label| that uses |\pmemprotected@write|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\pmemlabel}[1]{\@bsphack
+  \pmemprotected@write\@auxout{}%
+    {\string\newpmemlabel{#1}{\thepmemc@@page}}%
+  \@esphack}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newpmemlabel}
+% \begin{macro}{\pmemlabelref}
+% We have to be able to cope with a particular label
+% not (yet) being in the the \file{.aux} file when we come to check 
+% the page number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newpmemlabel}[2]{{\global\@namedef{m@#1}{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\pmemlabelref}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname m@#1\endcsname\relax
+    0%
+  \else
+    \csname m@#1\endcsname
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%  \subsection{Checking for empty arguments}
+%
+%  Like page checking, testing for an empty macro argument is more
+% difficult than it might appear at first sight.
+%
+%    The following code is from the \Lpack{ifmtarg} package~\cite{IFMTARG}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifmtarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnotmtarg}
+% |\@ifmtarg{|\meta{arg}|}{<code when empty>}{<code when arg not empty>}| \\
+% |\@ifnotmtarg{|\meta{arg}|}{<code when arg not empty>}| \\
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\Q=3
+\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
+\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
+\long\gdef\@ifnotmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@firstofone\@gobble\@nil}
+\endgroup
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Some example uses:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newcommand{\isempty}[1]{%
+%    \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{YES}}{\typeout{NO}}}
+% \newcommand{\isnotempty}[1]{%
+%    \@ifnotmtarg{#1}{\typeout{YES}}}
+%
+% \isempty{}    -> YES  \isnotempty{}    -> 
+% \isempty{   } -> YES  \isnotempty{   } -> 
+% \isempty{A}   -> NO   \isnotempty{A}   -> YES 
+% \isempty{ A } -> NO   \isnotempty{ A } -> YES 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Changing the page layout in the document}
+%
+%  You should not do this, but\ldots
+%
+% The following code is essentially from the \Lpack{chngpage} 
+% package~\cite{CHNGPAGE}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ch@ngetext}
+% This macro sets the page output parameters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\ch@ngetext}{%
+  \setlength{\@colht}{\textheight}\setlength{\@colroom}{\textheight}%
+  \setlength{\vsize}{\textheight}\setlength{\columnwidth}{\textwidth}%
+  \if@twocolumn%
+    \advance\columnwidth-\columnsep \divide\columnwidth\tw@%
+    \@firstcolumntrue%
+  \fi%
+  \setlength{\hsize}{\columnwidth}%
+  \setlength{\linewidth}{\hsize}%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\changetext}
+% |\changetext{|\meta{H}|}{|\meta{W}|}{|\meta{E}|}{|\meta{O}|}{|\meta{G}|}|
+% adds the given lengths to 5 main bits of the page layout. An empty
+% argument means `no change'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\changetext}[5]{%
+  \@ifmtarg{#1}{}{\addtolength{\textheight}{#1}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#2}{}{\addtolength{\textwidth}{#2}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#3}{}{\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{#3}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#4}{}{\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{#4}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#5}{}{\addtolength{\columnsep}{#5}}%
+  \ch@ngetext%
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Any given change lasts until another |\changetext| command is given.
+% A |\changetext| command should only be issued between two paragraphs.
+%
+% |\changetext| should not be used by anyone unless they really
+% know what they are doing. If you really know what you are doing
+% then you should know enough not to use it.
+%
+% \subsection{Temporarily changing the text width}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{adjustwidth}
+% \begin{environment}{adjustwidth*}
+% |\begin{adjustwidth}{|\meta{left}|}{|\meta{right}|}|
+% adds the given lengths to the left and right hand margins. A positive
+% value will shorten the text and a negative value will widen it. The
+% starred version of the environment will cause the
+% margin changes to switch between odd and even pages.
+%
+% This code is based on the \Lpack{chngpage} package.
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Replaced optional arg of adjustwidth by adjustwidth*}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{adjustwidth}[2]{%
+  \begin{list}{}{%
+    \topsep\z@%
+    \listparindent\parindent%
+    \parsep\parskip%
+    \@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}%
+                 {\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}}%
+    \@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}%
+                 {\setlength{\rightmargin}{#2}}%
+    }
+    \item[]}{\end{list}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{adjustwidth*}[2]{%
+  \begin{list}{}{%
+    \topsep\z@%
+    \listparindent\parindent%
+    \parsep\parskip%
+    \checkoddpage
+    \ifoddpage  % odd numbered page
+      \@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}%
+                   {\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}}%
+      \@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}%
+                   {\setlength{\rightmargin}{#2}}%
+    \else       % even numbered page
+      \@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}%
+                   {\setlength{\leftmargin}{#2}}%
+      \@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}%
+                   {\setlength{\rightmargin}{#1}}%
+    \fi
+    }
+    \item[]}{\end{list}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%  The environments only work for complete paragraphs.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\calccentering}
+% This macro calculates the amount to be added to the spine margin
+% (and subtracted from the foredge margin) 
+% in order to center the textblock. Call as \\
+% |\calccentering{\length}| and it sets |\length|
+% to the required value. Then use as \\
+% |\begin{adjustwidth*}{\length}{-\length}...|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\calccentering}[1]{
+  #1 = \paperwidth
+  \advance #1 by -\textwidth
+  \divide #1 by \tw@
+  \advance #1 by -\spinemargin
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Moving from the current page}
+%
+% Much of this code is taken from the \Lpack{nextpage} package~\cite{NEXTPAGE}.
+%
+% Clear to next page is |\clearpage|.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cleartoevenpage}
+%  |\cleartoevenpage[|\meta{text}|}| clears to the next even 
+% numbered page, 
+%  putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cleartoevenpage}[1][\@empty]{%
+  \clearpage%
+  \ifodd\c@page\hbox{}#1\clearpage\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Move to the next page without flushing floats is |\newpage|.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\movetoevenpage}
+%  |\movetoevenpage[|\meta{text}|}| moves to the next even 
+% numbered page without flushing floats, 
+%  putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\movetoevenpage}[1][\@empty]{%
+  \newpage%
+  \ifodd\c@page\hbox{}#1\newpage\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Clear to next odd numbered page is \cs{cleardoublepage}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cleartooddpage}
+%  \cs{cleartooddpage}\oarg{text} clears to the next odd
+% numbered page, 
+%  putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cleartooddpage}[1][\@empty]{%
+  \clearpage%
+  \ifodd\c@page\else\hbox{}#1\clearpage\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\movetooddpage}
+%  |\movetooddpage[|\meta{text}|}| moves to the next odd
+% numbered page without flushing floats, 
+%  putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\movetooddpage}[1][\@empty]{%
+  \newpage%
+  \ifodd\c@page\else\hbox{}#1\newpage\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Example uses: \\
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \cleartooddpage                         % same as \cleardouble page
+% \cleartooddpage[\thispagestyle{empty}]  % No headings on the skipped page
+% \cleartoevenpage                        % go to next even numbered page
+% Next example puts text on a skipped page
+% \cleartoevenpage[\vspace*{\hfill}THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK\vspace*{\hfill}]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Needing space at the bottom of a page}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\needspace}
+% |\needspace{|\meta{length}|}| checks if the is \meta{length} amount
+% of vertical space left on the page. If there is not it will start
+% a new page. The code is a variant of code thought of for the 
+% \Lpack{needspace} package~\cite{NEEDSPACE}.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added patch v1.4 versions of needspace macros}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\needspace}[1]{\begingroup\setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
+  \vskip\z@\@plus\dimen@\penalty -100\vskip\z@\@plus-\dimen@
+  \vskip\dimen@\penalty 9999\vskip-\dimen@\endgroup}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Needspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\Needspace*}
+% |\Needspace| and |\Needspace*| are more robust versions of |\needspace|,
+% which depends on penalties. If either |\needspace| or |\Needspace|
+% produce a short page it will be ragged bottom, even if |\flushbottom|
+% is in effect. The |\Needspace*| version honours the |\...bottom|
+% declaration.
+%    \begin{macrocode}    
+\newcommand{\Needspace}{\@ifstar{\M@sneedsp@}{\M@needsp@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\M@sneedsp@}
+% \begin{macro}{\M@needsp@}
+% These implement |\Needspace*| and |\Needspace| respectively.
+%    \begin{macrocode}    
+\newcommand{\M@sneedsp@}[1]{\par \penalty-100\begingroup
+  \setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
+  \dimen@ii\pagegoal \advance\dimen@ii-\pagetotal
+  \ifdim \dimen@>\dimen@ii
+    \break
+  \fi\endgroup}
+\newcommand{\M@needsp@}[1]{\par \penalty-100\begingroup
+  \setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
+  \dimen@ii\pagegoal \advance\dimen@ii-\pagetotal
+  \ifdim \dimen@>\dimen@ii
+    \ifdim \dimen@ii>\z@
+      \vfil
+    \fi
+    \break
+  \fi\endgroup}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Text spacing commands}
+%
+% While we're at it, new text spacing commands to supplement
+% the kernel's \\
+% \verb?\, (\thinspace) = 3/18 em?
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Extra text spacing macros from patch v1.4}
+% \begin{macro}{\medspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\:}
+% Medium space \verb?\: (\medspace) = 4/18 em?
+%    \begin{macrocode}    
+\newcommand{\medspace}{\kern .22222em }
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\:}{%
+  \relax\ifmmode\mskip\medmuskip\else\medspace\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\!}
+% Negative thin space (- 3/18 em).
+% Patrik Nyman (private email 2003/10/06) pointed out I had missed
+% the final \verb?\fi? !!!!. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\!}{%
+  \relax\ifmmode\mskip-\thinmuskip\else\negthinspace\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Fractions and subscripts}
+%
+%
+% Styles for fractions like 3/4.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\slashfracstyle}
+% |\slashfracstyle| based on the kernel |\textsuperscript| macro
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{slashfrac} and supports (from patch v1.4)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}    
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\slashfracstyle}[1]{%
+  {\m@th\ensuremath{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@\selectfont #1}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\slashfrac}
+% |\slashfrac| based on TeXbook exercise 11.6
+%    \begin{macrocode}    
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\slashfrac}[2]{\leavevmode
+  \raise.5ex\hbox{\slashfracstyle{#1}}\kern-.13em/%
+  \kern-.15em\lower.25ex\hbox{\slashfracstyle{#2}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textsubscript}
+% \begin{macro}{\@textsubscript}
+% |\textsubscript|, for text subscripts, based on the kernel 
+% |\textsuperscript| macro.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{textsubscript} and supports 
+%                (from patch v1.5)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}    
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\textsubscript}[1]{%
+  \@textsubscript{\selectfont#1}}
+\newcommand*{\@textsubscript}[1]{%
+  {\m@th\ensuremath{_{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%  \subsection{Numbers to names}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% number formatting
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The macros here convert an integer number in the range 0--2147483647
+% (TeX's maximum) into
+% the natural language name of the number.
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Much extended numbers to names (patch v1.2)}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\iflowernumtoname}
+% A flag for lowercasing the initial letters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iflowernumtoname
+  \lowernumtonamefalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifpriornum}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifminusnumber}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifnotnumtonameallcaps}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmakeordinal}
+% Some new booleans
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifpriornum
+\newif\ifminusnumber
+\newif\ifnotnumtonameallcaps
+\newif\ifmakeordinal
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\namenumberand}
+% \begin{macro}{\namenumbercomma}
+% \begin{macro}{\lcminusname}
+% \begin{macro}{\ucminusname}
+% \begin{macro}{\minusname}
+% Some macros representing characters/words for number formatting.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\namenumberand}{ and }
+\newcommand*{\namenumbercomma}{, }
+\newcommand*{\lcminusname}{minus }
+\newcommand*{\ucminusname}{Minus }
+\let\minusname\lcminusname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fnumbersep}
+% \begin{macro}{\tensunitsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\nthstring}
+% \begin{macro}{\iststring}
+% \begin{macro}{\iindstring}
+% \begin{macro}{\iiirdstring}
+% \begin{macro}{\tiethstring}
+% \begin{macro}{\teenstring}
+% More characters/words for formatting
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\fnumbersep}{,}
+\newcommand*\tensunitsep{-}
+\newcommand*{\nthstring}{th}      % nth
+\newcommand*{\iststring}{st}      % 1st
+\newcommand*{\iindstring}{nd}     % 2nd
+\newcommand*{\iiirdstring}{rd}    % 3rd
+\newcommand*{\tiethstring}{tieth} % tieth
+\newcommand*{\teenstring}{teen}   % teen
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ordscript}
+% How to format the ordinal string
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ordscript}[1]{#1}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@mten}
+% An internal shorthand for 10
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\m@mten=10 % shorthand for 10
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@ism@mctr}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@xsm@mctr}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@csm@mctr}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@ksm@mctr}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@xksm@mctr}
+% Counters for digits (units to ten thousands) in a number
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{ism@mctr}  % units
+\newcounter{xsm@mctr}  % tens
+\newcounter{csm@mctr}  % hundreds
+\newcounter{ksm@mctr}  % thousands
+\newcounter{xksm@mctr} % ten thousands
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@cksm@mctr}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@msm@mctr}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@xmsm@mctr}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@cmsm@mctr}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@bsm@mctr}
+% Counters for digits (hundred thousands to billions) in a number
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{cksm@mctr} % hundred thousands
+\newcounter{msm@mctr}  % millions
+\newcounter{xmsm@mctr} % ten millions
+\newcounter{cmsm@mctr} % hundred millions
+\newcounter{bsm@mctr}  % billions
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@workm@mctr}
+% A `work' counter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{workm@mctr}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\numdigits}
+% |\numdigits|\marg{number} splits the \meta{number} into individual digits.
+% It sets |\minusnumbertrue| if the number is negative, otherwise it is false.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\numdigits}[1]{%
+  \setcounter{ism@mctr}{0}%
+  \setcounter{xsm@mctr}{0}%
+  \setcounter{csm@mctr}{0}%
+  \setcounter{ksm@mctr}{0}%
+  \setcounter{xksm@mctr}{0}%
+  \setcounter{cksm@mctr}{0}%
+  \setcounter{msm@mctr}{0}%
+  \setcounter{xmsm@mctr}{0}%
+  \setcounter{cmsm@mctr}{0}%
+  \setcounter{bsm@mctr}{0}%
+  \setcounter{workm@mctr}{#1}%
+  \minusnumberfalse
+  \ifnum \c@workm@mctr < \z@  % negative
+    \minusnumbertrue
+    \c@workm@mctr = -\c@workm@mctr
+  \fi
+  \ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \m@ne     % units
+    \c@ism@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \advance \c@ism@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+  \fi
+  \ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@    % tens
+    \c@xsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \advance \c@xsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+  \fi
+  \ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@   % hundreds
+    \c@csm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \advance \c@csm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+  \fi
+  \ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@   % thousands
+    \c@ksm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \advance \c@ksm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+  \fi
+  \ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@   % ten thousands
+    \c@xksm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \advance \c@xksm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+  \fi
+  \ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@   % hundred thousands
+    \c@cksm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \advance \c@cksm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+  \fi
+  \ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@   % millions
+    \c@msm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \advance \c@msm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+  \fi
+  \ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@  % ten millions
+    \c@xmsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \advance \c@xmsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+  \fi
+  \ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@  % hundred millions
+    \c@cmsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \advance \c@cmsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+  \fi
+  \ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@% billions
+    \c@bsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
+    \divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
+    \advance \c@bsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\form@tnumber}
+% |\form@tnumber|\marg{number} formats \meta{number} as digits.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\form@tnumber}[1]{%
+  \numdigits{#1}%
+  \ifminusnumber-\fi
+  \priornumfalse
+  \ifnum \c@bsm@mctr > \z@ % billions
+    \priornumtrue
+    \thebsm@mctr\fnumbersep
+  \fi
+  \ifpriornum                 % hundred millions
+    \thecmsm@mctr
+  \else
+    \ifnum \c@cmsm@mctr > \z@
+      \priornumtrue
+      \thecmsm@mctr
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifpriornum                 % ten millions
+    \thexmsm@mctr
+  \else
+    \ifnum \c@xmsm@mctr > \z@
+      \priornumtrue
+      \thexmsm@mctr
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifpriornum                 % millions
+    \themsm@mctr\fnumbersep
+  \else
+    \ifnum \c@msm@mctr > \z@
+      \priornumtrue
+      \themsm@mctr\fnumbersep
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifpriornum                % hundred thousands
+    \thecksm@mctr
+  \else
+    \ifnum \c@cksm@mctr > \z@
+      \priornumtrue
+      \thecksm@mctr
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifpriornum                % ten thousands
+    \thexksm@mctr
+  \else
+    \ifnum \c@xksm@mctr > \z@
+      \priornumtrue
+      \thexksm@mctr
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifpriornum                % thousands
+    \theksm@mctr\fnumbersep
+  \else
+    \ifnum \c@ksm@mctr > \z@
+      \priornumtrue
+      \theksm@mctr\fnumbersep
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifpriornum                % hundreds
+    \thecsm@mctr
+  \else
+    \ifnum \c@csm@mctr > \z@
+      \priornumtrue
+      \thecsm@mctr
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifpriornum                % tens
+    \thexsm@mctr
+  \else
+    \ifnum \c@xsm@mctr > \z@
+      \priornumtrue
+      \thexsm@mctr
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \theism@mctr              % units
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cardinal}
+% |\cardinal|\marg{number} prints \meta{number} unformatted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\cardinal}[1]{%
+  \begingroup
+  \let\fnumbersep\relax
+  \form@tnumber{#1}%
+  \endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\fcardinal}
+% |\fcardinal|\marg{number} prints \meta{number} formatted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\fcardinal}[1]{%
+  \begingroup
+  \form@tnumber{#1}%
+  \endgroup}
+  
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ordinal}
+% |\ordinal|\marg{number} prints \meta{number} as an unformatted ordinal.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ordinal}[1]{%
+  \begingroup
+  \let\fnumbersep\relax
+  \form@tnumber{#1}%
+  \let\ordstring\nthstring
+  \ifnum \c@xsm@mctr=\@ne\else
+    \ifcase \c@ism@mctr
+      \or \let\ordstring\iststring%    1st
+      \or \let\ordstring\iindstring%   2nd
+      \or \let\ordstring\iiirdstring%  3rd
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ordscript{\ordstring}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fordinal}
+% |\fordinal|\marg{number} prints \meta{number} as a formatted ordinal.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\fordinal}[1]{%
+  \begingroup
+  \form@tnumber{#1}%
+  \let\ordstring\nthstring
+  \ifnum \c@xsm@mctr=\@ne\else
+    \ifcase \c@ism@mctr
+      \or \let\ordstring\iststring%    1st
+      \or \let\ordstring\iindstring%   2nd
+      \or \let\ordstring\iiirdstring%  3rd
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ordscript{\ordstring}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The next, tedious, code is for translating numbers into names.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nNameo}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamec}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamem}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamemm}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamemmm}
+% Names of major numbers: $0$, $10^{2}$, $10^{3}$, $10^{6}$, and $10^{9}$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\nNameo{\iflowernumtoname z\else Z\fi ero}
+\newcommand*\nNamec{\iflowernumtoname h\else H\fi undred}
+\newcommand*\nNamem{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi housand}
+\newcommand*\nNamemm{\iflowernumtoname m\else M\fi illion}
+\newcommand*\nNamemmm{\iflowernumtoname b\else B\fi illion}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamei}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNameii}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNameiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNameiv}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamev}
+%    These are the names for numbers 1 to 5.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\nNamei{\iflowernumtoname o\else O\fi ne}
+\newcommand*\nNameii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi wo}
+\newcommand*\nNameiii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hree}
+\newcommand*\nNameiv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi our}
+\newcommand*\nNamev{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi ive}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamevii}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNameviii}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNameix}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamex}
+%    These are the names for numbers 6 to 10.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\nNamevi{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ix}
+\newcommand*\nNamevii{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi even}
+\newcommand*\nNameviii{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi ight}
+\newcommand*\nNameix{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi ine}
+\newcommand*\nNamex{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi en}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexi}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexii}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexiv}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexv}
+%    These are the names for numbers 11 to 15.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\nNamexi{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi leven}
+\newcommand*\nNamexii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi welve}
+\newcommand*\nNamexiii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hir\teenstring}
+\newcommand*\nNamexiv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi our\teenstring}
+\newcommand*\nNamexv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi if\teenstring}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexvi}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexvii}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexviii}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexix}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexx}
+%    These are the names for numbers 16 to 20.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\nNamexvi{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ix\teenstring}
+\newcommand*\nNamexvii{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi even\teenstring}
+\newcommand*\nNamexviii{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi igh\teenstring}
+\newcommand*\nNamexix{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi ine\teenstring}
+\newcommand*\nNamexx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi wenty}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexxx}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexl}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamel}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamelx}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamelxx}
+%    These are the names for numbers 30 to 70.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\nNamexxx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hirty}
+\newcommand*\nNamexl{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi orty}
+\newcommand*\nNamel{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi ifty}
+\newcommand*\nNamelx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ixty}
+\newcommand*\nNamelxx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi eventy}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamelxxx}
+% \begin{macro}{\nNamexc}
+%    These are the names for numbers 80 to 90.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\nNamelxxx{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi ighty}
+\newcommand*\nNamexc{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi inety}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\unitnumbername}
+% Get the name of a unit (0 -- 9).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\unitnumbername}[1]{%
+  \ifcase #1 \nNameo\or
+   \nNamei\or
+   \nNameii\or
+   \nNameiii\or
+   \nNameiv\or
+   \nNamev\or
+   \nNamevi\or
+   \nNamevii\or
+   \nNameviii\or
+   \nNameix\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\teennumbername}
+% Get the name of a 'teen number (10 -- 19)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\teennumbername}[1]{%
+  \ifcase #1 \nNamex\or
+   \nNamexi\or
+   \nNamexii\or
+   \nNamexiii\or
+   \nNamexiv\or
+   \nNamexv\or
+   \nNamexvi\or
+   \nNamexvii\or
+   \nNamexviii\or
+   \nNamexix\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tensnumbername}
+% Get the name of a tens number (20 -- 90)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\tensnumbername}[2]{%
+  \ifnum #1=\@ne
+    \teennumbername{#2}\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
+  \else
+    \ifcase #1
+    \or
+    \or \nNamexx
+    \or \nNamexxx
+    \or \nNamexl
+    \or \nNamel
+    \or \nNamelx
+    \or \nNamelxx
+    \or \nNamelxxx
+    \or \nNamexc
+    \fi
+    \ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
+    \ifnum #2 > \z@ \tensunitsep\unitnumbername{#2}\fi
+  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Names of small ordinals. The use of |\nthstring| instead of `th' saves
+% some tokens.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\nthNameo{\nNameo\nthstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamei{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi irst}
+\newcommand*\nthNameii{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi econd}
+\newcommand*\nthNameiii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hird}
+\newcommand*\nthNameiv{\nNameiv\nthstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamev{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi if\nthstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamevi{\nNamevi\nthstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamevii{\nNamevii\nthstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNameviii{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi igh\nthstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNameix{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi in\nthstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamexii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi welf\nthstring}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\unitordinalname}
+% Get the ordinal name of a unit (0 -- 9)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\unitordinalname}[1]{%
+  \ifcase #1 \nthNameo\or
+  \nthNamei\or
+  \nthNameii\or
+  \nthNameiii\or
+  \nthNameiv\or
+  \nthNamev\or
+  \nthNamevi\or
+  \nthNamevii\or
+  \nthNameviii\or
+  \nthNameix\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\teenordinalname}
+% Get the ordinal name of a 'teen number (10 -- 19). Using |\nthstring|
+% instead of `th' to save some tokens.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\teenordinalname}[1]{%
+  \ifcase #1 \nNamex\nthstring\or
+  \nNamexi\nthstring\or
+  \nthNamexii\or
+  \nNamexiii\nthstring\or
+  \nNamexiv\nthstring\or
+  \nNamexv\nthstring\or
+  \nNamexvi\nthstring\or
+  \nNamexvii\nthstring\or
+  \nNamexviii\nthstring\or
+  \nNamexix\nthstring\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tensordinalname}
+% Get the ordinal name of a tens number (20 -- 90)
+% (Mathew Dafilis (\texttt{mpd@swin.edu.au}) sent Email on 2003/11/14
+% saying that \cs{ordinaltoname} didn't work for 20, 30, etc. He was
+% correct. It is now fixed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\tensordinalname}[2]{%
+  \ifnum #1=\@ne
+    \teenordinalname{#2}\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
+  \else
+    \ifnum #2> \z@
+      \ifcase #1
+      \or 
+      \or \nNamexx
+      \or \nNamexxx
+      \or \nNamexl
+      \or \nNamel
+      \or \nNamelx
+      \or \nNamelxx
+      \or \nNamelxxx
+      \or \nNamexc
+      \fi
+      \ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
+      \tensunitsep\unitordinalname{#2}
+    \else
+      \ifcase #1
+      \or 
+      \or \nthNamexx
+      \or \nthNamexxx
+      \or \nthNamexl
+      \or \nthNamel
+      \or \nthNamelx
+      \or \nthNamelxx
+      \or \nthNamelxxx
+      \or \nthNamexc
+      \fi
+      \ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+  
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    The names of tens ordinals. The use of |\tiethstring| instead
+% of `tieth' saves somes tokens.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\nthNamexx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi wen\tiethstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamexxx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hir\tiethstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamexl{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi or\tiethstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamel{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi if\tiethstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamelx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ix\tiethstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamelxx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi even\tiethstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamelxxx{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi igh\tiethstring}
+\newcommand*\nthNamexc{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi ine\tiethstring}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\n@me@number}
+% |\n@me@number|\meta{number} is an internal macro to convert a 
+% \meta{number} to names.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\n@me@number}[1]{%
+\begingroup
+    \numdigits{#1}%
+    \ifminusnumber\minusname\fi
+    \priornumfalse
+%% billions
+    \ifnum \c@bsm@mctr > \z@
+      \unitnumbername{\thebsm@mctr}\space
+      \ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamemmm
+      \priornumtrue
+    \fi
+%% hundred millions
+    \ifnum \c@cmsm@mctr > \z@
+      \ifpriornum\namenumbercomma\fi
+      \unitnumbername{\thecmsm@mctr}\space
+      \ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamec
+      \priornumtrue
+    \fi
+%% tens/units millions
+    \ifnum \c@xmsm@mctr > \z@
+      \ifpriornum
+        \ifnum\c@cmsm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
+      \fi
+      \tensnumbername{\thexmsm@mctr}{\themsm@mctr}%
+      \priornumtrue
+    \else
+      \ifnum \c@msm@mctr > \z@
+        \ifpriornum
+          \ifnum\c@cmsm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
+        \fi
+        \unitnumbername{\themsm@mctr}%
+        \ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
+        \priornumtrue
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifnum \c@cmsm@mctr > \z@
+      \ifpriornum\space\fi
+      \nNamemm
+    \else
+      \ifnum \c@xmsm@mctr > \z@
+        \ifpriornum\space\fi
+        \nNamemm
+      \else
+        \ifnum \c@msm@mctr > \z@
+          \ifpriornum\space\fi
+          \nNamemm
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+%% hundred thousands
+    \ifnum \c@cksm@mctr > \z@
+      \ifpriornum\namenumbercomma\fi
+      \unitnumbername{\thecksm@mctr}\space
+        \ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamec
+      \priornumtrue
+    \fi
+%% tens/units thousands
+    \ifnum \c@xksm@mctr > \z@
+      \ifpriornum
+        \ifnum\c@cksm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
+      \fi
+      \tensnumbername{\thexksm@mctr}{\theksm@mctr}%
+      \priornumtrue
+    \else
+      \ifnum \c@ksm@mctr > \z@
+        \ifpriornum
+          \ifnum\c@cksm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
+        \fi
+        \unitnumbername{\theksm@mctr}%
+        \ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
+        \priornumtrue
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifnum \c@cksm@mctr > \z@
+      \ifpriornum\space\fi
+      \nNamem
+    \else
+      \ifnum \c@xksm@mctr > \z@
+        \ifpriornum\space\fi
+        \nNamem
+      \else
+        \ifnum \c@ksm@mctr > \z@
+          \ifpriornum\space\fi
+          \nNamem
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+%% hundreds
+    \ifnum \c@csm@mctr > \z@
+      \ifpriornum\namenumbercomma\fi
+      \unitnumbername{\thecsm@mctr}\space
+        \ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamec
+      \priornumtrue
+    \fi
+%% tens/units
+  \ifmakeordinal
+    \ifnum \c@xsm@mctr > \z@
+      \ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
+      \tensordinalname{\thexsm@mctr}{\theism@mctr}%
+    \else
+      \ifnum \c@ism@mctr > \z@
+        \ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
+        \unitordinalname{\theism@mctr}%
+      \else
+        \ifpriornum\nthstring\else\unitordinalname{\theism@mctr}\fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else  % not ordinal
+    \ifnum \c@xsm@mctr > \z@
+      \ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
+      \tensnumbername{\thexsm@mctr}{\theism@mctr}%
+    \else
+      \ifnum \c@ism@mctr > \z@
+        \ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
+        \unitnumbername{\theism@mctr}%
+      \else
+        \ifpriornum\else\unitnumbername{\theism@mctr}\fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi % end ifmakeordinal
+\endgroup
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\numtoname}
+% Lowercase all names
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\numtoname}[1]{%
+  \makeordinalfalse
+  \notnumtonameallcapstrue%
+  \lowernumtonametrue%
+  \n@me@number{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\numtoName}
+% Uppercase first letter of first name (all else lowercase).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\numtoName}[1]{%
+  \makeordinalfalse
+  \notnumtonameallcapstrue%
+  \lowernumtonamefalse%
+  \n@me@number{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NumToName}
+% Uppercase first letter of all names (all else lowercase).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\NumToName}[1]{%
+  \makeordinalfalse
+  \notnumtonameallcapsfalse%
+  \lowernumtonamefalse%
+  \n@me@number{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ordinaltoname}
+% Lowercase all ordinal names
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ordinaltoname}[1]{%
+  \makeordinaltrue
+  \notnumtonameallcapstrue%
+  \lowernumtonametrue%
+  \n@me@number{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ordinaltoName}
+% Uppercase first letter of first ordinal name (all else lowercase).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ordinaltoName}[1]{%
+  \makeordinaltrue
+  \notnumtonameallcapstrue%
+  \lowernumtonamefalse%
+  \n@me@number{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\OrdinalToName}
+% Uppercase first letter of all ordinal names (all else lowercase).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\OrdinalToName}[1]{%
+  \makeordinaltrue
+  \notnumtonameallcapsfalse%
+  \lowernumtonamefalse%
+  \n@me@number{#1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{A fix for two column headings}
+%
+%
+% This is from a posting by Donald Arseneau to \ctt{} on 23 April 2001 to fix
+% a problem --- `When I use |\onecolumn\chapter...| its headline
+% is printed lower on the page than for two-column chapters'
+%
+% DA and I had previously discussed this in relation to the Index
+% and I had put a hack into the \Lpack{tocbibind} package to fix the Index.
+%
+% Donald posted the following.
+%
+% |\vspace*| gives bad spacing after a pagebreak and |\@makechapterhead|
+% starts with |\vspace*|.
+% The biggest problem is the definition of |\@topnewpage|, which is used
+% for the two-column spanning text. Here is a redefinition:
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added DA's redefinition of \cs{@topnewpage}}
+% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def \@topnewpage [#1]{%
+  \@nodocument
+  \@next\@currbox\@freelist{}{}%
+  \global \setbox\@currbox
+    \vbox {%
+      \break
+      \prevdepth\z@
+      \begingroup
+      \normalcolor
+      \hsize\textwidth
+      \@parboxrestore
+      \col@number \@ne
+      #1%
+      \vskip -\dbltextfloatsep
+      \endgroup
+      \null % ordinary \baselineskip
+      \vskip -\topskip
+  }%
+  \begingroup %% \showbox\@currbox
+    \splitmaxdepth\maxdepth \splittopskip\topskip
+    \setbox\@tempboxa \vsplit\@currbox to \z@
+  \endgroup %% \showbox\@currbox
+  \ifdim \ht\@currbox>\textheight
+    \ht\@currbox \textheight
+  \fi
+  \global \count\@currbox \tw@
+  \@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
+  \advance \@tempdima -\dbltextfloatsep
+  \global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
+  \ifx \@dbltoplist \@empty
+  \else
+    \@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
+    \let \@dbltoplist \@empty
+  \fi
+  \@cons \@dbltoplist \@currbox
+  \global \@dbltopnum \m@ne
+  \ifdim \@colht<2.5\baselineskip
+    \@latex@warning@no@line {Optional argument of \noexpand\twocolumn
+        too tall on page \thepage}%
+    \@emptycol
+    \if@firstcolumn
+    \else
+      \@emptycol
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \global \vsize \@colht
+    \global \@colroom \@colht
+    \@floatplacement
+  \fi
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The original version of |\@topnewpage| is in \file{ltouput.dtx}, line 159.
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Initialization} \label{sec:init}
+%
+% \subsection{Words and phrases}
+% 
+% This document class is for documents prepared in the English language.
+% To prepare a version for another language, various English words 
+% and phrases must
+% be replaced.  The English elements that require replacement are
+% defined below in command names.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\abstractname}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsname}
+% \begin{macro}{\listfigurename}
+% \begin{macro}{\listtablename}
+% \begin{macro}{\partname}
+% \begin{macro}{\chaptername}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixname}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixtocname}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixpagename}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibname}
+% \begin{macro}{\indexname}
+% \begin{macro}{\glossaryname}
+%
+%    This list is for titles of document sections.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\abstractname}{Abstract}
+\newcommand*{\contentsname}{Contents}
+\newcommand*{\listfigurename}{List of Figures}
+\newcommand*{\listtablename}{List of Tables}
+\newcommand*{\partname}{Part}
+\newcommand*{\chaptername}{Chapter}
+\newcommand*{\appendixname}{Appendix}
+\newcommand*{\appendixtocname}{Appendices}
+\newcommand*{\appendixpagename}{Appendices}
+\newcommand*{\bibname}{Bibliography}
+\newcommand*{\indexname}{Index}
+\newcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\figurename}
+% \begin{macro}{\tablename}
+% \begin{macro}{\figurerefname}
+% \begin{macro}{\tablerefname}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagename}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagrefename}
+%
+%    These are the names and phrases used for general elements.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\figurename}{Figure}
+\newcommand*{\tablename}{Table}
+\newcommand*{\figurerefname}{Figure}
+\newcommand*{\tablerefname}{Table}
+\newcommand*{\pagename}{page}
+\newcommand*{\pagerefname}{page}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\partrefname}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterrefname}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectionrefname}
+% More names for referencing.
+% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{partrefname}, \cs{chapterrefname}
+%                            and \cs{sectionrefname}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\partrefname}{Part~}
+\newcommand*{\chapterrefname}{Chapter~}
+\newcommand*{\sectionrefname}{\S}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Date}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\today}
+%    This macro uses the \TeX\ primitives |\month|, |\day| and |\year|
+%    to provide the date of the \LaTeX-run.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\today}{\ifcase\month\or
+  January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+  July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+  \space\number\day, \number\year}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Two column mode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\columnsep}
+%    This gives the distance between two columns in two column mode.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\columnsep{10\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\columnseprule}
+%    This gives the width of the rule between two columns in two
+%    column mode. We have no visible rule.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\columnseprule{0\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The page style and counters}
+%    We use the page style \pstyle{headings} by
+%    default and arabic page numbering.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+\pagenumbering{arabic}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We set the sectional counters to zero, the |tocdepth| to
+%    one (sections and above listed), the |secnumdepth| to
+%    two (sections and above numbered), and |\maxsecnumdepth| to
+% the same.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Added initialisation of \cs{maxsecnumdepth}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{part}{0}
+\setcounter{chapter}{0}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
+\maxsecnumdepth{section}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Set the |\linenumberfrequency| to zero to prohibit line numbering
+% and also set the font for line numbers. Can now set the final space
+% for boxed verbatim line numbers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\linenumberfrequency{0}
+\linenumberfont{\small\rmfamily}
+\settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\vlvnumfont 9999}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Single or double sided printing}
+%
+%
+%    Unless the \Lopt{twoside} wasn't specified, We do not try to make 
+% each page of equal height.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twoside
+\else
+  \raggedbottom
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    When the \Lopt{twocolumn} option was specified we call
+%    |\twocolumn| to activate this mode. We try to make each column as
+%    long as the others, but call |sloppy| to make our life easier.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twocolumn
+  \twocolumn
+  \sloppy
+  \flushbottom
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Normally we call |\onecolumn| to initiate typesetting in one
+%    column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+  \onecolumn
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Floats}
+%
+%    Here are the implementations of the figure and table environments
+% and their accompanying List of\ldots
+%
+% \begin{environment}{figure}
+% \begin{environment}{figure*}
+%    This is the definition of the actual environment. The form with the
+%    |*| is used for double column figures. We use |\newfloat| to set it.
+% In this class figures are numbered per chapter, but we need to change 
+% the default definition of |\thefigure| if a figure
+% is in a pre-numbered chapter.
+% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
+%                             figure float}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newfloat[chapter]{figure}{lof}{\figurename}
+  \kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}
+\renewcommand{\thefigure}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@figure}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures*}
+% These macros request that LaTeX produces a list of figures.
+% The LoF heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
+% version is used.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
+%                             list of figures}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlistof{listoffigures}{lof}{\listfigurename}
+  \kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@figure}
+%  |\l@figure{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the LoF entry for
+% a |figure| caption heading. 
+% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Deleted \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
+%                             figure listentry}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlistentry[chapter]{figure}{lof}{0}
+  \cftsetindents{figure}{0em}{2.3em}
+%%  \kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{table}
+% \begin{environment}{table*}
+%  The definition for tables is almost identical.
+% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
+%                             table float}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newfloat[chapter]{table}{lot}{\tablename}
+  \kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}
+\renewcommand{\thetable}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@table}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables*}
+% These macros request that LaTeX produces a list of tables.
+% The LoT heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
+% version is used.
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
+%                             list of tables}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlistof{listoftables}{lot}{\listtablename}
+  \kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@table}
+%  |\l@table{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the LoT entry for
+% a |table| caption heading. 
+% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Deleted \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
+%                             table listentry}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlistentry[chapter]{table}{lot}{0}
+  \cftsetindents{table}{0em}{2.3em}
+%%  \kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The \Lpack{subfigure} package defines |lofdepth| and |lotdepth|
+% counters. If is not used, then we have to define them.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}%
+     {\newcounter{lofdepth}\setcounter{lofdepth}{1}}{}
+  \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}%
+     {\newcounter{lotdepth}\setcounter{lotdepth}{1}}{}
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The \Lopt{article} option}
+%
+% The \Lopt{article} option requires changes to the default chapterstyle,
+% and the numbering of floats, etc.
+%
+% Emanuele Vicentini (2003/07/21) suggested making |\maketitle| more
+% closely match the real article's appearance.
+% Alan Budden\footnote{\texttt{alan.s.budden@bristol.ac.uk}} commented
+% on 2003/12/18 that the equation counter should be continuous.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/12/07}{Added footnote and chaptername changes to the article option}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added some resets of maketitle macros to 
+% the article option (from patch v1.7)}
+% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/18}{Added equation counter to article resets}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifartopt
+  \chapterstyle{article}
+  \counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
+  \counterwithout{table}{chapter}
+  \counterwithout{footnote}{chapter}
+  \counterwithout{equation}{chapter}
+  \renewcommand{\chaptername}{}
+  \renewcommand{\maketitlehookb}{%
+    \vskip -1.5\topsep\vskip -1.5\partopsep}
+  \renewcommand{\maketitlehookc}{%
+    \vskip -1.5\topsep\vskip -1.5\partopsep}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The \Lopt{ms} option}
+%
+% This should be done last as it makes various changes to the defaults.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\msdoublespacing}
+% \begin{macro}{\mssinglespacing}
+%  These do nothing unless the \Lopt{ms} option is used; then they change
+% the |\baselinestretch|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\msdoublespacing}{}
+\newcommand{\mssinglespacing}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifmsdoc
+  \renewcommand{\msdoublespacing}{%
+    \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.6}\large\normalsize}
+  \renewcommand{\mssinglespacing}{%
+    \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.0}\large\normalsize}
+  \renewcommand{\familydefault}{cmtt}
+  \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{cmtt}
+  \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{cmtt}
+  \renewcommand{\bfdefault}{m}
+  \renewcommand{\itdefault}{n}
+  \renewcommand{\sldefault}{n}
+  \renewcommand{\scdefault}{n}
+  \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.6}
+  \@twocolumnfalse
+  \onecolumn
+  \sloppy
+  \@twosidefalse
+  \raggedbottom
+  \pagestyle{plain}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Emulated packages}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\EmulatedPackage{abstract}
+\EmulatedPackage{appendix}
+\EmulatedPackage{array}
+\EmulatedPackage{booktabs}
+\EmulatedPackage{ccaption}
+\EmulatedPackage{chngcntr}
+\EmulatedPackage{chngpage}
+\EmulatedPackage{crop}
+\EmulatedPackage{dcolumn}
+\EmulatedPackage{delarray}
+\EmulatedPackage{enumerate}
+\EmulatedPackage{epigraph}
+\EmulatedPackage{framed}
+\EmulatedPackage{ifmtarg}
+\EmulatedPackage{ifpdf}
+\EmulatedPackage{index}
+\EmulatedPackage{makeidx}
+\EmulatedPackage{moreverb}
+\EmulatedPackage{needspace}
+\EmulatedPackage{newfile}
+\EmulatedPackage{nextpage}
+\EmulatedPackage{patchcmd}
+\EmulatedPackage{shortvrb}
+\EmulatedPackage{showidx}
+\EmulatedPackage{tabularx}
+\EmulatedPackage{titleref}
+\EmulatedPackage{titling}
+\EmulatedPackage{tocbibind}
+\EmulatedPackage{tocloft}
+\EmulatedPackage{verbatim}
+\EmulatedPackage{verse}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Patch file}
+%
+% At the suggestion of Danie Els (\texttt{DanieEls@sun.ac.za}), Dan Leucking
+% (\texttt{luecking@uark.edu}) and others, input a patch file, if one exists,
+% as the final act. (This is preferable to my series of \file{memfixa.sty},
+% \file{memfixb.sty} packages, and so on, for each release of the class.)
+% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added input of mempatch.sty}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{mempatch.sty} % should be this
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The end of the class definitions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</class>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Glossary Makeindex style file}
+%
+% Here is the basic style (configuration) file for Makeindex 
+% for use with the default glossary setup.
+% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added basic.gst file}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*gst>
+%%%%% basic.gst    basic makeindex glossary configuration file for memoir
+%%%%% Output style parameters
+preamble "\\begin{theglossary}"
+postamble "\n\\end{theglossary}\n"
+group_skip "\n\\glossaryspace\n"
+item_0    "\n\\glossitem"
+delim_0   "{\\memglonum{"
+encap_suffix "}}}"
+%%% Input style parameters
+keyword "\\glossaryentry"
+
+%</gst>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The end of the configuration file code
+%
+% \bibliographystyle{alpha}
+% \begingroup
+% \raggedright
+% \begin{thebibliography}{GMSN94A}
+%
+%
+%    \bibitem[ABH90]{bk:Impatient}
+%      Paul W.~Abrahams, Karl Berry and Kathryn A.~Hargreaves.
+%      \newblock \emph{TeX{} for the Impatient}.
+%      \newblock
+%       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1990.
+%      \newblock (Available from CTAN in \texttt{info/impatient})
+%
+% \bibitem[Ars01a]{TITLEREF}
+% Donald Arseneau.
+% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{Titleref} package (version 3.1)}.
+% \newblock April 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTN as
+%            \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/misc/titleref.sty})
+%
+% \bibitem[Ars01b]{CHAPTERBIB}
+% Donald Arseneau.
+% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{Chapterbib} package (version 1.9)}.
+% \newblock September 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTN as
+%            \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/misc/chapterbib.sty})
+%
+% \bibitem[Ars03]{FRAMED}
+% Donald Arseneau.
+% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{Framed} package (version 0.8a)}.
+% \newblock July 2003.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN as
+%            \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/misc/framed.sty})
+%
+% \bibitem[ArWi00]{IFMTARG}
+% Donald Arseneau and Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The ifmtarg package}.
+% \newblock March, 2000.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
+%
+%
+%  \bibitem[Car94]{DELARRAY}
+%  David Carlisle.
+%  \newblock \emph{The \Lpack{delarray} package}.
+%  \newblock March 1994.
+%  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
+%             \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
+%
+%
+% \bibitem[Car98a]{ENUMERATE}
+% David Carlisle.
+% \newblock \emph{The enumerate package}.
+% \newblock August, 1998.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
+%
+% \bibitem[Car98b]{REMRESET}
+% David Carlisle.
+% \newblock \emph{The remreset package}.
+% \newblock August, 1998.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/carlisle})
+%
+%  \bibitem[Car99]{TABULARX}
+%  David Carlisle.
+%  \newblock \emph{The \Lpack{tabularx} package}.
+%  \newblock January 1999.
+%  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
+%             \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
+%
+%  \bibitem[Car01]{DCOLUMN}
+%  David Carlisle.
+%  \newblock \emph{The \Lpack{dcolumn} package}.
+%  \newblock May 2001.
+%  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
+%             \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
+%
+% \bibitem[Coc02]{SUBFIGURE}
+% Steven Douglas Cochran.
+% \newblock \emph{The subfigure package}.
+% \newblock March, 2002.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/subfigure})
+%
+% \bibitem[Dal99]{NATBIB}
+% Patrick W. Daly.
+% \newblock \emph{Natural Sciences Citations and References}.
+% \newblock May, 1999.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/natbib})
+%
+% \bibitem[Dow00]{PATCHCMD}
+% Michael J. Downes
+% \newblock \emph{The patchcmd package}.
+% \newblock July 2000.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/patchcmd})
+%
+% \bibitem[Fai98]{MOREVERB}
+% Robin Fairbairns.
+% \newblock \emph{The moreverb package}.
+% \newblock December, 1998.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/moreverb})
+%
+% \bibitem[Fai03]{FOOTMISC}
+% Robin Fairbairns.
+% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{footmisc} --- a portmanteau package for 
+%            customising footnotes in LaTeX}.
+% \newblock February 2003.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
+%            \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/footmisc})
+%
+%
+%    \bibitem[Fea03]{BOOKTABS}
+%      Simon Fear.
+%      \newblock \emph{Publication quality tables in \LaTeX}.
+%       \newblock March, 2003.
+%      \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%                 \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/booktabs})
+%
+% \bibitem[Fra00]{CROP}
+% Melchior Franz.
+% \newblock \emph{The crop package}.
+% \newblock February, 2000.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/crop})
+%
+%
+% \bibitem[GMS94]{GOOSSENS94}
+% Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and Alexander Samarin.
+% \newblock {\em The LaTeX Companion}.
+% \newblock Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1994.
+%
+%
+%
+%    \bibitem[Knu84]{bk:knuth}  
+%       Donald E. Knuth.
+%       \newblock  \emph{The \TeX{}book}.
+%       \newblock
+%       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1984.
+%
+%    \bibitem[Lam94]{bk:lamport} 
+%       Leslie Lamport.
+%       \newblock  \emph{\LaTeX\ --- A Document Preparation System}.
+%       \newblock
+%       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994.
+%
+% \bibitem[LMB99]{CLASSES}
+% Leslie Lamport, Frank Mittelbach and Johannes Braams.
+% \newblock \emph{Standard Document Classes for LaTeX version 2e}.
+% \newblock September, 1999.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/base/classes.dtx})
+%
+%  \bibitem[MC98]{ARRAY}
+%  Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle.
+%  \newblock \emph{A new implementation of LaTeX's tabular and array 
+%                  environment}
+%  \newblock May 1998.
+%  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
+%             \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
+%
+% \bibitem[Oos96]{FANCYHDR}
+% Piet van Oostrum.
+% \newblock \emph{Page layout in LaTeX}.
+% \newblock June, 1996.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr})
+%
+%
+% \bibitem[Rah01]{NAMEREF}
+% Sebastian Rahtz.
+% \newblock \emph{Section name references in LaTeX}.
+% \newblock January 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref})
+%
+% \bibitem[Rah02]{HYPERREF}
+% Sebastian Rahtz.
+% \newblock \emph{Hypertext marks in LaTeX}.
+% \newblock March 2002.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref})
+%
+%
+% \bibitem[Sch98]{EVERYSHI}
+% Martin Schr\"{o}der.
+% \newblock \emph{The everyshi package}.
+% \newblock August, 1998.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/ms})
+%
+% \bibitem[SRR01]{VERBATIM}
+% Rainer Sch\"{o}pf, Bernd Raichle and Chris Rowley.
+% \newblock \emph{A new implementation of LaTeX's verbatim and verbatim*
+%                 environments}.
+% \newblock March, 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil99]{TOCVSEC2}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The tocvsec2 package}.
+% \newblock January, 1999.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/tocvsec2})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil00a]{EPIGRAPH}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The epigraph package}.
+% \newblock February, 2000.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/epigraph})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil00b]{ISOCLASS}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{LaTeX files for typesetting ISO standards}.
+% \newblock February, 2000.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/isostds/iso})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil00c]{NEXTPAGE}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The nextpage package}.
+% \newblock February, 2000.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil00d]{NEEDSPACE}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The needspace package}.
+% \newblock March, 2000.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil01a]{ABSTRACT}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The abstract package}.
+% \newblock February, 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/abstract})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil01b]{CHNGPAGE}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The chngpage package}.
+% \newblock February, 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil01c]{APPENDIX}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The appendix package}.
+% \newblock March, 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/appendix})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil01d]{CCAPTION}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The ccaption package}.
+% \newblock March, 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/ccaption})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil01e]{CHNGCNTR}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The chngcntr package}.
+% \newblock March, 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil01f]{HANGING}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The hanging package}.
+% \newblock March, 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/hanging})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil01g]{TITLING}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The titling package}.
+% \newblock March, 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/titling})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil01h]{TOCBIBIND}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The tocbibind package}.
+% \newblock April, 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/tocbibind})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil01i]{TOCLOFT}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{The tocloft package}.
+% \newblock April, 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/tocloft})
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil01j]{VERSE}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{Typesetting simple verse with LaTeX}.
+% \newblock August, 2001.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
+%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/verse})
+%
+%
+% \bibitem[Wil03]{LEDMAC}
+% Peter Wilson.
+% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{ledmac}: A presumptuous attempt to port EDMAC and
+%                 TABMAC to LaTeX}. 
+% \newblock August 2003.
+% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
+%            \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/ledmac})
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \end{thebibliography}
+% \endgroup
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
+
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%%
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/memoir/memoir.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/memoir/memoir.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a7c522b19f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/memoir/memoir.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+%% memoir.ins
+%% Author: Peter Wilson (herries dot press at earthlink dot net)
+%% Copyright 2001--2005 Peter R. Wilson
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any 
+%% later version.
+%% The latest version of the license is in
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2003/06/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
+%%
+%% This work consists of the files listed in the README file.
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this work when run through
+%% LaTeX.
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+\def\batchfile{memoir.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+ 
+  Author: Peter Wilson  (herries dot press at earthlink dot net)
+          Herries Press
+  Copyright 2001--2005 Peter R. Wilson
+ 
+  This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+  conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+  version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any 
+  later version.
+  The latest version of the license is in
+     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+  and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+  LaTeX version 2003/06/01 or later.
+ 
+  This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
+ 
+  This work consists of the files listed in the README file.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+%% \Msg{*** Generating the driver file ***}
+
+%% \generateFile{memoir.drv}{t}{\from{memoir.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\Msg{*** Generating the LaTeX2e document class files ***}
+
+\generateFile{memoir.cls}{t}{\from{memoir.dtx}{class}}
+
+\Msg{*** Generating the LaTeX2e document class option files ***}
+
+\generateFile{mem9.clo}{t}{\from{memoir.dtx}{9pt}}
+\generateFile{mem10.clo}{t}{\from{memoir.dtx}{10pt}}
+\generateFile{mem11.clo}{t}{\from{memoir.dtx}{11pt}}
+\generateFile{mem12.clo}{t}{\from{memoir.dtx}{12pt}}
+\generateFile{mem14.clo}{t}{\from{memoir.dtx}{14pt}}
+\generateFile{mem17.clo}{t}{\from{memoir.dtx}{17pt}}
+
+\Msg{*** Generating the MakeIndex configuration files ***}
+
+%%%%\usepreamble\empty
+\usepostamble\empty
+\generateFile{basic.gst}{t}{\from{memoir.dtx}{gst}}
+
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by LaTeX. See the FAQ on}
+\Msg{* CTAN at /help/uk-tex-faq for more on this.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space memoir.cls}
+\Msg{* \space\space mem9.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space mem10.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space mem11.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space mem12.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space mem14.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space mem17.clo}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documented source run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.dtx' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{* For an index process any name.idx file by:}
+\Msg{* \space\space\space\space makeindex -s gind.ist name}
+\Msg{* Process any name.glo file by:}
+\Msg{* \space\space\space\space makeindex -s gglo.ist -o name.gls name.glo}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+
+\endinput